HomeMy WebLinkAbout7050 GALL BLVD (36) ,� /
t I
�
'� � -- '
� '�� �
� , _ 2- 3 _ _
. ') .
� _
��
I
�
' SPECIFICATION FOR
ANGIO/HUMAN RESOURCE RENOVATIONS __ �
� ^ ` : _ ;� - - /y-
EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER -r . �� s� ' `�
I I �^:� � 3 9 �
� �� "f Z_.
� ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA � ��'-��: � '%
':�/.��_,.,._.-��
JOB NO. 9 8 0 8 8.0 0 �1��'�-- �
� NOVEN�ER 25, 1998
r
I I _ ` - -- :��`.
' ; j = �_ � _
� I - �_,�; 1�=3-�qe
� -
1
�
� , .
�
EARL SWENSSON ASSOCIATES, INC.
'i ' 2100 WEST END AVE.
SUITE 1200
, NASHVILLE, TENNESSEE 37203
� I
� ! �
� I I
i I , I
� I
'
' DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACT RE UIREMENTS
Sectlon 00000 Cover Sheet
' Section 00050 Table of Contents
Section 00070 State of Florida Codes & Standards
(Local Codes are Referenced on Drawings Title
� ; Sheet)
Section 00700 General Conditions of Contract
iection 00800 Supplementary Conditions
� I
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREN�NTS
� �
Section 01010 Summary of Work
1 Section 01031 Alteration Project Procedures
Section 01040 Contract Coordination
Section 01045 Cutting and Patching
� ' Section 01200 Project Meetings
Section 01300 Submittals
Section 01310 Construction Schedules
Section 01400 Tests and Inspections
' Section 01500 Temporary Facilities
Section 01630 Product Options and Substitutions
Section 01700 Contract Closeout
1 Section 01710 General Cleaning and Final Finish Cleaning
Section 01720 Project Record Documents
Section 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data
� Section 01740 Year 2000 Compliance
� I
llIVISION 2 SITEWORK
� NOT USED
- DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
� Section 03300 Concrete
Section 03375 Concrete Sealing
� ' DIVISION 4 MASONRY
� �
' 1 NOT USED
DIVISION 5 N�TALS
Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metal
1 i I
� �
DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY
� Section 06102 Fire Retardant Wood Blocking
� DIVISION 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07193 Plastic Vapor Retarder
Section 07213 Fibrous Insulation
' Sect�ion 07253 Sprayed Fireproofing
� November 25 , 1998 00050-1 98088 . 00
�
� �i
�
' Section 07270 Firestopping
Section 07900 Sealants
DIVISION s nooRs � wzr�nows
! � ,
Section 08100 � Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
, , Section 08215 Wood Doors
Section 08300 Access Doors
Section 08700 Finish Hardware
I ' DIVISION 9 FINISHES
� �
� Section 09100 Metal Stud Framing System
Section 09260 Gypsum Wallboard Systems
Section 09500 Acoustical Ceilings
Section 09650 Resilient Flooring
� Section 09680 Carpet Glue-Down Installation
Section 09900 Painting
Section 09952 Vinyl Wallcoverings
' DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
Section 10260 Bumperguards and Corner Guards
1 Section 10400 Interior Signage/Exterior poor Signage
� �
DIVISION 11 EOUIPMENT
� NOT USED
� I
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
� � �
Section 12300 Hospital Casework
�
i
' DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Sectlon 13090 Radiation Protection
� DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT USED
� I
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
� �
� Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions
Section 15020 Identification and Painting
Section 15025 Equipment Identification
Section 15030 Cleaning Mechanical Systems
' Section 15035 Testing Mechanical Systems
Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods
Section 15060 Piping and Fittings
' Secti.on 15061 Pipe Hangers
Section 15062 Valves
Section 15170 Motors
' Section 15250 Insulation
November 25 , 1998 00050-2 98088 . 00
� !
� I
,
, Section 15300 Fire Protection
Section 15320 Medical Gas Piping Systems
Section 15322 Certification Procedure for Medical Gas Pipelines
' Section 15400 Plumbing
Section 15450 Plumbing Fixtures
Section 15515 Hydronic Specialties
' Section 15790 Heating Coils
Section 15864 Ceiling Exhaust Fans e
Section 15890 Sheet Metal Ductwork - Low Pressure
' Section 15910 Sheet Metal Accessories
Section 15971 Controls - Pneumatic
Section 15990 Testing and Balancing of Mechanical Systems
Critical Systems Checklist
' DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
� �
' Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions
Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods
Section 16111 Conduit
� �
' Section 16113 Wall and Ceiling Raceway Systems
Section 16120 Wire and Cable
Secti.on 16130 Outlet and Junction Boxes
Section 16140 Wiring Devices and Plates
' Section 16160 Panelboards
Section 16170 Safety Switches (Motor and Circuit)
Section 16190 Supporting Devices and Hangers
' Section 16400 Distribution System and Grounding
Section 16500 Lighting Fixtures
Section 16612 Automatic Transfer Switch
Section 16720 Fire Alarm and Detection System Modifications
LSection 16726 Wired Master Time System Modifications
Section 16740 Telephone Raceway System
Section 16745 Dictation Raceway System
� Sectiion 16750 Intercom and Music/Paging Raceway System
Section 16775 Connection to Owner-Furnished Equipment
Section 16781 Data Processing Raceway Systems
' iritical Systems Checklist
END OF SECTION
' I
�
'
'
� �
�
Nove�mber 25 , 1998 00050-3 98088 . 00
� �
, �
� �
,
ISECTION 00070
� STATE OF FLORIDA CODES & STANDARDS
� (LOCAL CODES ARE REFERENCED ON DRAWING TITLE SHEET)
� PART I GENER.AL
��
i . 01 THE FOLLOWING CODES & STANDARDS WERE UTILIZED IN THE DESIGN
' I OF THIS PROJECT.
1 . 02 CODES & STANDARDS
1 NFPA-10 (1990) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA-11 (1994) Standard for Low Expansion Foam and
Combined Agent Systems
� NFPA-11A (1994) Standard for Medium and High Expansion
Systems
NFPA-12 (1993 ) Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
� Systems
NFPA-12A (1992) Standard on Halon 1301 Fire
Extinguishing Systems
t NFPA-12B (1990) Standard on Halon 1211 Fire
� � Extinguishing Systems
I ' NFPA-13 (1994) Standard for the Installation of
� Sprinkler Systems
, � i NFPA-13A (1994) Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of
� Sprinkler Systems
NFPA-14 (1993 ) Standard for Installation of Standpipe
� and Hose Systems
1 NFPA-15 (1993 ) Standard for Water Spray fixed Systems
for Fire Protection
� NFPA-16 (1991) Standard for Installation of Deluge Foam
, Water Sprinkler and Foam Water Systems
NFPA-16A (1994) Standard for Installation of Closed Head
Foam Water Sprinklers and Foam Water
� Spray Systems
, NFPA-17 (1990) Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing
� Systems
' NFPA-17A (1990) Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing
, Systems
NFPA-20 (1993 ) Standard for Installation of Centrifugal
Fire Pumps
' NFPA-22 (1993 ) Standard for Water Tanks for Private
Fire Protection
NFPA-24 (1992) Standard for Installation of Private
, Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
NFPA-25 (1992) Standard for Inspection, Testing and
' Maintenance of Water-Base Fire
Pro�tection Systems
NFPA-26 (1988) Supervision of Valves Controlling Water
Supplies for Fire Protection
� NFPA-30 (1993 ) Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
November 25 , 1998 00070-1 98088 . 00
� ' �
- ; �
I �
�
NFPA-31 (1992) Standard for the Installation of Oil ,
Burning Equipment
NFPA-33 (1989) Standard for Spray Application Using ,
Flammable and Combustible Materials
NFPA-34 (1989) Standards for Dipping and Coating
Processes Using Flammable or Combusr_ible
Liquids '
NFPA-35 (1987) Standard for the Manufacture of Organic
Coatings
NFPA-37 (1994) Installation and Use of Stationary ,
Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines
NFPA-40E (1993 ) Standards for the Storage of Pyroxlin
Plastics ' '�
NFPA-43A (1990) Standards for the Storage of Liquid and
Solid Oxidating Materials
NFPA-43B (1993 ) Standards for Storage of Organic
Peroxide Formulation '
NFPA-43C (1986) Standards for Storage of Gaseous
Oxidizing Materials
NFPA-43D (1986) Standards for Storage of pesticides in �
Portable Containers
NFPA-45 (1991) Standard on Fire Protection for
Laboratories Using Chemicals '
NFPA-49 (1991) Hazardous Chemicals Data
NFPA-50 (1990) Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites
NFPA-51 (1992) Standard for the Design and Installation
of Oxygen-Fuel Gas Systems for Welding, �
Cutting and Allied Processes
NFPA-51B (1994) Standard for Fire Prevention and Use of
Cutting and Welding Processes �
NFPA-54 (1992) National Fuel Gas Code
NFPA-58 (1992 ) Standard for Storage and Handling of
Liquefied Petroleum Gases
NFPA-68 (1988) Guide for Venting of Deflagulators '
NFPA-70 (1993 ) National Electrical Code
NFPA-70B (1987) Recommended Practice for Electrical
Equipment Maintenance '
NFPA-70E (1988) Electrical Safety Requirements for
Employee Workplace
NFPA-71 (1989) Standard for the Installation, ,
Maintenance and Use of Central Station
Signaling Systems
NFPA-72A (1987) Standard for the Installation,
Maintenance and Use of Local Protective '
Signaling Systems
NFPA-72B (1986) Standard for the Installation,
Maintenance and Use of Auxiliary �
Protective Signaling Systems
NFPA-72C (1986) Standard for the Installation,
Maintenance and Use of Remote Station '
Protective Signaling System
NFPA-72D (1986) Standard for the Installation,
Maintenance and Use of Proprietary
Protective Signaling Systems �
November 25 , 1998 00070-2 98088 . 00 ,
I
i I
' „ . �
' i NFPA-72E (1987) Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors
i NFPA-72F (1985) Standard for the Installation,
, Maintenance and Use of Emergency
� Voice/Alarm Communications Systems
, NFPA-72G (1988) Guide for the Installation, Maintenance
i and Use of Notification Appliances for
' Protecti�e Signaling Systems
NFPA-72H (1988) Testing Procedures for Local, Auxiliary,
Remote Station and Propriety Protective
1 � Signaling Systems
NFPA-74 (1989) Standard for the Installation,
Maintenance and Use of Household Fire
� Warning Equipment
' NFPA-75 (1992) Standard for the Protection of
Electronic Computer/Data Processing
Equipment
, NFPA-77 (1988) Static Electricity
� NFPA-78 (1986) Lightning Protection Code
NFPA-80 (1992) Standard for Fire Doors and Windows
I NFPA-82 (1994) Standard' on Incinerators, Waste and
! � Linen Handling Systems and Equipment
i NFPA-85A (1987) Standard for the Prevention of Furnace
iExplosions in Fuel Oil and Natural Gas-
' , Fire Single Burner Boiler-Furnaces
i iNFPA-85B (1989) Standard for Prevention of Furnace
Explosions in Natural Gas-Fire Multiple
, Burner Boiler-Furnaces
NFPA-85D (1989) Standard for Prevention of Furnace
� Explosions in Fuel Oil-Fire Multiple
� Burner Boiler-Furnaces
' � NFPA-85E (1985) Standard for Prevention of Furnace
� I Explosions in Pulverized Coal-fire
Multiple Burner Boiler-Furnaces
' NFPA-85F (1988) Standard for the Installation and
Operation of Pulverized Fuel System
� NFPA-86 (1990) Standard for Ovens and Furnaces, Design,
' Location and Equipment
NFPA-88A (1991) Standard for Parking Structures
i NFPA-88B (1991) Standard for Repair Garages
' � NFPA-90A (1993 ) Standard for the Installation of Air
I Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
NFPA-90B (1993 ) Standard for the Installation of Warm
Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
' INFPA-91 (1992) Standard for the Installation of Blower
and Exhaust System
NFPA-96 (1994) Standard for the Installation of
, � Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and
Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial
� Cooking
' NFPA-99 (1993 ) Standard for Health Care Facilities
NFPA-99B (1990) Hypobaric Facilities
NFPA-101 (1994) Life Safety Code
� � NFPA-101M (1992) Manual on Alternative Approaches to Life
� Safety
1 I
November 25 , 1998 00070-3 98088 . 00
� �
� �
'
NFPA-102 (1992) Standard for Assembly Setting, Tents and '
Air Supported Structures
NFPA-105 (1993 ) Recommended Practice for the 1
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
NFPA-110 (1993 ) Standard for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems '
NFPA-110A (1989) Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and
Standby Power Systems
NFPA-171 (1986) Public Fire Safety Symbols �
NFPA-172 (1986) Symbols for Architectural and
Engineering Drawings
NFPA-204M (1985) Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents '
and solid Fuel Burning Appliances
NFPA-211 (1992) Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents
and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances
NFPA-214 (1992) Water Cooling Towers ,
NFPA-220 (1992) Standard on Types of Building
Construction
NFPA-231 (1990) Standard for Indoor General Storage '
NFPA-231C (1991) Standard for Rack Storage of Materials
NFPA-231D (1989) Standard for Storage of Rubber Tires
NFPA-232 (1991) Standard for the Protection of Records
NFPA-241 (1993 ) Standard for Safeguarding Building '
Construction and Demolition Operations
NFPA-251 (1990) Standard Methods of Fire Testing of
Building Construction and Materials ,
Tests of Door Assemblies
NFPA-252 (1990) Standard Methods of Fire Test of Door
Assemblies ,
NFPA-253 (1990) Standard Methods of Test for Critical
Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
NFPA-255 (1990) Standard Method of Test of Surface t
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
NFPA-256 (1993 ) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Roof '
Coverings
NFPA-257 (1990) Standard for Fire Tests of Window
Assemblies '
NFPA-259 (1987) Standard Test Method for Potential Heat
of Building Materials
NFPA-260B (1983 ) Standard Method of Test for Determining
Resistance of Mock-Up Upholstered ,
Furniture Material Assemblies of
Ignition by Smoldering Cigarettes
NFPA-262 (1985) Method of Test for Fire and Smoke '
Characteristics of Electrical Wires
NFPA-321 (1991) Basic Classifications of Flammable and
� Combustible Liquids
NFPA-327 (1993 ) Standard Procedures for Cleaning or �
Safeguarding Small Tanks and Containers
NFPA-386 (1990) Standard for Portable Shipping Tanks for
Flammable and Combustible Liquids ' '
November 25 , 1998 00070-4 98088 . 00 �
�
' i I ' . � . � ' ��-'�"'.�
�
, NFPA-418 (1990) Standard for Rooftop Heliport
Construction and Protection
I ' I NFPA-490 (1993 ) Code for Storage of Ammonium Nitrate
NFPA-497M (1986) Classification of Gases, Vapors and
Ducts for Electrical Equipment in
Hazardous (Classified) Locations
' NFPA-600 (1986) Private Fire Brigades
NFPA-655 (1993 ) Standard for the Prevention of Sulfur
Fire and Explosives
� NFPA-664 (1993 ) Standard for the Prevention of Fires and
Explosives in Wood Processing and
Woodworking Facilities
I � NFPA-701 (1989) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame
Resistant Textiles and Films
NFPA-703 (1992) Standard for Fire Retardant Impregnated
Wood and Fire Retardant Coatings for
' Building Materials
NFPA-704 (1990) Standard System for the Identification
� of the F,ire Hazards of Material
' i NFPA-801 (1986) Facilities Handling Radioactive
Materials
NFPA-850 (1990) Fossil Fueled Steam and Combustion
' Turbine Electric Generating Plants
NFPA-1221 (1991) Standard for the Installation,
� Maintenance and Use of Public Fire
� Service Communications
� NFPA-1962 (1993 ) Standard for the Care, Use and
� Maintenance of Fire Hose (Including
Connections and Nozzles)
� NFPA-1963 (1993 ) Standards for Screw Threads and Gaskets
� � for Fire Hose Connections
� ASTM E136 (1987) Standard Test Method for Behavior of
i Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at
750 Degrees Fahrenheit
' ANSI-A17 . 1 (1987) Elevator Codes
Chapter 4A-3 , F .A.C . The State Fire Prevention Code (1990
' edition)
Chipter 4A-47 , F .A.C. The Uniform Fire Safety Standards for
� , Elevators (1990 edition)
! Chapter 59A-3 , F .A.C. Hospital Licensure (Revised 7/97)
' Chapter 59A-4, F .A.C . Nursing Homes and Related Facilities
(Revised 7/97)
Chapter 59A-5 , F.A.C. Ambulatory Surgical Centers (Revised
' 6/97)
Chapter 10D-38 , F.A.C . Intermediate Care Facilities for the
� Mentally Retarded
' Standard Building Code (1997 Edition)
� I ,
�
November 25 , 1998 00070-5 98088 . 00
� I i
�
�
'
Florida Americans with Disabil.ities Acces�ib�lity �
Implementation Act and Americans with Disabilities Act
Accessibility Guidelines (October 1, 1993) . �
END OF SECTION ,
� �
I) �
,
�
e � �
�
,
�
�
i � �
�I
i
I �
�
�
�
�
November 25 , 1998 00070-6 980�38 . 00 �
'
�
' SECTION 00700
' GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTR.ACT
PART 1 GENER.AL
, 1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
' A. Supplementary Conditions : SECTION 00800 .
1 . 02 STANDARD FORMS
' A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Standard Form
A201, 1987 edition, of the American Institute of
Architects, are hereby made a part of the Contract
, Documents to the same extent as if bound herein.
END OF SECTION
' ,
' �
,
' ,
I
'
,
I
'
�
'
'
, i
, '
Noveinber 25 , 1998 00700-1 98088 . 00
, ' i
C
�
' SECTION 00800
' ; SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
' The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to
� � t�he General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA
Document A201, Fourteenth Edition, 1987 . Where any article of
tihe General Conditions is modified or any paragraph, or clause
I ' t�hereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the
�naltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph, or
clause shall remain in effect .
' PART 1 GENERAL
' 1 . 01 MODIFICATIONS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Article 1 : General Provisions
, � Add the following to subparagraph 1 . 1 . 8 :
1 . 1 . 8 . 1 The term "product" as used in these Supplementary
� Conditions includes materials, systems and
� , equipment .
� , j 1 . 1 . 8 . 2 The term "or equal" as used in these Supplementary
i Conditions means "an equal approved by the
Architect" .
' 1 . 1 . 8 . 3 The term "provide" as used in these Supplementary
Conditions means "furnish and install . "
� 1 . 1 . 8 . 4 Wherever technical standards, such as (but not
limited to) ASTM, are referenced in the Project
Manual, it shall mean the standards current on the
� � date the Contract Agreement is finalized, unless
�
otherwise noted.
' B. Article 3 : Contractor
Add the following to subparagraph 3 . 2 . 1 .
3 . 2 . 1 . 1 Revise as follows : It shall be the responsibility
' of the Contractor, prior to submitting bids, to
notify the Architect in writing of conflicting
' information in the plans and specifications so an
Addendum may be issued to all bidders . In the
� event of failure to submit such notice, the more
expensive material or process shall be included by
� the Contractor for a complete project . The
Architect will rule as to the material or process
to be furnished. "
� I �
I
N'ovelber 25 , 1998 00800-1 98088 . 00
' I
I
,
Add the following subparagraphs 3 . 4 . 3 , 3 . 4 . 4 , 3 . 4 . 4 . 1 and '
3 . 4 . 4 . 2 .
3 . 4 . 3 Provide a list showing the name of the '
manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the
products identified in the General Requirements of �
the Specifications (Division 1) and, where
applicable, the name of the installing
Subcontractor.
3 . 4 . 4 The Architect will reply in writing to the ,
, Contractor stating whether the Owner or the
Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable '
objection to any such proposal . If adequate data
on any proposed manufacturer or installer is not
available, the Owner' s Representative may state
that action will be deferred until the Contractor '
provides further data. Failure of the Owner to
reply will constitute notice of no reasonable
objection. Failure to object to a manufacturer '
will not constitute a waiver of any of the
requirements of the Contract Documents, and all
products furnished by the listed manufacturer must �
comply with such requirements .
3 . 4 . 4 . 1 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner
will consider a formal request for the �
substitution of products in place of those
specified only under the conditions set forth in
the General Requirements of the Specifications ,
(Division 1) .
3 . 4 . 4 . 2 By making requests for substitutions based on '
subparagraph 3 . 4 . 4 . 1, the Contractor:
a. Represents that he has personally investigated the
proposed substitute product and determined that it ,
is equal or superior in all respects to that
specified;
b. Represents that he will provide the same warranty �
for the substitution that the Contractor would for
, that specified;
, c . Certifies that the cost data presented is complete
'
and includes all related costs under this Contract
but excludes the Architect' s redesign costs, and ,
waives all claims for additional costs relate3 to
the substitution which subsequently become
apparent; and �
d. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted
substitute, making such changes as may be required
for the work to be complete in all respects . ,
November 25 , 1998 00800-2 98088 . 00 ,
' i i ... . � .
�
1 � C . Article 4 : Administration of the Contract
� Add the following subparagraph:
�
4 . 5 . 8 Any arbitration hearings necessary hereunder shall
be conducted and held in Nashville, Tennessee .
� � D., Article 5 : Subcontractors �
I i
� Delete the last sentence from subparagraph 5 . 2 . 1 . Add the
following subparagraph:
5 . 2 . 1 . 1 No work shall be commenced until approval of such
' subcontractors has been given in writing by the
Owner. If required, the Contractor shall furnish
evidence satisfactory to the Owner, showing that
, any or all proposed subcontractors are competent
to execute the various parts of the work covered
by their subcontracts .
' � E. Article 7 : Changes in the Work
�
Make the following changes to subparagraph 7 . 3 . 6 :
� ! � In the first sentence, delete the words "a reasonable
' allowance for overhead and profit" and substitute "an
, � j allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the
� schedule set forth in subparagraph 7 . 3 . 6 . 6 below. "
I
' Add new subparagraph 7 . 3 . 6 . 6 :
,� I
, � � The allowance for overhead and profit combined, included
in the total cost to the Owner, shall be based on the
' following schedule:
1 . For General Contractor, 150 of the cost of the work
' i performed by own forces .
2 . For each subcontractor, 100 of cost of the work
' performed by own forces .
3 . Markup for General Contractor, for work performed by
; his Subcontractors, 5 percent of the amount due the
� Sub-subcontractor.
4 . In order to facilitate checking of quotations for
' extras or credits, all proposals shall be accompanied
by a complete itemization of costs including labor,
j materials, and Subcontracts . Labor and materials shall
be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where
' major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be
itemized also .
� �
� �
I '
Noveiber 25 , 1998 00800-3 98088 . 00
' j '
'
, F . Article 9 : Payments and Completion '
, Add new subparagraph 9 . 3 . 1 . 3 :
o i
9 . 3 . 1 . 3 The Owner will retain 100 of the amount due the
Contractor on the project . (See contract for
changes if any. ) '
Add the following to subparagraph 9 . 10 . 2 :
9 . 10 . 2 . 1 Releases of liens shall be furnished by the ,
Contractor on AIA Document G706A or a form
approved by the Architect . Subcontractors and '
materials suppliers lien releases may be provided
by the Contractor and submitted with each pay
request .
G. Article 11 : Insurance and Bonds �
11 . 1 . 1 Modify the first sentence of subparagraph 11 . 1 . 1 '
to read as follows :
The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in
a company or companies licensed to do business in �
the State in which the project is located such
insurance as will protect the Contractor from
claims set forth below which may arise out of or '
result from the Contractor' s operations under the
Contract and for which the Contractor may be
legally liable, whether such operations be by the '
Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or
by anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable : ,
Add new subparagraph:
11 . 1 . 1 . 8 Liability Insurance shall include all major ,
' divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive
basis including:
Premises-O erations includin X-C-U '
P ( g )
, Independent Contractor' s Protective
� ' ,
Products and Completed Operations
Personal Injury Liability. '
Contractual - including specified provision for �
the Contractor' s obligations under Paragraph 3 . 18
Owned, non-owned, and hired motor vehicles
�
November 25 , 1998 00800-4 98038 . 00 ,
' . - ' .. -�
, Broad Form Property Damage including Completed
Operations
' Umbrella Excess Liability
' Add to subparagraph 11 . 1 . 2 the following clause:
, 11 . 1 . 2 . 1 The insurance required by subparagraph 11 . 1 . 1
, shall be written for not less than the
, following, or greater if required by law.
1 . Worker' s Compensation:
' a. State: Statutory Limit
b. Applicable Federal : Statutory Limit
� c . Employer' s Liability: $100, 000, without
restriction as to whether covered by workmen' s
' , ; compensation law.
2 . Comprehensive General Liability (including
Premises- Operations; Independent Contractor' s
� � Protective; Products and Completed Operations;
i Broad Form Property Damage) :
' a. Bodily Injury:
I
$1, 000, 000 Each Occurrence
' $1, 000, 000 Annual Aggregate
b. Property Damage.
� $1, 000, 000 Each Occurrence
$1, 000, 000 Annual Aggregate
' c . Maintain Products and Completed Operations
Insurance for period of two years after final
payment.
, d. Property Damage Liability Insurance will
include X, C and U (explosion, collapse and
underground) coverage .
' 3 . Contractual Liability (Hold Harmless Coverage) :
�
' a. Bodily Injury:
$1, 000 , 000 Each Occurrence
' b. Property Damage:
$1, 000, 000 Each Occurrence
, ; i, $1, 000, 000 Annual Aggregate
,
i
' November 25 , 1998 00800-5 98088 . 00
i
�
�
'
4 . Personal Injury: '
' a. $1, 000 , 000 Annual Aggregate ,
5 . Comprehensive Automobile Liability (owned, non-
owned, hired) :
a. Bodily Injury: '
$1, 000 , 000 Each Person �
$1, 000 , 000 Each Occurrence
, b. Property Damage :
� $1, 000 , 000 Each Occurrence '
6 . Excess Limits Liability Policy (Umbrella) :
� '
a. $5, 000, 000
11 . 1 . 2 . 2 Each policy shall provide either in the body of ,
the policy or by appropriate endorsement (rider)
to the policy, that such policy cannot be �
altered or canceled in less than ten days after
the mailing of written registered notice to the
Owner of such alteration or cancellation, or not
less than five days after actual receipt by the '
Owner of such written notice .
Add the following to subparagraph 11 . 1 . 3 : '
11 . 1 . 3 . 1 Furnish one copy of each Certificate of i
Insurance herein required for each copy of the '
Agreement, which shall specifically set forth
evidence of all coverage required by 11 . 1 . 1,
11 . 1 . 2 , and 11 . 1 . 3 . The form of the certificate
shall be AIA Document G705 or a form approved by '
the Owner/Owner' s Representative. Furnish to
the Owner copies of endorsements that are
subsequently issued amending coverage or limits . '
Add the following subparagraph to 11 . 3 . 1 . 1 :
The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed '
Value.
Add the following subparagraph to 11 . 3 . 1 . 2 : '
If by the terms of this insurance any mandatory
deductibles are required, or if the Owner should elect to '
increase the mandatory deductible amounts or purchase this
insurance with voluntary deductible amounts, the Owner
shall be responsible for payment of the amount of the
deductible in the event of a paid claim. '
November 25 , 1998 00800-6 98038 . 00 '
' . . r, , , .
, s
I ' Add the following subparagraph:
� 11 . 4 . 3 The bonding company shall furnish a letter to
the Owner from the home office acknowledging the
bond(s) . Separate bonds are preferred; however,
, a single bond providing the stated coverage will
' be acceptable .
' PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
IPART 3 PRODUCTS
' Not Used.
' END OF SECTION
� '
' �,
1
'
'
'
� '
,
,
'
�
I
� Novernber 25 , 1998 00800-7 98088 . 00
I
i
� I
'
' ' SECTION 01010
� SUN�lARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
I1 . 01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
' A. Renovate approximately 3 , 120 square feet of office waiting
and assorted staff support space into 10 acute care beds
on the second and third floors . Additional 4, 445 sq. ft.
, work will occur with the renovation of eight beds into
semi-private and private rooms .
1 . 02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
' A. AIA A201 1987 Edition.
�
� B. Supplementary Conditions to AIA A201 .
1 . 03 OWNER FURNISHED/CONTR.ACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
� A. Equipment furnished by Owner to be installed by Contractor
is listed in Owner Furnished/Contractor Installed
Equipment Brochure.
� I B. Owner' s Responsibilities :
1 . Arrange for delivery of shop drawings, product data,
' , samples, manufacturer' s instructions, and certificates
to the Contractor.
�
' 2 . Submit claims for transportation damage.
3 . Inspect deliveries jointly with the Contractor.
' 4 . Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or
missing items .
' 5 . Arrange for manufacturer' s field services .
6 . Arrange for and deliver manufacturer' s warranties and
� bonds to the contractor.
C . Contractor' s Responsibilities :
' 1 . Review shop drawings, product data, samples and other
submittals . The contractor shall notify the architect
' and engineers of any conflicts in vendor drawings and
' that of the contract documents before proceeding with
installation.
� 2 . Receive and unload products at the site.
' , Noveiber 25 , 1998 01010-1 98088 . 00
I �
I
,
� 3 . Inspect deliveries and record shortages, and damaged or �
defective items .
4 . Protect equipment from damage and from exposure to 1
elements .
5 . Handle products at site including uncrating, inventory '
and storage of equipment .
6 . Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish '
products .
7 . Provide installation inspections required by public '
authorities .
8 . Repair or replace items damaged by the Contractor or
his operations . '
1 . 04 FIXED EQUIPMENT LIST
A. FIXED EQUIPMENT LIST includes items to be: '-
1 . Owner specified, Owner furnished and Contractor ,
installed.
2 . Owner specified, Owner furnished and Owner installed.
3 . Architect specified, Contractor furnished, and �
Contractor installed.
1 . 05 WORK SEQUENCE r
A. A scheduling sequence meeting should be held' with
Administrator prior to any renovation work being done . '
Coordinate progress schedule with the Administrator and/or
a delegated representative of the hospital staff .
B. Construct work in stages to provide continuous public ,
usage. Do not close off public usage of facilities ��ntil
use of one stage of work will provide alternate passage. � I
1 . 06 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Coordinate use of the premises under direction of �
Architect or Hospital' s Representative . Contractor will
submit plan or discuss locations on the site of storage
areas, layout areas and offices to or with the Architect '
for approval .
B. Do not unreasonably encumber site under this contract . '
C . Do not load structure with weight that will endanger
structure .
�
November 25 , 1998 01010-2 98088 . 00 '
i �
, D. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping
of products stored on premises .
' E. Obtain and pay for additional storage and work areas if
required for operations under this contract .
� F. Keep site clean and building broom clean at all times .
Vacuum passages between existing and new or renovated
spaces on a daily basis and/or as the need occurs .
' 1 . 07 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner will occupy premises during entire construction
' period to conduct his operations . Cooperate with Owner in
scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to
facilitate Owner usage .
' B. Execute Certificate of Substantial Completion for
designated portion of work prior to Owner occupancy.
' Allow: `
1 . Access for Owner personnel .
' 2 . Use of parking facilities .
3 . Operation of HVAC and electrical systems .
' C. On occupancy, Owner will provide for occupied areas : I
' 1 . Operation of HVAC and electrical systems .
� 2 . Maintenance
, 3 . Security
' PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
, PART 3 EXECUTION
' ' Not used.
' END OF SECTION
'
' ,
' Novernber 25, 1998 01010-3 98088 . 00
� I
i
' SECTION 01031
' I ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
� 1 . 01 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES
' A. Schedule work in the sequences and within times specified
in Section 01010 .
' B. Submit separate detailed subschedule for alterations work,
, coordinated with the Construction Schedules . Show:
1 . Each stage of work and dates of occupancy areas .
' 2 . Date of Substantial Completion for area of alterations
� work, as appropriate.
' I
; 3 . Trades and subcontractors employed in each stage.
�
� i . 02 ALTER.ATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION
' A. Assign the work of moving, removal, cutting and patching,
� to trades qualified to perform the work in a manner to
� ; i cause the least damage to each type of work, and provide i
i
means of returning surfaces to appearance of new work.
' B. Perform cutting and removal work to minimum necessary, and
in a manner to avoid damage to adjacent work.
1 . Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster or
' metals by methods to terminate surfaces in a straight
line at a natural point of division.
' , C. Perform cutting and patching as specified in Section
01045 .
� D. Protect existing finishes, equipment and adjacent work,
which is scheduled to remain, from damage.
1 . Protect existing and new work from weather and extremes
' of temperature.
a. Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F .
� � b. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and
� humidity control as needed to prevent damage to
' remaining existing work and to new work.
' i
I
' iovelber 25 , 1998 01031-1 98088 . 00
i
!
E . Provide temporary enclosures as specified in Section �
01500 , to separate work areas from existing building and '
from areas occupied by the Owner, and to provide weather ��,
protection. �
F. Discoveries of construction, furnishings and articles
having a historical or private value remain the property �
of the Owner.
1 . Promptly notify the Architect . '
2 . Protect discovery from damage from elements or work.
3 . The Architect will promptly transmit the decision for '
disposition of discovery.
4 . Store items to be retained by the Owner in a safe, dry '
place on the site. Dispose of items the Owner
� releases .
'
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 SALVAGED MATERIALS �
A. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed material
to replace damaged work of existing construction, when �
material is not readily obtainable on the current market .
1 . Use particular care in removal and salvage of the '
following items :
I a. Light Fixtures
b. Doors '
c . Plumbing Fixtures '
d. Ceiling Tile
2 . Store salvaged items in a dry, secure place on the �, �
site.
3 . Items not required for use in repair of existing work '
remain the property of the Owner.
4 . Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new �
construction except with permission of the Architect .
5 . Dispose of serviceable material not wanted by the Uwner '
in a proper manner and identify this credit to the
project .
'
November 25 , 1998 01031-2 980�8 . 00 ,
'
, t 2� . 02 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING
' A. General requirements that work be complete:
1 . Provide same products or types of construction as that
' in existing structure, as needed to patch, extend or
' match existing work. ,
a. Generally, the Contract Documents will not define
1 standards of workmanship present in existing
construction; the Contractor is expected to
determine products by inspection and any necessary
' testing, and workmanship by experience. _
2 . Presence of a product, finish or type of construction
requires that patching, extending or matching be
' performed as necessary to make the work complete and
consistent to identical standards of quality unless the
existing standard of quality �is less than desirable as
' determined by the Architect.
3 . Patch, replace and/or repair finishes disturbed in
areas where work is done under the terms of the
� contract but where no other finish work is required.
� PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 PROCEDURES
iA. Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who
are capable of matching existing quality of workmanship.
Quality of patched or extended work is same as that for
� new work.
3 . 02 ADJUSTMENTS
� � A. V�here partitions are removed, patch floors, walls and
ceilings with finish materials to match existing and/or
replace both areas with new materials and finishes
� approved by Architect.
1 . Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces
' becoming one, rework floors and ceilings to provide
smooth planes without breaks, steps or bulkheads .
' 2 . Where extreme change of plane (2 " or more) occurs,
request instructions from the Architect as to the
method of making transition. "
� B. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new
floors .
�
1 Nivember 25, 1998 01031-3 98088 . 00
�
i
'
' 3 . 03 DAMAGED SURFACES ,
A. Patch and replace any portion of an existing finished
surface which is found to be damaged, lifted, discolored ,
or shows other imperfections, with matching material .
1 . Provide adequate support of substrate prior to patching �
the finish.
2 . Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces '
in a manner to produce uniform color and texture over
the entire surface.
3 . When existing surface finish cannot be matched, 1
refinish the entire surface to the nearest I
intersections .
' 3 . 04 TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW I
, A. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, '
make a smooth and workmanlike transition. Match existing
adjacent work with patched work in texture and appearance
so that patch or transition is invisible at five feet .
1 . When finished surfaces are cut
in such a way that a
�
smooth transition with new work is not possible,
terminate existing surface in a neat manner alon a
g �
straight line at a natural line of division, and
provide trim appropriate to finished surface .
3 . 05 CLEANING i
A. Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in
Section 01700 .
�
' 1 . Clean Owner-occupied areas daily and/or as the need
occurs . �
2 . Clean spillage, overspray and heavy collection of dust
, in Owner-occupied areas immediately. �
B. At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make
surfaces ready for work of successive trades .
C . At completion of alterations work in each area, provide '
final cleaning and return to a condition suitable for use
by the Owner. '
END OF SECTION �
� ,
November 25 , 1998 01031-4 98088 . 00 �
1 zj l .
' SECTION 01040
' CONTRACT COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
� 1 . 01 RELATED WORK
� A. Sequence of construction: Section 01010 .
B. Owner occupancy: Section 01010 .
' C. Cutting and patching Section 01045 .
D. Project meetings : Section 01200 .
AE. Substitutions and product options : Section 01630 .
' F. Closeout submittals : Section 01700 .
i 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various
' sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly
sequence of installation of construction elements, with
' provisions for accommodating items to be installed later.
B. Coordinate sequence of work to accommodate Owner occupancy
as specified in Section 01010 .
� 1 . 03 MEETINGS
' A. In addition to progress meetings specified in Section
, ' 01200, hold coordination meetings and preinstallation
conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure
� coordination of work.
1 . 04 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
i A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section
' 01300 .
' B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent
responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and
placing in service, such equipment .
' C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure
compatibility of space, of operating elements, and effect
on work of other sections .
'
�
' November 25 , 1998 01040-1 98088 . 00
'
1 . 05 COORDINATION OF SPACE '
A. Coordinate use of project space and sequence of '
installation of inechanical and electrical work which is
indicated diagrammatically on the drawings . Follow
routings indicated for pipes, ducts and conduits as
closely as practicable, with due allowance for available �
physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building.
Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for
other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs .
�
B. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal
pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction. Coordinate
locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements . ' ',
1 . 06 COORDINATION OF CONTR.ACT CLOSEOUT
A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate �
Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion of
portions of the work designated for Owner occupancy '
designated in Section 01010 .
B . Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate
Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. '
C . After Owner occupancy of the premises, coordinate access
to site by various sections for correction of defective '
work and work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents, to minimize disruption of the Owner' s
activities . '
D. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in
Section 01700 .
,
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used. '
PART 3 EXECUTION '
Not Used
'
END OF SECTION
'
'
�
November 25 , 1998 01040-2 98088 � 00
�
' i �
' SECTION 01045
I
� CUTTING AND PATCHING
� �
PART 1 GENERAL
' 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
�
A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete the
� work and to:
1 . Fit the parts together and properly integrate with I
' j � other work.
I
2 . Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed
� work. ,
� � 3 . Uncover work to provide for Owner' s observation of
covered work. �,,
' � 4 . Remove and replace noncomplying work performed under
� contract .
� I
5 . Remove samples of installed work for testing.
� 6 . Provide openings in non-structure elements for
' ' penetrations of inechanical and electrical work.
B. In addition to requirements above, upon written
' � instructions of Owner:
I
1 . Remove samples of installed materials for testing.
' 2 . Remove items to provide for alteration of existing
, work.
I ' ' ,
1 . 02i PRECAUTIONS
A. Do not endanger work when cutting or altering.
� B. Do not cut or alter work of another trade without
; � consulting the trade involved and the Superintendent of
' construction.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS '
, '� A.� Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section
' � 01300 .
� ' B. Prior to cutting any structural member, submit written
notice to the Structural Engineer requesting consent to
proceed with cutting including:
� �
I
November 25 , 1998 01045-1 98088 . 00
1 ' '
� �
'
1 . Identifications of project . ' �
2 . Description of affected work. �
3 . Necessity for cutting.
4 . Effect on other work, and on structural integrity of '
project .
5 . Description of proposed work. Designate scope of : ,
� a. Cutting and patching
b. Trades required to perform work. '
c . Products proposed to be used.
' d. Extent of refinishing. ,
, 6 . Alternatives to cutting and patching. '
7 . Designation of party responsible for cost of cutting �
and patching. '
C . Submit cost estimate for cutting and patching requestad by �
Owner prior to starting work.
D. Should conditions of work, or schedule, require a change '
of materials or methods, submit written recommendations to
Architect, including: '
1 . Conditions which cause requirement for change .
2 . Recommendations for alternative materials or methods .
'
3 . Submittals as required for substitutions .
4 . Cost estimate for changing materials and methods . ,
E. Submit written notice to Architect designating time work
' will be uncovered for his observation.
,
1 . 04 RESPONSIBILITY FOR COSTS
A. Costs caused by ill-timed or defective work, and worl{ not '
complying with requirements of contracts, including costs
of additional services of the Architect or other '
consultants shall be paid by the party responsible for
ill-timed, defective, or noncomplying work as determined
by the Architect .
B. Cost of work done on instructions of Owner, other than ,
defective or noncomplying work will be paid by the Owner.
�
November 25 , 1998 01045-2 98088 . 00 �
� ` - _ ' .
� ' PART 2 PRODUCTS
� 2 . 01 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials required for original construction.
� B. For any , change in materials, submit request for
substitution as specified above.
'' PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION
' A. Inspect existing conditions including elements subject to
movement or damage during:
' 1 . Cutting and patching.
� ` B. After uncovering work, " inspect conditions affecting
installation of new products .
3 . 02 PREPARATION
� A. Before cutting:
� 1 . Shore, brace, and support as necessary to maintain
structural integrity.
' 2 . Protect other parts of project from damage.
3 . 03 PERFORMING WORK
� A. Fit and adjust materials to provide a finished and
complete installation.
� B. Cut and remove materials, to ensure other work will not be
damaged, and new materials can be properly installed.
C . Restore work to ensure compliance with specifications .
� � D. Refinish surfaces to provide an even uniform appearance.
' 1 . Continuous surfaces : Refinish to nearest intersections .
2 . Assemblies : Refinish entire assemblies .
�
END OF SECTION I
' I
�
' Novernber 25 , 1998 01045-3 98088 . 00 I
'
' � SECTION 01200
' PROJECT MEETINGS
�
PART 1 GENERAL
' 1 . 01 MEETINGS - GENERAL
' A. Contractor' s Responsibilities :
1 . Schedule and administer meetings throughout duration of
' work.
2 . Prepare agenda for meetings .
� 3 . Distribute written notice of each meeting seven days in
advance of ineeting date.
i
� 4 . Make physical arrangements for meetings .
� � 5 . Preside at meetin s .
g
' , 6 . Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings
� and decisions .
�
i � � 7 . Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three
idays after each meeting.
� 8 . Provide one copy to:
a. All participants in the meeting, including the
Architect .
' b. All parties affected by decisions made at the
meeting.
' B. Participants :
, 1 . Qualified representative of contractors,
subcontractors, and suppliers authorized to act on
behalf of the parties they represent.
� 2 . Architect
1 . 02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
' , A. Schedule meeting within the early stages of Construction
as determined by the General Contractor.
B. Suggested Agenda: Prepare written material, distribute
, lists and discuss :
I
�
' , ,
November 25 , 1998 01200-1 98088 . 00
� ,
I
'
1 . Identification of major subcontractors and suppliers . ' �
2 . Projected construction schedules . '
3 . Critical work sequencing.
4 . Major equipment deliveries and priorities . '
5 . Project coordination, including designation of
responsible personnel . ,
6 . Procedures for, and processing of :
a. Field decisions �
b. Proposal requests
" c . Submittals �
d. Change orders �
e . Applications for payments
7 . Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents '
8 . Procedures for Maintaining Record Documents
9 . Use of Premises : �
a. Office, work and storage areas �
b. Owner' s requirements
10 . Construction facilities, construction aids and ,
controls .
11 . Temporary utilities '
12 . Safety and first aid procedures
13 . Security procedures '
14 . Housekeeping procedures .
1 . 03 PROGRESS MEETINGS I
A. Schedule regular monthly meetings and as necessary, '
schedule additional meetings .
B. Suggested Agenda: '
1 . Review and approval of minutes of previous meeting.
2 . Review of work progress since previous meeting. �
November 25 , 1998 01200-2 98088 . 00 '
' � .
' 3 . Field observations, problems, and conflicts .
' I 4 . Problems, which impede construction schedule.
5 . Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules .
, 6 . Corrective measures and procedures required to regain
projected schedule .
� 7 . Revisions to construction schedule.
8 . Plan progress and schedule for succeeding work period.
� 9 . Coordination of schedules . I
10 . Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. I
, 11 . Maintenance of quality standards .
I
' � 12 . Review proposed changes for:
' '
i a. Effect on construction schedule and on completion
date.
' � b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.
; ' 13 . Other business .
,
� END OF SECTION
r
I �
'
'
�
'
'
,
' ' I
Nl�ovember 25 , 1998 01200-3 98088 . 00
' ' II
i
' I
i
rSECTION o 13 0 0
� i SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENER.AL
' 1 . 01 SUBMITTALS
I
� A. Submittals include shop drawings, design calculations,
' diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts,
nomenclature charts, brochures and other data which are
prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor,
' i Manufacturer, Supplier, Fabricator, or Distributor and
i which illustrate some portion of the project.
' B. The Contractor shall understand that the submittal of the
required documents does not constitute compliance with the
requirements of the contract documents; only drawings
' ; reviewed by the Architect/Structural Engineer constitute
compliance.
C. It is the Contractor' s responsibility to furnish
' equipment, materials, and labor for the project, which
meets the requirements of the codes and authorities
quoted, as well as the contract documents . Proprietary
� '� ; items specified herein only establish a minimum functional
and aesthetic standard and it is incumbent upon the
Contractor to ascertain conformance of these proprietary
' items or any proposed substitution with the codes and
� authorities .
�
�
D. Contract documents shall not include shop drawings, vendor
II ' drawings, or any material prepared and submitted by the
contractor or subcontractor.
1I. 02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
' A. The individual s ecifica '
p tion sections identify when
submittals are required.
' B. Submit all requested items to the Architect for review.
I
, ' C . All submittals and samples shall be accompanied by
transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing project name,
Contractor' s name, number of drawings, titles, and other
pertinent data. Identifv on transmittal work and product
' I by Specification Section. Transmittals which do not
, identify the specification section number will not be
processed by the Architect.
' � D. Provide required blank space on each submittal for the
contractor' s and the Architect/Engineer' s stamps .
� I I
Noveiber 25 , 1998 01300-1
, 98088 . 00
�
� '
� �E. Individual Specificatian �ections establish farms o�
submi�tal� required.
1 . 03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES �
A. Present in a c].ear and thorough manner. Title each
drawing with project raame and number; identify each �
element af drawings by re�erence to sheet number and
detail, o� Contract documents .
B. Reproduction of Contract Drawings for shop drawings is not �
accep�able.
, C. Iden�ify field dzmensions; show relat�.onship to adjacent �
or critical �eatures of work or product� .
D. Su.bmi� three blueline prints and one tran�pa�:ency �
{xeproducible sepia) af each shop drawings . Upon
campletion af the review by �he ArchitectlEngineer the
transparency and ane print will be returned to the �
contractor. The contractor is re�pon�ible for providing
additional. prints for hi� ne�ds .
E. A copy of the marked-up shop drawings with the Arch�tec�. �
andlar Engineer' s review stamp is �.o be maintained a�. the
jobsi�e .
F. Minimum �hee� size: 8-1J2" x 11" . �
1 . 04 PRC)DUCT DATA �
A. Submit four {4} cap�es of product data. Submi�. only pages
which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed �
data to identify pertinent produc�.s, re�erenced to
Specification Sectian and Article number. Show refe�ence
s�andards, performance characteri�ticS, and capaci�ies;
wiring an.d pipiza.g diagrams and con�rols, component parts; �
finishes; dimensions; and required clearances .
B. Modify manufacturer' s standard schematic drawings and '
diagrams to �upplement standard information and to provide
information �pecifically applicable to the work. Delete
information which is not applicable,
C. Provide manufacturer' � preparation, assembly, and '
installation instruc�ions .
1 . 05 SAMPZ,ES �
A. Submit full-page range of manufacturer' s standard fin?shes �
except where more restra.ctive requirement� are speci�ied,
indicating color�, textures, and patterns .
�
November 25, 1998 013Q0-2 98088 - OQ �
i
' � � " . ,
, B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of
products, including parts and attachments as required by
Architect/Engineer.
i ' �
C . Approved samples, which are of proper size, may be
� incorporated in work.
, ' D. Label each sample with identification.
E. Field Finishes : Provide full samples at Project, at
' location acceptable to Architect as required by individual
Specification Section. Install each sample complete and
finished. Acceptable finishes in place may be retained in
, completed work.
1 . 06 CONTR.ACTOR REVIEW
' A. Review submittals to determine and verify field
I� measurements, field construction criteria, manufacturer' s
catalog numbers, and compliance of submittal with
, ' requirements of Contract Documents before transmittal to
the Architect.
' B. Stamp and sign each sheet of shop drawings and product
; ', data, and sign or initial each sample to certify
, compliance with requirements of Contract Documents .
, , � Notify designated recipient in writing at time of
submittal of deviations from requirements of Contract
Documents . .
' C . Work requiring shop drawings, whether called for by the
contract documents or requested by the Contractor, shall
not be commenced until the submission has been reviewed by
' the Architect/Engineer. Work shall be in accordance with
and performed from the reviewed drawings and the
Contractor or his Subcontractor shall make certain that
, i proper shop drawings are at the site of the work.
D. By reviewing, approving and submitting shop drawings, the
Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and
, verified all field measurements, field construction
criteria, materials, member sizes catalog numbers , and
similar data and that he has checked and coordinated shop
, � drawings with the requirements of the project and of the
contract documents .
' 1 . 07 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW
I A.' The Architect/Engineer will review submittals with I
reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The
, Architect/Engineer' s review and/or corrections refer only
to the general arrangement and conformance of the subject
of the submittals with the design concept of the project
' i and with the information given in the contract documents .
Under no conditions should the Contractor consider the
i
Noveiber 25 , 1998 01300-3 98088 . 00
� �
� i
�
,
review to include the dimensions , quantities, and de�ails '
of the items nor the approval of an assembly in which the
item functions . The Architect/Engineer' s review of shop '
drawings shall not relieve the Contractor or
responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of
the contract documents unless the Contractor has informed
the Architect/Engineer in writing of such deviation at the '
time of submission and the Architect/Engineer has given
written approval to the specific deviation; nor shall the
Architect/Engineer' s review relieve the Contractor from ,
responsibility for errors or omissions from the shop
drawing.
1 . 08 RESUBMITTALS '
A. When shop drawings are returned to the Contractor with the
Architect/Engineer' s corrections the Contractor shall make '
the required corrections . Upon request, resubmit one set
of corrected drawings . The Contractor shall d--rect
specific attention in writing or on the submitted drawings ,
to revisions other than requested by the
Architect/Engineer on previous submission.
1 . 09 DISTRIBUTION ,
A. Distribute reproductions of shop drawings, copies of
product data, and samples which bear the '
Architect/Engineer' s stamp of approval, to job site file,
Record Documents file, subcontractors, suppliers, other
affected contractors, and other entities requ-ring ,
information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS �
Not used.
'
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used. '
END OF SECTION
'
'
'
,
November 25 , ` 1998 01300-4 98088 . 00 �
� 1 ' � � ..
�
' ' SECTION 01310
i CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
' I
I
PART 1 GENERAL
' 1 . 01 FORMAT
I �
I
' � A. Prepare network analysis system using similarities to the
critical path method, as outlined in The Associated
General Contractors of America publication, "The Use of
CPM in Construction - A Manual for General Contractors . "
, I B. Sequence of listings : The chronological order of the start
of each item of work
' C. Scale and spacing: Prepare to allow space for updating.
i
1�. 0 2 � CONTENT
, ; �
' A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with
dates for the beginning and completion of each element of
' construction.
i '
B. Identify each item by major Specifications section number.
' C. ' Identify work of separate stages and other logically
grouped activities .
' I
� D. Provide subschedules to define critical portions of the
entire schedule .
, E. Show accumulated percentage of completion for each item,
and total percentage of work completed, as of first day of
each month.
' � F. ; Show delivery dates for (Owner furnished products) and
�' (products specified under allowances, if any) .
' 1 . 03 MONTHLY PROGRESS REVISIONS
� A. � Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal
� ' and projected completion date of each activity.
,
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of
' schedule for the following.
; ; 1 . Major changes in scope .
' 2 . Activities modified since previous submission.
3 . Revised projection of progress and completion.
' , �
Nl�ovember 25 , 1998 01310-1 98088 . 00
' I I
'
� C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define . '
1 . Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on '
the schedule .
2 . Corrective action taken or recommended, and its effect .
3 . The effect of changes on schedules of other prime ' �
contractors . ',
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS '
A. Distribute copies of revised schedules to Owner, after
review, resubmit required revised data as required. '
B. Submit revised progress schedule with each monthly
Application for Payment. '
1 . 05 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Instruct Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other parties '
whose actions affect scheduled work, to promptly r��port
inability to comply with schedules . Provide a detailed
explanation and suggested remedies . '
END OF SECTION ,
,
'
'
,
'
1
1
'
November 25 , 1998 01310-2 980�8 . 00 '
I
' ' i
' SECTION 01400
'
, ! i TESTS & INSPECTIONS
PART 1 GENER.AL
' 1 . 01 The Testing Agency will be selected by the Architect . The
i Owner will pay for tests and inspections unless otherwise
specified.
' �
1 . 02 The responsibility of the Testing Agency shall be to test,
I inspect and report . Work and materials not complying with
' � these specifications and referenced codes, standards and
specifications shall be reported to the Contractor and
Architect immediately. Field notes confirming such
' notification are to be submitted with test and inspection
reports . Copies of field notes are to be left with the
, , project superintendent prior to leaving the construction
' ! site. Field notes shall include the message given to the
; Contractor, date and time of inessage, name of Contractor' s
' Representative informed, nature of discrepancy, action
taken by Contractor, and name of Testing Agency
' � Representative.
1 . 03 Tests and inspections of materials and processes will be
' required as set forth in the appropriate sections of these
, specifications and as directed by the Architect.
Laboratory and field personnel are to be qualified with a
' minimum of two years experience .
�
� ,
1 . 04� Dispose of or correct materials and work not complying
with the specifications in an approved manner. Should the
' contractor elect to accept material or work not complying
to the specifications, he thereby assumes full
responsibility for the material or work and design, test,
' ! inspection, and corrective action should the material not
i � conform to appropriate codes .
�
' 1 . 05 Whenever extra testing design and/or inspections are
necessitated by the fault or error of the Contractor, or
� by the noncompliance of the materials or workmanship with
� the requirements of these plans and specifications, or for
, � � the convenience of the Contractor, the Owner will pay for
such extra tests and inspections but will deduct the
amounts of such payments from payments due to the
' Contractor. Additional work for the Architect shall be
at the rate of 2 . 5 times direct personnel expense plus the
' cost of direct expense.
� 1 . 06 The reports shall indicate that the materials were tested
in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications
i and referenced codes, and shall state whether the material
' ; ! or materials passed or failed to pass those requirements .
� ,
November 25 , 1998 01400-1 98088 . 00
1 �
,
The Architect or his representative (Testing and �
Inspection Agency) shall select the samples of materials
for testing. In no case shall the vendor be considered a '
representative of the Architect for this purpose .
1 . 07 Copies of test or inspection reports are to be issued
within 48 hours of the test or inspection. The following ,
information is to be included:
Name and Address of Test Agency '
Date
Project Name
Project Location '
Project Contractor
Material Supplier
Specified Strength
Type of Material ,
Time Sampled
Name of Person Performing Tests
Quantity Represented ' �,
Weather Conditions
Results of Tests
Date Tested '
Location of Material Tested
Remarks
Distribution of Reports
1 . 08 Make the premises available to the Architect and to the '
Testing and Inspection Agency and shall cooperate with the
Testing Agency. ,
1 . 09 Notify the Testing Agency 24 hours prior to the required
testing and inspection.
1 . 10 The Architect will make decisions or set guidelines for ,
acceptance or rejection of materials based on test
results . ,
1 . 11 Advise the Architect immediately of improper testing
procedures, unqualified personnel performing test, ,
unnecessary testing or incorrect test results .
1 . 12 Neither the observations of the Architect in his
administration of the contract, nor inspections, tests or '
approvals by persons other than the Contractor shall
relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the
work in accordance with the Contract Documents . '
END OF SECTION �
� '
November 25 , 1998 01400-2 980�8 . 00 '
�I
�
'
� SECTION 01500
i
' TEMPOR.ARY FACILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
, 1 . 01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
' � A. Contractor' s use of premises : Section 01010 .
B. Final cleaning: Section 01700 .
' i . 02 ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Provide service required for construction operations, with
� poles, branch wiring, distribution boxes and other
appurtenances located to allow service and lighting by
' means of construction type power cords . Pay for costs of
' energy used.
� B. Arrange with local electric power company and pay fees for
tapping onto existing electric power source and providing
, meter for temporary construction lights and power.
�
C. Connect to existing service inside the meter for 110 and
' , 220 volt power for lights and power required, and provide
� branch wiring and distribution boxes located to allow
service and lighting by means of construction type power
' cords .
�� � 1 . Do not use the Owner' s source for o eration of electric
A
heat.
' 2 . The Owner will pay costs of energy used except as
follows :
, a. If higher voltages are required, make arrangements
i with local electric power company; make connections
' to primary source; and pay installation fees and
, meter charges .
D. Provide lighting for construction operations .
' � �
E. Existing and permanent lighting may be used during
construction. Maintain lighting and make routine repairs .
1 I
F. When temporary items are no longer required, remove the
system.
'
�.
' I �
November 25 , 1998 01500-1 98088 . 00
1 �
j �
,
1 . 03 HEAT AND VENTILATION �
A. Provide as required to maintain specified conditions for �
construction operations and to protect materials, finishes
and equipment from damage due to temperature and humidity.
B. Coordinate use of existing facilities with the O�vner. '
Extend and supplement with temporary units as required to
maintain specified conditions for construction operations
and to protect materials, finishes and equipment from ,
damage due to temperature and humidity.
C . Obtain approval of Owner' s Representative prior to '
operation of permanent facilities for temporary purposes,
verify that installation is approved for operation, and
that all filters are in place. Provide and pay for
operation and maintenance. '
D. Provide smoke free temporary heat required for performance
of work. Open fires will not be permitted. '
E. Provide ventilation of enclosed areas to cure materials,
to disperse humidity, and to prevent accumulations of
dust, fumes, vapors or gases . '
1 . 04 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Provide telephone service to the field office . Toll calls '
by parties other than the Contractor will be at their own
e}cpense. '
1 . 05 WATER
A. Provide service required for construction operations . '
Extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is
available by use of hoses . Pay meter charges .
B. Arrange with the local water company and pay fees for '
tapping existing water mains and providing meter for
temporary construction water. '
C . Connect to existing facilities inside the Owner' s meter.
Extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is
available by use of hoses . The Owner will pay meter �
charges .
1 . If the existing water supply is not sufficient, either
tap the line inside the meter where sufficient water ' '�
supply may be obtained, or make arrangements with the
local water company to tap a water main. If it is '
necessary to tap a water main, pay tapping fees and
meter charges .
D. When temporary piping is no longer required, remove it '
November 25 , 1998 01500-2 98088 . 00 '
L
i . .
�
' E. Provide drinking water in approved sanitary containers and
' � disposable cups for workmen.
� 1 . 06 � SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures
' � for use by workmen.
B. Construct facilities to be weathertight, and in compliance
' i with applicable legal and health requirements .
C. Keep facilities clean and sanitary and maintain facilities
� until construction is completed.
' D. If temporary facilities are placed over manholes, use
flushing type fixtures .
' � E. Do not allow workmeri to use Owner' s facilities .
i . 07 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
' A. Desi nated existin stairs ma be use
g g y d by construction
I personnel . Coordinate with the Hospital ' s Representative .
' ' B. ' Designated existing and permanent elevators may be used by
I I construction personnel and for transporting lightweight
' i � materials . Do not exceed 80% of the elevator' s rated load
� ca acit Prov.ide
i p y. protective coverings for finish
I surfaces of cars and entrances .
�
� ' C. Do not use existing elevators for construction purposes
unless the Hospital ' s Representative grants permission.
' 1�. 08 ENCLOSURES
� A. Provide temporary insulated weathertight closures of
' openings in exterior surfaces to provide acceptable
, working conditions and protection for materials, to allow
for temporary heating, and to prevent entry of
' unauthorized persons . Provide doors with self-locking
;
hardware and locks .
B. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to
' ' , separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent
penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied
areas, and to prevent damage to existing areas and
' equipment .
1 . Construction: Frame and cover with sheet materials
' � with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections
with existing surfaces .
2 . Sound rating: STC 35 in accordance with ASTM E90 .
'
� ;
' November 25 , 1998 01500-3 98088 . 00
i
�
3'. Fire rating: Flame Spread Rating of 25 in accordance '
with ASTM E84 .
4 . Finish: Paint surfaces exposed to view in Owner '
occupied areas to match surrounding.
1 . 09 BARRIERS '
A. Provide as required to prevent public entry to
construction areas and to protect existing facilities and '
adjacent properties from damage from construction
operations .
1 . 10 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION '
A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish, and
periodically dispose of off-site. '
B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work.
Maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during ,
finishing operations . The barriers are to be constructed
to resist the passage of dust .
C . Also see Section 01710 for further cleaning instructions . ,
1 . 11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Provide a weathertight building or an office trailer with: '
1 . Lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and '
ventilating equipment, and equipped with furniture.
2 . Job telephone as specified above. '
3 . Space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to
accommodate a minimum of 12 persons .
4 . Work table large enough to accommodate working '
drawings .
5 . Files, drawings, racks, and shelves to maintain order '
and neatness .
B. Provide janitor service for the office. ',
C. Provide lighted, weathertight storage sheds, for tools, �
materials and equipment with adequate space for orgar�ized '
storage and access . Provide heat and ventilation for ' �'�
products requiring controlled conditions .
D. Locate these facilities to preclude interference with work '
and as directed.
1
November 25 , 1998 01500-4 98088 . 00 ,
I
'
' � 1 . 12 PARKING FACILITIES
' A. Parking space at the site is limited.
B. Make arrangements with the Hospital ' s Representative to
' secure parking spaces for workmen. Do not park in spaces
' other than those designated by the Contractor.
C . If designated area is insufficient, contractors and
' workmen will be required to make their own arrangements
for parking.
1 . 13 REMOVAL
, A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services and
construction prior to Substantial Completion.
' B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of
temporary facilities . Remove underground installations to
' a depth of two feet and gr`ade as indicated or directed by
, the Architect .
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to
' i � specified, or to original condition.
� �
' PARTi2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
� PART 3 EXECUTION
I
' Not Used
' END OF SECTION
r
,
�
'
�
' I
Novelber 25 , 1998 01500-5 98088 . 00
1 ' ,
I I
1 �
' SECTION 01630
' PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 GENER.AL
I1 . 01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
�
' A. ' Contractor: s option in selection of products .
B. Products list .
' i C. Requests for substitution of products .
�
1I . 02 OWNER & ARCHITECT' S RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT
� A. Under terms set forth below, reasonable requests for
substitution will be considered. If, in the opinion of
' Owner and Architect, substitute items are equal to the
� products specified and are satisfactory for incorporation
in the Work, then the substitute items will be approved.
' 1 . 03 CONTRACTOR' S OPTIONS
I
� A. � Products Specified by Reference Standards or by
' ' � Description Only: Select a product meeting those standards
or description.
' B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers
with an "or equal" statement: submit a request for
� substitution for a manufacturer not specifically named.
� C. Products Specified by Naming Several Manufacturers : Select
products of a named manufacturer meeting specifications .
' , D. Products Specified by Manufacturer, Brand Name, Type or
' Catalog Number: Specification is for purpose of
establishing standards of quality, and style desired.
' Specification does indicate Owner and Architect' s
preference, but reasonable requests for substitution may I
i i
be submitted. .
, E. Product Specified by Manufacturer, Brand Name, Type or
Catalog Number and Followed by Words "No Substitutions : "
Provide Products Specified" .
, 1 . 04 LIMITATIONS OF SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Submit requests for substitutions prior to issuance of
' subcontracts or purchase orders . Subsequent request will
be considered only in case of product unavailability or
, other conditions beyond control of Contractor. �
'
i
November 25 , 1998 01630-1 98088 . 00
' �
I
1
B. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on �
shop drawings or product data submittals without separate
formal request, when requested directly by a subcontractor '
or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial
revision of Contract Documents .
C . Do not order or install substitute products without �
written acceptance.
D. Only one request for substitution for each product will be ,
considered. When substitution is not accepted, provide
specified product .
1 . 05 CONTRACTOR' S REPRESENTATION '
A. In making request for substitution, Contractor represents :
1 . He has personally investigated proposed product or '
method, and determined that it is equal or superior in
all respects to that specified or the credit or ,
addition offered represents a fair or superior
difference in value.
2 . He will provide the same warranty for substituted �
product as for product or method specified.
3 . He will coordinate installation of accepted '
substitution into Work, making such changes° as may be
required for Work to be complete in all respects .
4 . He waives all claims for additional costs related to �
substitution which consequently become apparent .
5 . Cost data is complete and includes all related cost '
under his Contract, but excludes the Architect' s
design.
1 . 06 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS ,
A. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with '
complete data, with drawings and samples as appropriate,
including: -
1 . Comparison of the qualities of the proposed '
substitution with that specified. _
2 . Changes required in other elements of the Work because 1
of the substitution.
3 . Effect on the construction schedule . '
4 . Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the
' product specified.
'
November 25 , 1998 01630-2 98088 . 00 ,
I
!
�
�
' 5 . Any required license fees or royalties .
6 . Availability of maintenance service, and source of
' replacement materials .
�
B. Identify product by Specifications section number.
' Provide the manufacturer' s name and address, trade name of
' product, and model or catalog number. List fabricators
and suppliers as appropriate.
' C. Attach product data as specified in Section 01340 .
i D. List similar projects using the proposed product, dates of
' i installation, and names of Architect and the Owner.
E: The Owner and Architect will review requests for
' substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify
Contractor, in writing, of the decision to accept or
� reject the requested substitution. Failure to object to a
listed item shall not constitute a waiver of requirements
, i of Contract Documents .
1 . 07 PRODUCTS LIST
' I
A. For products specified only by reference standards (ASTM,
i � etc . ) , include with listing of each product :
' 1 . Name and address of manufacturer.
� 2 . Trade name.
� 3 . Model or catalog designation.
1 4 . Manufacturer' s data to include performance and test
data and- reference standards .
i ,
' B! For products which will affect structure or be affected by
structural considerations, include drawings, diagrams,
� illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures,
' test data, and reference standards .
' 1 I
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
j
i Not Used.
, ' PART� 3 EXECUTION
� Not Used.
Ii END OF SECTION
' � ,
i
Noveimber 25 , 1998 01630-3 98088 . 00
, .
1 I
� �
' SECTION 01700
' ; CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
I
I
PART 1 GENER.AL
' 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
I
� A.I Definitions : Closeout is hereby defined to include
' general requirements near the end of Contract time, in
� preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal
termination of contract, occupancy by Owner and similar
' actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific
' requirements for individual units of work are specified in
sections of Divisions 2 through 16 . Time of closeout is
' directly related to "Substantial Completion" and;
therefore, may be either a single time period for entire
� work or a series of time periods for individual parts of
, � , the work which have been certified as substantially
� ; complete at different dates . That time variation (if any)
shall be applicable to other provisions of this section,
regardless of whether resulting from "phased completion"
' � originally specified by the contract documents or
subsequently agreed upon by Owner and Contractor.
' 1 . 02 � PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. General : Prior to requesting Architect' s inspection for
' certification of substantial completion, as required by
, I General Conditions (for either the entire work or portions
� thereof) , complete the following and list known exceptions
in request :
' 1 . In progress payment request coincident with or first
following date claimed, show either portion of work
' , claimed as "substantially completed" , or list
' incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons
for being incomplete . Include supporting documentation
' for completion as indicated elsewhere in these contract
documents .
� i 2 . Submit statement showing accounting of changes to the
� Contract Sum.
3 . Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover
' requirements .
i
� 4 . Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance
� bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and
isimilar documents .
�
1 ; �
� �
� November 25 , 1998 01700-1 98088 . 00
i I
'
5 . Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner' s full and �
unrestricted use of the work and access to services and
utilities, including (where required) occupancy ,
permits, operating certificates, and similar releases .
6 . Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials,
and similar physical items to Owner. ,
7 . Make final changeover of locks and transmit keys to
Owner, and advise Owner' s personnel to changeover in '
security provisions .
8 . Complete start-up testing of systems, and instructions '
of Owner' s operating/maintenance personnel .
Discontinue (or change over) and remove from project
site temporary facilities and services, along with
construction tools and facilities, mockups, and similar '
elements .
9 . The Contractor is responsible for making all punch '
lists and execution of same prior to his request for
substantial completion.
B. Inspection Procedures : Upon receipt of Contractor' s �
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or I
advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfi�led. �
Following initial inspection, Architect will either '
prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion, or advise
Contractor of work which must be performed prior to
issuance of Certificate; and repeat inspection when '
' requested and assured that work has been substant_ally
completed. Results of completed inspection will form
initial "punchlist" for final acceptance.
1 . 03 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE , ��
A. General : Prior to requesting Architect' s final inspection ,
for certification of final acceptance and final payment,
as required by General Conditions, complete the following
and list known exceptions (if any) in request : �
1 . Submit final payment request with final releases and
supporting documentation not previously submitted and
accepted. Include certificates of insurance for '
products and completed operations where required.
2 . Submit updated final statement, accounting for '
additional (final) changes to the Contract Sum.
3 . Submit certified copy of Architect' s final punchlist of ,
itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating
that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved
for acceptance, endorsed and dated by Architect .
'
November 25 , 1998 01700-2 98088 . 00 '
' I -.. ; , ,
�
' 4 . Submit final meter readings for utilities, measured
I ' record of stored fuel, and similar data as of time of
' substantial completion or when Owner took possession of
and responsibility for corresponding elements of the
' work.
' 5 . Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance
agreements, final certifications and similar documents .
' 6 . Complete final cleaning up requirements, including
touch-up of marred surfaces .
' 7 . Submit consent of surety.
' 8 . Submit final liquidated damages settlement statement,
� , acceptable to Owner.
, 9 . Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage
, �
� complying with lnsurance requirements until Owner takes
, final acceptance (i .e. final payment) , or sooner by
� mutual agreement .
B. Reinspection Procedures : Upon receipt of Contractor' s
� � notice that work has been completed, includin unchlist
, , J P
items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting
� incomplete item delays because of acceptable
' , circumstances, Architect will reinspect work. Upon
' completion of reinspection, Architect will either prepare
certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of
1 , work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as
required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure
will be repeated.
' i . 04 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
I A. General : Specific requirements for record documents are
' indicated in individual sections of the specifications .
Do not use record documents for construction purposes;
protect from deterioration or loss in a secure, fire
resistive location; provide access to record documents for
' , Architect' s reference during normal working hours .
� B. Maintenance Manuals : Organize maintenance-and-operating
manual information into suitable sets of manageable size,
, and bind into individual binders properly identified and
indexed (thumbtabbed) ; examples : Elevators, Finish Floor,
� � Maintenance, Lawn and Plant Maintenance, Roof Maintenance .
Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing,
warranties, wiring diagrams, recommended "turnaround"
cycles, inspection procedures, shop drawings, product
' da�ta, and similar applicable information. Bind each
� manual of each set into a heavy duty 2 " , three ring vinyl
� covered binder, and include pocket folders for folded
' I .
November 25 , 1998 01700-3 98088 . 00
' I
i �
i ,
` sheet information. Mark identification on both front and '
spine of each binder.
C . The Contractor and his mechanical and electrical '
subcontractors will each keep one set of drawings in the
job office and make a daily record of all changes in '
location of equipment, partitions, materials, etc . , as
approved by Architect. At the conclusion of the job, the
Owner will furnish sepias to the Contractor and the
mechanical and electrical subcontractors who will '
, incorporate all changes on the sepias . This includes all
Change Order sketches issued by the Architect during the
progress of the Work. The revised sepias are to be turned '
over to the Owner at the conclusion of the project .
PART 2 PRODUCTS '
NOT APPLICABLE
'
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES '
' A. General Operating/Maintenance Instructions : Arrange for
each installer of work requiring continuing maintenance t
(by Owner) or operation, to meet with Owner' s personnel,
at project site, to provide basic instruction needecl for
proper operation and maintenance of entire work. Include �
instructions by manufacturer' s representatives SNhere
installers are not expert in the required procedures .
Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, '
spare parts and materials, lubricants, fuels,
identification system, control sequences, hazards,
cleaning and similar procedures and facilities . For
operational equipment, demonstrate start-up, shutdown, '
emergency operations, noise and vibration adjustments,
safety, economy/efficiency adjustments, and similar
operations . Review maintenance and operations in relation '
with applicable warranties , agreements to maintain bonds
and similar continuing commitments .
3 . 02 FINAL CLEANING '
A. General : Specific cleaning for specific units of work is
specified in sections of Divisions 2 through 16 . General �
cleaning during progress of work is specified in General
Conditions :
1 . Provide final cleaning of the work, at time indicated, '
consisting of cleaning each surface or unit of work to
normal "clean" condition expected for a first class
building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with ,
November 25 , 1998 01700-4 98088 . 00 '
i
' � I . .,
� I
� manufacturer' s instructions for cleaning operations .
The following are examples, but not by way of
' � limitation, of cleaning levels required:
I
� a. Remove labels which are not required as permanent
labels .
' � b. Clean glazed materials, including mirrors and
;
� ' window/door glass, to a polished condition,
' removing substances, which are noticeable as vision
obscuring materials . Replace broken glass .
, c . Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surface
; finishes, including metals, masonry, stone,
' concrete, painted surfaces, plastics, tile, wood,
special coatings, and similar surfaces , to a dirt
� free condition, free of dust, stains, films and
similar noticeable distracting substances . Except
j as otherwise indicated; avoid disturbance of
, i natural weathering of exterior surfaces . Restore
� reflective surfaces to original reflective
j condition.
' I
� d. Wipe surfaces of inechanical and electrical
, equipment clean, including elevator equipment and
similar equipment in addition to that specified in
' � Divisions 15 and 16; remove excess lubrication and
other substances .
, e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access
spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches,
� equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar
' spaces .
f . Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom
clean.
' I I g. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft
surfaces .
' h. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition,
� free of stains including those resulting from water
' exposure .
' i . Clean food service equipment to a condition of
sanitation ready and acceptable for intended food
' service use.
I � j . Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function
' with full efficiency.
k. Clean pro�ect site (yard and grounds) including
i I landscape, development areas, of litter and foreign
� � substances . Sweep paved areas to a broom clean
i
I
, November 25 , 1998 01700-5 98088 . 00
I
1
condition; remove stains, petrochemical spills and '
other foreign deposits . Rake grounds which are
neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even ,
textured surface .
B. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or '
requested by Architect, remove protection devices and
facilities which were installed during course of the work
to protect previously completed work during remainder of
construction period. ,
C . Compliances : Comply with governing regulations for
cleaning operations . Do not burn waste materials at site, ,
or bury debris or excess materials on Owner' s propert��, or
discharge volatile or other harmful or dangerous materials
into drainage systems; remove waste materials from site
and dispose of in a lawful manner. �
1 . Where extra materials of value remaining after
completion of associates ' work have become Owner' s '
property, dispose of these to Owner ' s best advantage as
directed.
3 . 03 CONTINUING INSPECTIONS '
A. General : Except as otherwise required by specific
warranties, agreements to maintain, workmanship/ ,
maintenance bonds, and similar continuing commitments,
comply with Owner' s request to participate in inspections
at end of each time period of such continuing commitments . '
- Participate in general inspection of the work
approximately one year beyond date (s) of substantial
completion. ,
END OF SECTION ,
'
'
'
'
�
November 25 , 1998 01700-6 98058 . 00 '
I - -
�
� SECTION 01710
�
' GENERAL CLEANING & FINAL FINISH CLEANING
.�
PART 1 GENERAL
� ' 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED
� A. Maintain premises free from accumulations of waste,
debris, and rubbish caused by operations .
; B. At completion of work remove waste materials, rubbish,
' tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials . Clean
, all sight-exposed surfaces . Leave project clean and ready
! for construction work to follow, and ready for occupancy,
' as applicable.
' C.� Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with
local ordinances and anti-pollution laws .
' � � 1 . Do not burn or bur rub i
y b sh and waste materials on
iproject site.
' 2 . Do not dispose of volatile waste such as mineral
spirits, oil, and paint thinner in storm drains or
' � sanitary sewers .
� D. Hazard Control :
i
�, ' 1 . Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and
remove from premises daily.
' 2 . Prevent accumulation of waste, which might cause
hazardous conditions .
' 3 . Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile and
, noxious substances .
' PART 2 PRODUCT
I
i . 01 MATERIAL
' A. See only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of
surface to be cleaned.
' B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by
cleaning material manufacturer.
' �
' '
November 25 , 1998 01710-1 98088 . 00
' ;
I ; '
�
PART 3 EXECUTION '
3 . 01 DURING CONSTRUCTION '
A. Clean building and grounds and keep free from
accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.
B. At reasonable intervals during progress of work, but in no ,
case less than once a week, clean site and public
properties and dispose of waste materials, debris and '
rubbish.
C . Provide on-site containers for collection of waste
materials, debris, and rubbish. Type of container _s at '
Contractor' s option. Containers with adequate capaci=y to
accommodate anticipated needs . If containers do not have
adequate capacity, increase intervals of waste removal '
until adequate capacity is provided.
D. Vacuum interior building areas, where work is performed '
prior to painting and other finish work. Continue vacuum
cleaning on an as-needed basis until building is read�r for
occupancy.
E. Minimize handling of materials . Do not drop or throw '
materials from heights .
F. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other '
contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall
on wet, new painted surfaces . '
3 . 02 FINAL CLEANING
A. Employ experienced workmen or professional cleaners for '
final cleaning.
B. In preparation for substantial completion and occupancy, '
conduct inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior
surfaces, and of concealed open spaces .
C . Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, ,
and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior
and exterior finished surfaces of this work. Poli�h so
designated surfaces . Remove debris, rubbish, dirt, etc . , ,
from open concealed spaces, chases and above ceilings .
D. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified '
finish and to match adjacent surfaces .
E. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean surfaces of
grounds . '
F . Remove ice and snow from access to building.
,
November 25 , 1998 01710-2 98088 . 00 '
I
� r .
�
� G. Replace air-conditioning filters, when air-conditianing
and heating unit� are operated during cans�ruction
�
END OF SECTION
� `
'
�
�
,
�
,
�
�
�
,
i
}
1 �
1
1
� Novembez 25, 1998 Q1710-3 g8�gg . Q�}
I
I
� �
'
' SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
'
PART 1 GENER.AL
, �1 . 01 DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE
' A. . Maintain copies of the following documents for record
purposes :
1 . Contract drawings .
� , � 2 . Specifications (Project Manual) .
' 3 . Addenda. '
4 . Reviewed shop drawings .
, 5 . Change orders .
6 . Other documents which modify original contract .
' 7 . Field test records .
I
�, 8 . Manufacturer' s certificates .
' �
9 . Fixed equipment manuals .
' 10 . Revisions .
� B. Store record documents in a file in the field office,
' apart from the documents used for construction. Provide
files, racks and secure storage for Record Documents .
' C. Label and file Record Documents . in sequence with section
I number listings in Table of Contents of this Project
Manual . Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in the lower
right hand corner in neat, large printed letters .
' D. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible
condition.
, E. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes .
F. Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection
� ' by the Owner' s Representative.
1 . 02 RECORDING
' A. General Contractor shall transfer all changes on sepia
prints . All work shall be neat and legible .
' �
�
, Nlovember 25 , 1998 01720-1 98088 . 00
t
i I
i
,
1 . Use separate colors for recording information about ,
each major system.
2 . Establish a code to denote the color for each trad� and /
indicate by schedule placed on the front sheet o�: the
Record Drawings .
B . Marking Drawings : '
1 . Keep markings current . '
2 . Do not conceal work until required information has been
recorded.
' 3 . Neatly and legibly mark Record Set to indicate a��tual '
construction, including:
a. Depth of footings in relation to first floor level . '
b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground
utilities, valves, etc . referenced to building '
� exterior lines . Show direction of flow of pipP and
depth of piping underground.
c . Field changes of dimensions and details . �
d. Changes made by Contract Modifications . �
'
e. Details not on original Contract Drawings .
' C . Marking Project Manual : '
� 1 . Neatly and legibly mark Project Manual with black,
permanent ink: '
a. On appropriate pages, record references to Addenda,
Amendments, Modifications, Change Orders, and Field '
Orders .
b. On appropriate pages, enter trade name,
manufacturer, catalog number, and name of supplier '
of each product and item actually installecl, if
different from that specified.
c . Other items installed but not originally speci:Eied. '
D. Maintain documents listed in Paragraph 1 . 01A, above . '
1 . 03 SUBMITTAL
A. At Contract Closeout, deliver Record Documents to Owner' s '
Representative.
,
November 25 , 1998 01720-2 � 98088 . 00 '
� _
,
1 ��
�
' B. Submit Record Documents under cover of a transmittal
letter containing:
I
' i 1 . Date.
2 . Project title and number. "
' ' , 3 . Contractor' s and subcontractor' s names and addresses .
� 4 . Title and number of each Record Document .
' 5 . Certificati
on that each document submitted is complete
and accurate .
' '
6 . Signature of Contractor or his authorized
representative .
'
PART 2 PRODUCT
, i Not Used.
i
' PART 3 EXECUTION
� Not Used.
, j
END OF SECTION
i
' � i
�
�
1 I
�
'
I ;
� �
�
'
'
' I �
I
November 25 , 1998 01720-3 98088 . 00
' i �
� I
I
, SECTION 01730
I OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
� I
PART 1 GENERAL
I1 . 01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
� I
' ' A. Submittals - Section 01300 .
B. Contract Closeout - Section 01700 .
' C. Project Record Documents - Section 01720 .
I
i
D. Warranties and Bonds - Section 01740 .
' E. Warranties - Division 15 and 16 .
1�. 0 2 � GENER.AL
� ' �
A. Compile product data and related information appropriate
' for Owner' s maintenance and operation of products
' furnished under the Contract .
I ,
; B. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in
, I � this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections
� of Specifications .
, i C . Instruct Owner' s personnel in the maintenance of products
�
and in the operation of equipment and systems .
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE
' A. Have data prepared by personnel :
' , 1 . Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of
; the described products .
' � 2 . Completely familiar with requirements of this Section.
3 . Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to
! communicate essential data.
,I � �
4 . Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required
I drawings .
' 1iO4 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
I A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for
' use by Owner' s personnel . Submit three (3 ) copies of
manual to Owner' s Representative.
' I
� I
i
November 25, 1998 01730-1 98088 . 00
1 I
� I
�
1
B. Format : �
1 . Size: 8-1/2 " x 11" . �
2 . Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages .
3 . Text : Manufacturer' s printed data, or neatly '
typewritten.
C . Drawings : '
1 . Provide reinforced punched binder tab; bind in with i
text. I
2 . Fold larger drawings to the size of the text a es . '
P g
D. Product Literature : '
1 . Provide flyleaf for each separate product, or each
piece of operating equipment . '
2 . Provide typed description of product, and major
component parts of equipment . '
3 . Provide indexed tabs .
E. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title '
"OPER.ATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS . "
F . List: '
1 . Title of Project .
2 . Identity of separate structure as applicable . '
3 . Identity of general subject matter covered in manual . I
G. Binders : ' �
1 . Commercial quality three ring binders with durable and �
cleanable plastic covers .
2 . When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into
related consistent groupings . ,
1 . 05 CONTENT OF MANUAL:
A. Prepare a neatly typewritten� table of contents for each '
volume, arranged in a systematic order, to include:
1 . Contractor, name of responsible principal, address , and '
telephone number.
� '
November 25 , 1998 01730-2 98088 . 00 ,
�
� ' -
I
i
' 2 . A list of each product required to be included, indexed
� to the content of the volume.
' i 3 . List, with each product, the name, address, and
telephone number of :
� i a. Subcontractor or installer.
i
� b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
1 � c . Identify the area of responsibility of each.
� d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement .
' 4 . Identify each product by product name and other
� I identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents .
' II
B. Product Data:
, � 1 . Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the
' specific product.
i 2 . Annotate each sheet to:
� ' i
, a. Clearly identify the specific product or part
installed.
1 b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the
� installation.
I
� i � c . Delete references to inapplicable information.
�
� C. �' Drawings :
' 1 . Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to
� clearly illustrate:
' � �, a. Relations of component parts of equipment and
systems .
� b. Control and flow diagrams .
' 2 . Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record
� � Documents to assure correct illustration of completed
�
installation.
' 3 . Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance
�
,, drawings .
' D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for
� the particular installation:
' � 1 . Organize in a consistent format under separate headings
� , for different procedures .
�
November 25 , 1998 01730-3 98088 . 00 '
� i
�
2 . Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each �
procedure . ,
E. Copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued.
'
F . Provide information sheet for Owner' s personnel giving:
1 . Proper procedures in the event of failure . �
2 . Instances which might affect the validity of warranties ,
or bonds .
a. If a system shall be placed in operation prior to '
substantial completion, the warranty shall begin at
the time the system is placed in operation as
directed by the Owner' s Representative .
1 . 06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES I
A. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. '
B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials,
and finishes :
1 . Manufacturer' s data, giving full information on �
products .
a. Catalog number, size, composition. �
b. Color and texture designations . �
c . Information required for reordering specially
manufactured products .
2 . Instructions for care and maintenance. �
3 . Manufacturer' s recommendation for types of cleaning '
agents and methods .
4 . Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are �
detrimental to the product .
5 . Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C . Content, for moisture protection and weather e}:posed '
products :
1 . Manufacturer' s data, giving full information on ,
products .
2 . Applicable standards . �
3 . Chemical composition.
,
November 25, 1998 01730-4 98088 . 00 �
I
'
' 4 . Details of installation.
� D. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair.
E. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The
respective sections of Specifications .
� F . Provide complete information for products of applicable
sections of the Project Manual including, but not limited
' to, the following types of materials :
1 . Metal fabrications .
t2 . Joint sealants .
( 3 . Doors and frames .
� 4 . Windows .
� 5 . Hardware .
6 . Glazing.
� i 7 . All finish materials .
I8 . Toilet accessories . ,
t1 . 07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
, � A. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form.
tB. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as
appropriate:
� 1 . Description of unit and component parts .
1 2 . Function, normal operating characteristics, and
limiting conditions .
� 3 . Performance curves, engineering data, and tests .
4 . Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all
replaceable parts .
� C . Operating Procedures :
� 1 . Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating
instructions .
2 . Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency
� instructions .
3 . Summer and winter operating instructions .
�
' Novemier 25 , 1998 01730-5 98088 . 00 I
i
�
I
'
T 4 . Special operating instructions . a
D. Maintenance Procedures : '
1 . Routine operations .
2 . Guide to "troubleshooting. " ��
3 . Disassembly, repair, and reas•sembly.
4 . Alignment, adjusting, and checking. �
E. Servicing and lubrication schedule. '
1 . List of lubricants required.
F . Manufacturer' s printed operating and mainte:nance �
instructions .
G. Description of sequence of operation by control �
manufacturer.
H. � Original manufacturer' s parts list, illustrations, �
assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance .
1 . Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
2 . Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts . �
I . As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. �
J. Each contractor' s coordination drawings .
1 . As-installed color coded piping diagrams . '
K. List of original manufacturer' s spare parts,
manufacturer' s current prices, and recommended quantities ,
to be maintained in storage .
L. Other data as required under pertinent sections of �
Specifications .
M. Content, for each electrical and electronic system, as
appropriate : �
1 . Description of system and component parts .
a. Function, normal operating characteristics and �
limiting conditions .
b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests . '
c . Complete nomenclature and commercial number of
replaceable parts . �
November 25 , 1998 01730-6 98088 . 00 '
�
I
� I
� � ; _
� i -
2 . Circuit directories of
� panelboards .
I 3 . Electrical service .
� �
� 4 . Controls .
5 . Communications .
I
� , 6 . As-installed color coded wiring diagrams .
' 7 . Operating schedules :
� a. Routine and norma.l operating instructions
� ! � b. Sequences required.
� I
I c . Special operating instructions .
1 ,
� 8 . Mainten�nce procedures :
' I
a. Routine operations .
�! b. Guide to "troubleshooting. "
� �
� � c . Disassembly, repair, and reassembly.
� , � d. Adjustment and checking.
9 . Manufacturer' s printed operating and maintenance
� ; instructions .
j10 . List of original manufacturer' s spare parts,
� manufacturer' s current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
' I
11 . Other data as required under pertinent sections of
� � I Specifications .
i
I N. � Prepare and include additional data when the need for such
data becomes apparent during the instruction of Owner' s
� I � personnel .
; O. ' Additional requirements for operating and maintenance
', � � data: The respective sections of Specifications .
P. Provide complete information for products of applicable
� sections of the Project Manual including, but not limited
, , to, the following types of materials :
I
I 1 . Plumbing systems .
1 2 . Domestic water conditioners .
�
� 3 . Fire protection.
� �
I
Novelber 25 , 1998 01730-7 98088 . 00
' � �
�
4 . Power or heat generation. �
5 . Air distribution. �
6 . Controls and instrumentation.
7 . Motors . �
8 . Power generation and transmission.
9 . Service and distribution. '
10 . Lighting.
11 . Communications .
�
12 . Chemical Treatment . �
1 . 08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats '
� and outlines of contents prior to start of work.
B. Submit one copy of completed data in final form prior to i
final inspection or acceptance. =
C . Submit specified number of copies of approved data in �
final form after final inspection or acceptance .
1 . 09 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER' S PERSONNEL �
A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct
Owner' s designated operating and maintenance personnel in
the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, ��
equipment, and systems .
B. For each item, record the following information: �
1 . Time and date of instruction.
2 . Name (s) of personnel providing instruction. �
3 . Name (s) of personnel receiving instruction. �
4 . Items covered during instructions . -
C . Use operating and maintenance manual to constitute the �
basis of instruction.
1 . Review contents of manual with personnel in full d�=tail
to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. �
�
November 25 , 1998 01730-8 98088 . 00 '
'
� PART 2 PRODUCTS
� Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
, Not Used.
, END OF SECTION
�
�
' �
� I
' I '
i
1 �
�
1 '
1
�
1 '
�
1
1 �
' November 25 , 1998 01730-9 98088 . 00
I
i
�
, I -
�
' I
SECTION 01740
YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE
'
� PART 1 GENERAL
i1 . 01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
� A. Submittals - Section 01300 .
B. Project Record Documents - Section 01720 .
1 C. Operating and Maintenance Data - Section 01730 .
1 . 02 GENERAL
� A. All vendors and licensors are to represent that all
I computer licensed software will support the year 2000
format .
� B. All date related calculations will produce correct results
i for multi-century scenarios and after the year 2000 . This
' � includes age calculations, duration calculations,
I scheduling calculations, etc .
' � C. All manipulations and comparisons of date related data
produce the desired results for all valid dates within the
scope of the application. This includes : current date,
( pre-year 2000 date, rollover from 1999 to 2000, year 2000
� i leap year, post-year 2000 date, calculations including
imore than one century.
1'. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
A. All related software to be produced or altered by
� personnel trained and experienced in maintenance and
operation of software .
1I. 04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
� A. All appropriate shop drawing submittals to relate to and
explain that software complies with this requirement .
�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
� Not Used.
' PART 3 EXECUTION
i Not Used.
' � END OF SECTION
I
Novemf�ber 25 , 1998 01740-1 98088 . 00
' i j
� �
' �
i
� I I
�
' SECTION 03300
i
� � I CONCRETE
�,
IART 1 GENERAL
� 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED
' � A. Provide concrete indicated on the drawings, described in
these specifications, or otherwise required for proper
completion of the work. Refer to the drawings to determine
i the location and types of concrete used.
I � 1 . 02 � RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
�
A. Section 01300 - Submittals
� I
1 . 03 � REFERENCES
' ; A.� ACI 214 - Recommendations
�
I B.� ACI 301 - Specifications for StructuralConcrete Buildings .
' ; C.' ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Placement .
� ; D. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete .
� E.i ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting.
� �
' F . ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting.
� G. ACI 308 - Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete.
i
! H. ACI 309 - Recommended Practice for Consolidation of
� � Concrete.
i I . ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
' i Concrete.
• ' J. ASTM C31 - Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete
� Compressive and Flexural Strength Test Specimens in the
' Field.
I K. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates .
� � L. ASTM C39 - Standard Method of Test for Compressive
� Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders .
� M. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete.
' �
November 25 , 1998 03300-1 98088 . 00
' � I
�
� �
N. ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, �
and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete .
O. ASTM C143 - Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland ',
Cement Concrete .
P. ASTM C150 - Standard Specifications for Portland Cement . ,
Q. ASTM C172 - Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete .
R. ASTM C173 - Standard Method of Test for Air Content of �
Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
S . ASTM C230 - Standard Specifications for Flow Table or Use ,
in Test of Hydraulic Cement .
T. ASTM C260 - Standard Specifications for Air - Entraining �
, Admixtures for Concrete.
U. ASTM C309 - Specifications for Liquid Membrane - Forming '
Compounds for Curing Concrete.
V. ASTM C494 - Standard Specifications for Chemical �
Admixtures for Concrete.
W. ASTM C618 - Standard Specifications for Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement . �
1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordinate and schedule in a timely manner with the �
Owner' s Testing and Inspection Agency the following
quality control items : �
1 . Examine concrete in tr
uck to verify that concrete
appears properly mixed.
2 . Perform a slump test for each concrete load. Record if �
water or admixtures are added to the concrete at the
job site . Perform additional slump tests after job site '
adjustments .
3 . Concrete - Mold four specimens per set for compressive �
strength testing one set each 75 cubic yards placed.
For each set molded record:
a. Slump �
b. Air content
c . Unit weight i
d. Temperature, ambient and concrete �
November 25 , 1998 03300-2 98088 . 00 '
� , .
� e. Location of placement
� f . Any pertinent information addition of water,
addition of admixtures, etc .
� Perform one 7-day and three 28-day compressive strength
� tests . (Use one as a spare to be broken as directed by
the Structural Engineer if compressive strengths do not
appear adequate from the first two 28-day tests . )
, 4 . Report in writing, as directed by the
Architect/Structural Engineer, on the same day that
test are performed. Reports of compressive strength
� tests shall contain the project identification name and
number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing agency, concrete design compressive strength,
� location of concrete placement in structure, concrete
� mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking
istrength and type of break.
, ( B. The ready-mixed concrete plant shall be certified for
j conformance with the requirements of the National Ready
� Mix Concrete Association.
' 1�. 05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
I
� ; A. Establish concrete mix design proportions per ACI 318,
� Chapter 4 .
' B. Submit three copies of the concrete mix designs . Include
� , the following:
1 . Type and quantities of materials
1 2 . Slump
�
1 3 . Air content
�
4 . Fresh unit weight
' ' 5 . Aggregates sieve analysis
� 6 . Design compressive strength
� 7 . Location of placement in structure
� 8 . Method of placement
9 . Seven day and 28-day compressive strengths
�
�
� November 25 , 1998 03300-3 98088 . 00
I I
i
' I
i
C. The concrete supplier shall submit certificates tha� the i
materials used meet applicable ASTM Specifications . Mix
designs not conforming to the above will be rejected. �
Payment for the concrete mix design will be by the
supplier.
1 . 0 6 SLLTMP �
A. Design concrete with a slump of five inches maximum.
B. If a slump greater than 5 " is desired it shall be achieved ,
with a high range water reducer. Design the concrete mix
with a high range water reducer slump of two and one-half
inches plus or minus one and one-half inches . The maximum �
slump after high range water reducers are added shall be
eight inches .
1 . 07 FRESH UNIT WEIGHT � ,
A. Provide normal weight concrete with a fresh unit weight of �
140 to 152 pcf .
1 . 08 AIR CONTENT
A. No air content is required in concrete placed below the ,
design frost line.
B. Provide air content of five percent plus or minus one and �
one-half percent for normal weight concrete with required
compressive strength less than 5000 psi . �
C. Provide air content of three percent plus or minus on� and
one-half percent for normal weight concrete with required
compressive strength equal to or greater than 5000 psi . �
PART 2 PRODUCTS �
, 2 . 01 MATERIALS
,
A. Materials designated by specific manufacturer s trade '
names are approved, subject to compliance with the quality
, and performance indicated by the manufacturer.
Instructions and specifications, published by the
� manufacturer of such materials are included in and are a �
part of these specifications . Upon request, provide a
certificate from manufacturer or supplier that materials �
designated by reference to ASTM and ACI standards meet the
requirements of these agencies of latest edition. ��
2 . 02 CONCRETE STRENGTH �
A. Provide concrete strengths indicated on the drawings .
�
November 25 , 1998 03300-4 98088 . 00 �
� ' '
�
� 2i. 03 CEMENT
i
; A. � Provide Type I portland cement per ASTM C150, unless noted
� � otherwise. Use one brand only.
2 . 04 AGGREGATE
� � A. Provide fine aggregate in accordance with ASTM C33 .
Provide coarse aggregate of gravel or crushed stone in
I accordance with ASTM C33 for normal weight concrete. Size
coarse aggregate in accordance with ACI 318 .
�
� B. Provide lightweight aggregate per ASTM C330 for concrete.
� � Do not blend lightweight aggregates with normal weight
� aggregates for structural lightweight concrete .
! �
�
� 2 . 05 WATER
� A. Provide potable water free of deleterious substances per
' ACI 318 .
2i. 06 AIR ENTR.AINING AGENT
, A. Provide air entraining agent per ASTM C260 .
� � '
2 . 07 � WATER REDUCER
� A. Provide water reducing agent per ASTM C494 . �
2,. 08 HIGH RANGE WATER REDUCER
� I
A. i Provide high range water reducers (superplasticizers) per
ASTM C494 .
� 2 . 09 CHLORIDE
� �
� A. �� Use no chlorides of any form in concrete.
1 '
2i. 10 CURING COMPOUND
� A. An acrylic cure compound with a minimum solid content of
� 20 percent may be used at the Contractor' s option per ASTM
�' 309 .
' I
2 . 11 � FLY ASH
' , A. Provide Type F fly ash with a loss on ignition of less
; I than 5 percent or Type C fly ash with a loss on ignition
� � of less than 1 percent per ASTM C618 .
�
�
i
� �
' j
I
Novemiber 25 , 1998 03300-5 98088 . 00
1 � I
'
PART 3 EXECUTION �
3 . 01 HIGH RANGE WATER REDUCERS
A. High range water reducers are to be added as recommended �
by the manufacturer. The slump of the concrete shall be
one to four inches at the time the high range taater ,
reducers are added. Do no permit fresh concrete
containing superplasticizers to come in contact with Fresh
concrete not containing superplasticizers . '
3 . 02 ADDITION OF WATER AT JOB SITE
A. Water may be added to the batch only if neither the �
maximum permissible water-cement ratio nor the ma:{imum
slump is exceeded.
3 . 03 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE i
A. Deposit concrete as near as practical to final position. �
Maximum free fall shall be six feet .
B. Do no flowing of concrete with vibrators .
C . Place floors and slabs per ACI 302 . �
D. Use no aluminum equipment in placing and finishing �
concrete .
E. Place thickened slabs for partitions integral with floor
slabs . �
F . Prepare place of deposit, mix, convey, place, and cure
concrete per ACI 301, ACI 304, and ACI 318 . Wet forms �
before placing concrete .
G. Prepare place deposit, mix, convey, place, and cure �
concrete containing fibrous reinforcement per ACI 544 .
3 . 04 TIME LIMIT
A. Deposit concrete within one and one half hours after ,
batching.
3 . 05 VIBRATION �
A. Consolidate concrete per ACI 301 and ACI 309 . ,
3 . 06 CURING COMPOUND
A. Cure concrete per ACI 308 . Keep the concrete surface '
moist. If an acrylic cure compound is used, apply per
manufacturer' s recommendations to surfaces of concrete not
protected for five days for formwork. Do not use curing �
November 25 , 1998 03300-6 98088 . 00 '
� i � �
I
� compound in areas to receive material that does not adhere
� to concrete cured with a curing compound unless the cure
' I compound is water soluble .
i
3� . 07 ENVIRONMENTAL PROVISIONS
, A. Perform cold weather concreting per ACI 306 . Perform hot
� weather concreting per ACI 305 . Protect concrete from
� � drying and excessive temperature for the first seven days .
� Protect fresh concrete from wind.
,
3 . 08 CUTTING CONCRETE
, � A. Obtain Architect or Structural Engineer' s written approval
� , prior to cutting concrete for installation of other work.
�
3� . 09 PATCHWORK AND REPAIRS
' ;
� A. Notify Architect or Structural Engineer of any defective
� � areas in concrete to be patched or repaired. Repair and
patch defective areas with non-shrink grout. Cut out
j defective areas over 2 inches in diameter to solid
concrete but not less than a depth of one inch. Make
� � edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
�
3 . 10I CONCRETE FINISHES
1 �
� A. Finish Concrete per ACI 301 . Finish concrete level within
� class A tolerance .
� i ,
' END OF SECTION
I
I
� � i
� I
' � ,
I
i �
, I
�
� � �
�
' i
i
,
, I I
I
November 25 , 1998 03300-7 98088 . 00
' �
� �
, I
' SECTION 03375
I
� CONCRETE SEALING
'
PART 1 GENER.AL
� 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION:
' A. Work included: Provide concrete sealing where called for
on the drawings, as specified herein. All floor slabs
left exposed in finished project are to be sealed.
� 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly
� trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who
are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work
' � of this Section.
1 . 03 PRODUCT HANDLING:
_ � A. Protect the materials of this Section before, during, and
� after installation, and protect the work and materials of
all other trades .
, B. In the event of damage, immediately make replacements and
repairs to the approval of the Architect and at no
' � additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
� 2 . 01 SEALER:
� A. Where concrete sealer is called for on the drawings or is
, specified herein, provide "Ashford Formula" manufactured
by Curecrete Chemical Company, P.O. Box 735 , Orem, Utah
j 84057 .
, I
PART 3 EXECUTION
' 3 . 01 SURFACE CONDITIONS :
' A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this
Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental
to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not i
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. '�
i '�
`- 1 ,
�
1 Noveniber 25 , 1998 03375-1 98088 . 00 I
�
� �
� � �
,�
` 3 . 02 INSTALLATION: ,
A. Preparation: �
1 . On freshly finished concrete surfaces, no additional
surface preparation will be required. �
2 . On areas where forms are recently removed, remove all �
form oil and breaking compound residue to assure
penetration of the product into the surface . �
3 . On existing concrete, vertical surfaces, and masonry
surfaces :
a. Sweep all areas to be treated, using a fine bristle '
broom, or hose off with water and let dry to remove
all surface dust and dirt . �
b. Free the surface from all contaminants which would
inhibit penetration of the product into the pores �
of the material to be treated.
c . Remove all curing, sealing, and coating agents by
use of chemical or mechanical means as required. �
d. If acid is used to remove surface coatings, flush
the surface with water sufficiently to remove all '
acid and acid residues .
4 . When applying near windows, mask the glass . �
5 . Avoid contact with plant life, glass, aluminum, and
other finished surfaces . Where contact occurs,
immediately wipe with a damp cloth or flush with water. �
6 . Avoid contact with asphaltic concrete.
B. Application: '
1 . On freshly finished surfaces, spray the product with a �
low pressure sprayer immediately following the
finishing operation.
a. To assure proper curing, apply the product to the �
entire surface as soon as the surface is firm
enough to walk on, and before checking and
temperature cracking begins . �
b. Keep the entire surface wet for 30 minutes by
spraying the dry spots immediately.
�
�
November 25 , 1998 03375-2 98088 . 00
'
� ' ; - . .
�
1 '
� c . As the product begins to dry into the surface and
I becomes slippery underfoot, lightly sprinkle the
' � ; surface with water to aid penetration and to bring
' alkali to the surface .
i
d. As the product again begins to dry into the surface
I� � and becomes slippery underfoot, flush the surface
� with water and squeegee the surface totally dry,
� � ; removing all excess product and alkali or other
1 I impurities brought to the surface.
�
2 . On broom finished surfaces, no flushing is required but
squeegee or broom the excess product from the surface
I ' ; �, after 30 to 40 minutes .
�
j 3 . On cured concrete surfaces, saturate the surface with
' � the specified product .
, a. If dr s ots a
i y p ppear, broom excess material onto the
' � dry spots or re-spray them immediately.
�
b. Keep the entire surface wet with the product for 30
i minutes .
i � �
� c . If, after 30 to 40 minutes, the majority of the
, product has been absorbed into the surface, broom
, ; ; or squeegee excess product from low spots and
puddles so it will be absorbed into the surface, or
remove such excess product from the surface.
' � , d. If, after 30 to 40 minutes, the majority of the
� product is still on the surface, wait until the
i surface becomes slippery underfoot and then flush
' the entire surface with clear water and squeegee
i completely dry. If no water is available, squeegee
i the excess product from the surface after 30
' ' minutes so that the surface is completely dry.
i I
� END OF SECTION
' i
, �
, I
' I
� �
I
�
� f
I
� Noveiber 25 , 1998 03375-3 98088 . 00
, -
' SECTION 05500
I ' MISCELLANEOUS METAL
PiART 1 GENER.AL
' 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED
, A. Work under this Section includes, but is not limited to
and should include all metal required to complete all
openings and supports for the project :
, 1 . Loose steel angles for reinforcing metal deck.
2 . Steel angle frames above ceilings to support mechanical
� systems and electrical systems .
3 . Steel framing for wall mounted television brackets .
' 4 . Steel bracket and gussets for supporting counter tops .
1 . 02 SUBMITTALS
� A. Submit all items to Structural Engineer in accordance with
Section 01300 .
' B. Mill Certification: Upon request, submit mill
certification that steel supplied meets requirements of
I � these specifications and referenced specifications above.
� C . Shop Drawings : Submit four copies of prints of each
drawing.
' 1 . Indicate profiles, sizes, locations, connections, and
method of attachment .
' 2 . Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding
symbols .
i , 1 . 03 TESTING AND INSPECTING
A. Owner will engage a Testing Laboratory to inspect and test
' miscellaneous steel work. In addition, Structural Engineer
may inspect infrequently. Inspections will be made by AWS
� Qualified Inspectors .
' ' B. Inspections and tests will include:
1 . Visual inspections of : welded connections; fit-up
' welded joints; welds, and bolted connections .
2 . Obser-vation of welding procedures .
� �
' November 25 , 1998 05500-1 98088 . 00
I I
I
�
,
3 . Inspectors may inspect fabricator' s shop to observe ,
work in progress .
1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. Qualifications of Fabricator: Approved by American
Institute of Steel Construction Quality Certification �
Program, Category II .
B. A Fabricator not approved may be acceptable to Structural �
Engineer provided he has tests made (and pays for such
tests) as set forth in Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory
Services . Approval or rejection will be at Owner' s ,
discretion and without recourse.
1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver items installed by others in sufficient time not '
to delay that work. Provide drawings and directions
required for proper installation. �
B. Handle and store materials to preclude damage.
C . Store materials to permit easy access . Keep steel off of ,
ground.
PART 2 PRODUCTS '
2 . 01 MATERIALS ,
A. Steel Sections - ASTM A36 .
B. Welding Materials : Comply with AWS Code. �
C . Primer: Fabricators standard rust resisting primer.
2 . 02 FABRICATING
,
A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. �
B. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent
surfaces . Each e�osed edge to small, uniform radius .
C . Supply components required for anchoring metal ,
fabrications .
2 . 03 FINISH - ,
A. Clean surfaces prior to finishing. �
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or
where field welding is required.
�
November 25 , 1998 05500-2 98088 . 00 '
' � . _ _, .
� C . Prime paint items scheduled with one smooth, uniform coat .
' PART 3 EXECUTION
' 3 . 01 PREPARATION
I, � � A. Obtain Structural Engineer' s approval before site cutting,
or making adjustments not scheduled.
, 3 . 02 INSTALLING �
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, and free
� from distortion and defects .
� B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1 . 1 and
' Section 05100 .
C . Attach steel angle counter brackets through legs of steel
' studs and drywall with toggle bolts . Coordinate with
Section 06410 for proper mounting height .
3 . 03 FABRICATIONS
, A. Workmanship:
' 1 . Clean all metal surfaces of mill scale, flake rust and
I � rust pitting.
I ' I 2 . Surfaces shall be well formed and finished to shape and
size with sharp lines and angles and smooth surfaces .
3 . Weld or rivet all permanent connections .
� 4 . Grind welds and flush rivets smooth on surfaces that
will be exposed.
' 5 . Thickness of inetal and details of assembly and supports
shall give ample strength and stiffness .
� 6 . Provide holes and connections for work of other trades .
i 7 . Conceal fastenings where practical .
, B. Castings :
I ' 1 . Casting shall be uniform quality, free from blowholes,
porosity, hard spots, shrinkage distortion or other
, defects .
' 2 . Castings shall conform to the dimensions indicated with
a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch.
'
November 25 , 1998 05500-3 98088 . 00
i ��
i ,
3 . Castings shall be smooth and well cleaned by shop �
blasting or other approved method.
C . ' Shop Painting: '
�
' 1 . Properly clean all ferrous metals, except stainless
steel and galvanized surfaces, and apply one coat of ,
paint .
2 . Coat all anchors built into masonry with asphalt paint ,
unless specified to be galvanized.
3 . 04 TOUCH-UP
A. After steel items are in lace touch- �
, p , up welds, scratched
and damaged surfaces with primer.
END OF SECTION I
'
�
i
. 1
i
- 1
1
1
1
� 1
1
November 25 , 1998 05500-4 98088 . 00 �
�
iSECTION 06102
,�
eFIRE RETARDANT WOOD BLOCKING
P�ART 1 GENERAL
� 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED
� � A. Blocking in metal stud/gypsum drywall walls & partitions
for attachment of, but not restricted to, wall mounted:
� 1 . Cabinets & casework
2 . Toilet fixtures & accessories
i � 3 . Fire extinguisher cabinets
i 4 . T.V. support brackets ,
� 5 . Handrails & similar items
' 6 . Mirrors
� 7 . Chalk & tackboards
� 8 . Head boards
� B. Blocking at suspended ceiling level for support of:
� 1 . Curtain tracks
2 . Equipment tracks
� 3 . Drapery tracks
� C. Plywood panels for mounting electrical and telephone
equipment .
� 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber grading rules and wood species . Provide lumber
complying with voluntary product standard PS 20 .
8 1'. 03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
� A. Testing: ASTM E84 or U.L. Test 723 maximum flame spread
rating, 25 .
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
� � �
A. Submit all items to Architect in accordance with Section
01300 .
�
Novemier 25 , 1998 06102-1 98088 . 00
� I ,
i
I
�
i �
,
1 . 05 PRODUCT HANDLING '
A. Keep material dry at all times . '
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS t
A. Lumber: Graded in accordance with Section 1 . 02 . I
,
1 . Provide #2 or better grade fire retardant lumber for
all blocking. '
B. Plywood: Graded in accordance with Section 1 . 02 & c��mply
with 1 . 03 and fi.re treated.
1 . Panels for electrical and telephone equipment to be '
interior grade, fir faced, with exterior glue, C-D or
better faces, thickness as required for work :��eing ,
done .
2 . 02 ACCESSORIES �
A. Nails & Staples : Galvanized coating, size & type to suit
application.
2 . 03 WOOD TREATMENT MATERIALS I
A. Preservative & Fire Retardant Treatment : Dricon fire
retardant treated wood by the Hickson Corporation or �
Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc . , Thomson, Georgia.
PART 3 EXECUTION �
3 . 01 LUMBER TYPES & LOCATIONS - ALL TO BE FIRE RETARDANT �
A. Provide fire retardant treated wood for all interior,
exterior framing, blocking, nailing strips, and plywood �
gypsum board back up and electrical equipment boards .
3 . 02 INSTALLING WOOD
A. Install as required by individual situation with good '
quality workmanship. Fasten to steel stud systems with
Tek screws . Other fastenings with bolts as required. �
B. If wood is to come in contact with a "wet" substance such
as a poured concrete roof deck, separate the wood from the �
concrete with a 6 mil poly barrier between the wood and
the concrete .
END OF SECTION �
November 25 , 1998 06102-2 98088 . 00 �
i �
aSECTION 07193
� � PLASTIC VAPOR RETARDER
PART 1 GENERAL
� 1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
� 1 . Metal Studs - Section 09100 .
2 . Gypsum Wallboard - Section 09260 .
� PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURER:
�
�� ��
1 . Visking Corp. Visqueen.
� 2 . 02 MATERIALS :
1 . Vapor Retarder: 6 mil polyethylene sheet (clear) .
� 2 . Adhesive: 3M Co. No . 4693 at studs .
I � 3 . Tape: 3M Co . No. 396 (single faced) at joints .
, � PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION:
' 1 . Adhere over interior face of inetal studs before
installation of wallboard.
' 2 . Extend from structural floor slab to bottom of
structure above, using adhesive application on metal
studs and deck.
' 3 . Make vertical splices on metal stud, lapping vapor
barrier 6 in. minimum.
' 4 . Seal all laps and intersection with structural slabs
continuously with adhesive or pressure sensitive tape.
I � 5 . Exterior wall to be vapor tight at completion of .work.
END OF SECTION
�
,
November 25 , 1998 07193-1 98088 . 00
' '
i I
i
, SECTION 07213
' FIBROUS INSULATION
� PART 1 GENER.AL
' 1 . 01 DELIVERY AND STOR.AGE
' A. Coordinate delivery with job progress and affected trades
to minimize job storage time.
B. Store materials in clean dry space and protect against
' moisture.
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
', ' A. Deliver materials in original unopened packages,
containers, or bundles bearing manufacturer' s labels .
Labels shall indicate brand name, UL fire rating
, information, where applicable, R-value and other
descriptive data confirming compliance with this
specification.
� � B. Provide insulation having a flame spread rating of 25 or
less, in accordance with ASTM E84 tests .
'
P�ART 2 PRODUCTS
, 2 . 01 MATERIALS •
A. Thermal Insulation: Owens-Corning Fiberglass, or Knauf,
, unfaced, or approved equal, blanket type or batt type, in
widths to fit stud spacing. Provide insulation having an
"R" value of a minimum of R-19 for walls and a minimum of
' R-30 for roof/ceiling. Flame spread rating shall be less
than 25 .
� B. Sound Attenuation Blankets : U. S . Gypsum "Thermafiber" , or
� approved equal paperless, semi-rigid, spun mineral
fibermat, of thickness indicated.
' � C. Safing Insulation: U. S . Gypsum "Thermafiber" , Type I,
Class "A" , listed by Underwriter' s Laboratories, Inc . , or
approved equal .
� 1 . Provide galvanized steel safing clips, "stik-clips"
and/or galv. wire to keep insulation intact in walls .
,
' I
November 25 , 1998 07213-1 98088 . 00
, �I
, �
PART 3 EXECUTION �
3 . 01 PREPARATIC?N ,
A. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready ta re��eive
insulation.
B. Verify mechanical an.d electric �ervices within spaces have �
been installed and tested.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION �
A. Install �.hermal insulation between meta7. studs on all �
exterior walls .
1 . Fit insulation snugly in�.o framing with "stik-clips" ox
galv. wire threaded thraugh insulation to keep in�,act . �
Do nat staple insula�ion by forcing the insulatior_ into
reduced thickness, thereby losing the required R value.
2 . Maintain integri�.y af insulation over entire area Co be �
insulated.
3 . Insulate small Spaces between clo�ely spaced framing �
members . A finished insulated wall shall be free of
all voids .
4 . Carefully fit insulation around pipes, conduits, and `
o�.her obstruction.s .
5 .• Where pipes and condui�.s are loca�ed in stud space, '
place in�ulatian between exteriQr vaall and pipes and
conduits .
6 , Where building heat a.s in operation during the �
installaGion of exterior wall insulation, install vapor
retarder immedia�.ely ta prevent candensation. '
B. Install �ound atten�atian blankets where indicated.
1 . Fi.t insulatian inta framing and maintain integrivy of �
insulation aver en�.ire area to be insul.ated. Use
"stik-- clips" or galv. wire threaded through insulatian
to keep intact in. wa11s . �
C. �nstall safing insulatson, where indicated, strictl�r in
accordance with manufacturers ' instructions . �
D. Instal.l curtainwall insulation, where indicated, strictly
in accordance with manufacturers ' instructions . �
_ END OF SECTT(�N
�
November 25, 1998 07213-2 98Q88 . 00 �
� - -
' i
i
, SECTION 07253
i
' ' SPR.AYED FIREPROOFING
' �
PART 1 GENERAL
' 1 . 01 � QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
� � A. Sprayed-on fireproofing work shall be performed by a firm
having experience in the installation of similar materials
to those specified herein in projects comparable to this
, I project . The firm shall be licensed or otherwise approved
' i to apply the specified materials by the manufacturer of
'; said materials .
�
, � B. Before proceeding with fireproofing work, approvals of the
I proposed materials, densities and thickness shall be
' � obtained from the architect and other necessary
, authorities .
ii
C. At the request of Project Architect, Applicator may be
asked to spray a single bay or select area as a Mockup for
' � approval which will serve as a guide for remainder of
i proj ect .
I �
, 1';. 02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a Testing Laboratory to inspect and test
' � fireproofing to ensure that applied thickness and density
� meets U.L. fire rating requirements . ASTM E605 "Standard
� Test Methods for Thickness & Density of Sprayed Fire
� Resistive Materials . "
, B . Additional inspecting and testing because of noncompliance
with Project Documents will be paid for by Owner and
' I � deducted from payments to Contractor.
C. Patch test areas as required to reestablish fireproofing
' integrity.
i D. Testing laboratory to cross reference tested density (ASTM
� E605) to manufacturer air erosion tables to establish air
' i erosion (E859) of . 000 gm/sq. ft .
E. All fireproofing thicknesses to be figured on unrestrained
� beam thickness values .
�
1 : 03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
i
' A. U.L. Fire Hazard Classification
� B. , ASTM E84 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of
' i � Building Materials .
I
� November 25 , 1998 07253-1 98088 . 00
'
C . ASTM E119 , E605 , E736 , E759 , E760 , E761, E859 and E937 - ,
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials .
1 . 04 ' SUBMITTALS �
A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section
01300 . �
B. Submit four copies of shop drawings of the following:
1 . Plan drawings showing systems and thickness '
designations for each column, beam and assembly
required to provide a complete fireproofing protection
job. '
2 . Reports of reputable independent testing agency, of
products proposed for use, which indicates compliance '
with ASTM E84 and E119 , or equivalent tests,
requirements .
1 . 05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS '
A. An air and substrate temperature of 40° F (4 . 4°C) must be
maintained for 24 hours before, during and for 24 hours '
after application of the sprayed fireproofing. If
necessary for job progress, provide enclosures with heat
to maintain temperatures . '
B. Provide ventilation to allow for proper drying of the
fireproofing during and subsequent to its application. In '
poorly ventilated areas lacking natural ventilation,
forced air circulation will be required.
1 . 06 PROTECTION '
A. Provide adequate ventilation in areas to receive
fireproofing during and 24 hours after application. ,
B. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage. Mask
adjacent work as required.
C . Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from '
contaminating air.
D. Close off and seal ductwork in areas when fireproofing is '
being applied.
E. Protect applied sprayed fireproofing from damage. '
1 . 07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages bearing ,
name of manufacturer and product identification.
1
November 25 , 1998 07253-2 98088 . 00 '
I
1 i .
�
�
' B. Keep materials dry, under cover and away from damp
, surfaces .
' � i
�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
' 2 . 01 MATERIALS
A. � Asbestos-free Fireproofing: "Cafeco" Blaze-Shield II by
, Isolatek International . Blaze Shield type DC/F, or C/F to
match UL Assemblies indicated. Alternate manufacturers
are acceptable providing the alternate assemblies are the
� same as originally specified except for the fireproofing
� manufacturer and fireproofing type . See Section 01630 .
''
� ;
' B. I Water: Clean and free from elements which might adversely
' affect quality of fireproofing.
� C. Density: Minimum density to be 15 lb/FT' (ASTM E 605) or
, � as required for . 000 gm/FTZ air erosion.
�
I
PART i EXECUTION
� I
3 �. 01 PREPARATION
' � A. I The Contractor shall cooperate in the coordination and
scheduling of the work of this section to avoid delays in
job progress .
' B. Clean substrate of foreign materials which might interfere I��
� with proper bonding. Material must adhere to substrate �
properly.
' C. Sprayed fireproofing shall be applied to the concrete slab
; underside.
' I
D. Insure that erection fastenings (Clips, hangers, supports,
' sleeves, precast concrete panel connections and other
attachments to the fireproofing bases, as covered under
other sections of the specifications) are placed by other
' � trades before the application of fireproofing material .
' I
, E. Ducts, piping conduits or other suspended equipment that
could interfere with the uniform application of the
� sprayed fireproofing are to be ' positioned after the
! application of the sprayed fireproofing.
�
� F . Fireproof thicknesses are to be calculated on unrestrained
' beam values .
�
' ,
November 25 , 1998 07253-3 98088 . 00
' �
'
` 3 . 02 APPLICATION I
A. Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of �
substrate material of surrounding air is below 40° F .
B. Mix in clean machine, and in accordance with '
manufacturer' s printed instructions . Apply with ��lean
powered sprayers in accordance with manufacturer ' s printed
instructions .
C . Apply proper thic}cness to comply with UL requirements for '
ratings indicated. Use UL formulas to determine correct
thickness of application for sizes of steel members . The ,
average thickness shall be equal to or be greater than the
approved thickness .
D. Patching of fireproofing shall be the responsibility of '
this contractor as defined in cooperation with the ge�eral
contractor.
E. Equipment and application procedure shall conform to the '
materials application instructions .
3 . 03 CLEAN '
A. Remove excess and overspray, droppings and debris .
B. Remove spray fireproofing from materials and surfaces not '
specifically scheduled to be fireproofed.
1
END OF SECTION
'
,
'
'
�
'
' I
November 25 , 1998 07253-4 98G88 . 00 '
I
' I� '
I
i
' I SECTION 07270
�
FIRESTOPPING -
�
i
PART 1 GENERAL
I1'. 01 WORK INCLUDED
i
; A. Provide firestopping in accordance with the latest edition
' of U.L. Handbooks
' 1 . Empty hole penetrations through fire rated floor slabs .
2 . Openings between curtainwalls and floor slabs are to be
Fibrous Insulation Section 07213 .
' i 3 . Openings between tops of fire rated walls and floor or
; roof slabs are to be fire caulked as per U.L. details .
, � � 4 . Through penetrations of fire rated walls, per U.L.
' details .
, 1 . 02 RELATED WORK
A. � Refer to Section 07900/07213 for sealing of openings and
� i penetrations in sound barrier applications, not work of
this section.
t1',. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
, A. General : Provide firestopping materials that expand to
� fill cavities or provide adhesion to substrates, and that
, will maintain seal under normal expected movements of
substrates .
i
� B. � UL Classification: Provide firestopping materials that are
, i I currently classified with UL as "Fill, Void, or Cavity
Materials, " and "Through Penetration Firestop Systems . "
' � C . Fire Tests : Provide firestopping materials that have been
� i tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 "Methods for Fire
, ' Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops" and UL 1479
' "Fire Test of Through-Penetration Firestops . "
D. All through-penetration firestops are to be as per the
' U. L. fire resistance handbook, latest edition, and are to
; , carry U.L. system numbers and an appropriate F or T
� � number. �
i i �
' E . The same type/manufacture of firestopping should be agreed
to and used by all subcontractors on the project .
� I
�
�
' November 25 , 1998 07270-1 98088 . 00 �I
, �
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : ,
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical product �
data, including product description, technical data, and
installation instructions in accordance with Se��tion
01300 .
Identify the U.L. Design system numbers for each product '
or assembly. Provide shop drawings of exact dimensio�ing,
anchorage, substrate, proprietary system, etc . , and '
identify typical locations for each.
1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: '
A. Deliver firestopping materials to job site in original,
new and unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer' s name and a label identifying contents . �
B. Store firestopping materials out of weather, at
temperatures below 90 F (32 C) , and as recommended by �
manufacturer. Store as per manufacturers specified
instructions .
1 . 06 SAMPLE Mockup '
A. See Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard Systems, for the
construction wall mockup. Provide fire rated systens as �
required for this mockup.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS '
A. Provide materials by one of the following manufacturers :
1 . Dow Corning Corporation. '
2 . Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company (3M)
3 . Metalines, Inc . '
4 . Tremco
5 . Hevi-Duty Nelson '
6 . USG Fire Stop Systems '
7 . Hilti
8 . General Electric ,
9 . Specified Technologies, Inc .
�
November 25 , 1998 07270-2 98088 . 00 '
' � ! ' --
' 10 . CAFCO T. P. S .
�� ' 11 . USG - Acoustical caulk for non-rated sound wall
� terminations at floors and decks above as per drawings
� and specifications .
' 2 . 02 MATERIALS
'� A. � Provide materials specifically tested for the location
, ! proposed. Provide primers, sealants, tapes, foams, dams,
etc . , as required to provide a complete proprietary
system.
1 -
PART 3 EXECUTION
�
, 3 . 01 EXAMINATION:
� A. Verification of Conditions : Examine areas and conditions
! under which work is to be performed, and identify
� ; conditions detrimental to proper and/or untimely
completion.
1 1 . Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
I conditions have been corrected.
�
, 2 . Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in
suitable condition for application of firestopping.
3 � 02 INSTALLATION:
� A. I Perform work using methods and materials specified in
� 'Ifirestopping systems indicated in referenced standards .
' I j1 . Consult with Architect to establish acceptable modified
� � versions of referenced standards for conditions not '
' � specifically illustrated in referenced standards .
B. Install firestopping, at least equal to barrier fire-
, rating, in and around penetrations of floor structures,
exterior walls and interior walls indicated as time-rated
� fire barriers or smoke barriers .
; I
' iC. Install firestopping to close clearances around and within
sleeves, and around cables, conduits, pipes, ducts,
equipment enclosures, or other apparatus causing
' I penetration of barrier.
, D. � Patch penetrations caused by cutting or presence of unused
� or abandoned openings or boxes, using materials compatible
' with barrier construction and with fire-rating equal to
or greater than barrier rating.
I '
' � ,
�
November 25 , 1998 07270-3 98088 . 00
� � ,
'
E. In smoke barriers, firestopping shall resist the passage '
of smoke.
3 . 03 TO EXTENT PRACTICABLE, CONSTRUCT Fire-ra�.ed WALLS AFTER 1
PLrACEMENT OF PENETRATING MATERIALS, FITTING RATED
GONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TIGHTLY TO OR DIRECTLY ON MATERIAL �
OF PENETRATION.
A. Where large openings are crea�.ed in barriers, to permit
later installation of pipes and ducts, close unused '
portions of opening with solid fill equal to barrier
rating and with applicable fires�opping seaZan� system
around penetrating items . '
B. Fire-stop spaces in structural floor opening� wi�.h rated
Firestop conere�.e, or other rated assembl� on.1.y where
both horizor�.tal dimenSions exceed thickness of rated �
barrier. Provide dowels and reinforcement, within such
�ill, equal ta reinforcing specified for slab. Ir��tall
applicabl.e Fire-stopping system aroun.d all penetrating �
items .
C. Fire--stop spaces in xated concrete or masanry wall �
openings wi�h fire rated solid fill anly where both
height and width exceed thickness of rated barrier.
Tnstall applicable Fire-Stopping system around all
pene�.rati.ng items . ,
D. Fire-stap penetration� through fu11 thickn.ess af '
barriers . Where requzred thickness of firestapping �
sealant system is less than thickne�s af barrier , use
�iber fa.11, so3id fil1, ar fiber packing to ma}�e up
remai,nder of barrier thickness . '
E. Completely fill void spaces of each penetration with '
fire-stopping ma�erial .
F. Provide forms and dams to permanently secure fire- '
stopping materials .
1 . Install fire-stapping in floors to flush with top af � ',
i slab, sleeve, or housekeepira.g pad.
� G. Apply fires�.opping directly to penetrating i�.em. Po no�
anchor ar bond �ire-stopping to combustible ar non fire-- ,
rated materials such as plastic or fzber caversngs .
H. Where s1.�eves have been installed surraunding pipas or �
ather penetrations, fire-stop annu].ar space be�.ween
sleeve and it� contained pipe, cable, ar duct with ,
resilien�. fire-stopping sealant system to permit mo�rement
af pipe or duct without damage �o firestopping sealanG .
END OF SECTION �
November 25 , 1998 Q727Q-4 98088 . 00 ,
' . , . ' _ , �. . .
' SECTION 07900
' SEALANTS
PART 1 GENER.AL
� 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED
� A. Joints between hollow metal frames and masonry walls .
B. Joints between aluminum frames and walls .
' C. Interior wall joints where two materials of different
types meet .
D. Other caulking or sealing indicated.
�
1 . 02 SUBMITTALS
' � � A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section
01300 .
� , B. Product Data: Submit four copies of manufacturer' s product
specifications, handling/installation/curing instruction
and performance data sheets for each sealant product
� specified. Include chemical characteristics, performance
criteria and limitations .
1I03 JOB CONDITIONS
� A. Weather Conditions : Do n
ot proceed with installation of
' sealants under unfavorable weather conditions . Install
elastomeric sealants only when temperature is in the
temperature range recommended by manufacturer.
' 1 . 04 INSTALLERS' QUALIFICATIONS
A. Employ only workmen skilled in application of sealant
� materials, and regularly engaged in sealant work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
� 2 . 01 MATERIALS
� A. Sealant for Interior at Painted Areas : Acrylic - latex
caulk, permanent flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding
by Tremco or approved equal .
, B. Sealant for Interior at Vinyl Wallcovering and Cabinetry:
One part silicone, SILPRUF by General Electric or pow
Corning 795 or Pecora 895 or approved equal . Countertop
' sealant is by hospital casework installer, Section 12300 .
' November 25 , 1998 07900-1 98088 . 00
�, I
�
' I
C . Interior at Plumbing Fixtures and Tubs : One part silicone '
sanitary sealant by General Electric Sanitary Silicone
1700 or pow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant Sealant or �
Pecora 863/898 or equal .
D. Interior at Tile Wall : One art silicone sanitary sealant
by Dow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant Sealant or General ,
Electric Sanitary Silicone 1700 or Pecora 863/898 or
approved equal . `
2 . 02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS t
A. Joint Primer/Sealer: Provid type recommended by sealant '
manufacturer for joint surf ces to be primed and sealed.
All exterior sealant to b primed unless specifically
deleted by manufacturer t rough substrate testing by
sealant supplier. ,
B. Bond Breaker Tape : Polyeth lene or other plastic tape
recommended by sealant man facturer, to be applied to '
sealant contact surfaces wh re bond to substrate or joint
filler is not desirable.
C. Sealant Backer Rod (for mi or joints requiring bac}tiup) : �
Compressible rod stock of flexible, permanent, durable
non-absorptive material recommended by sealant
manufacturer. �
PART 3 EXECUTION �
3 . 01 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrates (joint s rfaces) and conditions under �
which work is to be perform d. Do not proceed with joint
sealer work until unsatis actory conditions have been
corrected. �
3 . 02 JOINT PREPARATION
A. Clean joint surfaces immed ately before installation of �
joint fillers, primer/sea er, sealants and caulking -
compound. Remove dirt, loose coatings, moisture and
other items which could int rfere with bond of sealant or �
caulking compound.
B. Prime surfaces unless on ite substrate tests indicate �
priming not required. Conf ' ne primer/sealer to areas of
sealant bond; do not allo spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces . '
3 . 03 INSTALLATION -
A. Comply with manufacturers pr' nted instructions . '
November 25 , 1998 07900-2 98088 . 00 �
�
' ' , ' t '
i
i
I
1 B. Install backer rod at depth recommended by sealant
� manufacturer for joint width. Install using blunt
' ; ; instrument to avoid puncturing or twisting. Do not leave
voids between rod ends . Size of rod should allow
� approximately 25% compression.
' C. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will
� ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform, continuous
i ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete
' "wetting" of joint bond surfaces .
1 D. Fill sealant roove to a sli htl concave surf
g g y ace . Tool
sealant to form concave surface and to set material
' � ! against the backer rod and the joint surfaces .
�
3 . 04 APPLICATION
� A. Generally, depth of sealant in joints shall be at least
I � 1/8" to 3/8" . In larger joints the depth of the sealant
� shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Use
' silicone filler for backup in knee joints .
I B. Use masking tape if necessary to protect adjacent areas .
� I C. Use gun nozzles sized to fit joints . Finish joints
� i neatly. Remove any excess materials and leave joints
� � clean
D. Use silicone sealant in channel glazing and back-bedding
I of glass (unless factory glazed) .
� �
, E. � Use acrylic latex sealant for interior work. Caulk where
� � shown on drawings and at all masonry walls butting into
� � other masonry walls .
3 . 05 CURING AND PROTECTING
I �
� � A. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with
� � manufacturer' s instructions . Protect sealants,
particularly while there is surface tack to avoid "pickup"
� , of dirt and dust.
', �
' ' I END OF SECTION
� I
�
�
i I
� ! � - I
i I
November 25 , 1998 07900-3 98088 . 00
� � f
,
' SECTION 08100
' HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
� PART 1 GENERAL
I1 . 01 �'IRE RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS
� A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc . , and Warnock-Hersey
International, Inc . fire-rating tests and labels are
� acceptable in usual Local and State requirements .
' B. Affix applicable metal labels to doors, frames, and view
windows designated in door schedule or on drawings . Mylar
i or paper labels are not acceptable.
� I
� C . Rated doors at stairs shall meet temperature rise criteria
I on unexposed side of door and shall not exceed 450 degrees
' F. at end of 30 minutes when tested by standard fire test .
D. Doors designated a "20 minute" or greater rating require
� UL labeled frame.
' E. Hollow metal frame view windows in one-hour rated walls to
receive a "C" label, 45 minute rated frame.
� 1 . 02 SUBMITTALS
� A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300 .
I
� B. Submit shop drawings indicating door and frame types,
gauge of inetal, sizes, Architect' s numbers, wall thickness
� where frames will be installed, fire resistance ratings
where applicable, and other pertinent data.
� 1 . Indicate sizes of louver and glazing openings .
2 . Indicate doors and frames which are to have thresholds,
' lead-lining and other special features .
1 � 03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
, A. Doors and frames shall be shipped in accordance with
manufacturer' s standard practice . Each door and frame
shall be identified by door number on the drawings .
� B. Deliver, store, and handle doors and frames in accordance
with requirements of manufacturer, and so as to preclude
� damage.
C. Store off of floor, on dunnage, in a dry protected place,
and with at least 1/ inch space between individual pieces .
'
�
' November 25 , 1998 08100-1 98088 . 00
� i
' �
�
�
'
PART 2 PRODUCTS �,
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER '
A. Manufacturer: Palmetto Me al Products, Columbia, South �
Carolina; Steelcraft, Cinc ' nnati, Ohio; and CECO Door
Products, Birmingham, Alabam . �
2 . 02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Provide flush type, seamle s metal doors, 1-3/4 inches '
thick, fabricated from 18 gauge cold-rolled, furniture
steel plates, properly re ' nforced, insulated to deaden �
sound, and welded.
1 . Continuously weld vertical edges, where face sheets
join, and grind smooth so that no seam is visible. �
Spot welding and filling with compound is not
acceptable.
2 . Close tops and bottoms of doors with formed steel ,
channels welded in place and ground smooth.
3 . At all pairs of fire r ted fire/smoke doors, provide '
factory installed steel stragals .
2 . 03 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
�
A. Provide metal frames with integral stops for doors and
interior view windows nd x-ray control windows . �
Fabricate frames from 16 ga ge cold-rolled furniture steel
plate.
' 1 . Line frames with lead w ere indicated. Use lead equal '
in thickness to lead use in ad 'acent walls .
� �
2 . Form double return flan es on all frames exce L for
, P
existing openings as sh wn. Where frames wrap around �
wall openings, form flan es to fit wall thicknesses .
' 3 . Miter corners of frames and continuously weld full ,
depth and width of face and throats . Tack welding at
throat and stops is not cceptable.
4 . Dress welded joints smo th on exposed surfaces so that �
joints are not visible hen frames are prime painted.
' Use of surface applied f ' llers to conceal manufacturing
defects is not acceptabl . ,
5 . Provide trim angles t be installed at heads of
exterior frames . �
6 . Provide 16 gauge steel c annel spreaders across bottoms
of frames . ,
November 25 , 1998 08100- 98088 . 00 '
�
� � ; .
� ,
�
,
� 7 . Frame Anchors : Provide floor anchors at each jamb and
� mullion. At jambs installed in masonry walls , provide
; � three masonry anchors at each jamb up to 7 ' -6" high,
� and one additional anchor for each 18 inches or
' fraction thereof over 7 ' -6 " in height . At jambs
installed in metal stud partitions, provide four metal
, stud anchors at each jamb up to 7 ' -6" high and one
�I additional anchor for each 18 inches or fraction
i thereof over 7 ' -6" in height .
� I
8 . Hollow Metal View Windows & Sidelite Frames : Provide a
rated U.L. label fire window frame, "C" 45 minute
� ; rated, which is constructed and installed per U.L.
� ; label procedures . Glazing to be wire glass unless
'� noted otherwise in the documents .
i ;�
' 2 . 04 PREPARING FOR FINISH HARDWARE
' A. I Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware.
' ; ' 1 . Hardware supplier will furnish hollow metal
� manufacturer approved hardware schedule, and hardware
templates for use in preparation.
� I 2 . Preparation includes sinkages and cut-outs for mortise
', ' and concealed hardware.
, 3 . See Finish Carpentry, Section 06200 for mounting
heights of strikes .
� � B. , Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface
� � mounted hardware.
I
� 1 . Drill and tap mortise reinforcement at factory.
Reinforce only for surface applied hardware.
i �
, j ' 2 . Provide 9 gauge steel reinforcement 1-1/2 inches wide x
10 inches long for hinges . Offset reinforcement so
� that hinges will finish flush with frame rabbet .
� 3 . Provide 12 gauge steel reinforcement for strikes .
' � 4 . Provide 12 gauge steel reinforcement for other
� � I
i hardware.
5 . Install reinforcement with concealed connections to i
� I develop full strength of reinforcement. �
' 6 . Install 26 gauge plaster guards to protect tapped
iholes .
1 7 . Punch frames to receive silencers .
� � ',
�
November 25 , 1998 08100-3 98088 . 00
' '
'
2 . 05 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING '
A. Where doors and frames h ve glazed openings , provide '
openings with integral stop on one side. Provide 20 gauge
steel removable glazing s ops for other side. Butt
corners of removable st ps, and prepare them for
installation with countersu. k sheet metal screws spacad at �
not more than 12 inches o . c .
2 . 06 SHOP COATING '
A. Level and grind surfaces smo th.
B. Apply full, smooth, even co t of Palmetto' s standard rust- ,,
inhibiting primer suitable a a base for finish paint .
PART 3 EXECUTION ,
3 . 01 FRAME INSTALLATION �
A. In Metal Stud Partitions :
1 . Install hollow metal fr es in close coordination with �
metal stud and gypsum dr all trades .
2 . Weld anchors for drywall partitions to the frames, four ��
per jamb to 7 ' -6 " in he ' ght. Leave spreaders in place
until partitions are rig' dly installed.
I 3 . Where door frames are cheduled to be reinforced by
structural steel members built into partitions, attach �
jamb anchors to structur 1 steel .
3 . 02 DOOR INSTALLATION '
A. Install doors with proper olerances at head, jambs , and
sill . �
3 . 03 TOUCH-UP
A. After installation, the Gen ral Contractor shall touch-up
i
scratched and damaged surf ces . Dented or bent frames
shall be repaired as requir d with metal putty, sanded and '
primed with shop coat simil r to original .
'� END OF S CTION ,
�
�
November 25 , 1998 08100- 98G88 . 00 ,
i
� . .
i !
SECTION 08215
� WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENER.AL
I1 . 01 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
, A. Division 15 - Metal Louvers . ,
1 . 02 FIRE RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS
� A. Underwriter' s Laboratories, Inc . and/or Warnock-Hersey
International, Inc . , fire rating tests and labels are
acceptable.
� � B. Affix applicable labels to doors designated in door
! schedule to have fire resistance classification.
I
� i C . Provide doors at stairwells which meet temperature rise
criteria that temperature on unexposed side of door will
not exceed 450° F. at the end of 30 minutes when tested by
' I standard fire test exposure.
D. Doors designated as "20 minute doors" shall bear actual
� � fire labels whether hung in single, paired or double
; egress openings . If label is not required, provide
j manufacturer ' s letter of certification.
/ 1 �: 03 QUALITY STANDARD
A. Doors shall meet the requirements of National Woodwork
� Manufacturers Association, "Industry Standard 1 - Wood
Doors, " Commercial Standard CS171 .
B. Doors shall meet the requirements of the Architectural
,,' Woodwork Institute, Section 01300 . Minimum standard for
wood doors - AWI PC-5 .
'i � 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300 .
, B. Submit shop drawings indicating door types, sizes,
Architect ' s numbers, fire resistance ratings where
� applicable, and other pertinent data.
1 . Indicate details of door construction. Include full
� size molding section detail for glazing and louver
installation.
� 2 . Indicate sizes of glazing and louver openings .
�
� i
' November 25 , 1998 08215-1 98088 . 00
� .
�
� ,
i �
�
3 . Indicate doors which ar to have thresholds , undercut , �
bottom edges, lead linin , and other special features .
C . Submit finish samples, howing the complete finish 1
appearance, to the Archite t for approval . Sample size
shall be not less than 8-1 2 " x 11" x 1/4" . Indicate on
the sample the Project, rchitect, General Contractor, '
Door Manufacturer, and a li ting of the operations used to
attain the finish.
1 . 05 PACKAGING ,
A. Each individual door shall be packaged with dark colored �
polyethylene or similar mat rial .
B. Package doors in normal p lletized quantities in such a
manner that the doors wi 1 be fully protected �uring �
shipment, handling and stor ge.
1 . 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDL NG �
A. Deliver doors to site only after plaster and concrete are
dry and building has reach d average prevailing relative
humidity of locality. ,
B. Store doors in an area whe e there will be no appreciable
variations in heat and humi ity. �
1 . Stack flat on 2 "x 4" 1 er, laid 12 inches from ends
and across center. �
2 . Under bottom door and o er top of stack, place plywood
or heavy corrugated car board to protect door surfaces .
C . Handle doors carefully to avoid damage . When moving �
doors, carry them. Do not rag one door across another.
1 . 07 GUARANTEE !
A. Guarantee doors for life of installation against defects �
in materials and workmansh'p, and against warp or twist
exceeding as determined b CS171 . Replace doors not
meeting guarantee .
�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS �
A. V.T. Industries, Holstein, owa.
B. Weyerhaeuser Company, Tacom , WA. , Marshfield Series . �
C . Eggers Hardwood Products Co p. , Neenah, WI . �
November 25 , 1998 08215- 98088 . 00 ,
�
i �
' ' i
I
, 2 . 02 TYPES OF DOORS
' ; A.� Non-Rated Doors :
� �
� 1 . 5 ply minimum hot pressed particleboard construction,
I 5502 .
� I 2 . Face : Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match
; ; existing,
� , I Cut: Plain-Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched.
B. 20 Minute Doors :
I
� �, � 1 . 5502 particleboard construction.
; �'�I 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match
' i l exisiting,
, �
Cut: Plain-Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched.
I C. � U.L. "C" Labeled Doors :
' � ,�
i1 . Mineral core 45 minute, 5545 .
, 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match
� existing,
Cut : Plain-Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched.
I � D. ; U.L. "B" Labeled (60 minute) Doors :
� I
1 . Mineral core, 5511 .
� f 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match
; existing,
' Cut: Plain Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched.
E. i U.L. "B" Labeled (90 minute) Doors :
, , 1 . Mineral core, 5511 .
�
I2 . Face : Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match
� existing,
Cut: Plain Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched.
' I
' � F. Lead-Lined Doors :
1 . Finger-Jointed staved core, 5511 .
� i 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match
� existing,
i Cut : Plain Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched.
�
� , I�'
November 25 , 1998 08215-3 98088 . 00
' � '
t
2 . 03 ACCESSORIES 1
A. Provide glazing stops for i stalling glazing material and �
louvers for all doors .
B. Provide steel stops meetin fire rating requirements at
"B" and "C" label and "20 mi ute" doors . ,
2 . 04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accord nce with AWI standards and ,'
quality assurance technici ns who monitor the product
process from start to finis . STILES AND RAILS MUST BE
SECURELY BONDED TO THE COR AND THEN ABRASIVELY SaI�TDED �
SMOOTH TO THICKNESS TOLE CE. DROP IN CORES ARE NOT
ACCEPTABLE.
B. Prepare doors at factory for finish hardware from '
templates furnished by hardw re supplier.
C . Make cutouts for glazing and louvers at the factory. '
D. Doors shall be finished at t e factory, in accordance with
AWI TR-6 Finish. All U.L. labeled (fire) doors shall have '
all edges sealed, fol owing fitting, per door
manufacturer' s recommendatio s .
E. Doors provided for "B" & " " label ratings are to have ,
reinforced stiles on the ja side to accent full mortise
butt hinges . �
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION ,
A. Verify that door frames a e of type required for the '
particular type of doors, i . e. , fire-rated frames for
fire-rated doors; lead lined frames for lead lined doors .
B. Owner, Architect, or Contra tor has the right to ran��omly �
select and verify construc ion methods utilized in any
particleboard core door. Manufacturer will provide
replacement at no charge . �
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Apply finish hardware and in tall doors . ,
B. Adjust doors and hardware fo correct function.
C. Adjust strikes so that the e is no play when doors are �
latched.
�
November 25 , 1998 08215- 98088 . 00 '
I
� ° ,
' D. No more than 5/8" undercut will be allowed at any door to
finis h concrete floor regardless of any finish or
� threshold added.
E. Install vision panels as shown on drawings .
, F . Replace any doors chipped or damaged.
� END OF SECTION
�
'
' I
�
�
'
�
�
'
r
'
'
�
November 25, 1998 08215-5 98088 . 00
� I
� I
' i I
� � SECTION 08300
� � ACCESS DOORS
� � �
�
PART 1 GENERAL
� 1 . 01 SUBMITTALS
iA.� Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section
' i 01300 . Submit four copies of manufacturer' s brochures
� and installation instructions .
' I '
1''� . 02 COORDINATION
' A. ! Coordinate delivery of panels with applicable trades who
� i will install, to avoid delays and interferences .
�
- B. � Coordinate locations so panels will provide proper access
' ; to equipment to be served.
C. I Coordinate size, location and quantities of panels with
mechanical and electrical trades .
' � �
1��. 03 � DELIVERY
� �
� � A. . Deliver panels in manufacturer' s original shipping
i containers . At time of delivery examine panels and doors
I with tradesmen who will install to ensure that they are in
' , good condition. If panels and doors are damaged, obtain
and deliver new, undamaged items .
� '
' PART 2 PRODUCTS I
2�. 01 � ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
, � A. i Inryco/Milcor, KARP, or approved equal .
�
� 2 02 PANELS
�
', A. ' Minimum size: 18" x 18" , Size as required for complete
� access to items requiring the door. Refer to M. P. & E.
� j ' documents for locations .
i
B. Doors : 14 gauge steel .
' I C. ; Frames : 6 gauge steel .
� �
' D. Latches : Screwdriver operated.
, E. Finish: prime coat of rust inhibitive paint .
' I I'
I I
Nqvember 25 , 1998 08300-1 98088 . 00
' � I
'
F. Types . '
1 . For drywall ceiling o walls : Milcor, Style M or ,
approved equal .
2 . For ceramic or quarry tile walls : Milcor, Style M,
stainless steel or appro ed equal . �
PART 3 EXECUTION ,
3 . 01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect access door openings and assure they meet '
requirements for type and s ' ze. 'B' Label doors will be
required for chase, shaft, tairwells etc . when 1-1/2 hour
fire rating must be provided. ,
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install access doors in ccordance with manufacturer' s '
printed instruction and anch r in place.
END OF S CTION ,
�
,
�
'
�
�
, �
,
t
November 25 , 1998 08300- 98088 . 00 ,
i
' � I
i I
_ i
I
I , I
i � SECTION 08700
FINISH HARDWARE
, I I
I
PART 1 GENERAL
' 1 . 01 ' SUBMITTALS
� A. 'I Submit the following to Owner' s Representative in
accordance with Section 01300 .
, 1 . Submit four copies of complete schedule of finish
� hardware and obtain Owner' s Representative' s approval
before delivering finish hardware .
i � 2 . Submit four copies of the various hardware
, � manufacturer' s catalog data for the items listed in
' schedule.
' ' '�I 3 . Submit two copies of installation instructions for
items requiring special field preparations .
' ' B. , Templates : Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit the
� necessary hardware templates to those trades and/or
' manufacturers with whom hardware must be coordinated.
� � � Comply with procedures established in ASAHC-NBHA Handbook,
for "Recommended Procedures for processing Hardware
� � Schedules and Templates . "
' 1 . 02 I QUALITY STANDARDS
' A. ' Hardware supplier shall have in his regular employment a
' � qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant who will be
�, , available to Owner ' s Representative and General
, Contractor for consultation as required to complete the
' � , work.
11. 03 PRODUCT HANDLING
I
� '�� A. Packaging of hardware on a set by set basis is the
responsibility of the hardware supplier. As material is
, � received by hardware supplier from the various
� I manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers marked
with the door opening number as appears on the drawings .
, B. I Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the
i hardware supplier, General Contractor and/or the hardware
; i installer until each is satisfied that the quantities are �
� correct .
,
' � �
i
� Novem�ber 25 , 1998 08700-1 98088 . 00 il
�
I
_ '
C . The General Contractor sha 1 provide secure lockup for '
hardware delivered to the p oject site and control access
so that completion of work will not be delayed due to �
losses .
PART 2 PRODUCTS '
2 . 01 HARDWARE
A. Finish: '
1 . Provide US26D satin chro e finish for hardware. Where �
US26D is not available f r the specified item, provide
finish to match US26D.
2 . Door closers shall have prayed lacquer finish to match ,
US26D.
B. Keying: '
1 . Provide cylinders with ix active pins, keyed, keyed
alike, master keyed and rand master keyed as directed '
by Owner' s Representati e . Provide four change keys
for each cylinder. Pro ide six master keys for each
master key group and s 'x grandmaster keys for each
grand master key group. ALL keys are to be stamped DO �
NOT DUPLICATE. Provid cylinders as required for
aluminum storefront door .
2 . Provide original key b anks of nickel silver alloy '
only.
3 . Deliver all permanent eys, master keys, and grand ,
master keys to General C ntractors Project Manager, and
deliver carbon copies o transmittal documents to the
Owner' s Representative . General Contractor shall '
deliver keys to Hospital Administrator when directed by
Owner' s Representative, and shall deliver copies of
transmittal documents t the Owner' s Representa�ive . '
The contractor shall eview keying with Hospital
Administrator or the des gnated representative.
C. Key Cabinet : ' �I
1 . Provide one Telkee, In . key cabinet complete with I
system components and in tructions for dual tag system. �
Allow for expansion 20 percent in excess of a�tual
requirements . �
2 . Provide a key chart to Owner at completion of work ,
indicating the schematic of the keying system.
,
November 25 , 1998 08700-2 98088 . 00 �
' i
�
, i D. Hinges : Butt hinges listed below are by Hager Hinge Co .
� Acceptable substitutes are : The Stanley Works; McKinney
I � j Manufacturing Co. ; and Lawrence Brothers . Provide three
� 4- 1/2 " x 4-1/2 " hinges for each door up to 7 feet high.
Provide one additional hinge for every 18 inches or part
thereof over 7 feet .
' I ; 1 . Interior doors without closers :
, � j a. No. 1279 for doors under 42 inches wide.
� b. No . BB1168 for doors 42 inches or wider.
, �
' ! 2 . Interior doors with closers :
; '�, a. No . BB1279 for doors under 42 inches wide.
� I
I b. No . BB1168 for doors 42 inches or wider.
I 3 . Interior UL labeled wood doors .
� ,
, � a. No. BB1279 for doors under 42 inches wide.
, ' � b. No. BB1168 for doors 42 inches or wider.
� 4 . Exterior doors :
I ' � a. No . BB1191 for doors under 42 inches wide.
; b. No . BB1199 for doors 42 inches or wider.
, , ' .
, c . Provide safety stud feature for all out-swinging
' I exterior doors .
' 5 . Where security/safety is a concern provide hospital
tips . (HT)
' I
i E. Locksets : Schlage (D Series-Rhodes Design) . No
! � substitutes . See Finish Carpentry Section 06200 for
' I i strike mounting heights .
� i
I
� 1 . Provide only UL listed locksets . Stamp latch bolt
faces to indicate that locksets are UL listed.
� I
' 2 . Where knurled knobs are indicated, only the lever on
the space entrance side needs to be knurled. Provide
� machine knurled levers .
i
� I 3 . Where locksets are indicated to be lead-lined, lead-
' line the escutcheons .
'
� � I
i ;
' November 25 , 1998 08700-3 98088 . 00
�
'
F . Exit Devices : Exit devices shall be manufactured by Von ,
Duprin Series 99 . Ac eptable substitutions are
Corbin/Russwin ED5000 serie and Yale 7000 series . Trim �
shall match lockset design.
1 . Where panic devices are installed on UL labeled doors,
provide UL labeled pan' c devices, and indicate that '
they are labeled by sta ping or permanently affixing a
tag to each device.
2 . Through bolt exit device on all doors . �
3 . Provide spacer kits whe e push pad exit devices cross �
over lites in doors .
G. Door Closers : Closers liste on schedule are by LCN 4000
Series . Acceptable subst ' tutions are Corbin/ Russwin ,
DC3200 and Yale 3501/3501BF. All closers to be standard
application and comply with opening force requiremen�s of
applicable codes . All rate doors to have closers . (IF '
THERE IS NO PLACE TO INST L A WALL STOP, USE A LINIITING
CLOSER. )
H. Floor Hinges : Rixson Firema k ,
1 . Provide Series L147-20 ith intermediate pivot ML19-20
for labeled lead lined d ors . '
2 . Provide Series L147 wit intermediate pivot ML19 for
non-rated lead lined doo s . �
I . Push and Pull Plates : . 050 gauge .
1 . Push plates 1001-3 ,
2 . Pull handle 1013-3
� J. Door Stops : Door stops lis ed in schedule are by Trimco . �
� Acceptable manufacturers a e: H.B. Ives, Baldwin Mfg.
Co . ; Quality Hardware . '
1 . Wall bumpers shall be W1 74CCS .
2 . Where swing of a door interferes with another door, '
provide roller bumpers similar to No. 1244 or 1245 , as
required to suit conditi ns .
3 . Provide overhead stops imilar to Rixson 55 Series on '
all doors where there s no place to install a wall
stop. �
'
November 25 , 1998 08700- 98088 . 00 , I
'
�
i
' � K. Thresholds, Weatherstripping, Carpet Dividers/Firestops
iand Light Seals : Items listed on schedule are by Pemco
� Mfg. , Inc . Acceptable manufacturers are: National Guard
' i ' Products; Reese Enterprises; and Zero Weatherstripping
Co .
I
� 1 . Thresholds : No. 2005AV with vinyl bulb at stop or No .
i � 271A with No . 222AV door bottom. .
I � 2 . Weatherstripping: No. 303AV at jambs and heads of
' doors .
� � I
�� 3 . Light seals & Sound Seals : No . 320CN at jambs and heads
� ! ! of doors, and No . 412C automatic door bottoms at
i, ��
sills .
' � 'I 4 . Carpet Dividers : Provide Pemko 236A firestops under
all "C" rated doors where carpet occurs each side of
, '� door, No. 2364A firestop under all"B" rated doors
' where carpet occurs each side of door, and No. 174C
' ', '� stop where carpet occurs one side under any fire rated
door.
I i 5 . Tile Dividers : Provide a 4" wide aluminum plate under
, � all "B" and "C" label doors where tile occurs each side �
' of door. Butt tile into plate. Plate to match
' thickness of tile.
� L. Rubber Silencers : Provide three per single door, and two
' per double doors .
�I
iM. Door Gaskets : Pemko S88D in continuous lengths . See Door
; Schedule for doors requiring gaskets at heads and jambs .
� , N. IMiscellaneous Hardware : Items of hardware such as flush
bolts, automatic flush bolts, dutch door bolts, etc . are
, identified in the various hardware sets on Finish
� Hardware Schedule by manufacturer' s numbers, and are
� manufactured by firms listed above.
�
, � O. � Fastenings :
�
1 . Provide fasteners required to install hardware items,
' I including wood and machine screws, and through bolts .
Furnish fasteners to match finish of product . Where
security/safety is a concern provide spanner head
, � screws (SHS) for all items of hardware with exposed
� fasteners .
P. UL Labels : All doors which are labeled are to have UL
� �I labeled hardware on them.
�
' � �
November 25 , 1998 08700-5 98088 . 00
' �
'
PART 3 EXECUTION ,
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. See Finish Carpentry, Sect on 06200 for installation of �
Finish Hardware.
B. Install Finish Hardware in accordance with manufacturer' s �
recommendations, using prope templates .
C. Install at heights reco ended as industry standards �
unless noted otherwise or as dictated by applicable codes .
D. Install carpet dividers und r all fire rated doors where i
carpet occurs .
HARDWARE SCHEDULE NOTES: '
1 . Hardware schedule is generic an hardware items listed are to
show basic operation/function o doors . Hardware supplier to '
furnish items by actual man facturing catalogue numbers,
making sure each item fits door use, and meets all fire/safety
codes, i . e . , UL etc . , regardl ss of whether called for in
schedule or not as hardware set numbers are used on different '
types of doors .
2 . Majority of door hardware fu ctions are listed using ANSI '
numbers . When there is no AN I number to use, manufacturer
number is used to establish fun tion onl .
HARDWARE SCHEDULE BEGINS ON NEXT P GE '
,
'
,
'
�
'
'
November 25 , 1998 08700- 98088 . 00 ,
� I' I
� SET 1
' j i 3 HINGES
i I 1 LATCH 310D
1 STOP
' � ,
� SET 2
� I I 3 HINGES
1 PRIVACY SET D40S
1 O.H. STOP
' , �
SET 3
� �I
� � 2 SET BY PASS HARDWARE 9110-144 ,
i 8 FLUSH PULLS 222B26D
, � SET 4 i
� I 1 RELEASE SENSOR INSIDE OF ANGIO BY POWER
� I , OPERATOR
� 2 SET PIVOTS L147 x ML19 US26D �
2 PULLS 20N US26D �
� ' i 2 PUSH PLATES 30S 4X16 US26D
2 MAG LOCKS 390 x ATD
Ij 1 POWER SUPPLY 510 x EIR
' i 2 KEY SWITCHES 643-14
' KEY SWITCHES TO DEACTIVATE POWER OPER.ATOR BEFORE
LOCKING AND DEACTIVATE MAG LOCKS BEFORE
' � OPERATION.
POWER OPERATOR BY OTHERS
1 ,
I SET 5
' ,
1 SET PIVOTS L147 x ML19 US26D
� 1 PULL 20N US26D
1 PUSH PLATE 30S 4x16 US26D
; POWER OPER.ATOR BY OTHERS
' SET 6
' 3 HINGES
' I 1 LOCKSET D70PD
I 1 STOP
'
I
' ' i
i i
' November 25 , 1998 08700-7 98088 . 00
I
'
SET 7 �
3 HINGES ,
1 LOCKSET D53PD
1 CLOSER 4041 SNB
1 STOP
SET 8 �
2 TR.ANSFER HINGES ETW8 �
4 HINGES
1 LATCHSET D10S
1 CLOSER 4041 SNB '
1 STOP
SET 9 '
6 HINGES
2 EXIT DEVICE 99L-F X BE SNB ,
2 CLOSER 4041 SNB
2 STOPS
'
END OF SE TION
'
a
,
1
J �
1
,
'
,
November 25 , 1998 08700- 98088 . 00 ,
' I� '
� ��
I '
� SECTION 09100
� i METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM
' I i
i
FART 1 GENERAL
' 1� . 01 i WORK INCLUDED
, A. � Steel stud interior wall framing and anchorage.
'
B. Overhead bracing where required.
, � C . ' Furring down soffits over casework.
1;. 02 '�, RELATED WORK
' I
� A. Submittals - Section 01300 .
' B. � Miscellaneous Metal : Steel angles, channels, and
' miscellaneous steel - Section 05500 .
! C . Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers - Section
' ' I 06100 .
� D. Fire Retardant Wood Blocking - Section 06102 .
' I E. Hollow Metal Frames and Doors - Section 08100 .
� F . Gypsum Wallboard Systems - Section 09260 .
' �
1�. 03 , REFERENCES
i I
' A. ASTM A446 - Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc
�� Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process .
B. � ASTM A525 - Standard Specification for General
' � � Requirements for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by
� Hot Dip Process .
' � C . AWS D1 . 3 - American Welding Society, "Structural Welding
; Code-Sheet Steel . "
� ' D. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute, "Design of Cold
Formed Steel Structural Members . "
, 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
i
� A. � Submit items to Owner' s Representative in accordance with
I ' Section 01300 .
, B. Submit manufacturer' s product data which clearly describes
� , quality, performance and galvanizing thickness .
'
i I
' November 25 , 1998 09100-1 98088 . 00
,.
C . Submit manufacturer' s cat log illustrations depicting �
cutaway plan views of w 11 systems for fire-ra�ings
indicated and manufactures i structions for installing. '
D. Shop Drawings :
1 . Submit drawings prepare by manufacturer/supplier for '
approval by the Archite t/Structural Engineer. These
drawings should include he following:
a. Plans, cross-section , or elevations as necessary ,
to adequately depict component locations .
b. Connection details showing screw types and '
locations, weld engths or other fastener
requirements .
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE I
A. Comply with: '
1 . Manufacturer' s installat ' on instructions .
2 . Underwriters ' Laborator ' es, Inc . or other approved '
testing laboratories r quirements for meeting fire-
ratings indicated.
1 . 06 COORDINATION ,
A. Coordinate with all trades required to install work in '
walls and partitions . Install studs in proper sequence
with other work.
B. Thicken walls as require to accomodate electrical, '
mechanical, plumbing and ot er in-wall components .
PART 2 PRODUCTS ,
2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS �
A. Acceptable manufacturers re Unimast Incorporated and
Dietrich Industries .
B. Products of other manufactu ers are acceptable only after '
compliance with requirement specified in Section 01630 .
2 . 02 INTERIOR WALL MATERIALS ,
A. Interior Studs (general) : ni�mast, or approved equal, 25
gauge roll formed, punched teel, galvanized. '
'
November 25 , 1998 09100- 98088 . 00 �
, I
�
I
i
' B. Interior Studs (heavy duty) : Unimast, or approved equal,
i 20 gauge roll formed, punched steel studs, galvanized.
! For use at door and window jambs, window sills and header
' � � framing and for back-up of wall hung cabinet work.
I
C . Interior Runners : Unimast, or approved equal�, galvanized
' I ; steel runners, 1-1/4 inches deep, compatible with studs .
� I 1 . Where walls include heavier gauge studs, provide
� 'I runners of gauge to match heaviest gauge studs .
'
D.I Furring members for gypsum board on concrete block walls :
' � i Unimast 26 gauge roll-formed, hat shaped, galvanized
� steel .
i
2 . 031 ACCESSORIES - INTERIOR WALLS
' I�, A.I Attachments :
' ' 1 . Runner attachment to metal roof deck (with rigid
� insulation or insulating concrete only) : U. S. Gypsum
� i 7/16" long S-12 high/low pan head screws .
i
I 2 . Studs and furring attachment to masonry and concrete:
� Hilti or approved equal Powder Driven Pins or hardened
' concrete nails of appropriate size .
i I
' 3 . Stud to runner attachment: USG Type S-12 , Pan Head
; Screws or approved equal .
I i
' � 4 . Stud to door and window frame attachment : USG, 3/8"
� long, Type 5-12 , Pan Head Screws or approved equal .
I 5 . Welding electrodes : Match to material being welded.
, i
' 6 . Anchorage Devices : These devices to be used where
' , appropriate Contractor to determine location of powder
I actuated devices versus expansion anchors .
' Powder Actuated Fasteners shall be manufactured from
AISI 1062 or AISI 1065 steel austempered to a minimum
! � core hardness of 50-54Rc and possess the following
� properties :
' a. Tensile Strength = 270, 000 psi
' b. Shear Strength = 162 , 000 psi
i
� i c . All fasteners shall meet the requirements of ASTM
, B-633-78 .
d. Fasteners shall be a minimum of 9/64" diameter.
i
' � ; e. Fasteners shall be zinc plated. I
�
i
Novelber 25 , 1998 09100-3 98088 . 00
� �
'
f . All exterior anchors to be galvanized. ,
Minimum Design Values for Powder ,
Driven Fasteners in Concrete (Poun s)
Shank Dia Penetration Loading e 3000 psi Conc . 4000 si Conc . '
0 . 145 " 1-1/8" Shear 225 265
0 . 145 " 1-1/8" Tension 115 145
0 . 177 " 1-7/16" Shear 285 330
0 . 177 " 1-7/16" Tension 205 275
0 . 205 " 1-1/4" Shear 445 500
0 . 205 " 1-1/4" Tension 280 345
Values are for semi-lightwei ht or normal weight concrete
Minimum fastener spacing of 4" and Minimum edge distance
of 3 "
See product literature for v lues in structural steel ,
7 . Expansion anchors shall e stud type and shall be zinc '
plated (and galvanized) in accordance with ASTM B633 ,
Type III Fe/Zn5 . Expans ' on anchors shall be a minimum
of 3/8 inch diameter with 2 1/2 inch embedment into
concrete unless noted ot erwise in the drawings . ,
PART 3 EXECUTION '
3 . 01 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WALL STUDS
A. Interior Track Runners : ,
1 . Anchor stud tracks to floor with powder actuated
fasteners staggered at minimum of 16 inches center- '
to-center, or as dete ined by 1 . 04D - Structural
Calculations .
2 . Attach flange of stud to track with #8 screw thru each '
f lange.
3 . Installing Top Runner : Provide powder actuated �
� fasteners in composite concrete or concrete floor
decks . Provid
e self ta ing screws at roof assemblies
or sheet metal closur strip. Where top runners '
parallel ribs of inetal eck, which are off center of
deck ribs, install meta steel closure strip to match
gauge of deck to extend across flutes of deck. Attach '
steel strips to bott ms of ribs with specified
fasteners . Space stagge ed fasteners 16 inches o . c .
a. Attach top runners o sheet steel strips with pan '
head sheet metal scr ws . Space staggered screws 16
inches o . c .
'
November 25 , 1998 09100- 98088 . 00 �
A- _' -
�
' b. Where one side of runner lands on ribs of composite
deck and the other side lands only on steel strip,
� attach to concrete deck rib with powder actuated
fasteners, spaced 32 inches o .c . , and attach to
continuous sheet steel closure strip with pan head
' � screws spaced 32 inches o . c .
1 �
c . Where top runners land securely on deck ribs,
� i whether running parallel or perpendicular, attach
' runners to bottom side of deck. Space staggered
fasteners 16 inches o. c .
, i d. Where stud walls extend to bottoms of fire-proofed
' ', beams, install 2 inch long "Z" clips (at 16" o . c . )
� i required to minimize disruption of fireproofing
� imaterials .
' B. Interior Wall Studs :
, �
� 1 . Do not install studs until door frames have been set in
i ' ! j place and anchored and braced. All interior wall studs
� shall be spaced 16 inches o. c . unless drawings are
shown otherwise.
' � i 2 . Where wall hung cabinetwork and casework is indicated
� to have furred down gypsum board, the furred down areas
I ' � ; shall be installed prior to ceiling grid so that angle
for ceiling grid will abut vertical furred walls .
; 3 . In long runs of walls, install double studs spaced 1/2
' , inch apart, at not over 30 ' -0 " intervals to act as
, � control joints . Back all control joints with safing
i insulation.
� 4 . Door and Window Jambs :
�
' a. At all openings up to and including 6 ' -0" wide,
doors and windows . Double 20 gauge studs (fastened
� together to make up a sturdy unit) at each jamb,
, I start 25 ga. stud within 6" from the double studs,
� each jamb.
b. At openings where doors are lead-lined ` (regardless
' ' of width) , install double 20 gauge studs (fastened
together to make up a sturdy unit) with a 20 ga.
stud 6 " away from the double studs, each jamb. The
� i double studs shall be attached to a steel angle
! frame by others . Steel angle attached to deck
� above and floor above
'
�
� �
' , �
�
' ;
November 25 , 1998 09100-5 98088 . 00
' I I
i
• '
c . At openings over 6 ' -0 " wide in long continuous '
walls (not cross corridor doors) provide double 20
gauge studs at jamb and a 20 gauge stud within 6" '
from frame . Provide a steel angle frame from floor
to deck above .
5 . Addition and renovation work will require the installer ,
to match the size of existing metal studs to keep the
walls straight and uniform.
6 . Install 20 gauge studs in walls where cabinetwork is '
shown to be wall hung.
C. Furring: '
1 . Hat channels on masonry walls : Space hat channels on
masonry walls 16 inches o . c . Attach to masonry with '
specified fasteners .
D. Bracing and Studs Above Suspended Ceiling: '
1 . Support top ends of diagonal stud braces approximately
32 " o.c . with sheet steel angles . Attach steel angles '
to bottom side of structure with power driven pins .
2 . Attach top and bottom ends to steel angles and vertical
studs with two Tek Screws . ,
3 . Where stud assemblies are indicated for hanging lights
and supporting lay in ceilings, attach top runners to ,
structure as specified above. Attach short studs to
top and bottom runners with two Screws per stud a� top
and two per stud at bottom to form a hanging assembly.
'
END OF SECTION
'
�
,
�
,
,
November 25 , 1998 09100-6 98088 . 00
, '
' ! �i
� SECTION 09260
� � GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS
' , �
�
PART 1 GENERAL
' 1 . 01 SUBMITTALS
I A.' Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section
' 01300 .
i B. Submit four copies of manufacturer' s product data and
' , instructions for installing.
�
1 . 02 � COORDINATION
�
! I A• Coordinate with all trades required to install work in
; walls and partitions . Do not install wallboard until such
' , � work has been installed and tested.
I
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Where systems with fire-resistance ratings are indicated
� or required, comply with detailed drawings and/or in
� accordance with local and state codes if they are more
' I stringent to produce a satisfactory fire-rated system.
1 . 04 HANDLING AND STORAGE
i
' � A.; Handle materials to avoid damage.
' B.' Store materials inside, under cover, in a dry place.
' 1 . Stack flat, off floor.
� �� 2 . Support boards to prevent sagging.
' ' �
3 . Store adhesives and joint material in a warm, dry
� place.
; C . Overloading is prohibited.
i
' � . 05 JOB CONDITIONS
y
A. Maintain medium constant temperature in areas where work
' is performed before, during, and after gypsum board and
� joint treatment applications .
i
B. Provide ventilation during and following application of
, adhesives and joint treatment .
; C. Protect system from drying too fast .
1 I
l
�I I
November 25 , 1998 09260-1 98088 . 00
' �
1
PART 2 PRODUCTS �
2 . 01 MATERIALS ,
A. Gypsum Board - General
1 . When double layered board is installed, bottom layer �
may be square edged instead of tapered edge .
B. Gypsum Board Types : Documents are based on USG. and '
compatible with steel studs and/or other components of
rated assemblies identified in drawings or other areas of
specifications . Alternate acceptable manufacturer Gold '
Bond or Georgia Pacific and must be a complete system as
listed by test results .
1 . USG, Type "X" , tapered edge, 5/8" thick. �
2 . USG, Type "X" , WR, 5/8" thick.
C . Fasteners : �
1 . Screws : USG, Type S, self-drilling, self-tapping, '
bugle head, screws for use with power driven screw
drivers . Lengths to fit conditions .
D. Laminating Adhesive : '
1 . Use adhesive complying with wallboard manufacturer ' s
recommendations . (For use when second layer of gypsum ' I
board is- not part of rated assembly) .
E. Sealants :
1 . Acoustical Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant � �
2 . Water Resistant Sealant : USG W/R Sealant I
'
F . Joint Treatment Materials :
1 . Adhesive Joint Treatment : USG Perf-A-Tape, or approved �
equal .
2 . Joint Compound: USG Ready Mixed Compound - All Purpose, '
or approved equal .
3 . Joint Reinforcement : USG 2 " wide Imperial Glass-=iber '
open-weave tape, Type P or approved equal .
, '
'
November 25 , 1998 09260-2 98088 . 00 ,
� , .
'
' G.; Trim:
'�, ' 1 . Outside Corner Trim: USG, or approved equal, No . 100
Perf-A-Bead, galvanized reinforcement .
2 . Control Joint : USG, or approved equal, No. 093 Control
' � Joint, galvanized.
3 . Channel Trim: USG, or approved equal No . 200A,
, � galvanized.
PART � 3 EXECUTION
' 3 . 01 PRE-INSTALLATION ACTIONS
' � A.' Notify Local inspecting authorities prior to beginning
installation of wallboard.
i
B. Review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure
' , that everything proceeding installation of wallboard has
been completed.
, ' � C.; Inspect surfaces of applied wallboard to assure that board
� is plumb and true. Do not commence work until
� deficiencies have been corrected.
' ' D.I After tub, shower pan or receptor is installed, place
I , , temporary 1/4" spacer around lip of fixtures . Precut
' board to required sizes and make necessary cutouts for
� � installation of tile backerboard.
�
3i . 02 CEILING BOARD INSTALLATION
' I
; A. i Install ceiling gypsum board before board is installed on
' walls unless walls are required to extend to the deck
j I above . Comply with manufacturer' s printed instructions
�I ' ' for installing.
i
, 3� . 03I WALLBOARD INSTALLATION
I'�, � ' �
j A. � Install all wallboard vertically and in accordance with
� manufacturer' s printed instructions : High priority walls
' ; shall be installed first and the lessor priority walls
shall be installed thereafter as required.
�� ' i 1 . Leave a 1/4" - 3/8" max. space between floor slab and
bottom edge of wallboard and seal with acoustical
sealant.
, I
2 . Where double studs are installed to act as control
joints, leave 1/2 inch wide separation in wallboard for
� installation of specified metal control joint . Control
� I joints not to exceed 30 feet on center.
November 25, 1998 09260-3 98088 . 00
1
�' �
'
3 . Where gypsum board walls form 135 degree angles, �
install galvanized steel angles running full height of
gypsum board to reinforce joints . �
4 . Where wallboard extends to bottom of inetal or concrete
decks, etc . , cut wallboard to clearances as required on '
drawings . See details for all smoke walls, fire &
smoke walls, fire walls, and all other wall types .
5 . Mud & tape all vertical & horizontal drywall jo_nts . �
Joints mudded and taped above ceiling spaces neeci not
be sanded. IN NO CASE shall drywall mud be used at
joint between drywall and structure above. This joint '
shall be caulked as required for type of wall
construction. See drawing details .
B. Stencil all corridor partitions, smoke, fire, horizontal '
exit, exit enclosures and other rated partitions with
permanent 2 inch high letters identifying the name and
hour rating of the partition, approximately 8 " above the
ceilin ever 20 feet on both sides of artition or 10
, J Y P , I
feet from corners, and identified once in each space
i having fire-rated or smoke walls . Identify walls as '
applicable, "1-HOUR FIRE, " "2-HOUR FIRE & SMOKE, SMOKE
RESISTIVE WALL TO DECK, " etc .
C . Double Layer Wallboard �
1 . Screw first layer to studs and runners with spec�fied
screws . Space screws at studs 8 inches staggered o . c . �
at joint and 12 inches o .c . at intermediate studs .
2 . For non-rated construction: Install first layer of '
' wallboard with long edges of board vertical and install
I second layer in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations .
� 3 . For fire rated construction: Instal
1 second layer of '
wallboard with �oints offset from those of first 1Gyer.
Screw attach second layer in accordance with �
, manufacturer' s printed instructions .
D. One Hour Walls : �
1 . One layer of 5/8" Type X wallboard applied to each side
of 3 5/8" metal studs . The wallboard shall be applied
with the long dimension vertical . The vertical joints '
shall be staggered one stud spacing on each side of
wall . The horizontal joints shall be staggered on each
side of the wall . The wall shall extend tight to the '
deck above and be sealed to the deck. All joints not
to exceed 1/4" shall be taped and sealed with drywall
mud and or Thermafiber safing.
'
� November 25 , 1998 09260-4 980�8 . 00
�
I
,
� � �
�
� �
� 3 . 04 � WALLBOARD FINISHING
I
� A. Walls shall be plumb and true and all corners shall be
' ' i plumb and square .
B. Finish joints in accordance with wallboard manufacturer' s
� � printed instructions .
, C.� The contractor shall be familiar with the finishing levels
� as described by the Gypsum Association from Level 1 to
Level 5 , and apply these finishes as required for final
finish as called
for in the drawings, i . e. , painting
� � different types of wall covering, etc .
�
' Examples . (These notes are brief and are guidelines only,
' � use Gypsum Association pamphlet #GA214-90 . )
� I
I 1 . Level 1 - Above Ceilings .
� � 2 . Level 2 - Where water resistant gyp board is used.
i 3 . Level 3 - Where heavy grade wallcovering is used.
' ; ; 4 . Level 4 - Where light grade wallcovering and flat
paint is used.
' S . Level 5 - Where gloss enamel, semi-gloss enamel,
�
and epoxy paint are used.
' D. ' Employ only qualified wallboard finishers for this work.
� ' �
i E. After finishing is completed and before paint or wall
� covering is applied, inspect walls and make corrections to
' � provide smooth surfaces free from defects .
1 � �
� I END OF SECTION
� I
i �
� ; '
, I j
! i
�
1 � I
�
�
i
�
1 , �
November 25, 1998 09260-5 98088 . 00
� ,
1 � � '
�
� °
' , SECTION 09500
�
; ! ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
�
IART 1 GENER.AL
� 1 . 01 INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED
i
� A. j Access Doors : SEC. 15050 .
a
i . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� � A. Qualifications of Installer:
� ' 1 . Minimum of three project installations of comparable
� extent as proposed project.
�
I 2 . Submit written description of material installer,
' � listing name of material manufacturers, qualifications
� of installation personnel, and years of concurrent
� contracting experience.
, B. Tolerances :
I
; 1 . Deflection:
� a. Suspension system components, hangers, and
fastening devices supporting light fixtures,
� � ceiling grilles, and acoustical units : Maximum
' I deflection 1/360 of the span.
i
� ' b. Deflection Tests : ASTM C635 .
� 2 . Allowable tolerance of finished acoustical ceilings
� system: Level within 1/8" in 12 feet .
�
' C. Fire Ratings :
�
1 . Fire Hazard Classification:
' � a. Maximum flame spread: Underwriter' s Laboratories,
i Inc . (UL) 0-25 ; smoke developed: 0-450 .
' � i
b. ASTM E84 .
' 1�. 03 SUBMITTALS
i
� A. ; Shop Drawings (Include the following) :
I 1 . Layout indication.
'
� 2 . Insert and hanger spacing and fastening details .
� i
� �
�
N;ovember 25 , 1998 09500-1 98088 . 00
' ' i
�
� '
3 . Splicing method for main and cross runners . �
4 . Change in level details . �
5 . Acoustical unit support at ceiling fixture.
B. Manufacturer' s Literature: �
1 . Submit manufacturer' s recommendation for installation
of suspension system. �
C . Certificates :
1 . Furnish certification of flame spread index of fire '
rating organization.
2 . Furnish certification of materials and systems �
conforming to specification requirements .
D. Maintenance Materials : '
1 . Furnish extra materials equal to 1% of each typ�� of
acoustical material supplied.
2 . Furnish suspension system components in amount
�
sufficient to install extra ceiling units .
1 . 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ��
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective �
packaging, with manufacturer' s labels indicating brand
name, pattern, size, thickness and fire rating as
applicable, legible and intact .
B. Store materials in original protective packaging to '
prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.
C . Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture �
content and temperature.
D. Do not begin installation until sufficient materials to �
complete a room are received. �
1 . 05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS '
A. Complete installation of dampening materials before
beginning work. �
B. Maintain humidity of 65-75% in area where acoustical
materials are to be installed, 25 hours before, during and ' ,
25 hours after installation.
C . Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 to 70
degrees F prior to and during installation of materials . �
November 25 , 1998 09500-2 98088 . 00 '
� � .
� ' '�,
�
� �
' PART 2 PRODUCTS
i
2 . 01i SUSPENSION SYSTEM
� � A. Type: Ex osed Tee Grid. �
� p ��
� I ,
' 1 . ASTM C635 .
�
� I
� ; 2 . Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty systems . I
I
�� 3 . All components of system from one manufacturer. I,
� i I 4 . Size : 24 x 48 in. and 24 x 24 in. (See drawings) . !
B., Main, Cross, and Concealed Members : I
� 1 . Web design: Single. Exposed flange 15/16 in. wide. I�
t � �
2 . Cold rolled steel, electro-zinc coated with prepainted I
, finish to match color of ceiling tile units . �I
� '�
C.; Edge Molding: I�
I li
, � 1 . Minimum 0 . 020 in. steel, channel or angle-shaped, with �
' � minimum flange width of 15/16 in.
1 � D. Hold down clips :
1 . Type as supplied by suspension system manufacturer.
, I E.� Rough Suspension:
I� 1 . Han er wire: Minimum 12
g ga. , galv. soft-annealed, mild
� i steel wire.
; 2 . Wire ties : 18 ga. , galv. annealed steel wire.
� , 3 . Hanger clips : Prefabricated metal clamps for fastening
as required. �
I
� i I 4 . Carrying channels : 16 ga. , 1-1/2 in. , cold rolled
� steel .
' 2 . 02i CEILING TILE UNITS
A. Mineral Fiber Acoustical Units :
, I
� 1 . United States Gypsum, No . 562 , Auratone, Fissured 24 x
' 48 X 3�4�� .
i
�
� i
Novelber 25 , 1998 09500-3 98088 . 00
� ; �
�
B. Vinyl Faced Gypsum Units : '
1 . "Vinylrock X" as manufactured by Capaul Div. of �
Acoustiflex Corp. or "USG Gypsum Ceiling Panels " ,
Stipple White, as manufactured by United States Gypsum.
2 . Size: 24 x 48 x 1/2 inches . �
PART 3 EXECUTION �
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Suspension System: ASTM C636 . �
1 . Hangers :
a. Install hanger clips as recommended by '
manufacturer.
b. Space hanger 'wires 4 ft . o .c . , each direction. ,
c . Install additional hangers at ends of each
suspension member 6 in. from vertical surfaces . '
d. Do not splay wires more than 5 in. in a 4 ft .
vertical drop. �
e. Wrap wire a minimum of three times horizontally,
turning ends upward. '
f . Saddle tie carrying channels to main structurc for
indirect hung suspension system.
g. Install additional hanger wire at each corner of ,
recessed light fixture not supported by regular
grid hanger. �
2 . Main and Cross runners :
a. Space main runners at 4 ft . o .c . , at right ang_e to �
carrying channel . Level and square to adjacent -
walls . Wire clip to channels at all intersections .
b. Space cross runners at 2 ft . on centers . �
3 . Wall molding: �
a. Install wall molding at intersections of suspended
ceiling and vertical surfaces .
b. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or �
� install corner caps .
�
November 25 , 1998 09500-4 98088 . 00
�
�
' c . Attach to vertical surface with mechanical
fasteners .
� B. Ceiling Tile Units :
1 . Install in level plane in straight line courses .
� 2 . Place materials to bear all around on suspension
members .
� 3 . Minimum width of border tiles : One-half unit
dimension.
� 4 . Provide field cut, scored, square edges on all tegular
edge tiles, to match factory edge.
, 3 . 02 CLEANING
I
� A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after
� installation.
B. Touch-up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in
painted surfaces .
� C. Remove and replace damaged, or improperly installed units .
� �
I END OF SECTION
, ! ,
,
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
November 25 , 1998 09500-5 98088 . 00
� � �
,
�
�
�
�
, 1
1
! �
�
�
1
1
�
�
�
1
�
�
1 �
�
' � � ,
,
� .
� SECTION 09650
I I
i � � ; RESILIENT FLOORING
i,
PART 1 GENERAL
� I
1�. 01 i RELATED WORK
� � A. ' Section 01300 - Submittals .
B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Finish troweling
� ' of floor slabs .
�
1�. 02 ! SUBMITTALS
i
' ! A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section
� 01300 .
i
� B. � Submit five copies of manufacturer' s product data and
, � installation instructions for types of resilient flooring
' and accessories specified.
1 C . When work is completed, submit two copies of
� ; � manufacturer' s written instructions for maintenance of
; flooring and accessories .
� '
1 . 03 EXTRA MATERIAL
� i A. Furnish additional resilient flooring material for
; replacement and maintenance.
; B. Furnish materials of each size, color pattern and type of
I � materials installed.
� � C . Furnish materials at the rate of one carton for each 1500
I � , � sq. ft . or fraction thereof installed.
1�. 04 DELIVERY AND STOR.AGE
I' � � A. � Deliver materials in manufacturer' s original, unopened
� ; containers with manufacturer' s labels legible and intact .
� B. � Store and protect materials in accordance with
manufacturer' s printed instructions .
�
' 1I. 05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain temperature of spaces and materials at a minimum
of 65 degrees F for at least 48 hours before installation
� and for not less than 48 hours after installation.
Subsequently, maintain temperature of at least 55 degrees
' I F in areas where work has been completed.
■ � i
November 25 , 1998 09650-1 98088 . 00
1 ! �
'
B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other �
finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed, but before casework is placed. �
PART 2 PRODUCTS �
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (Refer to Finish Plans for
Actual Materials Specified)
2 . 02 MATERIALS ��
A. Vinyl-Composition Tile : FS SS-T-312 , Type IV, 12 " x 12 " x
1/8" , asbestos free, tapered or bullnose edge . j
B. Resilient Sheet Flooring: 6 ' -0" wide rolls, . 085 " gauge.
C. Resilient Base: 4" high. Provide factory molded inside '
and outside corners .
1 . Standard top-set, cove base on resilient flooring and �
carpeted areas .
2 . Standard straight base where areas are carpeted. �
D. Resilient Edge (Terminal) Strips : 1/8" thick x 1" or more
wide, homogeneous rubber, tapered or bull nose on outer ,�
edge.
E. Adhesive Systems : Use adhesives as specified by the
manufacturer for the specific flooring and substrate as �
required.
F. Integral Base Fillet Strips : Cove stick by manufacturer to 1
back-up resilient sheet flooring is turned up walls to
form an integral base .
G. Cap Strips : Supplied by resilient sheet flooring �
manufacturer to cap integral base turned up walls .
H. Feature Strips : Supplied by resilient sheet flooring �
manufacturer for division of adjacent floor finish under
doors . �
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 PREPAR.ATION ,
A. Examine floors and walls for defects which might adversely �
affect tile work or its appearance. Do not begir� work
until defects have been corrected.
B. Thoroughly clean floors before applying adhesive . �
November 25, 1998 09650-2 98088 . 00 '
� .
'
� C. Verify the subfloor is acceptable to begin resilient
flooring installation. Perform bond and moisture test and
� calcium chloride test per manufacturer' s recommendations .
Acceptance of the subfloor is the responsibility of the
flooring contractor.
� 3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Use care in installing materials so that no stains appear
� on finished work.
B. Apply adhesive with clean notched trowels .
� 1 . Place adhesive only on that amount of area which can be
covered by flooring material within the recommended
� working time of the adhesive.
� � I
2 . Water base adhesive should be allowed to dissipate to
where the mastic changes color before flooring material
� is placed.
3 . Place adhesive uniformly.
� i C. Lay tile from center of space so that no tile less than
half size occurs in width or length of the space.
� 1 . Lay tile square with room axes . Lay tile with grain of
each tile perpendicular to adjoining tiles .
2 . Cut tiles neatly and fit to and around fixtures, I
, recesses, pipes and butting surfaces . Fit within 1/64
inch.
I
� 3 . Butt edges of flooring material tightly together.
4 . Use a roller, or firmly press tiles into adhesive so
1 that they are well bonded.
5 . Neatly trowel adhesive on wall and install rubber base.
� D. WELDED SEAM VINYL FLOORING
1 . Install flooring as specified above making sure that
� all inside and outside corners are consistent, radiuses
are tight and true and all work is done in a
workmanlike manner.
, 2 . Machine route seams, install PVC thread in routed
seams, and heat weld seams in accordance with
, manufacturer' s printed instructions .
�
Novemlber 25, 1998 09650-3 98088 . 00
� i
i' I
�
E. INTEGRAL BASE '
1 . Where flooring material turns up walls to form an ,
integral base:
a. Install cove fillet strips at floor/wall
intersections with adhesive . �
b. Turn flooring material or pre-moulded base up �Nalls
as shown on drawings and set to walls with ,�
adhesive.
c . Carefully miter corners and heat seal seams . �
d. Install cap strip at top of base .
F. BASE IN CARPETED AREAS �
1 . Install straight base in all areas to receive carpet
over 1/2 " in height in accordance with the finish �
schedule.
a. Straight base shall be installed prior to �
installation of carpet.
2 . Install cove base in all areas to receive carpet 1/2 "
in height or less in accordance with the finish ,
schedule.
3 . 03 CLEANING �
A. When installation in each space is completed, clean floor
and base . Cover floor with heavy paper or plastic
material taped in place. �
B. Just before final inspection, clean floor and base and
perform maintenance in accordance with manufactu.rer' s �
printed instructions .
END OF SECTION
�-
�
�
�
. �
November 25 , 1998 09650-4 98088 . 00 �
' � �
, , SECTION 09680
' � CARPET GLUE-DOWN INSTALLATION
PART 1 GENERAL
' 1 . 01 SCOPE & COORDINATION
I �
1 A. Arrange for job site storage in advance of arrival of
materials . Do not deliver materials to job site until
arrangements have been made.
' B. Coordinate carpet installation with other trades required
' to work in the same areas .
�
C . Furnish and install all supplementary or misc . items
, t incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and
� complete installation.
�
i1 . 021 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTORS
I A. Approved as an installation contractor by carpet
' manufacturers whose carpeting is selected.
� B. ' Employ only experienced, qualified, competent foremen and
� � journeymen installers .
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
' A. Submit items to Owner' s Representative in accordance with
� Section 01300 .
B. Carpet Samples, Specifications & Warranties : Submit 3
� carpet samples (minimum size 6" X 6" ) , 4 sets
�, manufacturer' s specifications and 4 sets manufacturer' s
' i i warranty for each pattern and color used to the General
Contractor for submittal to the Architect.
� C . Installation Data: Submit four copies of manufacturer' s
data for adhesive to be used, and printed instructions for
installation to the General Contractor for submittal to
; the Architect .
' D. Maintenance Instructions : Submit four copies of
manufacturer' s maintenance instructions to General
1 Contractor for submittal to Architect .
E. Seaming Diagram: Submit 3 copies of seaming diagram to the
' General Contractor for approval . Location of transition
and edge pieces should be indicated on drawing. Include
samples of proposed manufacturer, model # and color of
these transition and edge pieces .
'
� November 25 , 1998 09680-1 98088 . 00
�
1 . Submit notarized certificates from carpet manufacturers ,
stating that carpet supplied meets with requirements of
this specification. �
2 . Submit certified laboratory test reports for
flammability in accordance with Part 2 . 02 .
F . Submit copy of letter or other positive approval from '
State Fire Marshal . See APPROVALS paragraph below.
1 . 04 APPROVALS ,
A. Submit, in states requiring it, a certified laboratory �
test report for flammability to State Fire Marshal of the
state where project is located stating that carpet meets
or exceeds required Flame Spread Rating and obtain Fire
Marshal ' s approval before ordering carpet. �
, B. Comply with State, Local and Federal codes .
1 . 05 USABLE SCRAP CARPET '
A. Deliver usable car et ieces of leftover car et to Oumer.
A P P �
I Neatly package and wrap such carpeting for storage
protection.
1 . 06 STORAGE �
A. Arrange, in advance of delivery, with General Contractor
' for secure, clean, dry storage space. '
B. Owner will not accept responsibility for safeguarding
carpet and accessories .
1 . 07 JOB CONDITIONS '
A. Heating and Ventilating: Maintain uniform temperature
between 65 degrees and 95 degrees F in spaces receiving �
, carpet for a eriod of at least 72 hours before car et is
P p
' installed, during installation, and for at least 72 hours
after installation. Provide ventilation in spaces u�here �
carpet is installed during installation and for at least
72 hours after installation.
B. Conditioning: Unroll carpet 24 hours before installation. ,
PART 2 PRODUCTS ,
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS �
A. Refer to finish Drawings for carpet manufacturers, styles
and colors . ,
�
November 25 , 1998 09680-2 98088 . 00 '
'
� B. Trim and Edge Accessories - Mercer Products Co . or
approved substitute.
' � 2�. 02 CARPET PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Rating:
� 1 . All carpet shall meet requirements of Standard for
Surface Flammability of Carpets and Rugs, DOC FF-1-70
' (Methenamine Pill Test) .
2 . Carpet shall have a minimum critical flux of 0 . 45 per
' square centimeter as determined by Flooring Radiant
� Panel Test ASTM E-648 .
I
3 . Carpet shall have a smoke density development of 450 or
� less per NBS Smoke Chamber Test NFPA 258 .
I B. Permanent Static Protection: 3 . 0 KV or less at 20%
� ` � relative humidity and 70 degrees F, when tested by AATCC '
I � 134, Electrostatic Propensity.
' C . Vermin Proofing: Treat carpet to make it completely moth III
and vermin proof .
I
' D. Dampproofing: Treat carpet materials so that carpet is
' compatible with installation over concrete slab subfloors .
E. Factory Runs : Produce carpet, of each type specified, in
� one factory run and from one dye lot . Guarantee colors
i and shades to be uniform throughout the run of material .
2 . 03 CARPET ACCESSORIES
� A. Furnish and install accessory trim pieces at all
transitions to another floor material and all exposed
' � edges of carpet. Submit samples in accordance with 1 . 03
E.
� 2 . 04 ADHESIVES AND SEALERS
A. Adhesives General .
' 1 . Provide adhesives as recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
' 2 . Comply with requirements for flame spread rating, same
as specified for carpet.
� � B. Waterproof cement : As recommended by carpet manufacturer.
Comply with requirements for flame spread rating.
�
� i
� i
Nlovemlber 25 , 1998 09680-3 98088 . 00
' �
'
C . Seam Sealers : Provide sealers and other materials, if �
required, in accordance with carpet manufacturer' s printed
instructions . ,
PART 3 EXECUTION '
3 . 01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Examine floor
s for defects or conditions which might
adversely affect carpet installation or appearance. Do '
not install carpet until defects or conditions are
I corrected. ,
B. Clean floors thoroughly of substances detrimental to
proper installation. Allow floors to dry completely.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION �
A. Install carpet in accordance with approved shop drawings, �
� seaming diagram, and manufacturer' s printed instructions .
B. Cut carpet, where required, to allow proper seam and �
pattern match. Make cuts straight and true, without frayed
edges . Small patched areas and seamed pieces of carpet
are not acceptable .
C . Locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic . ,
D. Doorway seams shall be centered directly under the door. �
E. Join seams so as not to detract from appearance of carpet
installation. Coat cut edges with seam- sealer recommended �
by carpet manufacturer.
F. Spread adhesive in quantity required, after primer
application, if manufacturer recommends a primer. ,
G. Do not change run of pile where carpet is contir_uous
through a wall opening. �
H. Fit car et snu 1 to wall
p g y s and other vertical surfaces .
I . Lay entire carpet tight and flat to subfloor, well
, attached at ed es and so that it resents a un' f �
, g , p i orm
' appearance .
J. Install edge strips and trim in accordance with �
manufacturer' s printed instructions .
'
�
November 25 , 1998 09680-4 98088 . 00 '
� ,. . .
� 3 . 03 INSPECTING, CORRECTING, AND CLEANING
A. As installa�.ian in each space is campleted, care�ully
� inspect entire in�tallatian for defect� . ESpecially
examine seams £ar �ign� a� raveling and separation, and
excessive adhesive.
� B. Make correc�ionS a� required. If defects are visible
a�ter at�.empted correction, replace defective carpet.
' C . Thoraughly clean carpet .
D. Owner reserves the right to tes�. installed carpet far
� compliance with specifications within time periad covered
by manufacturer' s warranty.
� 3 . 04 PROTECTING
A. Furniture placernent and heavy �.raf�ic shall not accur for
4$ hours following a.nstalla�.ion.
� B. P1.ace plastic on carpet to protect from construction dir�,
an:d traffic. Da no�. remove untzl all phases of
� construc�.ion are complete.
� END OF SECTION
�
� I
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
November 25, 1998 09680-5 98Q88 . OQ
� i I
i !
'
-- ----
.'
� SECTION 09900
� PAINTING
, PART 1 GENER.AL
1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES
� ' A. Painting. The work required under this section consists
of all painting, finishing and related items necessary to
complete the work indicated on drawings described in the
��I ' specifications and listed in the Painting and Finishing
schedule.
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE
' A. Qualifications :
� 1 . Employ only skilled mechanics experienced in applying
commercial painting products .
, B. Include on labels or containers :
1 . Manufacturers Name
, ' 2.� Product Name and Number
3 . Color
' 4 . Batch Number
� C. Field Quality Control :
1 . Request review of first finished room, item or area.
' 2 . Use the first acceptable room, item or area as the
project standard for the rest of the work.
3 . Each room, item or area used as a project standard
r shall be no smaller than 100 sq. ft . in surface area
unless otherwise directed by the Architect .
' ' D. Color Consistency should be maintained in all materials by
the manufacturer. All tinting is to be done by the
manufacturer unless the Architect approves other
' � arrangements .
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
� A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section
01300 .
'
� November 25 , 1998 09900-1 98088 . 00
�
B. Color Selection: '
1 . As chosen by the Architect/Owner and referenced in ,
finish schedule and on drawings .
1 . 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials in sealed containers with manufacturers '
labels intact and legible. ��
B. Storage of Materials : �
1 . Store materials in a protected area at a temperature ,
between 35 F . and 110 F.
2 . Open and mix materials in storage area.
, 1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS ,
A. Apply coating only under the following prevailing ,
environmental conditions :
I 1 . Air and surface temperatures are not below 50 degrees
F. or above 120 degrees F . unless otherwise approved '
by the manufacturer.
2 . Surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F . above the �
dewpoint .
3 . The atmosphere is relatively free of airborne dust. �
B. Cover or otherwise protect surfaces not to be painted.
1 . 06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ,
A. Insure that all materials used are in compliance with
current State and Federal EPA regulations with regard to ,
Volatile Organic Compounds (V.O.C. ) .
B. Insure that all materials used meet NFPA (National Fire
, Protection Association) No . 101 Class A requirements for ,
Flame Spread and Smoke Density.
C . Comply with manufacturers recommendations for '
environmental conditions under which painting systems are
applied.
�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS _ t
A. Materials shall be products of the Porter Paint Co . , as
� listed in Section 3 . 06 Painting and Finishing Schedule and '
November 25, 1998 09900-2 98088 . 00 �
, . ,.
, to establish performance re irements and a s
� tandard of
quality, unless otherwise specified. PPG & Sherwin
� Williams. are accepted as equals .
B. Use products of the same manufacturer for each coating
system and for each type of surface.
� 1 . Requests for substitutions shall comply with all
conditions in Section 01340 and the following:
, C. Materials supplied by other non-specified suppliers will
be considered if the following prevailing conditions
' exist:
1 . Performance criteria of the specified materials are
exceeded by the submitted alternate materials as listed
, on the technical data sheets of each specified product.
2 . The submittal must comgare the performance criteria of
� the specified material with that of the submitted
material and be documented in a side by side manner for
the Architect to review.
' 3 . Substitute materials must be for complete systems and
not individual products combined with the specified
materials and the performance criteria for all products
� within a system must meet or exceed the specified ,
materials .
, 4 . Only one alternate submittal will be received for this
specification and must be accompanied by a detailed
statement of the sum to be added or deducted from the
base bid should alternate materials be accepted.
� 2 . 02 MISCELLANEOUS '
' A. Oils, turpentine, and other materials required to
accomplish this work shall be first quality materials .
� B. Primers shall be specified by manufacturer of the finish
paints used and detailed in Section 3 . 06 .
C . Thinners shall be of a type as recommended by the paint
' manufacturer for each product specified in section 3 . 06 .
D. Turpentine shall comply with requirements of Federal
' Specification TT-T-801 .
E. Mineral Spirits shall comply with requirements of Federal
� Specification TT-T-291 Grade 1 .
'
' November 25 , 1998 09900-3 98088 . 00
� i
. '
2 . 03 MATERIAL PREPAR.ATION �
A. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturers latest �
printed instructions .
B. Do not use materials beyond manufacturers recommended '
shelf life .
C . Do not use mixed materials beyond manufacturers
recommended pot life. '
PART 3 EXECUTION ,
3 . 01 PRE-WORK INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces to be coated and report any conditions '
that would adversely affect the appearance or performance
of the coating systems and which cannot be put into an
acceptable condition by the preparatory work specifi�d in '
paragraph 3 . 02 .
B. Do not proceed with surface preparation and application �
until the surface is acceptable or authorized to proceed
is given by the Architect .
3 . 02 SURFACE PREPAR.ATION ,
A. General :
1 . Always follow manufacturers recommendations for proper �
surface preparation for each specified product . Faulty
finish due to improper use of material or workmanship '
shall be replaced by the applicator at his own expense.
� 2 . Dislodge dirt, plaster nibs, mortar spatter and other
dry material by scrapping or brushing. Remove dust and '
loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming or
blowing with high pressure air.
3 . Remove oil, wax and grease by scraping off heavy r
deposits and cleaning with mineral spirits or a hot ,
trisodium phosphate solution followed by a water rinse. '
4 . Remove mold and mildew with a household bleach (Sodium
Hypochloride) in water solution: 7 parts water to 1
part bleach. Wash off bleach and allow to dry. ,
5 . Verify that surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and
free of dust, dirt, oil, wax, grease or other �
contaminants .
,
November 25 , 1998 09900-4 98088 . 00 '
i .
' B. Steel :
' 1 . Remove all rust, mill scale and other foreign matter by
the most appropriate method for the service level and
environment as recommended by the primer manufacturer.
' C . Nonferrous Metal :
1 : SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning to remove all contaminants .
iD. Galvanized Metal :
1 . Remove contaminants and protective mill coating by
' SSPC- SP1 Solvent Cleaning or Steam Cleaning.
E. Concrete, Masonry and Cement Stucco:
' 1 . Allow new concrete and masonry to cure 28 days .
� 2 . Scrape and grind fins and protrusions flush with
surface.
3 . Patch holes and cracks flush with surface.
� 4 . Rake mortar joints clean.
' F. Plaster:
1 . Allow to cure for 28 days .
, 2 . Remove nibs and other protrusions by scraping flush
with surface .
, 3 . Patch voids and cracks with spackling compound to match
texture of surface.
' G. Gypsum Board:
1 . Sand joint compound smooth and flush with surface using
' fine grit sandpaper.
2 . Fill nicks, scratches, holes and uneven spots with
spackling compound and after dry, sand flush with
, surface .
H. Wood:
, 1 . Remove surface deposits of sap and pitch by scraping
� and cleaning with mineral spirits .
� 2 . Seal knots and pitch pockets with a product
manufactured for this specific purpose.
� 3 . Sand rough spots of smooth siding and finish woodwork.
N'ovember 25 , 1998 09900-5 98088 . 00
'
�
i
�
r
4 . A�ter prime coat is dry, fill cracks, hales and �
scratches with suitable wood fil.ler or spac.�.ling
compound and when dry, sand flush with surface . �
5 . Sand lightly between eaats .
I . Cancrete Flaars . �
1 . Prepare concrete floors by acid etching, ship blasting
or mechanical shot blasting in accordance with �
manufacturers recommended procedure.
3 . 03 AFPLICATION � I
�
A. Mix and �.hin materials in accordance with the
manufacturer� grinted instructions. �
B. Apply ma�erials at specified f�lm thickness by method
recommended by the manufacturer.
C . Allow each coat �o dry thoroughly before recoating. � �
D. Vary color sligh�2y for each successive caa�. �
E. Cut in edges clean and sharp where work joins other �
materials or colars .
F. Make finish coats smooth, uniform in col.ar and free o� ,
brush marks, laps, runs, dry spray, overspray and skipped
ar mi�sed areas . � ;
G. Pzime glazing staps and glazing beads before glass is
installed. �
H. Backprime exterior woodwork which is ta receive pain,�
finish, with exterior primer.
I . Remove grilles, caverS, and access panels and paint �
separately.
J. Replace identifieation markings when painting over ar � �
spattered.
K. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, canvector and �
basebaard heating cabinet� that are visible through
grilles and lou�rers with one coat o� flat biack paint .
Pain� damper� exposed immediatel.y behind lauvers, grilles, �
etc . to match face panels .
L. Paint bath sides and edges of plywoad backboards for ,
electrical equipment before backbaards are insta11ec1 and
equipmen.� is mounted.
�
Navember 25, 1998 09900-6 98088 . Q0 �
� � �.: - '
� M. Remove electrical cover plates, hardware and other items
not scheduled to be painted before painting surfaces on
which such items are mounted. When painting is completed,
' re-install items .
N. Paint exterior metal housing of inechanical equipment on
roof or ground where color is not compatible with
adjoining facades or existing conditions as directed by
Architect and in accordance with materials specified in
, Section 3 . 06 . ,
O. Stencil all corridor partitions, smoke, fire, horizontal
exit, exit enclosures and other rated partitions with
' permanent 2 inch high letters identifying the name and
hour rating of the partition, approximately 8" above the
ceiling every 20 feet on both sides of partition, or 10
' feet from corners, and identified once in each space
I having fire-rated or smoke walls . Identify walls as
applicable, "1-HOUR FIRE, " "2-HOUR FIRE & SMOKE, SMOKE
RESISTIVE WALL TO DECK, " etc .
� P. Paint one coat of Surface Sealer S40149 1 . 0 - 2 . 0 mil
s DFT
by Porter Paint Co. on all walls scheduled to receive Type
� I vinyl .
3 . 04 INSPECTION
' A. Request acceptance of each coat before applying succeeding
coats from the Architect .
' B. Touch-up and repair all work that is not acceptable to the
Architect and request final acceptance.
� 3 . 05 CLEANING
A. Remove paint spatters from glass, plumbing fixtures and
' adjoining surfaces .
B. Repair any damage to coatings or surfaces caused by
cleaning operations .
' C. Remove debris from job site and leave storage area clean.
� 3 . 06 PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE
A. Surfaces not to be painted unless otherwise scheduled:
, 1 . Face brick.
2 . Pre-finished wall panels, partitions and ceiling tile.
� 3 . Items with factory applied final finish.
, 4 . Concealed ducts, pipes and conduit .
' November 25, 1998 09900-7 98088 . 00
. ,
B. Contractoar is responsible for �.he pro�.ection of �urface� �
determined not to be coated and to correct de:Eects
praduced in the process af application. The £ollowing �
schedule calls for �he recommended amounts of material ta
be applied. However, if sufficient ha.ding and pratectiori
i� nat accompli�hed apply enough additional material ta �
the satisfac�.ian of the Architect. Reques�. final app�oval
o� each substrate and area.
C. Exteriar Painting and Finishing Schedule: �
EPS 2A: NOT USED
EPS 1 : NOT USED �
EPS 2 : NUT LTSED '
EPS 3 : NOT USED
EPS 4 : NOT USED �
EPS 5 : NOT USED
EI�S 6 : NOT USED � i
EPS 7 : NOT Ua�ED I
D. Interior Painting and Finishing Schedule: �
IPS 1 : Nt�T USED �
IPS 2A: N(�T LTSED
IPS 2 : NQT USED �
� IPS 3 : NQT USED
� 'IPS 4 : NOT USED
IPS 5 : NOT USED �
�
i
IPS 6 : NOT USED
IPS 7 : N(�T USED ,
IPS 8 : NOT USED
IPS 9 : Gypsum Board �
� Water-Based Epoxy. Fini�h: Gloss, Sema.glo�s .
lst coat - 767 Latex Primer Sealer. i
2nd & 3rd coat - 9371 Dura-G1aze Gloss Epoxy OR 96025
Dura-Glaze Semi- Gio�s Epo�r 2 . 0 mils DFT.
�
November 25, 1998 09900--8 98Q88 . Q0 �
' � ;
�
' IPS 10 : NOT USED
IPS 11 : Gypsum Wallboard
� ' Latex Enamel - Semigloss
Semigloss
' 1st coat - 767 Primer Sealer.
2nd & 3rd coat - 109 Latex Semigloss, or 36168 Lo Sheen
' Eggshell .
IPS 12 : NOT USED
' IPS 13 : NOT USED
I
IPS 14 : NOT USED
, IPS 15 : Pipe Identification.
All piping within each mechanical room, fan room,
, , boiler room, powerhouse and other exposed areas shall
� � be painted in it' s entirety with Advantage 900
Acrylic/Gloss Enamel .
' 1 . Natural Gas - 6539-4 Purple
2 . Propane - Safety Orange
3 . Fuel Oil - 6693-1 Tan
, 4 . Standpipe and Sprinkler Piping - Safety Red.
5 . Steam Condensate - 6149-5 Orange
6 . Chilled Water - Safety Green
, 7 . Condenser Water - 6359-3 Aqua
8 . Hot Water Piping - 6026-3 Pink
9 . Domestic Cold Water - Safety Blue
10 . Domestic Hot Water - 6071-6 Dark Pink
' 11 . Elevator Hydro Lines - 6094-5 Coral
12 . Chemical Feed Piping - Safety Yellow
' Stenciling of all exposed and concealed piping shall be in
� accordance with Division 15, Mechanical using the same coating
ma�terials .
' END OF SECTION
i
1 -
1
1 �
� November 25, 1998 09900-9 98088 . 00
I,
�
,
' SECTION 09952
' VINYL WALLCOVERING
PART 1 GENERAL
, 1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Only use materials which have Fire Hazard Classifications
meeting requirements set forth below.
' B. Only employ qualified wallcovering mechanics for this
work.
C. Install test panels for full width and corner applications
' of vinyl wallcovering materials in areas designated by
Architect . Test panels accepted by the Architect will be
used as the standard of comparison for the work.
' 1 . 02 COORDINATION
�
� A. Coordinate this work with other trades required to install
work in areas to receive wallcovering. Do not install
wallcovering until work which might cause damage to
wallcovering has been completed.
' 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
, A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section
01300 .
� B. Submit five copies of selected manufacturer' s product data
' and installation instructions for each selected type of
wall covering.
�
' C . Submit five copies of certif�cate from adhesive
manufacturer stating that adhesive will permit removal of
vinyl wallcovering from gypsum drywall without damage to
� drywall paper facing.
D. Submit two copies of selected manufacturer' s printed
instructions for maintenance of installed materials for
' transmittal to Owner. Include manufacturer' s name,
material brand name, and color and pattern designation.
1� 04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
'
A. Deliver materials in original packaging clearly labeled to
, identify manufacturer, brand name, quality and grade of
material, and fire hazard classification.
� B. Store materials in a dry, warm place in original,
' undamaged packaging. Do not store rolled goods on ends .
�
' Nivember 25 , 1998 09952-1 98088 . 00
I
! �
I �
'
C . Maintain temperature in storage area above 40° F and not '
less than 65° F for at least 24 hours before installing.
1 . 05 ENiTIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS '
A. Comply with manufacturers recommendations concerning
� environmental conditions under which wallcoverings should ,
be installed.
1 . 06 JOB CONDITIONS ,
i A. Do not apply materials in unclean areas, or where dust is
being generated.
B. Areas to receive applications must have a reasonably '
constant temperature of 60-70 degrees F. measured at the
floor level . '
PART 2 PRODUCTS
'
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A. Fire Hazard Classification Required: UL Label indicating �
fire hazard classification determined by ASTM E84 .
1 . Flame spread: Not more than 25 . '
2 . Fuel contributed: Not more than 15 .
3 . Smoke developed: Not more than 450 . 1
B. Provide wallcoverings of colors and patterns shown on the
Finish Schedule on the drawings . '
2 . 02 WALLCOVERINGS
A. See Finish Schedule for approved materials and '
manufacturers .
B. Class and Types : Comply with FS CCC-W-408 . �
1 . Type 1 : Light duty, total weight 11 to 16 ounces/linear
yard, 54 inches wide . Prime gypsum board walls one '
coat white primer in conjunction with Type I
wallcoverings .
2 . Type 2 : Medium duty, total weight 19 to 27 ,
ounces/linear yard, 54 inches wide.
'
'
November 25 , 1998 09952-2 98088 . 00 '
' '. „ ,.
� 2 . 03 ADHESIVE
' A. Type: An adhesive manufactured expressly for use with
selected wallcoverings .
1 . Mildew-resistant and non-staining to wallcovering.
r2 . Strippable type adhesive is optional for Type I vinyl
wallcovering as these walls are painted one coat of
, primer. Strippable adhesive is required for all Type
II & III vinyl wallcovering.'
�
iPART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION
� A. Before commencing work, inspect surfaces for defects which
might adversely affect installation or appearances . Do
' not commence work until defects have been corrected.
B. Assure that proper environmental conditions exist before
work is begun and while work is in progress .
' 3 . 02 PREPARATION
� A. Remove vinyl wallcovering from packaging and allow it to
acclimatize for at least 24 hours before installation.
' B. Check materials for defects before installing. Reject
damaged materials and promptly remove them from job site.
C. Remove switch and receptacle plates, and surface mounted
' fixtures from surfaces where vinyl wallcovering is to be
installed.
' 3 . 03 INSTALLATION
� A. Install wallcovering before equipment and casework is
' placed as possible .
B. Install materials only on clean dry walls .
' C . Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer' s printed
instructions .
� � D. Use wallcovering panels in exact order as cut from rolls .
Use rolls in consecutive order as numbered by I
manufacturer. Fill in spaces above and below windows,
, above doors and similar areas in sequence from rolls .
E. Trim deeply textured patterns, or where patterns must be
matched, on a flat work table.
'
' Nivember 25 , 1998 09952-3 98088 . 00 �i
I �
I �
�
�, ,
� F . Han smooth n -
on match
g , ed patterns by applying strips on �
wall overla in the e
, pp g dges and double cutting through
both thicknesses . '
G. Apply fabric secure, smooth, clean and without wrinkles,
gaps or overlaps . Eliminate air pockets and ensure full
bond to wall surface. �
H. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.
I . Make seams straight and plumb, and a minimum of 6 inches '
away from corners .
J. Remove adhesive from surface at each seam before '
, proceeding to next. Wipe clean. Do not use solvents .
K. Replace switch and receptacle plates, and surface mounted '
fixtures, and ensure that cut edges of wallcovering are
completely concealed. Trim bottom of sheets 3 " from
finish floor to allow for application of rubber base . '
L. If vinyl wallcovering of different color changes at
outside corners, provide full height vinyl cover corner '
strips, approved by Architect .
M. Before final inspection, repair damaged wallcovering.
3 . 04 CLEANING �
A. Clean wallcoverings of adhesives, dust, dirt and other '
contaminants .
B. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean.
,
END OF SECTION
'
'
'
�
,
'
'
November 25 , 1998 09952-4 98038 . 00 ,
1 I
� SECTION 10260
� �
i BUMPERGUARDS AND CORNER GUARDS
1 I
PART 1 GENERAL
I1 . 01 SUBMITTALS
�
' A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section
01300 .
' B. Submit four copies of manufacturer' s product data,
.� � including full range of colors and finishes available, and
� illustrations of accessories and hardware.
' C. Submit four copies of shop drawings indicating locations
where corner guards will be installed and where wall
i guards will be installed. Indicate methods of anchoring,
' i and how accessory items will be fitted in.
��
1�. 02 COORDINATION
'I � A. Coordinate this work with other trades required to install
work in areas where wall and corner guards are to be
i installed. Do not install guards until painting and vinyl
' � wall covering work has been completed in those areas .
1 . 03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTING
� ' � A. ; Deliver and store items in manufacturer' s original, sealed
I ! packaging.
B. Maintain protective coatings on guards until installation
' is com lete. Remove rotective coati
P p ngs at time of final
� cleanup for final construction inspection.
' I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
' 2 . 01 Corner Guards : Construction Specialties, Decogard
Products, Inc . , Pawling Rubber Corp. , Institutional
� Products Corp. , Korogard by Koroseal and Balco 48" high
' ' surface mounted units, extruded aluminum retainer channel,
rigid PVC guards, and top and bottom caps . Colors will be
selected by Owner. Provide the following types :
' I A. � At square corners : C . S . , Decogard Inc . SM20, Pawling CG-
10 , Korogard G200 or Institutional Products Corp. 170
' Series .
B. At corners other than 90°: Provide guards to match angle in
, same as 90° corners .
' I I
I
November 25 , 1998 10260-1 98088 . 00
' � i
! I
i ,
2 . 02 Bumperguards : C . S . , Decogard BG-10, Pawling WG-35EXT, �
Institutional Products Corp. 150D/160D, Korogard B100 or
Balco VB-2 surface mounted units consisting of : cover; �
corner pieces; connectors where required; and end caps .
Colors will be selected by Owner. Provide units in long
lengths to minimize jointing. �
2 . 03 Fasteners : As required and as indicted on approved shop
drawings .
2 . 04 Rigid Vinyl Covers : Meet ASTM E-84-81 A with flame spread �
15 or less; smoke development 450 or less, IZOD impact
test ASTM D-256-78, 25 . 4 lbs/inch. '
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLING '
A. Install rails and guards in locations indicated on ,
approved shop drawings and/or Architect' s drawings .
B. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and
manufacturer' s recommendations . �
C. Install bumper guards and crashrails to within 1-1/2 " of
adjacent door frames, F.E.C . cabinets, etc . '
END OF SECTION '
1
'
' �
'
'
,
'
November 25, 1998 10260-2 98088 . 00 '
�
� SECTION 10400
i
' i INTERIOR SIGNAGE/EXTERIOR DOOR SIGNAGE
' PART 1 GENERAL
1 . 01 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
' A. Manufacturer shall appoint a Project Manager to this job
prior to bid date. Project Manager shall work with
Architect to develop an adequate graphics system for the
' Facility. Manufacturer shall submit a cost estimate of
i ! the graphics package, based on the preliminary sign
� schedule, on or before bid date.
, B. Manufacturer' s Project Manager shall arrange a
consultation with the Owner and or Architect to review
I i traffic flow, decision points and informational
, ; requirements . The preliminary graphics system shall be
� presented to Owner for his input. After final graphics
system is approved, manufacturer shall submit final
' quotation. All changes to the preliminary system shall be
approved by the Architect . �
; C. � Signage shall comply with the ADA Rules and Regulations as
, i � in Federal Register Volume 56, No . 144 dated July 26,
1991 .
1 . 02 SUBMITTALS
1 �� ,
i A. ; Manufacturer' s Project Manager shall submit six copies of
� final sign schedule and location drawings to the
' Contractor upon receipt of Owner' s approval of content .
B. Submittals to show letter size, style, and availability of
' ' matching existing sign types (if applicable) .
I �
1�. 0 3 WARRANTY ,
� A. Manufacturer shall submit one year written warranty on all
products .
I
IPART 2 PRODUCTS
, 2 . 01
� A. Manufacturer:
' 1 . Signs shall be made according to the IM System as
manufactured by APCO Graphics, Inc . or approved equal .
1 : I
I
' Novernber 25, 1998 10400-1 98088 . 00
j I
,
B. General : �
1 . The IM system is a series of modular inserts and ,
holders . All parts shall be injection molded, high
impact, fracture resistant, matte finish plastic . Wall
holders shall be 1/2 " deep, sized to accept standard � '
inserts . Inserts shall feature radiused corners and a
molded-in self aligning reveal . Inserts are retained
within the holders by specially designed PresLock ',
fasteners which require a suction tool for removal and
change . I
C . Finishes : '
1 . Color shall be an integral part of each component . '
Painted and other "applied" finishes on molded parts
are not acceptable. Standard imprinting shall be '
accomplished by using a photographic screen printing
technique whereby the image forms a chemical bond with '�
the plaque surface. No handcutting of artwork or �
letterforms is acceptable . The finish is to be matte,
eggshell or nonglare. Colors as selected by Owner.
D. Typography: '
1 . Primary message copy shall be Helvetica Medium, upper
and lower case. Helvetica Regular, upper and lower '
case, shall be used for secondary copy.
E. Contrast : '
, 1 . Light characters on a dark background or dark
characters on a light background.
F . Tactile Signs : �
1 . Tactile signs are those which are� permanent signs '
including but not exclusive of room number signs,
• restroom signs, department signs, office signs, fire �
exit door signs, elevator signs . �
2 . Where tactile signs are required, characters are to be
raised 1/32 " thickness above sign surface and grade 2 '
braille is also to be on the sign.
3 . Letters to be at least 5/8" high, but no more than 2 "
high based on an upper case 'X' . �
' 4 . T e st le to be u er case letters onl .
YP Y PP
Y
5 . Symbols : '
a. Where symbols are required, symbol must be ,
accompanied by raised and braille verbal message
November 25 , 1998 10400-2 98088 . 00 '
1 � � � . , ,..
�
� placed directly below the symbol . The border
dimensions o� the symbol are ta be 6" . The symbol
� i� not required �o be tactile.
� G. Symbols of Acces�ibility:
� 1 . Areas or roams within the facility that are required to
be identified as accessible according ta section 4 , 1 0�
� the ADA Rules and Regu].atians as in Federal Register
1 VoZume 56, Na. 244 dated July 26, 1991 shall use the
internatianal symbol of accessibili�y.
2 . Text telephones requa.red by Section 4 . 1 . 3 of ADA Rules
� � & Regula�.ions mentioned above shall be identified by
! the International TDD Symbol . I� a facili�.y has a
' public text telephone. Signage mus�. be pravided a� all
� � non-text telephones, directing persons to �.he Iocatiora.
i of the nearest text telephone.
�
� � 3 . Where main entrance iS not handicapped accessible,
� ' � signage is required directing persons to nearest
� accessible entrance.
�
� � 4 . When a tailet facility is not handicapped accessible,
� signage is requzred directing persons to the neares�
' accessible tailet facility.
i
' � H.� Character Propor�ion and Hea.ght:
( 1 . Letters and numbers on signs Shall haue a width to
� i i heigh� ratio between 3 : 5 and 1 : 1 and a stroke width to
E i height ratio between �: 5 and 1 : 10 u�.�ng an upper case X
� ta cal.culate ratios .
� 2 . Letters and numbers on �igns shall be sized according
to the viewing distance from which they are read.
� Upper and Iower case letters acceptable. Generallsr one i
� ' i inch of charac�er height for 50 feet of viewing �,
di.stance.
� T . Sign Types :
�
� ; 1 . Type IA-1, a wall mounted directional sign wi�h �loor
� identification, shall be used to indicate direc�ians at
corridor intersections and/or majar deci�ion points .
The IA-1 has madular message panels and can be e�anded
or contrac�ed with the number o� listing�
� required. Insert width is constant at 18" . Heigh�. a�
the unit varies with the quantity of ine�sage panel�
used at a particular location.
�
� � �
� i
November 25, 1998 1fl4Q0-3 98088 . 00
, � �I
'
2 . Type IA-2 , a wall mounted directional holder and ,!
insert, shall be used as an alternate to IA-1 for those
areas where minimal information is required. Insert �
width is 12 " , height is 6" .
3 . Type IB-1, a ceiling mounted directional sign, shall be
used to supplement the wall mounted directional system �
in those locations where wall space is restri��ted.
Messages on the IB-1 can appear on one or two sides of
each unit . The IB-1 is designed to accept up to two '
lines of inessage copy per sign face. Insert �Nidth
height is 7 " . Message copy must be 3 " in height based
on capital 'X' . �
4 . Type IC-1, a wall mounted holder and insert, shall be
used to display Fire Evacuation Plans . The 12 " x 12 "
insert retains 8" x 12" paper map behind a +�lear ,�
acrylic cover. Evacuation routes and fire equipment
symbols are applied by facility staff with impressions
� transfer type. '
5 . Type ID-1, a wall mounted floor level identification
' holder and insert, shall be located opposite elevator
banks where an IA-1 does not appear. Insert size is 12 " �
x 12 " .
6 . Type ID-2 , a wall mounted fire warning holder and '
insert, shall be located near the elevator button
panel . Insert width is 12 " , height is 8" . The copy is
, to be raised 1/32 " with grade 2 braille below.
7 . Type IE-1, a wall mounted identification holder and
�
insert, shall be used to designate areas of primary
importance to the public . IE-1 features a large symbol '
reinforced with message copy. Insert size is 12 " x
12 " .
8 . Type IF-1, a wall mounted identification holder and i
insert, shall be used to designate areas of secondary
importance to the public . This sign has small symbol � I
reinforced with message copy. Insert size is 8" x 8" .
9 . Type IG-1, a wall mounted identification holder and
insert, shall be used to designate Rest Rooms . Insert �
size is 8 " x 8 " . This sign has symbol with copy raised
1/32 " and grade 2 braille below.
10 . Type IK-1, a wall mounted floor identification holder �'
and insert, shall be located inside the stairwell
adjacent to the fire door. Insert size is 6 " �: 6" . �
The copy is raised 1/32 " with braille below.
�
November 25 , 1998 10400-4 98088 . 00 '
, i � � ,� . . ,: � ,
1 � �
�
i ' 11 . Type IL-1, a fire exit holder and insert, shall be
mounted on the corridor side of each exit door. Red
insert standard 8" x 8 " , integrally colored white
' acrylic letters are chemically bonded to the insert .
The copy is raised 1/32 " with braille below.
� 12 . Type IM-1 a wall mounted room identification holder and
� insert, shall be used to designate individual rooms .
This sign has message copy only. Insert size is 8" x
8" . The copy is to be raised 1/32 " with grade 2 braille
� below.
13 . Type IN-1, a wall mounted informational holder and
, � insert, shall be used when the "in use" feature is
� required to discourage interruptions of those using
the room. Insert size is 8" x 8" .
� � 14 . Type IO-1, a wall mounted holder and insert, shall be
, i used to number patient rooms . The IO-1 has two windows
' � that accept 15/16" x 8" message strips . The IO-1 is
, � i I specially molded to allow strips to be inserted and
removed without removing the insert from the holder.
Insert size is 8" x 8" . The copy is to be raised
� ' i 1/32 " with grade 2 braille below. I
� 15 . Type IP-1, a wall mounted holder and insert, shall be I
; used to number rooms within a department. Insert size
1 �' is 6" x 6" . The copy is to be raised 1/32 " with grade
2 braille below.
� i I 16 . Type IQ-1, a wall mounted holder and insert, shall be
' i used in stairs serving four or more stories, in place
� of sign IK-1 . Sign shall be within stair well, at
' each landing. The sign shall indicate the floor level,
the terminus at the top and bottom of the stair
enclosure and the identification of the stair. The
, i ! sign shall also state the floor level of and direction
to, exit discharge. Sign shall be mounted to be
visible with door open or closed. See detail on
signage schedule .
' i � 17 . Type IR-1, wall mounted holder and insert shall be used
i � on corridor side of stairways or other main doorways
1 that do not provide building exit in case of emergency.
Sign shall have copy "No Exit" where "No" is 2 " high
and "Exit" is 1" high.
� i 18 . Type IZ-1, wall mounted dimensional lettering, specify
� height and depth of characters .
'
tI �
I '
November 25 , 1998 10400-5 98088 . 00
' � I�
'
PART 3 EXECUTION �
3 . 01 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR SIGNS �
1 . Wall mounted signs shall be installed plumb and level .
The center point of the signs shall be 60" above the
finished floor. Signs are to be mounted on wall �
adjacent to latch side of door, including double leaf
of doors . Sign shall be placed on nearest adjacent
wall . Type IA signs are generally wall mounted at '
corridor intersections, 6" from the edge of the wall or
in elevator lobbies . Type IC signs are located in
� elevator lobbies and where required. Vinyl foam tape
is standard as the method of attachment to smooth
nonporous surfaces . Silicone adhesive is used with �
vinyl foam tape on textured or irregular surfaces .
2 . Type IB signs are attached to the ceiling grid w?th a �
projecting fixture. A special bracket is built into
the module, which slides onto an aluminum track that �
mechanically fastens to the ceiling T-Bar grid.
Special end caps lock the module in place . Ceiling
height should range from 7 ' 6" to 9 ' 0" for Type IB to be
most effective . '
END OF SECTION �
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
��
November 25 , 1998 10400-6 98038 . 00
i
, ' I �
i
I
�i ' SECTION 12300 i
I
' I I HOSPITAL CASEWORK
'
PART 1 GENERAL
I1 . 01 SCOPE OF WORK
i
A. Provide all plastic laminate casework and accessory items
, as specified herein. Refer to plans for specific details
and requirements .
, B. General Conditions : The General Conditions, Supplementary
; � General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
� Requirements apply to all work in this Division. Refer to
, other Sections, Divisions, and Schedules for work in
� connection with the Section.
I
T . 02 �; RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
, � � A.� General millwork and custom cabinetry unless s ecified
i p
herein or so noted on plans as included within this
' section.
� B. Rubber, vinyl or other finished toe base.
! i C. Locks master keyed to room doors and other special locks .
D. Blocking in walls .
� I
� E.� Sinks, fittings, traps, stops, tail pieces, vacuum
breakers and other fixtures, electrical and mechanical
' runs and connections .
F. Service Connections to Equipment: Final setting of non-
� � integral trim and utility connections to equipment under
� i this section (including waste) are provided under other
relevant Sections of the Project Specifications,
governing the utility.
' 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
i �
� i A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 .
�
B. Submit four copies of Shop Drawings for approval . Show
� ' materials, dimensions, sink locations, fittings and other
accessories . Show relation of material furnished under
I this section with connecting or related work of other
suppliers and trades .
�
1 I
I
I
' Novelber 25 , 1998 12300-1 98088 . 00
'
' C . Samples of colors shall be submitted upon award of ,
contract for selection and coordination with other
suppliers . Architect may request and retain samples and �
catalog cuts as required for accessory and special items .
1 . 04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Drawings and specifications are based upon casework as �
manufactured by T.M. I . Systems Design Corporation, 50
South Third Avenue West, Dickenson, ND. Construction and �
design shall be trimline series with three millimeter
edges . Equal series by LSI Corporation of America, Inc . ,
2100 Xenium Lane, Minneapolis, MN 55441 will be accepted '
provided they meet specifications .
B. Casework of other nationally recognized casework
manufacturers may be considered for approval provided a '
written request is received ten (10) days prior to opening
of bids . Minimum requirements that MUST be met in order
to be considered for approval are:
�
1 . All backs must be 3/8" thick and must be fully let in
on all four sides of cabinet . The back must be sealed
with hot melt glue. Stapled backs will not be '
accepted.
2 . Cabinet sides may not extend to floor. Cabinet base �
shall be exterior grade plywood.
3 . All ed es of doors and drawer fronts sha
g 11 be 3
millimeter, color to match the adjacent plastic �
laminate color, with both edges and all 4 co�ners
' radiused to 1/8" . Edges shall be polished to prevent
scuff marks . Self edge or "T" mold will not be
acceptable. ,
4 . All cabinets to be fastened to the wall through a 1" �
thick installation rail on back of cabinet .
5 . All cabinets must have a minimum 3/4" thick core before ,,
laminate. Finished thickness shall be not less than
13/16" .
' 6 . Provide stretchers betwe n
e all drawers in diawer
' cabinets . '
7 . Tops and bottoms of all wall cabinets shall be 3/4" � 'I
minimum thick.
,
'
November 25 , 1998 12300-2 98088 . 00
'
' � , .
i
' 8 . Door/Drawer Spreaders : Provide minimum 3/4" X 6" X full
width putty finished cabinet body spreaders immediately
� behind all door/drawer and multiple drawer horizontal
' � joints to maintain exact body dimensions and close off
reveal . Front edge to be 1 mm f lat edge PVC to match
door and drawer edge .
' 9 . All exposed interior of open cabinets or behind glass
i doors shall be decorative laminate in same color and
1 finish as cabinet exteriors .
10 . All cabinet elevations shall have a nominal 1" scribe
� where elevation abuts wall . On wall to wall
�' elevations, center the cabinets and put equal scribes
,� �
j on both ends .
' � 11 . Countertop end splashes shall be installed at all
I conditions where cabinet abuts wall .
� �� 12 . All countertops shall be scribed to the wall be means
! � of a 1/2 " scribe stri at the to of
I , p p the backsplash.
13 . After countertops and cabinets are properly scribed to
' wall, all joints at tops and cabinets will be caulked
� with polyseam seal clear adhesive caulk or equal .
� Caulking is a part of this section.
�
iC. Manufacturers requesting approval shall submit evidence of
at least 10 years experience and installations for similar
� type of project . Manufacturers shall also show evidence
i � of financial stability, plant facilities, catalogs and
� specifications . Full-sized samples, catalogs and
specifications, shall be submitted with written request
1 for approval . Samples may be impounded by Owner and
retained until completion of job for verification and
� compliance of specifications .
I D. Architect Owners o inion and deci '
� � / p sion shall be final in
the evaluation of manufacturers products for approval to
bid, or award of contract .
� 11. 05 SCHEDULING
i
1 A. Schedule delivery only when casework can be promptly
installed.
B. Do not install casework until wall and floor finishes have
� been completed.
'
� � I
�
I
� November 25 , 1998 12300-3 98088 . 00
! I�
'
PART 2 PRODUCTS �
2 . 01 MATERIALS �
A. Laminated Plastics/Finishes :
1 . High pressure plastic laminate, vertical . 032 grade, �
for exposed surfaces to meet NEMA Standards .
2 . Color Selection Available (See Finish Schedule) : '
3 . Plastic Laminate Balancing Sheet (Back of Door or
Drawer) : Putty coloring or manufacturers standard �
heavy gauge plastic laminate to provide balanced
construction. Backing sheet shall be textured.
4 . Counter Top High Pressure Plastic Laminate: '
a. High pressure plastic laminate, . 050 thickness .
Color as per finish schedule. �
b. Heavy gauge neutral colored backing sheet for
, balanced construction (unsupported countertop over
5 ' -0 " orily) . �
5 . Polyester Laminate (Interior Liner) :
' a. Thermosetting acid resistant polyester resin �
impregnated laminate, permanently bonded to
substrate. �
b. Polyester laminate shall be 9 to 11 mills in
' thickness 62% resin content, color fast and putty
in color. ,
c . Putty colored or manufacturers standard polyester
laminate for semi-exposed cabinet interiors behind �
doors and drawers .
d. Must meet : NEMA LQ1-1977 , & NEMA LD3-1980 . '
B. High performance particle Board Core:
1 . Particle board shall be of 47 lb. density, and balanced �
construction with moisture content not to exceecl 8% .
All particle boards shall meet or exceed the �
requirements for its type and classification ,.�nder �
Commercial Standard CS-236-66 Federal Specification LL-
B-800A, and ASTM-D-1037-87 .
C . Hardboard: Hardboard shall meet or exceed Commercial �
Standards, CS-125 and Federal Specification LLL-B-00810 .
Tempered Hardboard 1/4" thick - smooth both sides .
, �
November 25 , 1998 12300-4 98038 . 00 �
, ' . . .. . , . , , `
' D. Edging:
� 1 . Solid, high impact, purified, color thru, acid
resistant, 3 mm thick PVC edging machine applied for
drawer fronts and doors . Color to match adjacent
plastic laminate color.
� 2 . Flat edge design for cabinet body (1 mm PVC) .
� E. Hardware:
1 . Hinges :
� a. Heavy duty, five knuckle 2-3/4 inch institutional
type hinge. Mill ground, hospital tip, tight pin ',
feature with all edges eased. Hinge to be full
� wrap around type of tempered steel . 093 inch thick.
each hinge to have minimum nine screws, #7, 5/8
inch FHMS to assure positive door attachment.
i 1 b. One pair per door to 48 inch height. One and one-
half pair over 48 inches in height. Hinge to
accommodate 13/16 inch thick laminated door, and
I� � allow 270 degree swing. �
c . Finish to be LH-301 Dull Chrome. �
, 2 . Pulls :
� The following options are available:
a. Wire Pulls - Chrome.
1 3 . Sliding Door Hardware:
a. Sliding glass doors 1/4 inch thick: Stylmark
1 #910007 double track rolling door assembly.
b. Sliding glass doors 3/4 inch thick Stile and Rail
� Doors; Sterling No. 602 top mounted track with dual
roller hangers . Vertical adjustment for accurate
alignment.
4 . Drawer Slides :
a. Standard Drawers : LSI Lab Series Slide, Epoxy
Powder coated to match drawer body color, with
, positive in- stop, out-stop and out-keeper to
maintain drawer in 800 open position. Captive
nylon rollers, both front and rear. Minimum 100
� lb. load rating, full extension. Provide adjuster
to regulate body slide sway.
� b. Shallow Drawers : Grant No . 328, full extension.
� loveiber 25, 1998 12300-5 98088 . 00
I
'
c . File Drawers : Grant No . 329 , full extension. '
d. File Drawer Followers : Knap & Vogt No . 476 follower �
and track assembly.
5 . Catches
a. LH-340 5 lb. magnetic catch for base and wall �
cabinets . Provide two 7 lb. pull at each tall
cabinet door. �
b. LH-345 roller catch for mobile cabinets .
6 . Adjustable shelf clips : To have locking devic? to 1
prevent shelf slide-off and to be of such design as to
support a tested load of minimum 150 lbs . each without -
failure, referenced 1 . 04 .D. Cabinet interior sides '
shall be flush, without shelf system permanent
projection.
, 7 . Wardrobe Rod: To be 1/16 inch chrome steel rod - LH- �
362 , supported by #734 flan e chrome.
g
8 . Coat Hooks : �
a. Sin le coat hooks - Ives No . 581 a '
g S tin Aluminum, or
ABS plastic, putty colored. �
b. Double Coat Hooks - Ives No . 405 Satin Aluminum, or
ABS plastic, putty colored. �
9 . Locks : Shall be disc tumbler lock keyed alike and
master keyed. Dull chrome finish.
a. Hinged doors and drawers National Lock No . 68-504 . �
b. Sliding doors, 13/16 inch thick, National Loc}i No. �
68-057 .
c . 1/4 inch sliding panel doors, K & V #963 . �
F. Detailed Requirements for Cabinet Construction:
1 . Sub-Base: �
a. Cabinet Sub-Base: To be separate and continuous (no
cabinet body sides-to-floor) , waterproof plywood '
with concealed fastening to cabinet bottom.
Ladder-type construction, of front, back and
intermediates, to form a secure and level platform '
to which cabinets attach.
�
November 25 , 1998 12300-6 98088 . 00 �
� � .
, 2 . Cabinet Top and Bottom - Wall and Base:
� a. Base Cabinet bottoms to be putty colored polyester
laminated particle board interior side, 3/4 inch
thick with phenolic neutral colored backer sheet on
concealed side.
� b. Solid sub-top shall be furnished for all lower base
i cabinets to be phenolic overlay neutral color.
, c . Exterior exposed wall cabinet bottoms shall be
putty colored polyester laminate. Assembly devices
1 shall be concealed on bottom side of wall cabinets .
� d. Exposed body edges shall be flat edge (1 mm) .
' e. If wall cabinet is over 54" A.F.F. the cabinet
bottom is to match the face color.
! 3 . Cabinet Ends
�
a. Putty colored polyester laminated particle board
interior side, 3/4 inch thick with phenolic neutral
� colored backer sheet on concealed side. Library
� stack end panels 1 inch thick. Holes drilled for
� adjustable shelves 1-1/4 inches on center.
ib. Exposed edges shall be matching flat edge.
� c . Exposed exterior cabinet ends to be laminated with
plastic laminate.
4 . Fixed and Adjustable Shelves :
� a. Putty colored polyester laminated particle board
two sides . Leading exposed edge of shelves to be
' � edged with Flat Edge PVC, putty in color.
b. Thickness : 3/4 inch standard shelving to 36 inches
, wide. one inch shelving 36 inch wide and over.
� c . Exposed adjustable shelves shall have a 1mm PVC
� edge on three edges with a 3mm PVC edging on the
� front edge .
5 . Cabinet Backs :
ri a. Standard cabinet back to be 3/8 inch thick, for use �
on all cabinets with or without doors . Rear,
� unexposed, side of back to receive continuous hot �
' melt glue at joint between back and
sides/top/bottom for sealing against moisture and
vermin, and further contribute to case rigidity.
' �
'i
Novelber 25 , 1998 12300-7 98088 . 00
1 � � �
, �
'
b. Exposed exterior backs shall be 3/4 inch particle � '
board faced with high pressure plastic laminate.
6 . Doors and Drawer Fronts : �
a. Plastic laminated doors and drawer fronts to be
13/16 inch thick for all hinged and sliding doors . ,
Core material to be 3/4 inch thick, 45 lb. density
particle board bonded on exterior with high
pressure laminate and with putty colored or '
manufacturers standard heavy gauge balance sheet
on interior face .
b. Exposed edges shall be as specified in Section �
1 . 04 .
c . Stile and Rail doors to be 13/16 inch thick plastic �
laminate door with 1/4 inch plate glass . Available
hinged or sliding. All exposed edges to be trimmed
and glazed with extruded vinyl glazing bead. �
d. Sliding glass doors to be 1/4 inch thick plate
glass with ground and polished edges . fitted with
etched and anodized aluminum shoes and nylon �
rollers .
7 . Drawers : �
a. Drawer fronts shall be applied to separate drawer
body component sub-front . �
b. Sides and back of drawers to be 1/2 inch thick
putty colored polyester laminated fiberboard, sub-
front same, except 5/8 inch thick. �
c . Exposed top edge to be Flat Edge PVC, color per
finish schedule . ,
d. Drawer sides to be dadoed to receive front and
back, machine. squared and held under pressure u�hile �
glued and pinned together.
e. Drawer bottom shall be putty color polyester
laminate, 1/4 inch thick, housed and glued into '
front sides and back. Underside of drawer to
receive continuous hot melt glue at joints between
bottom and back/sides/front for sealing and �
rigidity. Reinforce drawer bottoms as required
with intermediated spreaders .
f . Paper storage drawers fitted with hood at back. ,
g. All drawers shall have roller guides as specified
under Paragraph 2 . 01 .E. 4 . �
November 25 , 1998 12300-8 98088 . 00 �
' � • .. „
, 8 . Vertical and Horizontal Dividers : One of the following
as indicated by cabinet number:
� � a. Tempered hardboard 1/4 inch thick, smooth both
I
faces . Secured in cabinet with molded plastic
clips .
� b. Putty colored polyester laminated particle board
1/2 inch thickness . Secured in cabinet with molded
1 plastic clips . Edges to be PVC, color to match
cabinet.
G. Countertops
� I
�� 1 . High pressure plastic laminate bonded to particle board
core. Thickness as shown on plans and specifications .
� Underside to be properly balanced with heavy gauge
backing sheet . Edges shall be high pressure plastic
- laminate to match horizontal surface color. Furnish
' � ; countertops in design �as shown on drawings . Provide
' continuous tops for counter type cabinets �ixed in a
� line.
' H. Workmanship: -
� 1 . All exposed exterior cabinet surfaces shall be 1/32 "
� high pressure plastic laminate, U. S. according to
' Finish Schedule, minimum 48 colors/wood grains .
Laminate surface/backer to core under controlled
conditions, by approved and regulated laminating
' methods to assure a premium lamination. Natural
� setting adhesives that cure thru chemical reaction are
required. Methods requiring heat are not allowed;
' "contact" methods of laminating are not allowed.
� 2 . Cabinet parts shall be accurately machined and bored
� ; i for premium quality grade joinery construction
� � utilizing automatic machinery to insure consistent
sizing of modular components .
3 . End panels shall be doweled to receive bottom and top.
� Back shall be fully housed into cabinet sides, top and
! bottom to insure rigidity and a fully closed cabinet .
� 4 . Drawer bottom shall be fully housed into sides, back
and sub-front. Sides of drawer to be fully dadoed to
� receive drawer back, locked in fully to sub-front,
i fastened with glue and mechanical fasteners .
I 5 . All cases shall be square, plumb and true.
' 6 . Provide removable back panels and closure panels for
plumbing access where shown on drawings .
� ' I
I
November 25 , 1998 12300-9 98088 . 00
, i I
!
` PART 3 EXECUTION �
3 . 01 COORDINATION �
A. Coordinate work of this section with related work of other
sections as necessary to obtain proper installation o� all
items . ,
B. Verify site dimensions of cabinet locations in building
prior to fabrication. '
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Storage and Protection: casework shall be protected in '
transit . Store under cover in a ventilated buildina not
exposed to extreme temperature and humidity changes . Do
not store or install in building until concrete, masonry, '
and plaster work is dry.
B. Workmen: Install casework under the supervision of the '
manufacturer' s representative with factory trained
mechanics authorized by manufacturer.
C . Workmanship '
1 . Erect casework straight, level and plumb and securely
anchored in place. Scribe and closely fit to adjacent �
work. Cut and fit work around pipes, ducts, etc .
2 . Install all items complete and adjust all moving parts �
to operate properly.
3 . Leave surface clean and free from defects at tin:e of
final acceptance. �
D. Guarantee: All materials to be guaranteed for pericd of
one year from manufacturer' s defects and workmanship. �
E. Clean up: Remove all cartons, debris, sawdust, scraps,
etc . , and leave spaces clean and all casework ready for �
Owner' s use.
'
END OF SECTION
�
'
w
November 25 , 1998 12300-10 98088 . 00 '
� � - - � �
, SECTION 13090 •
� � R.ADIATION PROTECTION
PART 1 GENER.AL
I1�. 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
, A. Comply with requirements of the National Council on
Radiation Protection and Measurements Report No . 49 .
1!. 02 TESTING
� � A. After X-ray equipment has been installed and placed in
operation, have radiation shielding tested by a health
'I , physicist who is certified by a nationally recognized
agency. Owner will pay for testing. Decision of
acceptability of shielding by the health physicist shall
1 , be binding.
,
B. Method of Testing: In accordance with requirements of
National Bureau of Standards Handbook H-76 "Medical X-Ray
i � Protection up to Three Million V.o:lts" .
� C. Repair or replace defective work including other affected
, work. Do any additional testing required for the health
physicist' s satisfaction. Repair, replacement and
retesting shall be at Contractor' s expense.
� 1 . 03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other trades involved in this work.
� ' 1 . Deliver lead-lined gypsum board and associated items to
wallboard trade so as to cause no delay in this work.
� '�
' 2 . Deliver sheet lead to hardware installer to expedite
this work.
, 3 . Install view window, and cassette film loading cabinet
I in close coordination with wallboard trade.
� 4 . Install sheet lead at electrical outlets, switch boxes,
utility recesses, and other penetrations of lead-lined
walls in close coordination with mechanical and
� electrical trades .
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
� A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300 .
;
� j I
Novenlber 25 , 1998 13090-1 98088 . 00
1 '
� �
�
f
1
, B. Submit four copies of Manufacturer' s product data �
illustrating equipment items and describing radiation
protection items . Submit four copies of Manufacturer' s �
printed instructions for installing view windows and. film
loading cabinet .
1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING '
A. Do not deliver items to project site until they can be
installed promptly. �
B. Deliver items in original, resealed containers and leave
protective packaging in place until items can be
installed. Dispose of damaged items that cannot be �
properly repaired for installation.
C. Handle materials carefully. '
D. Strictly follow Manufacturer' s instructions for storing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
�
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER �
A. A&L Shielding, Inc . Rome, GA, (800) 329-5323 , or approved
equal . �
B. Ray-Bar Engineering Corp. , Azusa, CA, (818) 969-1818 .
C. Radiation Protection Products, College Grove, TN, (800) �
328-3361)
2 . 02 MATERIALS �
A. Lead-Lined Gypsum Board: 5/8" thick x 4 ' -0 " wide x height
indicated, laminated with a single sheet of pure virgin �
lead of thickness indicated. Gypsum board shall be
Firecode C (Type X) only.
B. Sheet Lead: Unpierced, pure virgin lead, varying not more ',
than 30 over entire surface.
1 . Lead strips : 2 " wide x height and thickness indicated �
for lead-lined gypsum board.
2 . Shields : 1/16 " thick x dimensions required for '
shielding electrical outlets, switch boxes, utility
recesses, and other penetrations of lead-lined walls . �
3 . Hardware shields : 1/16" thick x dimensions required for '
shield door hardware .
,�
November 25 , 1998 13090-2 98088 . 00 '
' � ' " :-
i ,
�
' C. Lead Glass Viewin Win
li , g dow: (Provide test results to
verify protective requirements)". Telescopic Type, Model
, 67516 or approved equal .
��� � I 1 . Match lead lining of frame to that of surrounding wall
lead. Frame for lead glass view window shall be
j � aluminum telescopic type . (Not lead/steel) .
i 2 . Leaded glass, approximately 1/4" thick. Install
� multiple panes to provide shielding equal to lead of
' surrounding wall lead. Neutral gray enamel finish with
stainless steel rim.
' � PART 3 EXECUTION
, 3 . 01 INSTALLING II
A. Install viewing window and film loading cabinet strictly
in accordance with manufacturer' s printed instructions .
'' ' � I
B. Install sheet lead shields to cover wall penetrations and
extend out at least 2 " in all directions . Attach lead �
' securely to retain it in place but do not penetrate lead
with fasteners . li
C. Control windows shall be installed with center at 5 ' -3 "
� above finish floor. The code requires a minimum of 18 ,
inches from edge of glass to end of control wall .
� , END OF SECTION
'
� '
1 .
i i
�
�
1 I
' ,
1 ' �
, �
I
November 25 , 1998 13090-3 98088 . 00
, I i
,
� �
, ' SECTION 15010
I
, ' GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
�
I
;
' l. PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� i
� i A. All labor, materials, tools and services for a complete installation of
; i equipment and systems contained in contract documents.
� ; B. Principal features of work included are:
i 1. Heating; ventilating, air-conditioning systems, controls and
� insulation of inechanical system piping, ductwork, etc.
' � � 2. Modifications and additions to the existin heatin ventilatin
, g g� g�
' air-conditioning systems, controls, ductwork and piping systems.
' 3 Adjusting fan speed, replacing belts, replacing drives and motors
� � on existing air handlers, return fans and exhaust fans to
' i , accommodate modifications.
4. Firesto in all mechanical lumbin and fire rotection s stem
PP g , P g P Y
' � penetrations through fire and/or smoke rated assemblies.
I 5. Automatic temperature controls.
� I
6. Additions and modifications to existing control system.
, , 7. Plumbing system and related piping insulation.
�
' i � 8. Connect to existing sanitary sewer, domestic water and storm
;I sewer inside the building.
9. Connect to existing fire sprinkler system inside the building.
� ' 10. Connect to existing medical gas systems inside the building.
i
� � 11. Furnish anchor bolts, sleeves, supports and similar items to be
S � built into concrete and masonry.
, 12. Preparation and submittal of inechanical maintenance manuals,
' ; � shop drawings and product data. �i
! 13. Fire protection system.
� � 14. Sealing (Hardcasting) of existing ductwork joints where indicated
on the drawings.
! 15. Demolition of existing piping, ducts and associated equipment
' I, which will not be reused.
i �
' ;
November 25, 1998 15010-1 98088.00
�
'
1.02 RELATED WORK '
A. Section 01045: Cutting and patching.
B. Section 01300: Submittals. �
C. Section 01300: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
D. Section 01600: Storage and Protection. '
E. Section 02050: Demolition.
F. Section 07270: Firestopping. �
G. Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal. (Flashing for mechanical
items penetrating walls and roo£) ,
H. Section 09900: Painting.
I. Section 16923: Individually Mounted Starters. '
J. Division 16: Power wiring for Division 15 equipment including
installing and connecting starters to be furnished under Division 16. ,
K. Division 16: All control wiring above 50-volts and associated conduit
for Division 15 equipment to be furnished under Division 16. �
1.03 DEMOLITION
A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify the existing condition ,
of all equipment affected by this project and the exact location of
material to be removed (or relocated) before demolition work is started.
Report any inconsistencies with the Contract Documents immediately to '
the architect.
B. Demolition work shall be phased to accomplish replacement with
minimum downtime. Contractor shall be responsible for coordin�.ting �
shut-downs or service interruptions with the Owner's representative.
C. Schedule / phase demolition work in advance with the Owner's '
representative. Coordination with facility operating hours and access to
areas affected by this project shall be the Contractor's responsibi.lity.
D. Remove existing ductwork, diffusers, grilles and piping which are not '
shown on the drawings to remain or to be reused.
E. Where existing piping (hot water, cold water, domestic water, gas, '
medical gas, chilled water, steam, condensate, drain, sanitary se��er,
storm, etc.) is found in walls to be removed, offset and reroute piping
into the new partition layout. Reinsulate pipe in accordance with Section ,
15250. If pipe service is to be abandoned, remove piping in wall and
cap in ceiling above wall and in space below wall. ,
o '
November 25, 1998 15010-2 9E088.00
'
, � �
I
1 F. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing, storing and
reinstalling any equipment noted as existing to be relocated. The
'; Contractor shall repair or replace any such equipment that is damaged or
I 1 � lost throughout the duration of this project without additional cost to the
, ; Owner.
�
� � G. All equipment to be demolished is the property of the Owner and shall
' '
, be turned over to the Owner s re resentative b the Contractor. At the
; P Y
I ; discretion of the Owner's representative, any or all of such equipment
' i may be refused and released to the Contractor for disposal.
I
� 1.04 ITEMS FURNISHED FOR INSTALLATION BY OTHER TRADES
' ; A. Electrical control components including but not limited to controllers,
relays, thermostats, etc.
, ; � B. Refer to Section 01020 for additional information.
; 1.05 PHASING
, � I A. Project will require multiple phases of construction in order to maintain
�� � ' hospital functions.
; I
B. Provide temporary connections of ductwork and piping where required
� i to maintain ventilation and temperature control in areas adjacent to �I
� � construction.
� �; C. Sensitive areas must be maintained under positive pressure and soiled
� areas under a negative pressure at all times.
1 � D. Construction areas must be maintained under negative pressure at all
times. Provide temporary exhaust fans and ducting as necessary to
maintain proper pressure relationships.
' ; � 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
� � A. Submittal of bid implies:
� 1. Bidder has visited job site.
; 2. Bidder is familiar with site conditions.
' � 3. Bidder has read applicable paragraphs of the specifications and
� � will be bound by their conditions.
� ,
� ; 1.07 LOCAL CONDITIONS
i
� A. Conform with local conditions.
' , B. Coordinate with local utilities on size of utility services.
� 1.08 INTENT
� ' A. The contract documents (drawings, plans and specifications) describe the
mechanical work of this project.
� ! , B. Any item mentioned in one part is binding as though mentioned in both.
November 25, 1998 15010-3 98088.00
'
'
C. The contract documents form a guide for a complete mechanical ,
installation.
D. Furnish all items which are reasonably necessary for a comple�te system, �
but which are not specifically mentioned, such as duct hangers ar
transitions, piping offsets, drains, etc.
E. In areas of renovation, survey the site and be informed of existing ,
conditions in particular above ceilings which will require offsetting
and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit. '
F. Mechanical layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical on1y.
G. Coordinate exact locations of ducts, pipes and equipment with the work
of other trades. ,
H. Architect reserves the right to make reasonable changes in location of
mechanical equipment and appurtenances. ,
1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable local, state and federal codes. '
B. Comply with applicable requirements of recognized industry associations
which publish standards for the various trades. �
C. Employ only qualified journeymen for this work.
D. Do not route any piping directly above or 42" in front of electris;al �
switchgear, panels or transformers.
E. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and �
equipment will require offsetting, raising and in some instances
relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit. Survey the site and
be informed of existing conditions in particular above ceilings which ,
will require offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and
conduit and include the cost of this work.
F. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and �
equipment will require removal of the existing ceiling and ceilin� grid.
Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions which will �
require ceiling removal. Include the cost of the ceiling work or
coordinate its removal with the General Contractor.
G. Additional installation costs associated with substituted equipment '
requiring additional work on the part of this contractor or other
subcontractors to satisfy the manufacturer's installation requirements
shall be the responsibility of the submitting contractor. �
H. Supervise all work by competent mechanic specifically qualified in his
discipline.
'
'
November 25, 1998 15010-4 9�3088.00
'
1 i ; , . . . ,
� I
�
1 � � 1.10 FEES AND PERMITS
, i
� � A. Secure and pay for permits, licenses and inspections required for work
' , under this division, including water and sewage tap.
i B. Give notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations
I applicable to work.
� � 1.11 FIRESTOPPING
; I
A. Manufacturer of materials shall specialize in the manufacture of the
I'� � � products required for firestopping.
� B. Provide manufacturers' certifications of all materials used for
' � �; firestopping.
C. All penetration methods shall.be tested and listed in accordance with the
' , ,' Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory.
D. Penetrations and openings for all mechanical, plumbing and fire
� , protection services in fire andlor fire/smoke rated assemblies shall be
firestopped with tested firestopping design assemblies. These
penetrations include but are not limited to the following:
� � 1. Ductwork, piping, conduit and control tubing through above
� grade floor slabs.
1 , 2. Ductwork, piping, conduit and control tubing through rated walls
� and partitions.
! �
� ' 3. Ductwork, piping, conduit and control tubing through vertical
� shafts such as pipe chases, duct chases, stairwells, elevator shafts
� I and utility chutes.
4. Voids azound pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits, cable trays, cables
' and wires penetrating above grade floor slabs and fire rated
, ! partitions, fire walls and smoke walls.
II ' , E. Refer to Section 07200 for additional information and requirements for
i firestopping.
�
�I ' � 1.12 CODES AND STANDARDS
, A. Mechanical installation to be in accordance with applicable local, state
; I and federal codes having jurisdiction.
� B. Codes considered a licable to this ro'ect include but are not be
I PP P J
' i II limited to:
� � 1. SBC: 1997 Standard Building Code.
i �
� , ; 2. SMC: 1997 Standard Mechanical Code.
3. SPC: 1994 Standard Plumbing Code.
, ; 4. State of Florida Energy Code.
I
November 25, 1998 15010-5 98088.00
�
'
5. Florida AHCA requirements. �
6. NFPA 13: Sprinkler System Installation.
7 NFPA 14: Standpipe and Hose Systems. ,
8. NFPA 99 - 1993: Non-flammable Medical Gas Systems.
9. NFPA 90A: Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. a I�
10. NFPA 101 - 1994: Life Safety Code.
11. ANSI Handicapped Code A117.1 �
12. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act
13. AGA: American Gas Association. �
14. AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Associations, Inc. -
15. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. '
16. ARI: American Refrigeration Institute
17. ASHRAE: American Society Of Heating Refrigeration and Air �
Conditioning Engineers.
18. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ,
19. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
20. MSS: Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Val�✓e and �
Fitting Industry
21. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. ,
22. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
23. SMACNA: Sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air-- ,
Conditioning Systems
24. UL: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. '
C. Install all work in strict conformity with applicable codes.
D. Submit andlor file with proper authorities necessary contract documents �
as required by governing authorities.
E. Other than the signe�i and sealed Contract Documents, the Contractor is '
responsible for any Professional Engineer's signature and seal required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.13 COORDINATION � ',
A Visit site and be informed of conditions under which work must be
performed. �
B. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and
equipment as well as higher ceiling heights will require offsetting,
�
November 25, 1998 15010-6 9�088.00
'
' � I� -
I I
' raising and in some instances relocation of existing piping, ductwork
, and conduit. Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions in
' i particular above ceilings which will require offsetting and/or relocation
of existing piping, ductwork and conduit and include the cost of this
i work.
' � C. In certain areas where higher ceilings are being installed, existing
; � conduit, wiring, piping, sprinklers, rainwater leaders and ductwork will
' require offsetting, raising or relocation to accommodate the renovation.
, , Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions which require
! offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit and
� , include this work.
� D. No subsequent allowance will be made because of error or failure to
obtain necessary information to completely estimate and perform all
' ; I work involved.
E. Carefully examine drawings and specifications to be thoroughly familiar
' i with items which require plumbing or HVAC connections and
coordination.
� F. Notify other trades of any deviations or special conditions necessary for
installation of work.
� ,
' G. Resolve interferences between work of other trades prior to installation.
, H. Advise other trades to leave proper chases and openings. Place outlets,
! anchors, sleeves and supports prior to pouring concrete or installation of
� masonry work.
� I. Advise other trades to leave floor depressions where required for proper
; installation of showers or other equipment.
' ; ' J. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and
equipment will require removal of the existing ceiling and ceiling grid.
� i I Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions which will
require ceiling removal. Include the cost of the ceiling work or
icoordinate its removal with the General Contractor.
' ; K. Additional installation costs associated with substituted equipment
� requiring additional work on the part of this contractor or other
' subcontractors to satisfy the manufacturer's installation requirements
, i shall be the responsibility of the submitting contractor.
� L. Coordinate all necessary power connections as recommended by the
manufacturers of installed e ui ment with Division 16 tradesmen.
, � �
q P
' M. Coordinate with Division 16 tradesmen for proper sizing of circuit
� � breakers, fuses, safety switches, conduit and wiring for all Division 15
� equipment prior to rough-in or bid.
i N. Do not route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical
, switchgear, panels or transformers.
November 25, 1998 15010-7 98088.00
'
'
O. Should this coordination be neglected, any cutting and/or patching ,
required to be done at contractor's expense.
1.14 SUBMITTALS ,
A. Refer to Section 01300 for general submittal requirements.
B. Submit for approval seven copies of complete brochures and shop �
drawings of materials, fixtures and equipment, proposed, giving names
of manufacturers, trade names and specific catalog numbers.
C. Submit all brochures with the possible exception of temperature controls '
at one time, bound in a single 3-ring binder or side-stitched laminated
cover with the Project name, General Contractor and subcontractor �
identified on the cover and a table of contents.
D. Submittals transmitted without the manufacturers' certification letter will �
be returned unchecked.
E. Include a cover sheet for each section with section identification
number, Contractors' approval stamp and sufficient space for Engineers' �
stamp and comments.
F. Identify or LIST any and ALL EXCEPTIONS taken with the '
specifications and drawings in the submittal manual.
G. Brochures:
1. Submit complete descriptions, illustrations, specification data, '
etc., of materials and equipment proposed.
2. Clearly indicate proposed items when other items are sho��vn on �
same sheet.
3. Submit samples on request and/or set up for inspection an� ,
approval. Samples will be returned.
4. Submit performance curves for all fans, air handling units and �
pumps.
H. Specifically submit information and brochures on the following:
l. All HVAC and plumbing equipment. ,
2. All pipe and pipe fittings including origin of manufacture.
3. All pipe hangers and supportlanchorage methods. '
4. All valves and strainers. �
5. Vibration isolation.
6. Materials and installation details for all firestopping. �
7. Duct and pipe insulation including list of proposed thicknesses
for each service, flame spread and smoke development ratings
for all materials including adhesives and sealers. '
November 25, 1998 15010-8 98988.00
'
�
� i
i �
, � � 8. Low Pressure Duct: Sheet metal gauges, method of fabrication
� � and longitudinal seam construction and joint sealant (Hardcast).
' � 9. Sheet metal accessories including diffusers, registers, grilles,
louvers, vents, fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers with sleeve
; gauges indicated.
' 10. Temperature controls including brochures on all components.
' 11. Qualifications of Test and Balance Firm including references and
' , sample report forms.
,
,' I. Shop/Coordination Drawings:
' 1. Submit specific shop/coordination drawings for major materials
� where called for or when requested by Engineer and for the
j following:
' ' a. Automatic temperature control systems.
' b. Interlock and control wiring.
c. Complete dimensioned shop drawings for location of all
� sleeves, anchors, pads, chases and other openings required
' for installation of the mechanical and plumbing systems
in the building.
' � d. Owner furnished equipment rough-in.
,� e. Fire protection system coordinated with ductwork,
mechanical piping, plumbing, conduit and electrical
' equipment..
2. Submit brochures and shop drawings in time to allow three
' weeks from date of receipt in Engineer's office before final
, approval is required to meet construction schedule.
3. Include Contractor's stamp of approval on all submittals
' evidencing he has examined and checked same and information
i contained therein is in accordance with contract requirements,
' ; � with any deviations clearly marked.
4. Do not construe approval of shop drawings as permitting depart-
ure from contractual documents.
' j 5. Additional installation costs associated with substituted
' i equipment requiring additional work on the part of this
' contractor or other subcontractors to satisfy manufacturer's
installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the
� submitting contractor.
' � 6. Submit above mentioned brochures and shop drawings and
I �
; ' receive approval before any materials are installed.
, '
November 25, 1998 15010-9 98088.00
'
,
1.15 AGENCY SUBMITTALS: A copy of the final water and air balancing report '
shall be available for review by the Florida's AHCA representatives at the final
inspection. ,
1.16. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prior to final acceptance of project, furnish to Owner required number ,
of bound manuals of instructions for operation and maintenance c�f
mechanical equipment and systems furnished under this division.
I
B. Furnish data in a 3-ring, hard-cover type binder. '
C. As a minimum include the following product data:
1. Equipment performance data. �
2. Fan curves.
3. Operating and maintenance instructions. ,
4. Spare parts list.
5. Copies of approved submittal data. '
6. Equipment warranties.
7. Testing and balance report. ,
D. Clearly indicate items furnished on this project.
I E. Furnish a list indicating names and addresses of nearest supply house '
carrying recommended spare parts for equipment furnished and name of
installation subcontractor. ,
F. Written description of complete mechanical systems operation.
G. Supervise initial operation of systems and equipment and verbally ,
instruct Owner in such operation in addition to manuals mentioned
above.
i H. Obtain letter fr m
o Owner statin manuals and instructions as mentioned
� g '
above have been received. Furnish a copy of this letter for Architects's
files.
1.17 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
'
A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. '
B. Other materials and equipment to be covered or otherwise protected
against damage from water, dirt, chemical or mechanical injury. This '
includes during on-site storage, after installation and until final
acceptance.
C. Store items in a clean, dry place and protect from damage. '
D. Damaged painted surfaces of equipment to be touched up to match
original paint. �
November 25, 1998 15010-10 98U88.00
'
i � '
1 ..
�
�
! ' E. Any materials shown on the contract documents as existing to be
' � I
�
relocated are the ro ert of the owner. The contractor shall be
P P Y
, ' � responsible for removal, storage and reinstallation of these materials for
the duration of the project. Any of these materials suffering damage or
, � loss while under the responsibility of the contractor shall be repaired or
� replaced without additional cost to the owner.
�
' I 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS
�
I , ! I A. Refer to Section 01720 for requirements for record drawings.
, i B. Keep a record set of blue line prints at job site exclusively for recording
� � deviations from the drawings which are necessary because of job
' � conditions.
C. Mark deviations in colored pencils for ease of identification of various
' ' systems.
D. When work is complete, record all deviations on clean sepia copies of
drawings and submit sepias of completed "Record Drawings" to
I� , , Owner's representative for distribution.
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
, 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
I � A. Specifications and drawings indicate name, type or catalog numbers of
� materials and equipment to establish basic standards for the project.
' ' These standards shall be used exclusivel in re aration of the
Y P P
, , Contractor's bid. Unauthorized substitution of non-approved
� manufacturers, equipment or materials shall constitute automatic
� re�ection of submittal. Upon completion of the bidding process, the
, ' Architect will review written requests from the Contractor for alternate
� manufacturer's including appropriate changes to the bid price for the
substitutions requested. The Contractor shall not utilize the alternate
, I manufacturers in the preparation of bid unless approved by written
' addendum from the Architect.
, ! B. Specific references are made to one or more manufacturers' names and
' model or catalog numbers. This does not indicate that the material and
equipment specified is necessarily an "off the shelf' item; requirements
, for specific finishes, materials or other modifications may introduce
, � variances from manufacturers' standards. Contractor shall ascertain that
I such modifications are fully considered.
I
, � , C. Where multiple items of equipment or materials are required, they shall
� � be the product of a single manufacturer.
' � D. Refer to Section 01630 for additional requirements.
�
E. Provide UL or ETL labels when available.
� I
' �
November 25, 1998 15010-11 98088.00
'
'
F. Use products and materials of domestic manufacturer unless specifically '
noted otherwise.
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION '
3.01 LOCATIONS
A. Mechanical layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical. '
B. Exact locations of ductwork, pipes and equipment may vary because of
conflicts with work of other trades. '
C. Work out conflicts such that relocations do not affect operation or
appearance of systems. '�
D. Where conflicts cannot be worked out between trades, Owner's ,
representative will decide. Owner's representative reserves the right to
make reasonable changes in locations. '
E. Locate equipment requiring periodic servicing or adjustment so that it is
readily accessible. '
F. In projects involving renovation, installation of new piping, duct�vork
and equipment as well as new ceiling heights will require offse�tting,
raising and in some instances relocation of existing piping, ductv,�ork '
and conduit. Visit site, be informed of conditions under which this work
must be performed and include the cost of this work in bids.
G. In certain areas where higher ceilings are being installed, existing '
conduit, wiring, piping, sprinklers, rainwater leaders and ductworl< will
require offsetting, raising or relocation to accommodate the renovation. �
Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions which require
offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit and
include this work. '
H. Do not route piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical
switchgear, panels or transformers. ,
I. Do not backup service sides to walls or place it too close to other
equipment to make service impractical.
3.02 EXISTING SERVICES '
A. Provide temporary work, equipment and materials to maintain existing
services in operation. '
B. Coordinate all shutdowns to Owner's convenience.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING '
A. Repair or replace routine damage caused by cutting in performance of
� contract. �
B. Correct damage caused due to installation of inechanical work.
1
November 25, 1998 15010-12 98088,00
'
' , i
�
' ' i C. Perform repairs with materials which match existing and install in
accordance with the appropriate section of these specifications.
, � , 3.04 COLTNTERFLASHING: Counterflash ducts, pipes, etc., where penetration of
roofs and outside walls occur.
' I 3.05 CONNECTION TO OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT I
, , A. Connect or install equipment shown on mechanical drawin s re uirin
� � � �
� ' plumbing and/or mechanical hookups. �
' B. Rough-in piping and connect equipment.
i C. Provide piping, shutoff valves, strainers, unions and backflow prevention
' i �� devices required for a complete installation.
�
D. Provide operating valves and controls as an integral part of Owner
, ; furnished equipment.
; 3.06 ACCEPTANCE OF SYSTEMS
i i
' ' A. Complete the following before requesting a final inspection:
; 1. All work required under this division of the specifications except
' ' as permitted.
2. Pay special attention to completion of work required under
Sections 15020, 15025, 15030 and 15035.
, ; 3. System balancing.
4. Control system checkout. �
1 � '
� 5. Furnish required operating instructions, wiring diagrams and
pneumatic or electric "Project Record Documents" control
' � � diagrams in accordance with Division 1.
, 6. Mount one copy of each control diagram in the appropriate
' ; I equipment rooms as specified elsewhere.
; 7. Owner will accept�ob on basis of tests and inspections.
�! 8. A representative of firm that performed test and balance work is
' � to be in attendance to assist with final inspection.
� !
' ' 9. Furnish necessary mechanics to operate system and make necess-
' , � ary adjustments during final inspection.
' I 3.07 WARRANTY AND SERVICE
' � I A. Guarantee all work installed under this Division to be free from defects
in workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of
� substantial usage, from date of occupancy of project or from date of �
' ' i final acceptance, whichever is earliest. ,
i
' I �
November 25, 1998 15010-13 98088.00 I
1
'
B. Above parties further agree they will repair and replace defective '
material or workmanship which becomes defective within terms of this
warranty-guarantee.
C. Upon final acceptance of work, Owner will assume responsibilit}� of '
supervision, operating and maintaining equipment. �
D. After final acceptance, owner will lubricate motors and other operating '
components, clean strainers, make minor adjustments for proper operat-
ing conditions and report defective materials or workmanship to '
Contractor.
E. Owner will make emergency repairs only if Contractor is unavailable.
Such repairs shall in no case void a warranty or guarantee. ,
F. Replace defective material, parts and equipment and correct defective
workmanship without delay and without cost upon being notified of '
such defect.
G. Upon expiration of each of these limits noted herein, maintenance
including labor and materials costs will be at Owner's expense. '
END OF SECTION ,
'
'
,
. �
'
'
1
,
,
November 25, 1998 15010-14 98088.00
1
I I
' �
�
1 I
, � SECTION 15020
� ; IDENTIFICATION AND PAINTING
I
' 1. � PART - 1 GENERAL
' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
, � A. Identify and paint all piping (new and existing) in renovated areas as
; � specified herein.
tB. Comply with the applicable provisions of Section 15010.
C. Identify piping, painted under Section 09900.
' ; D. Painting of Standpipes and Fire Protection Piping.
E. Painting of Medical Gas Piping.
! 1.02 RELATED WORK
i A. Section 09900: Painting.
� B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' � 01340 (01300).
j 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS ,
' ' A. Do not apply painting materials to unclean or improperly prepared
surfaces, or where dust is being generated.
� I B. Protect items not scheduled to be painted by covering with protective
' �
, materials.
, 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Refer to Section 09900 for approved
' � paint manufacturers.
, ' ,
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
, I 3.01 INSTALLATI ON
, A. Identify exposed piping with snap-on or strap-on type markers
' � indicating service, direction of flow and pipe size. Install markers at
' � valves, access panels and at least once above each space but not more
than 50 feet apart. Color code markers in accordance with ANSI-B 13.1.
� Provide Seton "Setmark" markers.
' B. Identify concealed piping above ceilings with painted stencils indicating
' pipe service, direction of flow and pipe size. Install markers at valves,
'
' November 25, 1998 15020-1 98088.00
. I
�
access panels and at least once above each space but not more than 50 '
feet apart.
C. Color code Standpipes and Fire Protection piping: CC13 Safety :red. ,
D. Requirement for identification of piping is in addition to the
requirements for any color coding of inechanical and electrical piping
specified in Section 09900. �
E. Waste, vent, control compressed air and buried lines need not be
marked. '
3.02 MEDICAL GAS PIPING
A. Paint the following medical gas piping in the stockpile prior to erection. ,
B. Do not touch up areas of pipe where joints are made during the erection
process in locations where pipe is concealed. Touch up of joints is
required where medical gas piping is exposed. ' i
C. When painting the piping in the stockpile, leave the ends unpainted for I
several inches so that it will not be necessary to remove the paint prior '
to the brazing or soldering process.
D. Provide stick-on identification markers indicating service and direction �
of flow on all medical gas piping on 20 foot intervals and at least once
above every room.
E. Color code medical gas piping in accordance with the following '
schedule:
1. Clinical compressed air - yellow. '
2. Vacutun - white.
3. 1Vitrous oxide - medium blue. '
4. Oxygen - green (to match oxygen cylinders).
'
END OF SECTION
i
� 1
1
1
i
November 25, 1998 15020-2 98088.00
,
' � i I
I
i � I I
SECTION 15025
� i
' � EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION '
I
; I
� , 1. � PART - 1 GENERAL
!
' ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
! j A. Nameplates, tags, stenciling and similar items for identification i
purposes.
' � � B. Valve tagging. ,I
C. Control Diagrams. �I
' � � 1.02 RELATED WORK
; A. Section 09900: Painting. I�
' B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
; � C. Section 15020: Identification and Painting �,
' 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' 01340 (01300).
' 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS
,
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Seton Name Plate Corporation or equal.
' i 2.02 NAMEPLATES, TAGS, ETC.
� A. Nameplates: Rigid plastic, "Setonite" or bakelite, with engraved
' , � lettering of 3/4" minimum height. Fill engraved lettering with a
permanent coloring material which contrasts with color tag material for
, i easy reading.
, B. Fasteners: Commercial quality, rust resistant nuts and bolts with
� backing washers, self-tapping screws or rivets.
' ' C. Stenciling: Stencil large pieces of equipment with an oil based enamel
; � or semi-gloss latex.
1 2.03 CONTROL DIAGRAM FRAMES: Seton Name Plate Corp., No. 111P
; I aluminum frames with "plexiglass" or "lucite" glazing or equal by Brady or
� Avery.
' �3. I PART - 3 EXECUTION
; 3.01 BAKELITE NAMEPLATES
' I �
A. Provide engraved rigid plastic nameplates showing name and number of
mechanical equipment in a conspicuous location on items such as
' j starters, fans, reheat coils, air handlers and control panels. .
� November 25, 1998 15025-1 98088.00
�
1
B. Nameplates to have at least 3/4" high lettering. �
C. Use names and numbers appearing in schedules on drawings.
D. Submrt proposed identification list for approval prior to making '
nameplates. Use abbreviations only where approved.
E. Fasten nameplates to equipment using nuts and bolts, screws, brads, '
rivets or other type fasteners. Glue or adhesive is not acceptable.
F. If unsuitable surfaces, such as high temperature, lack of space, etc. do
not allow for direct attachment, use copper or brass rings or chains to '
attach tags.
3.02 VALVE IDENTIFICATION '
A. Identify each valve with engraved anodized aluminum identificati��n tags
indicating valve manufacturer, style and size on one side and valr.�es '
� normal position, contents of pipe and sequential identification nurnber
on other side.
B. Color code tags to differentiate valve types. ,
C. Tags to be Seton Style M4963.
D. Attach tag to valve handle with nickel plated bead chain. '
3.03 CONTROL DIAGR.AMS
A. Provide pneumatic and electrical control diagrams, sequence of �
operation, framed and mounted of equipment and controls in each
separate equipment room. '
B. As a minimum the following instructions and diagrams are required:
1. Pneumatic and electronic control diagrams. '
2. Electrical/Electronic inte�lock and control diagrams.
3. Sequence of operation, where applicable. '
4. Required concise operating instructions.
C. Use non-fading prints of black-line diazo or approved equivalent and t
aluminum frames with "plexiglass" or "lucite" covers.
D. Diagrams and instructions may be reduced in size, but lettering not to �
be smaller than "elite" type as produced on standard typewriter.
END OF SECTION '
,
. �
November 25, 1998 15025-2 98G88.00
�
�
' ' �I
I
' ' � SECTION 15030
� �
, � CLEANING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
I I
' 1. ' PART - 1 GENERAL
I
' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
t � � A. Cleaning of Duct Systems.
t 1 B. Cleaning of Existing Mechanical Equipment.
� C. Cleaning of Existing Ductwork.
' � D. Cleaning and flushing of inechanical piping systems.
E. Cleaning of Domestic Water System.
�� F. Cleaning of Medical Gas Piping Systems.
' 1.02 RELATED WORK: Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions
i
�2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS: NOT APPLICABLE
� 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
' i 3.01 GENERAL
� ! A. Upon completion of contract and progressively as work proceeds, clean
' , up dirt, debris, oil materials, etc., and remove from site.
' � B. Keep premises in neat and clean condition to satisfaction of Owner.
' 1 C. Thoroughly clean ducts and appazatus casings before fans and filters are
operated.
iD. Touch up factory applied finishes, if not to be repainted, covering all
' bare places, scratches, etc.
� � E. Repair without cost to Owner all stoppage, discoloration or other
� damage to parts of the building, its finish or furnishings resulting from
� failure to properly clean piping system.
� �
' ; 3.02 EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
' I i A. In renovation areas, clean existing coils on reheat coils to return coil
' i pressure drop characteristics to original condition.
�
' j i B. Replace existing fan belts where required to adjust fan speed to final air
' delivery requirements shown on drawings.
, j C. Clean existing damper blades where mounted in duct systems.
' '
, November 25, 1998 15030-1 98088.00
�
3.03 EXISTING DUCTWORK '
A. Tn areas of renovation, clean existing interior of ductwork where dust
and cobwebs have collected. �
B. Clean elbows at turning vanes and air extractors to remove dust and
cobwebs. ,
C. In areas of renovation, seal transverse duct joints with two part Hardcast
sealant where air leakage is present or otherwise indicated on the
drawings. �
3.04 MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Make joints in pipe and tubing with brazed joint fittings, except at �
equipment requiring screwed connections.
B. Wash joints with hot water after assembly to crack and wash off flux. �
Use wire brush.
C. Circulate a solution of trisodium phosphate (2 lbs per 50 gallons �of '
water volume) or sodium carbonate (1 lb per 30 gallons of water; or
sodium hydroxide (1 lb per 50 gallons of water) through the piping
system at design temperature for 3 hours. �
D. After pipe cleaning is completed, drain system and remove, clean and
replace strainer baskets. Clean dirt legs.
3.05 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM '
A. Flush domestic water system progressively by opening building outlets
and permitting flow to continue from each until water runs clear. '
B. Sterilize system in accordance with requirements of State Department of
Public Health by the following method or other method acceptable to '
local authorities:
1. Introduce chlorine or a solution of calcium or sodium �
hypochlorite, filling lines slowly and applying sterilizing agent at
a rate of 50 ppm of chlorine as determined by residual chlorine
tests at ends of lines. �
2. Open and close all valves while the system is being chlorinated.
3. After sterilizing agent has been applied and left standing for 24 '
hours, test for residual chlorine at ends of lines.
4. If less than 25 ppm is indicated, repeat sterilizing process. �
5. After standing for 24 hours and tests show at least 25 ppm of
residual chlorine, flush out system until all traces of chemical
used are removed. �
6. Arrange for local health department to check and approve system
before connecting to existing system. �
November 25, 1998 15030-2 98�J88.00
'
�
II
1 ' I
� I
, I 3.06 OXYGEN, NITROUS OXIDE, CLINICAL COMPRESSED AIR AND
� VACUUM SYSTEMS
' ' ! A. Before erection, thoroughly clean outside and inside of pipe, tubing,
, � valves and fittings (except those supplied pre-cleaned for specific
� I service by manufacturers).
' , � B. Wash free of oil, grease, dirt. In the case of oxygen or any other
� � combustible material, wash in a hot solution of sodium carbonate or tri-
� ; sodium phosphate mixed in proportions of one pound to three gallons of
� � water.
C. Employ scrubbing and continuous agitation of parts to remove deposits
' I and insure complete cleaning.
, D. After washing, rinse parts thoroughly with clean hot water.
1 �
E. After cleaning, take necessary precautions in handling and storage of
materials and in cleanliness of tools used for cutting and reaming to
� , ; prevent oil, grease or foreign substance from being introduced into
tubing.
I F. Tools must be cleaned as specified for pipe. The use of cutting lubricant
' is not permitted for cleaning. Where such contamination is known to
` have occurred, rewash and re-rinse materials affected.
' � ' END OF SECTION '
� �
1 �
,
1
�
;
1 �
,
! �
� ,
, i� � �
1 ; �
�
i
' November 25, 1998 15030-3 98088.00
�
i I
' i '
I
� � I
� SECTION 15035
� �
, � i TESTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
i
� 1. � PART - 1 GENERAL
i 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
, , i A. Test mechanical systems and equipment to demonstrate proper
I operation.
1 � B. Testing of existing air handling equipment.
C. Testing of existing mechanical systems and equipment prior to
� � renovation.
D. Testing of Domestic Water Piping.
� ; E. Testing of Drainage and Vent System.
, � F. Testing of HVAC Piping System.
� ; , G. Testing of Fire Protection Piping.
� H. Testing of Indoor Air Quality.
' I. Records of Testing.
� �
� ��
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
i
� B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
, ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� I A. Employ competent, qualified mechanics to test the HVAC systems.
' , �
B. Employ a reputable, recognized organization regularly engaged in the
j work to test and balance the HVAC systems.
� , C. Provide written documentation of all testing witnessed by General
Contractor or Owner's representative.
� ' � 1.04 COORDINATION: Advise Architect of scheduled systems testing and
� I completed system demonstration schedule so that he may witness tests andlor
demonstration, if he so desires.
� I I
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS: NOT APPLICABLE
� �
� I �
�
i �
� �
November 25, 1998 15035-1 98088.00
�
'
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION �
3.01 GENERAL TESTING
A. Test all equipment and systems installed and demonstrate proper �
operation.
B. Submit notices of readiness for inspection. �
C. Correct and retest work found defective when tested.
D. Make repairs to piping system with new materials. Peening, doping or �
caulking of screwed joints or holes is not permitted.
3.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING: Test hot and cold domestic water piping '
system upon completion of rough-in and before connection to fixtures at a
hydrostatic pressure of 125 psig for a period of one hour.
3.03 DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM 1
A. Test drainage and venting system with necessary openings plugged to
permit system to be filled with water and subjected to a water pressure '
of 10 feet of head.
B. System to hold water for 30 minutes without a water level drop greater
than 4 inches in a 4 inch standpipe and without visible leakage. �
C. Test system in sections if minimum head can be maintained in each
section. Provide a minimum "10 foot head" pressure at top joint. ,
D. Conduct air or smoke test if in opinion of Architect reasonable cause
exists to suspect leakage or less than quality workmanship. �
3.04 HVAC PIPING: Hydrostatically test piping at 125 psig pressure with no
evidence of leaking for a period of at least 6 hours.
3.05 FLUSH VALVES: Test flush valves for proper operation. '
3.06 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PIPING: Test fire protection system with no '
evidence of leaking at minimum of 200 psi for period of 2 hours.
3.07 INDOOR AIR QUALITY TESTING:
A. After completion of construction, commissioning of all HVAC, ,
ventilation systems and bu'rn-in of the heating systems to drive so Ivents '
and other contaminates from th�building, secure the services of an � �
independent Air Quality Testing Agency. i
B. The approved Testing Agency shall perform indoor air quality sarnpling
and testing at multiple locations in the renovated areas to test for indoor �
air contaminates including but not limited to the following: � ,
1. Sulfur dioxide. �` I
' I
2. Carbon monoxide.
3. Nitrogen dioxide. '
November 25, 1998 15035-2 98�88.00
�
�
' �
� I
' i i 4. Ozone.
' ' � 5. Hydrocarbons.
' ; 6. Total particulate (below l0µm diameter)
I
i � 7. Lead particulate.
' � I
8. Carbon dioxide.
� 9. Chlordane.
� � � 10. Ozone.
�
' I 11. Radon.
, 12. Other contaminates recommended b the IA Testin A enc .
Y Q g g Y
' ' C. The Testing Agency shall chemically analyze the samples and provide a
I � written report to the Owner and Architect. The re ort shall s ecificall
�
' P P Y
highlight areas with unacceptably high levels of contaminates.
� � D. Areas found to have unacceptably high levels of contaminates shall be
corrected by the contractor.
' E. The Testing Agency shall assist in resampling these areas after
corrective action.
3.08 RECORDS OF TESTING
� A. Maintain records of system testing and test results.
B. Furnish copy of test records to the Architect.
'
� � END OF SECTION
i
i '
� ; i
� ��
1 �
�
. �
1 � �
1 ;
November 25, 1998 15035-3 98088.00
1
. I
I
'
I
' I SECTION 15050
, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
,
i
' �1 ; PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: All work specified in this section shall comply with the
� ; � provisions of Section 15010.
I
, i 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: The mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and
' , , show the relation of equipment and connections. Do not scale drawings for
exact sizes and locations.
� � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' ; I 01340 (01300).
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
, ; A. Store materials in accordance with Section 01620 (01600).
I B. Protect materials and equipment at all times from damage, weather and
� � exposure to dirt and moisture.
C. Any materials shown on the contract documents as existing to be
� � relocated are the property of the owner. The Contractor shall be
responsible for removal, storage and reinstallation of these materials for
the duration of the project. Any of these materials suffering damage or
� i loss while under the responsibility of the Contractor shall be repaired or
replaced without additional cost to the Owner.
2. ' PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� � 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
' A. Specifications and drawings indicate name, type or catalog numbers of
materials and equipment to establish basic standards for the project.
�, These standards shall be used exclusively in preparation of the
, � Contractor's bid.
B. Unauthorized substitution of non-approved manufacturers,
equipment or materials shall result in automatic rejection of
j � submittal.
' �� C. Upon completion of the bidding process, the Architect may review
written requests from the Contractor for voluntary alternate
� � manufacturers including appropriate changes to the bid price for the
�� substitutions requested.
� � � D. The Contractor shall not utilize the alternate manufacturers in the
� preparation of bid unless approved by written addendum from the
� Architect.
November 25, 1998 15050-1 98088.00
1
-�J
'
E. Do not construe standards as limiting competition. Base bid on one or ,
more of the approved manufacturers listed.
F. Equipment shall bear UL or ETL labels when available. �
G. Use products and materials of domestic manufacturer unless specifically
noted otherwise. '
H. Refer to Section 01630 (01600) for additional requirements.
2.02 EQUIPMENT �
A. Structural Fastening
1. Provide concrete inserts, expansion shields, lag bolts, bolts, �
washers and nuts for structural fastening of equipment, materials,
piping and ductwork.
2. All bolted devices to use jamb nuts. f
3. Inserts to be continuous type equal to Unistrut Corp. Series
P3200 for beams and P3300 for floor and roof slabs. �
4. Inserts to be complete with springs, nuts, end caps and plastic
coated filler to prevent concrete seepage. '
5. Use of power drive "shot-pins" is permitted only for ducts up to
20 inches in width and pipes up to 1 inch diameter.
B. Miscellaneous Supports and Framing: '
1. Where light weight concrete/decking or other non-structural
materials are used that will not support inserts, provide angles, �
unistrut and channels to span between steel beams and/or bar
joists to support ductwork, equipment, and piping.
2. Provide all angle iron or channel framing at irregular w�ll and �
floor slabs penetrations required to provide a smooth surface for
mounting of angles around fire and combination fire-smolce '
damper sleeves.
3. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring '
special framing or drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's
installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the
submitting contractor. �
4. Provide all screws, bolts, nuts, inserts, required for attaching
sheet metal specialty items to duct, walls, floors and ceilings.
C. Access Panels �
1. Furnish ceiling and wall access panels for installation by other �
trades.
2. Furnish access doors with UL labeled fire rating comparable to
the wall, floor, shaft or ceiling rating where they are installed. '
November 25, 1998 15050-2 98088.00
,
' � �� _ . ,
I
' I I .
3. Provide panels of sufficient size and locate to permit servicing of
; all equipment furnished under this section.
' I
4. Minimum size to be 18-inch x 18-inch.
� 5. Construct doors as follows:
' � � a. 14-gauge steel.
i b. 16-gauge steel frame.
, i � c. Screwdriver operated locks.
�
d. Finished with prime coat of rust inhibitor.
, � I 6. Provide Milcor, Bilco or approved equal doors for the following
applications:
! a. Milcor Style A for acoustical tile ceilings.
' � �
b. Milcor Style M for exposed masonry walls.
� � c. Milcor Style DW for drywall installations.
� d. Milcor Style AP for plastered ceilings and walls.
� e. Milcor Style M with stainless doors for ceramic tile or
; glazed structural tile.
' 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
� �' 3.01 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION
1 ' i A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Route piping and ductwork to avoid conflicts and interferences with
� building structure and other trades.
' C. Install ductwork and piping to provide maximum possible clear height
i � underneath.
' D. Install equipment requiring service to be readily accessible.
i i
' , END OF SECTION
' � i' �
� �
� j
�
� I
November 25, 1998 15050-3 98088.00
'
i
i �
, � I
' I �
SECTION 15060
I
, �
PIPING AND FITTINGS
i
� �
' 1. �, PART - 1 GENER.AL
' I 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' ; ! A. All piping associated with mechanical systems.
' ; B. The following piping systems are not covered in this section. Refer to
� i
other sections for specifications:
1. Section 15300: Fire Protection.
' � 2. Section 15320: Medical Gas Piping Systems.
1.02 RELATED WORK
, � A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. ',
� � B. Section 15035: Testing Mechanical Systems.
I� ' � � C. Section 15061: Pipe Hangers. '�
� � D. Section 15062: Valves. I
' � i E. Section 15250: Insulation.
1 � F. Section 15515: Hydronic Specialties.
; 1.03 DEFINITIONS
' A. References to low and medium pressure applies to piping with 125 psi
and lower working pressure.
� � B. References to high pressure applies to piping systems with working �
/ , pressure greater than 125 psi.
� 1.04 SUBMITTALS
' , � A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340
(01300).
' ; B. Submit pipe, valves and fittings for approval prior to starting
' I installation.
j C. Submit welders's certificates specified in Quality Assurance below.
� � 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� �
' i A. Pipe and fittings to be new domestic manufacture and marked clearly
with manufacturer's name, weight and classification or working press-
� � ure.
, �
November 25, 1998 15060-1 98088.00
'
, I
B. Foreign pipe and fittings installed in the project will be removed at '
contractars expense. i
C. Welders' Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accord3nce �
with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and
Brazing Qualifications.
D. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ASME Code f�r ,
Pressure Piping, B31.9 Building Services Piping and The American
Welding Society, Welding Handbook. ,
E. Soldering and brazing procedures for piping shall comply with ASME
Code for Pressure Piping, B31.9 Building Services Piping.
1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING �
A. Provide factory applied plastic end caps on each length of pipe.
Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling to pre�°ent ,
pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris and moisture.
B. � Protect stored pipe, flanges, fittings and specialties. Elevate above grade '
and enclose with durable waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do
not exceed structural capacity of floor.
C. Pipe, cleanout and floor drain openings shall be temporarily plugged ,
with oakum or test plugs until final connections are made.
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS '
2.01 STEEL PIPES
A. Mill wrap all uninsulated underground steel pipe with Republic ,
X-Tru-Coat or equal.
B. Steel pipe shall comply with ASME B36.lOM. '
C. Standard Weight, ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E, electric resistance
welded or ASTM A53, Grade B, Type S, seamless black steel pi�e with �
butt welded joints and fittings for heating hot water piping: 2'/2" a.nd
larger diameter.
2.02 STEEL PIPE FITTINGS '
A. Flanges, Fittings, Unions and similar Items:
1. Commercially available products mazked in accordance wii:h '
MSS SP-25.
2. Markings on products of small size or odd shape may be omitted '
provided they are listed in the sequence allowed by MSS ��P-25.
3. Mark products with the manufacturer's name and trademarlc. ,
B. Fittings 2" and smaller:: Class 125 cast iron, manufactured in
' accordance with ANSI Standard B 16.4. Materials shall meet the
� �
November 25, 1998 15060-2 98088.00
�
� � •
' ; I
i i
� i specifications of ASTM A-126, Class B. Threaded with ANSI/ASME
I ' Standard Ta er Pi e Threads B 1.20.1 and chamfered.
, P P
'� ' ' ! C. Fittings 2'/z" and larger:
; 1. Factory made, wrought carbon steel, butt welded fittings.
� ; 2. ASTM A234, ANSI B 16.9 and B 16.28.
' i
� , �
, D. Provide factory forged fittings and flanges forged in USA.
; E. Provide eccentric reducers on all steam piping to maintain condensate
i �
I ' , , drainage along bottom of piping.
, � � F. Machined, remarked, painted and otherwise altered non-domestic
� i forgings are not acceptable.
, G. Branch connections from Mains or Headers 2'/z" or larger:
' �
1. Welded tees or welding outlets, equal to Bonney Forge
iWeldolets ar Threadolets. �
, ' 2. Use forged outlets only if branch line is at least one pipe size
smaller than main or header.
I H. Flanges: ASTM A105 and ANSI B16.5, carbon steel, raised face with
' ' ' butt welded end connection. ASTM A105 and ANSI B16.5.
' I
I. Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150. Hexagonal stock �
I�� ' with ball and socket j oints and bronze seating surfaces. Threads shall
conform to ASTM B1.20.1.
, � J. Bolting Materials:
1. Semi-finished carbon steel bolts and hex nuts, ASTM A307.
t2. Threads and Dimensions: ANSI B 1.1 and B 18.2.
� K. Thread Lubricant:
' I II
1. Crane "Formula 425" or equal.
i 2. Approved Teflon tape may be used except on fuel oil, natural or
' propane gas and medical gases.
! � L. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gaskets shall match full-faced for cast iron
' flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the
service of the piping system in which installed and conform to the
' � respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B 16.20 or B 16.21). Provide
! materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and
I
� � � thermal conditions of the fluid being carried. Gaskets containing
; asbestos will NOT be accepted. Gaskets to be Cranite, Sepco or equal.
' i
, I
November 25, 1998 15060-3 98088.00
1 �
' ' — -- �
,
2.03 COPPER PIPE '
A. Type L, hard drawn seamless, ASTM B-88 for the following ser�ices.
Piping dimensions indicated on drawings as 2'/s" are outside diaineter �
(OD).
1. Domestic hot & cold water piping.
' 2. HVAC hot water water pipe: 21/s" OD and smaller. Contractor's ,
I option to use copper pipe up to 4" OD inside building.
3. Control air tubing-Refer to Control Section. ,
� 2.04 COPPER PIPE FITTINGS
A. Sweat type, wrought copper, ASTM B62, with dimensions conforming '
to ANSI B16.22 and sweep patterns for copper tubing.
B. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Victaulic Company of America. �
Electroplated steel or brass nipple with an inert and non-corrosive
thermoplastic lining. Provide separate union if dielectric fitting is
located at equipment connection. '
C. Dielectric Connections (dry piping systems):
1. Dielectric unions with screwed, flanged or sweat ends to isolate ,
dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
2. Epco Sales, Inc., Watts Regulator Co. or Lochinvar "V" line '
dielectric couplers.
, 3. Use couplers at junction of steel pipe and equipment with copper ,
' piping systems.
4. Do not use steel or cast iron fittings in copper piping syst��ms.
D. The use of T-Drill fittings is NOT permitted under any circumstance. ,
E. Nipples: Brass. '
2.05 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE
A. Standard weight cast iron pipe shall conform to ASTM A74 (hub &
spigot) or ASTM A888 and CISPI 301 (hubless) with drainage fittings ,
� for:
1. Waste, vent and drain pipe: 2" and larger diameter. '
2. Storm water pipe.
3. Rainwater leaders inside building. r
B. Joints in Cast Iron Pipe:
1. Provide neoprene compression type gasketed joints in hub and '
spigot cast iron soil pipe. Compression gaskets shall comply with
ASTM C564. ,
November 25, 1998 15060-4 98088.00
1
i
i .
� I
� I
I
I
' j 2. Cast iron soil pipe aboveground may be hubless with neoprene
, I gasketed couplings. Do not use hubless pipe below on-grade
slabs or underground.
, ' j a. Couplings shall be constructed of 24 gauge, type 304
� stainless steel.
' i b. Neoprene gasket shall comply with ASTM C564.
� c. Coupling assembly shall be FM approved and labelled to
�� Class I of Factory Mutual Standard 1680 far 15 PSI
� � � ' working pressure.
�
� ; d. Coupling assembly shall conform with CISPI 310.
� I e. Couplings and gaskets shall be Clamp-All.
� , .
' ; � 2.06 STRAINERS
� A. Cleanable, line size, Y-type strainers.
�
' �i, B. Brass strainer basket.
' C. 20 mesh monel screen for 2" and smaller.
� ;
' ' � D. 1/16" perforations for 2'/2" tlu�u 4".
�
' E. '/s" perforations for 5" and larger.
� I
i F. Provide back-up screens where necessary for support of screens.
' � •
' � G. Blow down hose bibs.
' ;
' li H. Provide the following type strainers:
' 1. Screwed end: 250 lb., Muessco #11.
� �
� �', i 2. Flanged end: 125 lb., Muessco #751.
� 3. Solder end: 250 lb., Muessco #353.
� �' 4. Grooved end: 300 lb., Victaulic #732. ''
�I I. Strainers to be Armstrong Machine Works, Mueller Steam Specialty,
' � Spirax Sarco or Victaulic Co. of America.
i
' 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE ACCESSORIES
' i A. Sleeves:
; 1. Provide schedule 10 or 40 steel pipe sleeves at wall and floor
, j penetrations.
i
� 2. Use 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal for floor penetrations in
I I mechanical�rooms except where UL penetration details require a
' � �� different method.
�
;
' ;
November 25, 1998 15060-5 98088.00
i
�
1
3. Sleeve penetrations of rated walls and floor slabs must ramply ,
with approved penetration details and firestopping methods
shown in the latest edition of the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
B. Escutcheons: Chrome pipe escutcheons, slip-on or split type where pipe ,
passing through finished walls is visible.
C. Exposed Metal Pipe and Trim: Chrome plated. '
D. Pipe Saddles: 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal installed to protect
insulation. '
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATI ON ,
A. Ream pipe after cutting to full bore.
0
B. Remove foreign matter from inside of pipe before installation. ,
C. Foreign pipe, valves and fittings installed in the project will be removed
at contractors expense.
D. Han i in so e ui ment flan es and connections do not bear wei ht '
gPP g q P , g g
of piping.
E. Install piping to prevent stresses and strains to piping and hangers from '
expansion or contraction.
F. Provide loops, offsets or expansion joints as indicated on drawin;s. '
G. Do not support piping from pumps. No torque shall be applied to pumps
by connecting pipes. �
H. Adequately support vertical lines at their bases or by a suitable hanger
placed in horizontal line near riser or by a base fitting set on peclestal. '
', I. Run piping in straight lines and square with building. Riser lines to be
i plumb. Make offsets only where indicated or where necessary.
J. Provide flan es and unions throu hout i in s stems to facilitate
g g PP g Y �
installation and removal of piping and equipment.
K. Tees and Ta s: In eneral all branch tee connections should be made
P g '
on the top of the mains to avoid circulating grit and trash into th�
smaller branch lines serving coils. '
L. Make provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without
dismantling piping.
M. Grading pipes for drainage: '
1. Uniformly place storm drainage, sanitary sewer and footing drain ,
pipes at elevations and slopes indicated on drawings.
2. Unless noted otherwise, slope pipes at not less than '/8" per foot.
,
November 25, 1998 15060-6 93088.00
1
, i
' � -
' � I3.02 ROUTING
�
i A. Route piping approximately as indicated on drawings or as structural
� ' i and architectural conditions permit.
� B. Do NOT route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of
� electrical switchgear, panels or transformers.
, C. Do NOT route an water or drain i in directl above Radiolo
� Y P P g Y gY
' � ' rooms, C.T. Scan Rooms, computer rooms, control rooms, R/T, R/F,
� MRI or other rooms with electronic diagnostic equipment. Route all
� � mam pipmg outside these areas.
' D. Do not install water piping, other than fire protection piping, in
� � Transformer or Elevator Equipment Rooms.
� ; li E. Collect plumbing vents below roof and terminate above roof at least 25
feet away from fresh air intakes at air handling units and rooftop units.
i F. Install piping not to interfere with opening of doors.
, G. Route piping to intersect and cross fire-rated walls and partitions at a 90
i degree angle.
� ' H. Do not route piping over any electrical equipment where the possibility
i , i of damage exists.
' 3.03 PIPE SLEEVES
� ' A. Provide sleeves for all piping installed under this division. Locate
� ' sleeves at permanent walls, partitions and floors.
' B. Floor sleeves to extend 1'/z" above finished floor.
' � C. Wall sleeves to extend 1'h" beyond face of wall on each side.
� D. Mount sleeves flush with bottom side on concrete or decking in floor
� slabs and coordinate method of penetration with General Contractor.
I ' E. Sleeve enetrations of rated walls and floor slabs must com ly with
P P
, approved penetration details and firestopping methods shown in the
� , latest edition of the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
; � F. Provide pipe sleeves as follows:
' 1. All piping penetrating masonry walls of any type or fire rating.
' , 2. All piping penetrating 2-hour fire rated walls.
�i� � i 3. All piping penetrating floor slabs.
' I 4. Chilled water piping at all wall penetrations.
, � �I
1
' November 25, 1998 15060-7 98088.00
�
'
G. Non-sleeved penetrations of 1-hour fire rated and/or smoke walls: ,
1. Extend all piping not subject to movement or sweating such as
gas piping, medical gases, waste piping, etc. through one-hour �
fire and smoke walls void of insulation.
2. Cut wallboard to fit pipe tight to both sides of wall. Refer to ,
Architectural details and Section 02720 for additional sealing,
caulking and firestopping.
H. Sleeved penetrations of non-rated walls: ,
1. Void space between pipe and sleeve to be packed with Therma-
fiber Safing Insulation as manufactured by United Gypsum ,
Company.
2. Pack safing material tight to within '/2" of ends of sleeve. ,
i 3. Install a primary seal at sleeve ends using Childers Chillpen
CP-30 for chilled water piping.
4. Refer to Architectural details and Section 07270 for additional '
sealing and firestopping requirements at penetrations.
5. Stop pipe insulation at sleeve and wrap 1'/z" of insulation and '
protruding end of pipe sleeve with 2 layers of "Hardcast" duct
joint wrap.
6. On cold piping, void space between sleeve and piping to be ',
minimum 1" all around.
7. On hot piping, void space between sleeve and piping to be !
minimum '/2".
3.04 FIRESTOPPING ,
A. Penetrations and openings for all mechanical piping, plumbing piping
and fire protection piping services in fire and/or fire/smoke rated ,
assemblies shall be firestopped with tested firestopping design
assemblies. These penetrations include but are not limited to the
following: �
1. ° Piping and sleeves through above grade floor slabs.
2. Piping and sleeves through rated walls and partitions. ,
3. Piping and sleeves through vertical shafts such as pipe chases,
stairwells, elevator shafts and utility chutes. �
4. Voids around pipes and sleeves penetrating above grade fl�or
slabs and fire rated partitions, fire walls and smoke walls.
B. Manufacturer of materials shall specialize in the manufacture of the '
products required for firestopping.
,
November 25, 1998 15060-8 98088.00 '
�
I I �
, i I �
1 � �
C. Provide manufacturers' certifications of all materials used for
� I firestopping.
' , i D. All penetration methods shall be tested and listed in accordance with the
Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory
I I
' � E. Refer to Section 07270 for additional information and requirements for
� � firesto in
PP g•
� i 3.05 PIPE JOINTING
' i ! A. Pipe End Preparation:
� ' , i 1. Cut pipe ends square with pipe cutters only. Do not use hack
saws or torch.
i �
, 2. Ream pipe ends to full diameter after cutting.
' � �
3. Where pipe is threaded, die-cut right hand, pipe standard, clean
� I cut, full depth and taper threads. Make threaded joints leakproof
' ' I without caulking.
I 4. Apply a thin layer of approved pipe lubricant to male threads
� only.
I � � �
� 5. Where pipe is to be welded, die-cut end of butt joints at 30
' j degree taper. Provide full penetration weld with no bubbles or
' ' ' holes. Remove all slag.
� � B. Soldered and Brazed Joints:
' ' � 1. Make soft copper joints with suitable flux and 95/5 Tin-
i Antimony solder except plumbing joints.
' � 2. Make all domestic water plumbing piping joints with certified
� lead free solder such as Taramet Sterling by Taracorp Industries
� I or approved equal.
' , j 3. Make type K copper pipe joints with suitable flux and high
, melting point silver or phoscopper solder.
i
, C. Cast Iron Pipe Joints: For hub and spigot pipe with compression
I gaskets, install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
' i D. Hubless Pipe Couplings:
, I 1. Install couplings in accordance with manufacturer's published
� instructions.
' I
2. Support horizontal piping within 24" of each coupling.
� I 3. At changes of direction, support piping within 18" of coupling
, � ; used to make change of direction.
; � 4. Brace piping and fittings 6" and larger to prevent the swaying of
�, ' pipe in a horizontal direction.
i
, i November 25, 1998 15060-9 98088.00
'
5. Support vertical piping at the base of each stack and at every '
floor level.
3.06 ESCUTCHEONS: Provide chrome plated escutcheons where uninsulateci pipes ,
visibly penetrate walls of finished spaces.
3.07 STRAINERS: Install strainers for removal without spilling water on mators ,
and electrical equipment.
3.08 AIR VENTING
A. Provide manual air vents at high points of vertical risers and at each '
water coil to eliminate air from systems.
B. Provide air vents at all reheat coils. 1
3.09 VALVE ACCESS
A. Locate shut off and control valves for easy access and operation. '
B. Where valves are located in enclosed spaces, provide access doors of
sufficient size for operation. '
C. Furnish these access panels to proper trades for installation.
3.10 CONTROL SYSTEM CONNECTORS: Weld 1-inch steel half coupling �Crane ,
No. 386 or equal or provide 1-inch female pipe thread connection at loc�itions
indicated on drawings for installation of thermometers and automatic controls.
3.11 RECHECKING AND REPAIRING '
A. Before piping is concealed, recheck for leaks.
B. Remake or replace defective, leaking or otherwise unsatisfactory joints '
or material.
C. Peening, caulking or doping of piping is not permitted. '
END OF SECTION '
'
,
,
'
� ,
November 25, 1998 15060-10 98��88.00
� '
i
'
I
� ' I SECTION 15061
'' ' PIPE HANGERS
i
� �
' 1. PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' � A. Furnish and install pipe hangers for all mechanical piping systems.
i j B. Furnish and install pipe supports and alignment devices for all plumbing
, rough-in piping in stud walls.
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
j I
' ; 'i A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
� B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
t � C. Section 15300: Fire Protection.
: �� D. Section 15320: Medical Gas Piping Systems.
' E. Section 15250: Insulation.
� 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
1 � 01340 (01300).
i �
, , 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Comply with the applicable provisions of Section
' ' , 15010.
2. I PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� j 2.01 HANGERS
' � �
A. Grinnell Figure 260 (MSS SP-69, Type 1) adjustable clevis hangers for
' ; non-insulated steel piping: 2" thru 24" diameter with no longitudinal
movement.
, ,
' B. Grinnell Figure 260 (MSS SP-69, Type 1) adjustable clevis hanger, with
; Figure 167 (MSS SP-69, Type 40) galvanized insulation protection
, shields (4 psi compressive strength) sized for maximum 10 foot span for '
the following applications:
' � ' 1. Insulated steel i in '/z" thru 24" diameter.
i i P P g'
� 2. Insulated copper piping: '/z" through 8" O.D.
1 C. Grinnell Figure 104 (MSS SP-69, Type 6) adjustable swivel ring, split
� ring type hanger for the following applications:
' ; l. Non-insulated steel pipe, galvanized steel pipe and copper pipe:
� '/z" thru 1%z" diameter.
' , 2. Non-insulated cast iron soil pipe thru 8" diameter.
i
November 25, 1998 15061-1 98088.00
t
1
'
D. Grinnell Figure 97c or CT-99 (MSS SP-69, Type 9) adjustable �i��e ring ,
hanger, either plastic covered or copper plated for non-insulated copper
tubing with no longitudinal movement.
E. Grinnell Figure 171 (MSS SP-69, Type 41) pipe roll complete with '
Figure 167 (MSS SP-69, Type 40) galvanized insulation protection
shields (4 psi compressive strength) sized for maximum of 10 foot span ' '
for the following applications:
1. Insulated copper piping: 2'/s" OD and smaller with longitudinal '
,movement including hot water reheat piping.
2. Insulated steel piping 1" thru 30" with longitudinal movement
including hot water reheat piping. '
F. Grinnell Figure 261c or CT-121 (MSS SP-69, Type 8) riser clamp,
either plastic coated or copper plated at floor penetrations for copper '
pipe risers.
G. Grinnell Figure 261 (MSS SP-69, Type 8) riser clamps at floor slab
penetrations to support steel pipe risers. '
H. Unistrut Trapeze Hangers: Where three or more lines of pipe nin
parallel, provide trapeze hangers. '
I. Grinnell Figure 282 (MSS SP-69, Type 18) universal concrete inserts,
adequately sized and correctly positioned to support full operating '
weight of piping, fittings, valves, etc.
J. Grinnell Figure 86 (MSS SP-69, Type 23) C-clamps with locknuts for
the following applications: '
1. Attaching hangers to steel beams.
2. Note: Welding hanger rods to steel members is not perrrii�tted. ,
K. Grinnell Figure 218 (MSS SP-69, Type 30) beam clamps with Grinnell
Figure 157 extension pieces for attaching hangers to bar joists. '
2.02 SUPPORTS/ALIGNMENT DEVICES
A. Sumner Manufacturing Company's pipe support and alignment system '
for all plumbing rough-in piping to provide support and isolate
dissimilar materials:
1. Posifix: Support to align hot & cold lines with waste piping in a '
lavatory/sink rough-in for wall clearances greater than 3'/2".
2. Pipefix: Support to align hot & cold lines with waste piping in a ,
lavatory/sink rough-in for 3'/z" wall clearance.
3. Stakfix: For use inside of chases, provides two or three pipe 1
support off a vertical stack riser.
,
November 25, 1998 15061-2 98088.00
'
! �
' , �
� � I 4. Channel: Sized to fit over P-2000 Unistrut as an isolator for
, ' pipes.
' � B. Furnish all necessary accessories including clamps, mounting screws, u-
� bolts, stainless steel bands and metal clips required for complete
� installation.
1 �
C. Do not locate any plastic support materials above ceilings used as return
air plenums.
� 3. i PART - 3 EXECUTION
; 'i 3.01 INSTALLATION
' � A. Support piping on specified hangers such that equipment, pumps, valves
and fittings do not bear weight of pipe.
' �I 1. Support pipe risers at regular intervals in pipe shafts in
accordance with good practice.
' 2. Do not use perforated metal, strap iron or band iron for support.
, 3. Do not make offsets in hangers.
� 'I B. Isolate dissimilar hanger and piping materials where pipe is not
� insulated.
C. Provide neoprene grommets to isolate and clamp medical gas piping ,
' , where supported with trapeze hangers to isolate dissimilar metals. �
�� D. Suspend hangers from building structure.
' E. The following tables indicate maximum allowable spacing of hangers
i
and brackets.
' ' 1. Space hangers and brackets at closer intervals where required to
maintain levels, slopes and drainage or to prevent sagging.
� , 2. Provide hangers and brackets within 2' of all valves and fittings
' , (elbows, tees, etc.).
; MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SPACING - STEEL PIPE
' '
3/4" TO 1'/4" 6' O.C.
' ; 1'/z" TO 21/z" 9' O.C.
�
' � 3" 12' O.C.
� � 4" TO 6" 14' O.C.
j • 8" TO 12" 19' O.C.
' il 14" TO 24" 25' O.C.
'
November 25, 1998 15061-3 98088.00
,
�
'
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SPACING - COPPIER PIPE S
5/s" 5' O.C.
'/s" TO 1'/s" 5' O.C. I
13/s" TO 2'/s" 7' O.C. '
25/s" TO 5'/s" 9' O.C.
6" TO 8" 12' O.C. '
CAST IRON PIPE ,
Support each fitting at intervals of not more than 5 feet and at every joint.
'
END OF SECTION '
�
'
�
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
November 25, 1998 15061-4 98088.00
1
' �
� � SECTION 15062
' VALVES
�
� �
I (
, 1. ' PART - 1 GENERAL
; �; 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: All valves required for mechanical piping systems.
, 1.02 RELATED WORK
. � A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
' ! ' B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings
i
1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' � ! 01340 (01300).
,
1.04 DEFINITIONS
' I
' A. Low/medium (LP/MP) pressure duty references up to 125 psi working
pressure (wp).
� B. High pressure (HP) duty references greater than 150 psi wp.
�
2. , PART - 2 PRODUCTS
' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish and install Stockham valves or approved equal by Powell,
, Crane, Dezurik, Hammond, Lunkenheimer, Nibco-Scott, Rockwell,
I Centerline or Victualic.
B. Valves are specified by Stockham model numbers unless otherwise
' ; � noted to establish quality levels in the following tables:
GATE VALVES
' ' � 2" & 2-1/2"
Service Less & Up
; i
� � ---------- ----- -----
Steel Pipe B-105 G-623
i
� � Copper Pipe B-109 G 623
i �
� �
i � '
�
1 � ���
i � ���
November 25, 1998 15062-1 98088.00
�
�
'
CHECK VALVES �
2" & 2-1/2"
Service Less & Up �
---------- ------- -------
Domestic Water B-319 -- '
Sweat Valves B-309 --
Circ. Water G-932 G-932
'
BALL VALVES
Service 2" & Less '
---------- -----------
Domestic Water Hammond 8301 t
Circ Water Hammond 8301
BUTTERFLY VALVES '
Service 3" & Less 4" & Up
---------- ----------- ---------- r
Circ Water LG-712-BS3-E LG-722-BS3-E
'
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish new valves of domestic manufacture and mazked clearly with '
manufacturer's name and classification or working pressure.
B. Gate Valves '
1. Steel pipe systems, 2" and smaller:
a. Stockham figure B-105. '
b. Threaded end, bronze body, solid wedge disc.
c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS-�'P 80. �
d. Rising stem, union bonnet.
e. Body, bonnet and wedge shall conform to ASTM E-62 ,
bronze.
f. Stem shall be of dezincification-resistant silicon bronze '
ASTM B-371, or low zinc alloy ASTM B-99.
g. Non-asbestos packing and malleable or ductile iron '
handwheel.
,
November 25, 1998 15062-2 9�088.00
'
,
, � II 2. Steel pipe systems, 2'/2" and larger:
a. Stockham figure G-623.
� � �
b. Flanged, iron body, bronze mounted.
i c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 70.
i � �, d. Outside stem and yoke, bolted bonnet.
' �i e. Body and bonnet shall conform to ASTM A126 Class B
' cast iron.
i
' f. Packing and gaskets to be non-asbestos.
' i � 3. Copper pipe systems, 2" and smaller:
a. Stockham figure B-100 or B-109.
� ' �; b. Threaded or solder end, bronze body, solid wedge disc.
, c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 80.
' d. Rising stem, threaded bonnet.
, ; e. Body, bonnet and wedge shall conform to ASTM B-62
� � bronze.
� f. Stem shall be of dezincification-resistant silicon bronze
� ASTM B-371 or low zinc alloy ASTM B-99.
, g. Non-asbestos packing and malleable or ductile iron
' handwheel.
, � � 4. Copper pipe systems, 2%z" and larger:
,
, ' i a. Stockham figure G-623.
� b. Flanged, iron body, bronze mounted.
�� ' ; � c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 70.
I d. Outside stem and yoke, bolted bonnet.
' ! e. Body and bonnet shall conform to ASTM A126 Class B
cast iron.
� � f. Packing and gaskets to be non-asbestos.
, �
i � C. Ball Valves
I �
, � 1. Copper piping systems 2'/s" OD and smaller:
i a. Hammond Figure 8301.
' , b. ASTM B62 bronze body with threaded ends.
I, c. TFE seats and packing.
' �,
�
� November 25, 1998 15062-3 98088.00
� �
�
d. Full ported, chrome plated, solid brass ball with machined ,
port.
e. ASTM B 16 brass, blow-out proof stem '
f. Rated for 600 psi WOG (-20 to 150 �F).
g. Provide extended lever stems for valves in insulated �
piping.
h. Install valves with brass sweat to thread adapters. �
i. OPTION: Victaulic Series 600 butterfly valves in
grooved copper piping systems.
D. Butterfly Valves '
1. Steel i e s stems:
PP Y
a. Nibco LD-2000-5, Hammond Series 6200, Centerline �
Series 200, Keystone 129 or Stockham LG-722-BS�-E.
b. Rated for bidirectional, bubble-tight, dead-end shut-off '
service at 200 psi wp.
, c. Rated for 200 psi wp water service (-20 to 200 �F). '
d. Cast iron, lug type body conforming to ASTM A126,
Class B. �
' e. Field replaceable EPDM liner.
f. Aluminum bronze disc. '
g. Stainless steel stem with EPDM or Buna-N O-ring stem
seals. '
h. OPTION: Victaulic Series 300 butterfly valve in grooved
steel piping systems.
2. Operators: '
a. CLG-O (inside service) gear operator.
b. CLG-2 (weatherproo� gear operator. ,
c. Fully enclosed worm and quadrant unit.
d. Suitable handwheel to provide necessary torque for '
close-off rating and infinite throttling positions.
e. Valve-position indicator on operator. �
3. Operators for valves 3" and under:
a. Latch lock handle. �
b. Suitable for On-Off and manual throttling service.
�
November 25, 1998 15062-4 9€088.00
�
I I
'
� ��
' � E. Check Valves
' 1. Copper piping systems: 200 psi wp water service (-20 to 200
� °F).
' 2. Steel water piping systems: 200.psi wp water service (-20 to
� 200 �F).
i '
3. � PART - 3 EXECUTION
I � ; 3.01 INSTALLATION
�
� j A. Locate all shutoff and control valves for easy access and operation.
; �
� B. Where valves must necessarily be located in enclosed spaces, furnish
with access doors of sufficient size for operation.
� C. Furnish these access panels to proper trades for installation.
� � �
D. Install isolation service valves on all coils, air handlers and other
locations shown on the drawings.
, � E. Install butterfly valves in water piping systems such that ordinary
� maintenance work can be performed on equipment isolated by these
; valves, without having to drain the system beyond the valve.
� F. Furnish valve insert spools for flanged gate and globe valves 2'/z" and
' larger.
1 � '
i
; END OF SECTION ;
��
' � I
i
� �
� I
� I' I
' i '��
I i
� I
' I '
I �
� �
November 25, 1998 15062-5 98088.00
'
; i
� i 'I
i
,� , SECTION 15170
i ,
I �
� � MOTORS
� 1. PART - 1 GENERAL '
�� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Provide electric motors for equipment specified under
� this Division.
1.02 RELATED WORK
� � A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
� I
' � B. Division 16: Power wiring, starters and interlock wiring. ,
� ' �I 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section I
- � 01340 (01300).
�, ' 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� ! 2.01 EQUIPMENT
,
� � i A. Provide new NEMA standard motors designed for ample size to operate
jat proper load and full speed continuously without causing noise, vibrat-
� ion or temperature rise in excess of rating. �
, B. Torque characteristics to exceed rotating equipment WR2 requirements
, by sufficient amount to insure acceleration to full rated speed within
� i � allowable acceleration time of motor.
, �
� C. All motors 5 HP and larger on all equipment furnished under Division
j 15 to be high efficiency, high power factor type with additional rotor
� and starter windings equal to Baldor Super-E premium efficienc
I y
� � motars.
i
' ; D. Where motors are specified or scheduled to be used with variable
i � - frequency drives, furnish motors designed with heavy duty insulation for
� ' inverter duty to withstand additional heat generated by less than a
' I � perfect sine wave.
� , E. Motors to be designed and nameplated for 120-volt, 1-phase, 60-cycle
� j operation to be capacitor start, 40 degree continuous rise, open drip
� proof type equipped with ball bearings and internal overload protection.
iF. Motors designed and nameplated for 460 or 208-volt, 3-phase, 60-hertz
� � operation to be:
�
� i 1. Single-speed.
, � �
; i 2. Squirrel cage type.
, � 3. NEMA Design B.
I
November 25, 1998 15170-1 98088.00
'
�
4. Normal-starting torque. '
5. Open drip proof.
6. Quiet-operating. j
7. 40 degree centigrade continuous rise.
G. Motors to be equipped with lubricatable ball bearings having grease ��
fittings and relief ports.
H. Bearings to be rated by bearing manufacturer for B-10 life of 100,000 �
hours. Aluminum end brackets to have steel inserts in bearing cavity.
I. Where part-winding starters are specified, motors to be wound for
part-winding. ,
J. Specification applies to all motors unless otherwise specified with
equipment.
�
K. Motors drawing greater than 1000 watts at full load shall have a power
factor full load rating of 85% or higher at rated voltage; provide '
necessary capacitors on load side of starter for minimum power fa�ctor.
L. When tested in accordance with IEEE Test Procedure No. 112A,
Method B, Motor Apparent Efficiency (power factor x efficiency) shall �
meet or exceed the following:
�
MOTOR APPARENT
HP EFFICIENCY �
I, ----------------------
I' 1 to 1-1/2.........66% '
2 to 5.............70%
5 to 7-1/2.........73% 1
10 to 15...........75%
20 and UP..........76% '
M. For all high efficiency/high power factor motors, above values to be �
equal to those of a Baldor Super-E premium efficiency motor.
N. Motor sound power levels not to exceed the guidelines recommended by j
NEMA (MG1-12.49).
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION �
3.01 INSTALLATI ON
A. Arrange and include setting of motors. �
November 25, 1998 15170-2 98088.00
�
I �
' '�
� � B. Motors on direct-driven equipment to be lined up on job using dial
� , equipment.
� C. Unless starter furnished as integral part of equipment supplied, starter to
� be furnished and installed by Division 16.
i
j D. Adjust motors on belt driven equipment for proper belt tension.
� ' i
E. Provide motor shafts of sufficient length to equal or exceed centerline of
actual installed motor sheave.
� ' ,I
j ; END OF SECTION
1
:
1
� � �' _
�� '
�� �
1 �
� ,
1 !
�
1
�! ;
1 ; ���
� '�
1 � '
� � '
�
;
1
November 25, 1998 15170-3 • 98088.00
' �
! I
�
'
^, � i
i SECTION 15250
�
' , INSULATION
� I 1. � PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
�� � 'I A. Insulation for piping, duct systems and equipment specified in Division
� ! 15.
, � B. Certain equipment and/or systems to be factory insulated by the
manufacturer. Factory applied insulation shall comply with all
' � requirements specified herein.
� C. Provide all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment to perform
work required on the drawings and specified herein.
, D. All pipe, fittings, valves and strainers in insulated piping systems to be
insulated.
� I
� � 1.02 RELATED WORK
' A. Section 07270: Firestopping.
� , B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
' C. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
� D. Section 15890: Sheet Metal Ductwork - Low Pressure.
1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' � i 01340 (01300).
I
� 1.04 DEFINITIONS
� A. Thermal resistance "R" values are expressed in units of "Hour °F ft2Btu
per inch of Thickness" on a flat surface at a mean temperature of 75°F
; 'i unless noted otherwise.
�' ' B. Thermal conductivity (k) values are expressed in units of "Btu in/Hour
°F ftz" on a flat surface at a mean temperature of 75°F unless noted
' otherwise.
� C. Insulation to consist of insulating materials, jacket, mastic and adhesive,
' � either as a "system" or as an individual component when used separ-
� ; ately.
; 1.05 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE / CERTIFICATION
� ; �; A. Certify all insulation, adhesives, coatings, sealers and tapes as having a
� flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke development of 50 or less
'� � � when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 225 and UL 723.
November 25, 1998 15250-1 98088.00
�
�
'
B. All insulation shall be labeled by the manufacturer. The label shall �
include the "R" value, thickness, density, flame spread and smoke
developed rating. �
C. All insulating materials to meet the requirements of NFPA-90A. �
D. Products to meet applicable national, model, state and local building,
plumbing and mechanical codes. Products to be UL listed for intended �
service.
E. Deliver and store all insulating materials in manufacturer's containers �
and keep free from dirt, water, chemicals and mechanical damage Do
not repair, dry nor install insulation which has been damaged or tivet.
Such materials shall be removed from the project site. �
F. Apply insulation in a neat, workmanlike manner using experienced,
qualified tradesmen. �
G. Do not apply insulation until all leak and pressure testing has been
completed, inspected and released for insulation application.
H. Clean and dry surfaces prior to insulation application. ,
I. Butt insulation joints firmly together, smooth and securely install all
jackets and tapes. �
J. Insulation for duct, pipe and equipment exposed to weather to be
certified as self-extinguishing for 1" thickness in less than 53 seconds �
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1692.
K. Certify that all duct and piping insulation meets the minimum �
requirements of.the current Florida Energy Code for Building Co�struct-
ion.
1.06 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS '
A. Refer to Section 15010 for applicable codes and standards.
B. ASTM E-84 ,
C. NFPA 255
D. UL 723 ,
E. NFPA 90A
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS ,
2.01 MATERIALS FOR PIPE AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide factory premolded or shop mitered segment type insulation for �
pipe, fittings and valves, unless otherwise noted.
�
�
�I November 25, 1998 15250-2 9�088.00
'
I '
� ,
I i
' �
, B. Fitting insulation to be of same thickness and material as adjoining pipe
, insulation.
' , C. Cellular Glass (Foamglas)
' 1. Product to have continuous operational temperature limit of not
� less than 900°F and shall comply with requirements of ASTM
� C552, Type II, Class 2.
' 2. Inner and outer diameters of rigid insulation shall be in
� � , accordance with ASTM C585 for nominal sizes of pipe and
! I
, tubing.
' I
� ; 3. Thermal conductivity (k) at 75°F mean temperature shall be 0.33
maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or
' ASTM C518.
' 4. Cellular glass pipe insulation installed indoors shall be jacketed
with all-purpose, laminated, glass-fiber reinforced, flame-
� retardant, white kraft paper and aluminum foil complying with
ASTM C921, Type I.
� � a. Jacket shall be field applied.
� � b. Water vapor pertneance shall be 0.02 permeance inch
maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM E96,
� � Procedure A.
, c. Beach puncture shall be 50 oz in/in tear minimum when
� tested in accordance with ASTM D781.
� d. Tensile strength shall be 35 lbs/in width minimum when ,
� tested in accordance with ASTM D828.
' I, 5. Provide Pittsburgh Corning "Foamglas" pipe insulation for the
following services:
� a. Chilled water piping above ceilings of conditioned spaces:
< 1" pipe - 1" thick.
' � b. Chilled water piping above ceilings of conditioned spaces:
�, �i > 1" pipe - 1'/z" thick.
, c. Chilled water piping in unconditioned areas: < 1" pipe -
' ; ! 1'/2" thick.
� d. Chilled water piping in unconditioned areas: > 1" pipe -
' , 2" thick.
� I
I
�
November 25, 1998 15250-3 98088.00
�
'
e. In lieu of pipe saddles where other piping insulation is �
used (ie: Fiberglass, flexible elastomeric).
D. Flexible Tubular Elastomeric �
l. Product to have continuous operational temperature limit o;not
less than 220°F and shall comply with requirements of ASTM
C534, Type I. �
2. Thermal conductivity (k) at 75°F mean temperature shall b+: 0.28
maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 ar ,
ASTM C518.
3. Provide 2-pound density, fire-retardant elastomeric, slip-on ,
flexible type insulation with pre-mitered and pre-glued joints.
4. Maximum allowable flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum
allowable smoke development density of 50 when tested in 1
accordance with ASTM E-84. Product to be FM approved. I
5. Maximum water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm-inch in , I
accordance with ASTM E 96 and UV stabilized.
6. No material that exhibits melting, dripping or flowing whe:n I
tested by the ASTM E-84 test method shall be allowed. �
7. The ASTM E-84 test shall not employ the use of steels rods or �
wire mesh to hold the test specimen in place. No metal baffle �
may be used during the test to deter flame impingement �n the
test specimen. �
8. Provide AP Armaflex manufactured by Armstrong for %2" and 1" ,
application thicknesses.
9. For indoor applications provide AP Armaflex SS with self-seal '
seams. Seal butt ends with Armstrong 520 Adhesive.
10. Do NOT submit polyethylene or polyolefin foam insulation. It is �
NOT acceptable.
11. Provide flexible tube elastomeric insulation for the following �
services:
a. Moisture condensate drains: '/z" thick.
b. Floor drains and P-traps (except in slab-on-grade) s��rving ,
as moisture condensate drains from cooling equipinent:
'/2" thick. �
c. Domestic cold water piping: '/z" thick.
d. Domestic hot water piping: 1" thick for piping < 4" �
diameter.
�
November 25, 1998 15250-4 98088.00
,'.
I
' I ,. .
� I
' i e. Chilled water piping: 3/4" thick for pipe sizes < 1"
� � diameter and runouts < 2" diameter which do not exceed
� 12' in length to an individual fan coil unit.
' , � E. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation
I 1. Product to have continuous operational temperature limit of not
�' ' less than 650°F and shall comply with requirements of ASTM
C547, Class 2.
� ; I 2. Inner and outer diameters of rigid insulation shall be in
I accordance with ASTM C585 for nominal sizes of pipe and
; � tubing.
' ; 3. Thermal conductivity (k) at 75°F mean temperature shall be 0.26
� maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.
� '
� 4. Glass fiber pipe insulation installed indoors shall be jacketed
with all-purpose, laminated, glass-fiber reinforced, flame-
' ; retardant, white kraft paper and aluminum foil complying with
ASTM C921, Type I.
�' ' a. Jacket shall be factory applied with self-sealing lap.
' ' b. Water vapor permeance shall be 0.02 permeance inch
maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM E96,
� Procedure A.
; I c. Beach puncture shall be 50 oz in/in tear minimum when
� tested in accordance with ASTM D781.
, d. Tensile strength shall be 35 lbs/in width minimum when
tested in accordance with ASTM D828.
, �' S. Insulation density to be > 4 Ibs/ft3.
� 6. Product to be equivalent to Schuller International "Micro-Lok"
, � with Type "AP-T" jacketing. Applicable products manufactured
, by Certainteed, Knauf or Owens Corning are acceptable.
� I�� 7. Provide glass fiber pipe insulation for following services:
, � ;
� a. Domestic hot water piping:
(1) 1" thick for piping � 4".
' , �� � ��
2 1/z thick for i in 4 .
� � ) PP g
' b. Domestic cold water piping: '/z" thick.
i
� ' c. D ' "
omestic trap primer piping: /z thick.
� ��
I
I
'
November 25, 1998 15250-5 98088.00
1
f
�
d. Heatin hot water i i :
g PPng '
(1) '/�" thick for piping runouts which serve single
terminal units, do not exceed 12' in length and are
� 2�� �
(2) 1'/2" thick for all piping. �
e. Horizontal rain water piping including fittings from
horizontal to vertical and vertical to horizontal and roof
drain bodies: 1" thick. ,
F. Flexible Sheet Elastomeric
1. Product to have continuous operational temperature limit of not '
less than 220°F and shall comply with requirements of ASTM
C534, Type II.
2. Thermal conductivity (k) at 75°F mean temperature shall L�e 0.28 ,
maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or
ASTM C518. �
3. Apply with full coverage of Armstrong 520 Adhesive on surface
and at butted j'oints. ' '
4. Product to be AP Armaflex Sheet as manufactured by
Armstrong.
5. Provide flexible sheet elastomeric insulation for the following '
services:
a. Chilled water valves and strainers: 3/4" thick.
�
b. All equipment and piping which is subject to sweating.
2.02 MATERIALS FOR DUCTS
'
A. Blanket Type Duct Insulation
1. Insulation shall comply with requirements of ASTM C553, Type '
I, Class B2 for service up to 250°F.
2. Thermal conductivity (k) at 75°F mean temperature shall be 0.27 �
maximum at labeled thickness and 0.25 maximum with material
compressed 25% when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or
ASTM C518. �
3. Insulation shall be minimum 1 pound per cubic foot density.
4. Blanket type duct insulation installed indoors shall be jack�:ted �
with foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) facing.
a. Jacket shall be factory applied. �
b. Water vapor permeance shall be 0.02 permeance inch
when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A. �
November 25, 1998 15250-6 98088.00
i
I ' , . N ,
' � I
i
' I
I c. Beach puncture shall be 25 oz in/in tear minimum when
� tested in accordance with ASTM D781.
� 5. Product to be manufactured by Schuller International or equival-
� � ent by Certainteed, Knauf or Owens-Corning.
i
I 6. Provide glass fiber blanket insulation for the following:
� � a. Unlined conditioned supply ducts concealed from view:
1'/z" thick.
, � I b. Terminal reheat coils: 1'/2" thick.
�
ic. Tops of supply air diffusers: 1'/z" thick.
' � d. In addition, insulate any duct surface, air device or
I
hangers subj ect to sweating.
, i B. Board Type Duct Insulation
� �� 1. Insulation shall comply with requirements of ASTM C612, Class
1 ; 2 for service up to 450°F.
;
i i 2. Thermal conductiviTy (k) at 75°F mean temperature shall be 0.22
' � maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or
ASTM C518.
�
; 3. Insulation shall be minimum 3 pound per cubic foot density.
' I 4. Board type duct insulation installed indoors shall be jacketed
: i with foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) facing.
' � � a. Jacket shall be factory applied.
i �
, b. Water vapor permeance shall be 0.02 permeance inch
� � when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A.
� c. Beach puncture shall be 40 oz in/in tear minimum when
! tested in accordance with ASTM D781.
' �
5. Product to be manufactured by Schuller International or equival-
i �
� ent by Certainteed, Knauf or Owens-Corning.
i� � ; , 6. Provide glass fiber board insulation far the following:
I' a. Unlined conditioned supply ducts exposed to view: 1'/z"
' ' �� thick.
� � '
i �
b. All supply air ducts exposed to view (NO liner
i permitted): 1'/2" inch thick.
, � c. Su 1 and return air ducts with'
pp y in equipment rooms:
! 1'/z" thick.
I' ' j � d. Outside air intake plenums and ductwork: 1'/z" thick.
� i
� � �
' i
November 25, 1998 15250-7 98088.00
1 ' �
�
,
2.03 MATERIALS FOR FITTINGS AND VALVES '
A. Premolded insulation and/or one-piece PVC insulated fitting covers.
1. Provide factory pre-molded one-piece PVC insulated fittin� '
covers, precut insulation inserts and installation materials for the
following services:
a. PVC covers shall be rated for a flame spread of 25 and a �
smoke development rating of 50.
b. All pipe fittings, elbows, tees, unions, valves, flanges and �
couplings.
c. All grooved couplings in insulated piping systems. '
d. OPTION: Miter insulation for tees and elbows < 2" pipe
diameter in concealed locations. This option does 1`10T �
apply to chilled water systems.
2. Materials to be LoSMOKE 25/50 PVC by PROTO PVC Corp of
Clearwater, Florida or equal by Foster Seaglass, UNI-FIT inserts ,
and accessories, Molded Acoustical Products, Inc., Hamfab,
Zeston Division of Schuller International or Armstrong Pr��ducts. �
2.04 ELECTRICAL HEAT TAPE
A. Furnish Raychem HWAT heat tracing tape for uncirculated branch '
domestic hot water lines.
B. Provide heat tape in densities indicated on the drawings.
C. Install heat tape underneath wrapping, insulation and jackets specified in '
this section. �
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION ' '
3.01 GENERAL
A. Do not cut insulation where a hanger is located. '
B. Test piping and duct systems for leaks prior to installation of instilation
covering. �
C. All surfaces to be clean and dry when covering is applied. Cover3ng to
be dry when installed and during application of any finish. �
D. All adhesives, cements and mastics to be free of asbestos and
compatible with materials applied without attacking materials in either
wet or dry state. �
E. Install insulation using professional insulators who have substantial
experience and ability. �
F. Exposed to view insulation to have a well tailored appearance.
�
November 25, 1998 15250-8 98088.00
,
! I �
' � �
i
i I
' i G. Do not insulate expansion tanks or heads of hot water and condenser
�
water pumps.
� H. Do not insulate nameplates on equipment. Provide neatly beveled edge
�
� at interruptions of insulation.
I. Install insulation to allow clearances and access for service and
� ; I maintenance to all equipment.
� � J. Install metal jackets with seams on bottom.
, � � K. Where electric cable wrap is specified, insulation to be applied over
( cable.
� �
� i ' L. Pipe Wall Penetrations:
; 1. Do not pass fiberglass pipe insulation through fire rated
, �, �I partitions.
i
2. Stop insulation at each side of partition.
� ' � � 3. Install foamglas insulation on chilled water, domestic cold water
i � and horizontal runs of rainwater leaders in wall cavity, where
I
� lines pass through rated partitions.
1 � i 4. Refer to Sections 07270, 15010 and 15050 for information on
i firestopping of wall penetrations.
' � M. Duct Wall Penetrations:
i
� 1. Stop all duct coverings, including jacket and insulation, at fire
� � dampered penetrations of walls, floors above grade and roofs.
� i
; � 2. Flare-out or extend jacketed insulation at least 2" beyond angle
� � frames of fire dampers and secure to structure.
, � �
3. Maintain vapor barrier.
; 4. Install covering over damper access door readily removable and
, � identifiable.
�
� � 5. Stop all duct coverings including jacket and insulation at all
'� ' ' ' penetrations of rated walls and smoke partitions.
I
i6. Seal air tight around duct penetration of drywall, full circumfer-
'I � ence.
; 7. Refer to Sections 07270, 15010, 15890, 15895 and 15896 for
! information on firestopping of wall penetrations.
' I 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND EQUIPMENT COVERING
I � A. Where glass fiber or flexible tubular elastomeric insulation is used on
� ', � piping sized 2" and larger, insert a section of foamglas insulation at
ihanger or support points, between pipe and metal shield for full length
� of shield, to prevent crushing of insulation.
� ;�
November 25, 1998 15250-9 98088.00
1 i
• ,
B. Maintain same insulation thickness as adjoining insulation. ; �
C. Where insulation passes through pipe hangers and across trapeze .
supports, provide 12" long, 18 gauge galvanized.metal saddles for '
support where foamglas is not acceptable.
D. On cold pipes subject to sweating, carry vapor barrier through the
hanger and seal. � �
E. Do not apply insulation until all leak and pressure testing has been
completed, inspected and released for insulation application. � ,
F. Foamglas Insulation: '
1. Butter the full inside surface of the insulation and the transverse �
and longitudinal joints with fire-resistive pliable sealer. '
2. Voids and cracks shall be filled with sealer.
3. - �
Mastic shall be Benjamin Foster CP-95 44 or equal.
4. Secure insulation with 1" wide aluminum bands 9" O.C. '
5. Stagger transverse joints.
6. Insulate fittings, valves, flanges, traps and air vents with same '
' thickness of insulation using factory fabricated fitting sections or
premolded insulated fittings.
7. Adhere block type insulation with stick-clips or bands, in �
addition to the sealer as required to provide support for the ;
insulation.Install expansion joints in all foamglas insulation at all �
unit run-outs and in all straight runs at intervals not in excess of
40 feet.
G. Flexible Tubular Elastomeric Insulation: '
1. Apply to pipe and fittings with all joints tightly fitted and sealed
with Armstrong 520 adhesive. ; ,
2. Where self sealing type insulation is permitted, joints shall be
made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructi�ns.
� 3. For flexible tubular elastomeric pipe and fitting insulation when �
' exposed to view inside building or exposed to the weather, finish
with two coats of fire retardant self-extinguishing vinyl lacquer �
type highly flexible coating equivalent to Armstrong "WB
Armaflex Finish", custom color blended to match surrounding
surfaces. ,
H. Flexible Sheet Elastomeric Insulation:
1. Prior to application, thoroughly clean and dry all metal surfaces. �
2. If surface has been primed, test a two square foot section using
' adhesive equivalent to Armstrong 520 Adhesive in order ta �
November 25, 1998 15250-10 98088.00
'
i i
,
' i, II determine whether solvent in adhesive will loosen or lift the
primer.
� 3. If primer is loosened, then remove it before proceeding.
� 4. When testing proves acceptable, adhere insulation with smooth
� side out, using thin coating of same adhesive. Follow manufac-
�' turer's instructions.
1 ; �
5. Coat all butt edges of each sheet and stagger all joints.
� ; 6. Insulate all standing seams or flanges with same thickness of
; insulation material as that used on main surface.
I
� ' 7. Apply insulation in layers carefully fitted to the shell or casing
curvature of the equipment.
, i 8. Allow for removal of nuts and bolts at flanges, etc. by using
multiple layers on insulation and tapering at these points.
9. Finish insulation with 2 coats of Armstrong "WB Armaflex
' Finish", custom color blended to match surrounding surfaces.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCT COVERING
, A. All duct joints shall be sealed and pressure testing shall be completed
prior to installation of any covering.
' B. Jacketed Blanket Type Insulation:
1. Apply covering to ducts pulled snug but not more than '/4"
' � compression at corners.
, 2. Use insulation having 2" tab or cut insulation long enough to
allow for "peel-off' of insulation from jacket to effect a
� � ; minimum overlap tab of 2".
i
� 3. Staple lap with flare type staples 1" O.C.
� , 4. Cover standing seams, stiffeners and braces with same insulation ,
; blanket, using 2" jacket lap and staple lap.
�
� � 5. Secure jacket to covering using Foster No. 85-20 or 85-75
adhesive or equal.
' 6. For duct 24" and wider, mechanically fasten insulation to duct
� bottom, using weld pins or nylon "stick-clip" base plates having,
� self-locking, coated metal or nylon discs, locating fasteners on
' � � 12" centers laterally and longitudinally.
�
7. For ducts up to 18" deep, mechanically fasten insulation to duct
� � sides, using one row of pins or plates located on 12" centers
� � horizontally and equal distance laterally between duct top and
' bottom. For ducts over 24" deep, use minimum of two rows.
�
November 25, 1998 15250-11 98088.00
�
,
C. Jacketed Board Type Insulation: �
1. Apply jacketed board type insulation to ducts using weld pins or
nylon "stick-clip" plates having self-locking, coated metal ��r '
nylon discs.
2. Locate fasteners on 12" centers vertically and horizontally.
3. If insulation is grooved for corners, pin as required to hold �
insulation tight to duct.
D. Cover all joints, pins, rips, tears, punctures, disc heads, staples or breaks r
in vapor barrier jacket with FSK tape or 4-inch wide woven glass fabric
tape embedded in equivalent of Childers CP-82 or Benjamin-Foster No. '
85-20 "Sparkfast" vapor barrier fire resistant adhesive.
E. After Test and Balance of air systems is accepted, repair insulation at all
test ports in ducts. Mark locations of ports on insulation jacket with '
permanent marker.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ONE-PIECE PVC INSULATED COVERS '
A. Premolded fitting covers to be precisely cut or mitered to fit or be
tucked snugly into the throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe
covering, tufted, tucked and taped to form a fully insulated pipe ,
covering.
B. Use adhesive and/or tape specified for type of insulation to insure a �
thorough vapor barrier.
C. Tape ends securely to adjacent pipe covering. Tape to extend over �
adjacent pipe insulation with an overlap of at least 2-inch on both sides.
END OF SECTION '
�
,
'
'
�
�
November 25, 1998 15250-12 98t�88.00
�
i � -
� � �
i I
i I
' � SECTION 15300
i
�
i '
' i FIRE PROTECTION
i
, i l. i PART - 1 GENERAL �
I ! 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' , i A. Materials, accessories, equipment, tools, transportation and performance
� of all services and labor required to completely execute the sprinkler
� i and fire protection work for this project as indicated on the drawings
' � � and specified herein.
I, ; B. Cutting of holes necessary for the installation of work specified under
' � this section.
I '
. C. Patch using the same material and finish neatly.
' � I' D. Provide all OS & Y valves and zone valves with electrical contacts for
�
! supervision.
' E. All electrical power wiring and interlock wiring furnished and installed
, I
� by other trades.
'� F. Extent of work:
' � 1. Interior pipe, fittings and valves.
�, ;
� I� 2. Hangers, supports and sleeves.
' ' '
' j 3. Sprinkler heads, extra sprinkler cabinet.
� � 4. Testing and flushing.
� '
G. Provide a wet sprinkler system as required by the drawings.
'i ' ; � H. Color code Fire Protection piping in accordance with the following
� schedule: CC 13 Safety red. Refer to Division 09900.
; I
� ( 1.02 RELATED WORK
' ' A. Section 07270: Firesto in
j � PP g•
� j B. Section 09900: Painting
� ' ' I
� � C. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
i
�
�� � � D. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings. ,
I
iE. Section 15062: Valves.
, F. Division 16: Electrical Wiring.
' � I '
' i
� ! �
I
November 25, 1998 15300-1 98088.00
� '
�
1 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. Pipe and fittings to be new domestic manufacture and marked clearly
with manufacturer's name, weight and classification or working press- '
ure.
B. Materials to be UL and FM approved, where such approval is applicable �
or required by the agencies having jurisdiction over fire protection
work.
C. Foreign pipe and fittings installed in the project will be removedl at �
contractor's expense.
D. All hose threads, operating nuts and accessories for hydrants, Siamese '
� connections, etc. to be local Fire Department standard.
E. Install system(s) in accordance with the drawings and specifications,
however, no requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 are to be vivlated. '
F. Furnish all materials and labor necessary to fully comply with the
drawings, specifications, rules, regulations and ordinances. '
G. Do not route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical
switchgear, panels or transformers. ,
H. Coordinate routing of all sprinkler piping with other trades (mechanical
piping, ductwork and electrical). Failure to coordinate routing of piping
' with other trades will result in relocation and rerouting of sprinkler
piping at contractors' expense. '
I. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and �
equipment will require offsetting, raising and in some instances
relocation of existing sprinkler piping. Survey the site and be info.rmed
of existing conditions in particular above ceilings which will require
i offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping and include the cost of �
this work.
J. No subsequent allowance will be made because of error or faillu•e to
,
obtain necessary information to completely estimate and perform. �11
work involved. �
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340 ,
(01300).
B. Equipment submittal drawings and data are required on all items r�amed '
by manufacturer, including the following:
1. Sprinkler Heads - Type and Manufacturer.
2. Valves - Manufacturer. �
3. Fire Cabinets and Valves.
�
November 25, 1998 15300-2 98f)88.00
�
1 Y
� I �
' 4. Water Flow and Tamper Switches. ',
� 1.05 APPLICABLE CODES
� � A. NFPA 13: Sprinkler Systems
B. NFPA 14: Standpipe and Hose Systems
' C. Refer to Section 15010 for applicable state, local, fire and plumbing
codes.
, 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVES
' i A. Interior
I l. Check valves: Crane No. 375 or equal, UL approved flanged
j pattern, iron body, swing check valves.
� I 2. Cutoff valves: Crane No. 467 or e ual UL flan
( q , ged pattern,
i outside screw and yoke, wedge gate valves.
� � �'
� 3. Cutoff valves up to 2": Crane No. 459 or equal, bronze.
I 4. Cutoff valves 2-1/2" and 3": Crane No. 467-1/2 or equal.
' �
j 5. Cutoff valves 4" to 6": Clow F-5733 or equal.
i
' ' ' 2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS
� j A. Interior
�' ' 1. Furnish all sprinkler pipe inside of building using:
� a. Schedule 40 (ASTM-A53) black steel pipe for sizes 2"
and smaller.
, ' b. Schedule 10 ASTM-135 black steel pipe for sizes 2 1/2"
� and larger with mechanical couplings.
I� , � � 2. Fittings: Sprinkler service, cast iron, screwed, flanged or
! mechanical coupled to be rated for 125 pound service.
I, ' 2.03 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES
� A. Piping to be supported with UL and FM approved hangers. Refer to
I , Sections 15060 and 15061.
I
I B. Alarm Check Valve Assemblies to be complete with necessary
I appurtenances.
�� � � C. Drains to discharge outside of building into open air.
� � 2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS, EXTRA SPRINKLER CABINET
i
� A. The following sprinkler heads to be the proper types, ratings and
� spacings for areas involved. Appropriate finishes must be compatible
' I �
,November 25, 1998 . 15300-3 98088.00
� � '
'
�
with space finishes being served. Slip-type escutcheons will not be ,
permitted. Approved equals are acceptable by the following: Griru�ell',
Viking and Reliable.
1. Brass Up-right: Star Sprinkler Co. Model "SG". ,
2. Horizontal Side-wall: Star Sprinkler Co. Model "Recessed ,
Sidewall Model LD-2". ,
3. Concealed Full Recess Type: Star Sprinkler Co. Model
"Quasar". �
4. Semi-recess "Cup" Type: Star Sprinkler Co. Model "Galaxy ,
Starmist . '
5. Dr Pendent: Star S rinkler Co. Model "ME-1".
Y P
' B. All automatic sprinkler heads (new and existing) shall be Listed Q�uick �
' Response Type. .
C. Provide (1) sprinkler cabinet with 12 extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler
wrench for emergency use at a location selected by Owner. ; '
� 2.05 FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE �
A. Croker Standard 2-1/2" polished brass chrome plated with cap and '
chain.
�
2.06 FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE AND CABINET (Class I): Croker Standard ,
9000 recessed aluminum with 1/4" wire glass door, 2-1/2" angle hose va�ve,
cap and chain, all chrome plated.
2.07 FLOW SWITCHES: Notifier Model No. WFD-6 vane type flow switch with '
pneumatic retard adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds and complete with double'
pole, double throw micro feature. '
2.08 TAMPER SWITCHES: Notifier Model No. SGV for 4" and larger, Potter
Model No. OSYSU-A2 for pipe size less than 4", tamper switch double pole,
'� double throw micro feature for 1/2-inch to 12-inch valves. �
�' 2.09 WATER FLOW ALARMS: Provide other flow switches as indicated on �
drawings and connect to fire alann system. �
2.10 DRAIN VALVES: Provide drain valves as required. �
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION • ' ,
3.01 COORDINATION
' A. Coordinate installation to assure there is no conflict with the work of ,
other trades.
B. Do not'route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical �
switchgear, panels or transformers. ;
' '
November 25, 1998 15300-4 98088.00
. '
i j
' ' � .' .r , .
' ; C. Coordinate routing of all sprinkler piping with other trades (mechanical
� piping, ductwork and electrical). Failure to coordinate routing of piping
with other trades will result in relocation and rerouting of sprinkler
' , piping at contractors' expense.
' D. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and
' � equipment will require offsetting, raising and in some instances
i � relocation of existing sprinkler piping. Survey the site and be informed
� of existing conditions in particular above ceilings which will require
' i offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping and include the cost of
this work.
, � E. No subsequent allowance will be made because of error or failure to
; obtain necessary information to completely estimate and perform all
�
work involved.
' � 3.02 INSTALLATION
�
; A. Foreign pipe and fittings installed in the project will be removed at
' � contractor's expense.
B. Install wet sprinkler system.
' � C. Provide head spacings appropriate for hazards involved.
� D. Refer to Architectural details and specifications for sealing of pipe
� penetrations at rated walls and slabs.
' ! E. Connect to the water main or branch i in as indicated on drawin s.
PP g g
� '� F. Attach hangers to structural steel work by clamping or other approved
' ; ' methods. Do not drill or punch structural work. '
i
� G. Do not route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical
' ' switchgear, panels or transformers.
, ; H. Wherever necessary, furnish, install and securely anchor to or between
� ; � building members with suitable angle iron or other steel members to
support sprinkler work.
� � I. Support for grooved piping to conform to requirements of MSS-SP-69,
, � '� "Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application".
'� J. In addition to these requirements, do not leave horizontal pipe
, ' f unsupported between any two couplings nor whenever a change in
direction of flow occurs.
1 �
� �
�
i
'
November 25, 1998 15300-5 98088.00
,
,
K. As a minimum, support piping at the following intervals in addition to ,
the locations stated above.
PIPE MAXIMUM SPAN
SIZE BETWEEN HANGERS ' '
------- --------------- �
1 inch 8 feet ;
1-1/4 to 2 inch 10 feet � ,
2-1/2 to 4 inch 12 feet
5 to 8 inch 14 feet '
L. Support vertical piping at every other floor or every other pipe length, ,
whichever is most frequent.
M. Set the base of the riser piping or base fitting on a pedestal or ' '
foundation. '
N. Install sprinkler heads and required piping in areas such as concealed
spaces, lab hoods and other special areas and spaces as required by ,
NFPA 13, NFPA 101, applicable state and local building codes.
O. Provide drain valves, pipes and test connections as required by NFPA '
13.
P. Pipe drain lines and test connections to outside of building. '
Q. Originate drain lines from the most hydraulically remote point of eaeh
sprinkler zone. ,
3.03 FIRESTOPPING '
. A. Penetrations and openings for all fire protection piping services in fire
and/or fire/smoke rated assemblies shall be firestopped with tested ,
firestopping design assemblies. These penetrations include but are not
limited to the following:
1. Piping and sleeves through above grade floor slabs. ■
2. Piping and sleeves through rated walls and partitions.
3. Piping and sleeves through vertical shafts such as pipe chases, '
stairwells, elevator shafts and utility chutes. '
4. Voids around pipes and sleeves penetrating above grade floor '
slabs and fire rated partitions, fire walls and smoke walls.
B. Manufacturer of materials shall specialize in the manufacture of the ' i
products required for firestopping. �
. � ,
November 25, 1998 15300-6 98088.00
'
' �
i
' C. Provide manufacturers' certifications of all materials used for
' I
firestopping.
' D. All penetration methods shall be tested and listed in accordance with the
Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory.
E. Refer to Section 07270 for additional information and requirements for
' firestopping. , "
j3.04 TESTING, STERILIZING AND FLUSHING
' I A. Test fire protection system with no evidence of leaking at minimum o�
i200 psi for period of 2 hours.
' B. Refer to Section 15030 and Section 15035.
I -
I
� � END OF SECTION
� I
i
i
' �
I
'
I
1
' �
�
�
' �
i I
, i .
I
1 � I
I '
, '
, I
' i i
I
' November 25, 1998 15300-7 98088.00 ,
'
i I
i
' i
�
, SECTION 15320
i I
i
ii MEDICAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS
�
' 1. PART - 1 GENER.AL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED �
' � A. Provide materials, accessories, equipment and tools for performance of
� all services and labor required to complete all medical gas piping
' systems for this project as indicated on the drawings for the following
�
services:
( 1. Oxygen (02).
� I
2. Vacuum.
j 3. Compressed air.
' '
� 4. Nitrous Oxide (N20).
� 1.02 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE
� i A. Cleaning and Joining: Work is briefly described in Section 15010:
! General Mechanical Provisions for emphasis, Section 15030, and
' � hereinafter described in detail.
i
� B. Cap ends of all medical gas piping in stockpile.
� j C. Paint (color code) all medical gas piping in stockpile prior to erection.
i � Refer to Section 15020 for additional requirements.
j
' D. Install pre-printed identification labels of all medical gas piping after
� erection on 20-foot intervals and at least once above every room. Refer
' to Section 15020 for additional requirements.
' ' 1.03 RELATED WORK
i
� j A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
' � I B• Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods.
' I C. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
i '
D. Section 15322: Certification Procedure for Medical Gas Pipelines.
I E. Division 16: Electrical Specifications.
, 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
I 01340 (01300). ,
' � �
�
' I
;November 25, 1998 15320-1 98088.00
� � ,
, '
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS '
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Model numbers of equipment are taken from Puritan Bennett. � '
B. Approved equals are acceptable by the following:
1. Allied Health Products. '
2. Chemetron Corporation.
3. Medaes '
C. Match outlet manufacturer in existing faciliTy.
2.02 PIPING (All Services) '
A. All medical gas piping to be factory washed, degreased, capped, copper
tubing Type K or L (ASTM B 819) and identified clean for Oxygen '
service.
B. Medical gas piping shall bear one of the following factory labels: '
OXY, MED, OXY/MED, ACR/OXY or ACR/MED. "
C. For any piping system operating at pressures bteween 200 and 300 psig,
all piping shall be ASTM B819, Type k copper ONLY. '
D. Vacuum piping to be copper tubing Type L (ASTM B 819). ,
E. Provide hard tempered piping for all piping. Contractor's Option: Soft ,
temper for concealed and below grade locations.
F. Identify pipe as specified in Section 15020: Identification and Painting. '
G. Use only wrought copper brazing fittings, precleaned and bagged �or
' Oxygen service. : ,
2.03 OUTLETS (All Services)
A. Provide outlets for concealed piping which are sufficiently strong and '
rigid to firmly support dispensing equipment without the use of
supporting bracket.
B. Design outlets for flush installation. '
2.04 WALL OUTLETS / INLETS '
A. Quick disconnect wall recessed type. '
B. Provide flush outlets with adjustable mounting feature in order to '
compensate for variations in plaster thickness. '
C. Factory assembled outlets with transparent protective shielded gas
identifying instruction plates to be used during construction. '
D. Replace instruction plates with permanent stainless steel face plates
having nameplates prior to final inspection. '
November 25, 1998 15320-2 98088.00
: '
i
� ' ;
�
�
� �
' I E. Provide all outlets listed under the UL reexamination service.
� F. Locate outlets where indicated on plans, unless otherwise noted with
' � centerlines 60 inches above finished floors.
i
G. Provide one vacuum bottle bracket suitable for wall mounting for each
1 I vacuum inlet.
H. Safety key each outlet for its specific service.
, 2.05 VALVE BOXES
� A. Provide sectional shutoff valves in recessed boxes at locations shown on
I drawings.
' B. Construct box using minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel as follows:
�
i1. Equip with two flanges for fastening to wall.
' �
2. Finish with two coats of baked white enamel.
� 3. Construct front door of 0.188" Plexiglass, silk screened, with
, � removable pull handle.
� 4. Hold door to box using 3" Hedlock 11 friction locks.
I
' ' C. Cover each valve with 0.063" aluminum sheet, finished with white
i enamel and labelled CAUTION! (Name of Service) VALVE TO BE
, � CLOSED ONLY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY," in accordance with
I current edition of N.F.P.A. 99.
( D. Also, on same sheet, identify the area and rooms which the valve serves,
' using appropriate labels provided by box manufacturer (Example:
ANGIO PROCEDURE ROOM). All labels to be typed.
' � E. Label each valve handle with an "OFF" directional indicator.
�
� F. Fabricate in such a fashion that once the door is removed and the valve
is closed the door cannot be put back on until the valve is opened.
' � G. Preassemble with 4" long lengths of copper tubing on each side of unit,
i i with '/s" gauge port downstream of valve, capped for protection after
' factory pressure testing.
� H. Especially prepare and degrease the assembly for oxygen service.
�
� '
' I. Provide "swing-away" ball valve having brass ball, bronze body, double I
seal, full flow design, Teflon seats, "O" ring packing, designed for
� working pressure of 300 psi.
, � J. Provide union type connections so that by removing a maximum of
� three bolts, valve may be swung out of line allowing rapid replacement
' � of seats, seals and ball.
� K. Provide lever type handle requiring a quarter turn to move from fully
� ; open to fully closed position.
i
' November 25, 1998 15320-3 98088.00 I
'
,
L. Valves to be complete with downstream line pressure monitoring ,
gauges.
M. Valves and aIl piping exposed to view in valve box to be chrome plated. �
2.Ob S�IUTOFF VAL�ES {Nat Installed In Vaive Box}:: Provide "swing-away"
ball valve, as hereinbefore specified to be located in valve boxes, and attach � '
metal tag to valve reading "CAUTION! {Narr�e of Service} VALVE - I�C> NC}T
CLOSE EXCEPT IN EMERGENCY. THIS VALVE CONTROLS SUPP.LY �
T4 {Name of Area)." � ;
2.07 ALARM SYSTEMS
A. Each line pressure alarm station panel (modular type) to be of the flush �
mounted electrieai back bax type, ganged tagether as required, ha��ing a
common face plate fabricated of No. 4 brushed finish stainless ste�l and
factory pre-wired companents using calor coded wiring. '
B. Identi�y each panel with a minimum 1" high, engraved, bakelite t�g
which is permanently attached to the panel. �
C. Provide with each panel:
1. An audia-buzzer and visual-light indicators for each servic�; ,
bein.g monitoxed.
2. Audio-buzzer silencing switch.
3. Visual-light indicator when circuit energized. ,
4. Push-to-test momentary contact switch for testing panel
indicating lights. '
D. Provide circuitry st� that if audio-buzzer is silenced, the respective
visual-light indicator will remain "ON" and this indicator will ,
automatically reset only when the malfunction has been corrected.
E. Provide an indicating pressure gauge, for each service being moriitored, '
an the Alarm Panel.
F. Each alarm panel: Listed by U.L. as an assembiy and bear the lak�el
thereof. '
G. Make all electrical wiring connections on nurnbered terminal strips,
�ocated within back box. ,
I H. Provide line press2,u�e alarms in the locations indicated on plans.
�! I. Electrical pawer supply of 110-volt to 24-volt, required by each panel �
or panel grouping, and all power and control wiring, to be provided as
part of the panel. '
J. Switches to be factory set to activate alarms as fallows:
1. 02 : 40 psi-law & 60 psi-high. ,
November 25, 1998 � 15320-4 98088.OQ
,
�
�
, � -
! � 2. Air: 40 psi-low & 60 psi-high.
� 3. Nitrous Oxide: 40 psi-low & 60 psi-high.
` ' � 4. Vacuum: 12" Hg-low.
i
iK. Provide monitoring gauges in accordance with NFPA 99 for
' Non-Flaminable Medical Gases using lettered identification labels and
I I
color coding.
' ' L. Provide 1/4" MNPT isolation valves to facilitate maintenance and
' ' pressure testing for each:
� 1. Pressure switch.
' i
2. V acuum switch.
' ; 3. Monitoring gauge.
; 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
� ,
' � i 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Cleaning and Joining: Work is briefly described in Section 15010:
� General Mechanical Provisions, for emphasis, and hereinafter described
, , in detail.
� B. Cap ends of all medical gas piping in stockpile.
i
, i C. Color-band all medical gas piping using 2-inch wide color-coded bands
j every 6 feet in stockpile prior to erection. See Section 15020, Part 3,
� paragraph 3.02.
' � � D. Where zone valve boxes are mounted in fire-rated or smoke-rated walls,
' enclose all sides (5-siding)of recessed box in 5/8-inch layer of Type-X
� ; drywall.
� E. Brazing Qualification:
�
' 1. Brazing procedures and brazer performance shall be qualified in
� accordance with either Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualifications," of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
' ; or AWS B2.2, Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance
' ! Qualifrcation, both as modified in NPFA 99 paragraph 4-4.1.4.2.
2. An oxygen analyzer shall be used to verify that piping has been
' � � ro erl ur ed rior to each brazin rocedure.
P P YP g P gP
' F. Joints:
� ' �
; � 1. Make all joints copper-to-copper in the piping, except those
� permitted to be approved brass flared type gas tubing fittings and
, � those at valves or at equipment requiring screw connections, with
� � BCuP material complying with AWS A5.8 brazing filler.
�
,
' November 25, 1998 15320-5 98088.00
,
2. The use of flux is NOT permitted on copper-to-copper brazed �
joints.
3. Install screw joints used in shutoff valves and other threaded �
connections by tinning the male thread with soft solder.
G. Washing:
1. All pipe, pipe fittings and valves not furnished prewashed and ,
degreased shall be cleaned and degreased by washing in a hot
solution of sodium carbonate or tri-sodium phosphate (Oak�te '
#24) and then thoroughly rinsed with water. After rinsed, dry
with high pressure Nitrogen, identify and bag.
2. Oakite #24 solution of six to eight ounces of Oakite per gallon �
of hot water is prepared by mixing one-third the total quantity of
hot water with the total amount of Oakite #24 required. '
3. When this has been dissolved, add remaining hot water.
4. Immerse pipe and fitting for five to fifteen minutes, or until all �
deposits are removed.
5. The use of organic solvents, for example carbon tetrachloride, is '
prohibited.
6. Employ scrubbing where necessary to insure complete cleaning.
7. After washing, rinse the material thoroughly in clean, hot �vater. �
8. After cleaning, exercise particular care in the storage and
handling of all pipe and fittings. '
9. Pipe and fittings: Temporarily cap or plug to prevent
recontamination before final assembly. '
10. Keep tools used in cutting or reaming free from oil or grease.
11. Where such contamination has occurred, the items affected to be '
rewashed and rinsed.
12. After installation of the piping, but before installation of the ,
outlet valves, blow lines clear by means of oil-free Nitro�en.
H. Isolation: Maintain isolation of copper piping from hangers, concluit
and other dissimilar metals. �
I. Hanging: Install neoprene grommets to isolate, support and clam��
medical gas piping where supported on trapeze hangers. ,
J. Pressure Testing
1. After installation of station outlet valves, subject each section of '
the pipeline system to a test pressure of 200 psig by means of
(oil-free) dry nitrogen.
'
November 25, 1998 15320-6 98+)88.00
'
� � . ;. � - .
' 2. Maintain test pressure until each joint has been examined for
� leakage by means of soapy water or other equally effective
, I means of leak detection safe for use with oxygen.
� I
! 3. After completing this test, fill the pipeline systems with test gas
iat 200 psig; close the supply valve and all outlet valves; and the
' source of test gas disconnected.
4. Maintain this pressure for 24 hours with no allowance for loss.
' i 5. If there is a pressure drop after 24 hours, each joint in section to
be inspected and tested for leakage.
' 6. Repair leaks and subject section to another 24 hours test.
7. After each section is tested, maintain system under pressure until
� put into service.
� ( K. Cross Connection Testing:
i1. To determine that no cross connection to other pipeline systems
' j exists, reduce all systems to atmospheric pressure.
i
� 2. Disconnect all sources to test gas from all of the systems with
� � the exception of the one system to be checked.
3. Pressure this system with dry nitrogen to a pressure of 50 psig.
1
� 4. With appropriate adapters matching outlet labels, check each
individual station outlet / inlet of all systems installed to
determine that test gas is being dispensed from only the outlets
� � of this system.
I
iL. Final Testing - Purging and Analyzing:
' i l. When all medical gas piping systems have been tested,
, disconnect the source of test gas and connect the proper gas
! source of supply to each respective system.
' 2. Following this connection and pressurization, open all outlets in �
I a progressive order, starting neazest the source and completing
� j the process of purge flushing at the outlet farthest from the
� source.
� 3. Permit gas to flow from each outlet until each system is purged
' j of test gas used during previous tests.
4. Documentation shall be made of each test performed.
�
I
� END OF SECTION
� I � I
�
; '
� ;�
November 25, 1998 15320-7 98088.00
�
-- I
I
I I
� I
I
SECTION 15322
� '
� '
1 , CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE FOR MEDICAL GAS PIPELINES
� ; 1. � PART - 1 GENERAL
, 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
'� ! � A. Responsibilities and procedure to be followed in final certification of the
I medical gas pipelines and is included as a supplement to Section 15320:
i , Medical Gas Piping Systems.
, B. Review Construction Documents prior to installation of inedical gas
� ; piping systems. Provide a written report to the Architect of any
� � discrepancies, code violations and/or suggestions for coordination with
�
� other trades.
, �
C. Provide at least one job site visit during construction to verify that the
medical gas piping s stem installation is i
� � Y n compliance with this
� i' Section, Section 15320 and NFPA 99. Provide a written report to the
Architect of problems and/or areas of non-compliance.
� � � 1.02 RELATED WORK
' ' ; A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
i
iB. Section 15320: Medical Gas Piping Systems.
�, � �, 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
� A. The certi in a enc
f}' g g y shall be completely mdependent of the Installer,
� � Contractor, Manufacturer or Supplier of the Medical Gas Piping System.
� � B. The certifying agency shall have a minimum of five years ex erience in
P
; certifying medical gas piping systems for compliance with NFPA 99.
' � 1.04 SUBMITTALS
� �
I A. Submit qualifications for approval in accordance with Section 01340
� ; (01300).
�
B. Submittal shall include at least five projects (similar in size and scope)
� ; which have been completed by the certification agency within the past
i five years. Include names and phone numbers of references for each
project.
� , �� 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� A• When new piping is "cut-in" to previously installed piping, it is possible
�� ; that previously installed piping could be disturbed so as to cause crossed
piping in previously installed system. It is imperative that previously
� Nove
mber 25, 1998 15322-1 98088.00
1 '
�
installed systems be inspected for crossed piping in conjunction w.ith the �
new system medical gas pipeline inspection and certification.
B. Test existing medical gas piping for gaseous and solid particulate purity '
prior to tie-in.
C. The certifying agency shall provide all tools and equipment necessary
for completing the work specified herein. Accurately calibrate and �
maintain instruments in good working order during certification o�'
systems. �,
D. Work performed to be under the direct supervision of qualified
technician(s).
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS : Refer to Section 15320. t
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROCEDURE �
A. Provide a verified list designating number and location of all medical �
gas outlets to the Medical Gas System personnel performing the medical
', gas pipeline inspection.
B. Perform mechanical check of all medical gas outlets prior to the '�
certification inspection.
C. Preform any necessary repairs or rework prior to inspection. 1
D. Check the following:
1. Piping properly supported, labeled and identified.
2. Outlets properly supported. �
3. Installation complete and in compliance with NFPA standards. �
4. Appropriate adapters fit and securely lock in place without
leakage. �
5. All valves and alarms are identified as to area served.
E. The Owner is responsible for ensuring that bulk tank and/or cylin�ler �
supplies are installed, connected and filled (or partially filled) prior to
certification inspection.
F. Have Medical Gas System Certifier and Plumbing subcontractor sign '
Medical Gas Pipeline Inspection Agreement describing service to be
performed by the Medical Gas System Certifier, services not performed
by the Medical Gas System Certifier, price quotation and exceptions �
affecting quoted price.
G. Require Medical Gas System Certifier to provide factory trained, �
qualified representatives independent of supplier to perform pipeline
inspection and to provide report and certification in accordance with
previously signed agreement for completely installed system. !
�
November 25, 1998 15322-2 98088.00
�
�
.,� '
I
� ,
I� H. Any discrepancies discovered during the inspection shall be noted and
, corrected. Any and all portions of the system affected by corrective
I action shall be retested and findings recorded after retest.
�� I
I. Have Plumbing subcontractor provide representative to serve as
� customer contact person and to witness the inspection and certify that all
� outlets on the list have been checked and are in accordance with inspect-
ion procedure and findings as witnessed.
;� J. Owner will provide representative to witness the inspection and to
certify that all spaces and the outlets listed have been checked in
accordance with inspection procedure.
�� K. Have Medical Gas System Certifier furnish all customer copies of
Medical Gas Pipeline Inspection Report and Medical Gas Pipeline
iCertification for distribution as follows:
,� I'
1. Plumbing Contractor.
i
� 2. Architect.
� � 3. Owner.
- � � L. Follow this procedure in addition to the above items on extensions to
� ; � existing systems:
' 1. Contractor, with adequate advance notice, to request that
� i � inspector or inspection team be on site when old piping is cut-in
i ' for installation of new lines.
� � 2. Contractor and Certification team to arrange to have inspector or
inspection team on-site when the existing piping is cut-into for
� installation of new lines.
,' �
� 3. Install main line shut-off valves in new piping as close as
� possible to point of cut-in to previously installed piping.
� 4. NOTE: Following verification of proper labeling and proper gas
' - � distribution of previously installed piping after cut-in procedure,
� consider the aforementioned valves (Item 3) the "source" of
� ; supply for the new piping.
� 5. After re-establishing pressure in each previously installed supply
�
� line after "cut-in", open at least two previously installed outlets
� ; ; for each gas and for each cut-in point to ensure that the proper
�, gas is being delivered.
� �, 6. These outlets must be those most immediately "upstream" of the
_ � �
I cut-in point.
' �
� � ; • 7. Bleed gas to atmosphere prior to analyzing to ensure purging
� from point of cut-in to test point.
� i �
� �� November 25, 1998 15322-3 98088.00
1 �
'
r
8. Confirm the presence of the desired gas with the combined use �
of an oxygen analyzer and a pressure gauge attached to an '
appropriate adaptor with result tabulated below.
GAS 02 CONCENTRATION PRESSURE �
Oxygen 98 - 100% 50 psi plus or minus 5 psi �
Vacuum -- Negative �
Air 21% 50 psi plus or minus 5 psi
�
Nitrous Oxide 0% 50 psi plus or minus 5 psi �
END OF SECTION �
�
� I
� I
�
,�
� �i
,�
�� I
�
�
�
�
November 25, 1998 15322-4 98088.00 w
�
i
1 I I
�
� � i
�
� I
SECTION 15400
�J I
I
'. PLUMBING
� 1. PART - 1 GENER.AL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� A. Cleanouts.
� B. Domestic Water Service Connection.
� I
I C. Fire extinguishers and cabinets.
� �
I D. Shock Absorbers.
� ' E. Sanitary Sewer Service Connection.
i �
� i F. Trap Primers.
1 1.02 RELATED WORK
� i A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
� C. Section 15061: Pipe Hangers.
D. Section 15250: Insulation.
1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
�� � 01340 (01300).
I
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� , 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
I
' � A. Ancon.
B. Beeco.
� ; C. Cla-Val.
' D. Febco.
I
i
,' E. Josam.
I F. Orion.
� G. Precision Products.
� ' H. Wade.
I
,� j i I. Zurn.
; I J. J.R. Smith.
',
�'' ' �
,November 25, 1998 15400-1 98088.00
�
� � I
2.02 EQUIPMENT �
A. Cleanouts
1. Josam, Zurn, Wade, J. R. Smith or Ancon. ,,��
2. Access Covers:
a. Minimum size: 12" x 12". I �
b. Furnish for access at valves, shock absorbers, trap
primers, etc.
3. Carpet:
a. Josam 56000-2-14 inside caulk round brass scoriated � � �I
frame and cover. ,
b. Furnish carpet marker and permanent marker in ceiling I
above. �
4. Exterior: �
a. Josam 56040-15 cast iron cutoff ferrule.
b. Round cast iron scoriated frame and cover, secured.
5. Finished Concrete Floor: Josam 56000-2 inside caulk round' �
Nikaloy scoriated frame and cover.
6. Resilient Tile Floor: Josam 56000-2-12 inside caulk round , �'
Nikaloy scoriated frame and cover.
7. Wall: � �
a. Josam 58700-2-15 cast iron caulking ferrule. `
b. Nikalo smooth round access frame and cover.
Y
�
c. Satin finish bronze top.
d. Secured cover vandal proof screw. ,�
8. Waterproof Floors: Furnish cleanouts in waterproof floors with
clamping devices. �
. B. Domestic Water Service Connection: Provide connection to existing
water mains inside existing building. '
C. Fire Extinguishers (F.E., Wall hung) '
1. General purpose ABC type, 10-pound capacity and UL rat�d� f
4A60BC. �
2. Furnish complete with wall mounting bracket.
' �
, ;�
November 25, 1998 15400-2 98088.00
�
i
� I
� ' I . , ,
i �
I
� D. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets (F.E.C.)
� ; 1. Elkhart, Croker Standard or Potter Roemer.
,� � 2. Fully recessed cabinet tub constructed of 18 gauge steel, frame
and door satin anodized extruded aluminum.
� � I 3. Door style: 1/4" wire glass or tempered glass.
_.� � '
; 4. Fire extinguishers (F.E.) to be general purpose ABC type,
; 10-pound capacity and UL rated 4A60BC. Furnish complete with
� i; j wall mounting bracket.
I
i � E. Sanitary Sewer Connections:Provide saddle or cut-in-wyes type
� � ; connection to existing sanitary sewers inside the existing building.
j F. Shock Absorbers:
I l. Josam, Zurn, Wade, J. R. Smith or Precision Products.
' ; ,
' 2. Refer to drawings for location and size of shock absorbers.
� � G. Trap Primers:
;
� 1. Josam, Zurn, Wade or J. R. Smith.
�, �
� �' 2. Provide all bronze valve, chrome plated with removable �
' operating parts, integral vacuum breaker and gasketed access
,� i , cover.
I
� 3. Provide trap primers on all floor drains except shower drains.
� 3. ' PART - 3 EXECUTION
� ' ;
; 3.O1 INSTALLATION
i �
' ' � A. Cleanouts:
� 1. Locate line size cleanouts for all lines 4" and smaller at base of
� � all soil and waste stacks, at all changes in direction and in
straight runs.
; 2. Spacing in straight runs not to exceed 50 feet inside building and
� � 100 feet outside the building.
3. Cleanouts which cannot be made easily accessible otherwise shall
i be extended up through floor and/or wall.
�� I
j � B• Domestic Water Service Connection:
' I l. Field verify exact location, size, pressure and elevation of
� � , existing water main.
'� � 2. Flush system and test at 200 psi far 24 hours without evidence
I ; of any leaks.
� '
;November 25, 1998 15400-3 98088.00
� � �
i
�I
� I
C. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets: I
�
1. Locate top of extinguisher 5 feet above finished floor. '
2. Identify on cabinet with 1-1/4 inch high red lettering "Fire �
Extinguisher."
3. Install in accordance with all requirements of NFPA-10. �
4. Where FE cabinets are mounted in fire-rated or smoke-rated �- i
walls, enclose all sides (5-siding)of recessed cabinet in 5/8-inch �
layers of Type-X drywall. �'
D. Sanitary Sewer Service Connection:
1. Field verify exact location, size and elevation of existing sewer. �
2. Flush system, fill with water and let stand for 24 hours without
evidence of any leaks. ,�
E. Shock Absorbers: "
1. Install shock absorbers such that access and maintenance can be ��
performed without disturbing walls and non-lift-out ceilings. �
2. Shock absorbers to be tested and certified by Plumbing and ��
Drainage Institute. �
F. Trap Primers: '
1. Install primers under sinks and/or lavatories out of line of sight.
2. Provide trap primers on all floor drains except shower drains.
3. Trap primers to be approved by Plumbin and Draina e Institute. �
g g _ .
END OF SECTION ��
�
�
:�
.
�
,
� - �
�
November 25, 1998 15400-4 98088.00
'
�
� '
I
� �
� SECTION 15450
i
i
� PLUMBING FIXTURES
� l. PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
`��. � A. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures, trim and related items including:
i
i1. Supplies.
� j 2. Traps.
� 3. Drains.
� i I 4. Cleanouts.
' S. Water closet seats and covers.
� i
; 6. Fixture supports.
� 7. Other accessory items.
;
!, B. Provide white fixtures unless specified otherwise. .
�
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
� B. Section 15400: Plumbing.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS:
' I A. Perform all work in accordance with applicable codes and standards
enforced by local authorities.
B. Furnish and install outlet devices which limit the flow of hot water to
' � lavatories and sinks to a minimum of %2 GPM, sized as recommended
i by the manufacturer and as required under ASHRAE Standard 90-1989,
� � paragraph 7.7.2 or local or the current State Energy Code.
' � � C. Install all fixtures in strict accordance with ADA and ANSI A 117.1
�
� requirements for handicap fixture clearances.
' ' D. All faucets shall be listed and certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF
I
� International Standard 61, Section 9 requirements.
I �
� � E. Refer to Architectural plans for exact dimensional placement of ALL
plumbing fixtures.
� ; 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section I
� 01340 (01300).
I
� �
November 25, 1998 15450-1 98088.00
� �
�
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS ,�
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -
A. Plumbing fixtures: Eljer or equal fixtures by American Standard, Crane �
or Kohler.
1. Wall hung lavatories furnished complete with chair carriers. �
2. Counter top sinks furnished complete with mounting rin�s where
required. �
B. Roof drains, hydrants, floor drains, shock absorbers, carriers and traps:
Ancon, Josam, Zurn, J. R. Smith or Wade.
C. Flush valves: Sloan Royal, Zurn or Delaney. ,�
D. Toilet seats: Church, Olsmite, Beneke or Bemis complete with self-
sustaining check hinges. �
E. Faucets: T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Water Saver, Zurn or `
Chicago Faucet Company. �
F. Supplies and stops: McGuire, Chicago Faucet Co. or Zurn
G. Stainless steel sinks: Elkay or Just. �
H. Thermostatic and/or pressure balancing valves: Symmons or LPonard. '
I. Flow control devices: Dole Flow Controls Company. �
J. Caulking: General Electric silicone sanitary sealant.
2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES ��
A. Lavatory Shields: �
• 1. For all handicap lavatories and or sinks, provide soft-cove� �
sheilds on drain lines and hoticold supply line piping to protect
occupants from sharp edges and scalding temperatures.
2. Covers shall be ADA approved. �
3. Covers shall be durable and professional-looking with VPlcro �
snaps.
4. Covers shall be offered in colors including black, white, light
gray, seafoam green, dusty rose, ivory and baltic blue. Provide �
color as selected by Architect.
5. Furnish Handy Shield Safety Covers as manufactuted by �
Plumberex Specialty Products, Cathedral City, California.
B. Refer to drawings for specifications, location and quantity of "P"
numbers: �
�
November 25, 1998 15450-2 98088.00
�
� -
� �3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
�
' '� 3.01 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS
� � A. Connect to plumbing fixtures and equipment provided under this and
' other sections of specifications, all drawings and/or manufacturers
approved shop drawings.
� � '
, B. Provide rough-in connections where indicated.
C. Follow schedule, details on plans or manufacturers approved shop
�, i drawings for connection sizes to fixtures.
� , D. Connect wall hung urinals to waste piping with red brass nipples.
� , E. Furnish all toilet seats complete with self-sustaining check hinges.
� F. Each fixture, floor drain and piece of equipment to have separate trap(s)
I � installed as close to fixture as possible.
' G. Provide p-traps under floor drains complete with trap prime connection.
! H. Furnish and install outlet devices which limit the flow of hot water to
� ; �
, lavatories and sinks to a mimmum of /z GPM, sized as recommended
I by the manufacturer and as required under ASHR.AE Standard 90-1989,
� � paragraph 7.7.2 or local or state energy codes.
I. Install all fixtures in strict accordance with ADA and ANSI A117.1
� requirements for handicap fixture clearances.
' J. Refer to Architectural plans for exact dimensional placement of ALL
, plumbing fixtures.
� K. Coordinate floor de ression re uirements for showers General
P q
iContractor.
' � L. Caulk around joints at fixtures mounted on wall or floor and where
� backed up to walls.
�' M. Mount fixtures rigid to walls as shown on drawings or details.
I
; N. Install a dropped eared "L" mounted on treated wood backing for rigid
� i support on all shower heads installed throughout the building.
3.02 TESTING AND CLEANING
� � � A. Inspect and test all work to insure installation in accordance with plans
� ; and specifications and proper operation.
� B. Refer to test procedures and pressures are required under Section 15035.
� � C. Correct all deficiencies found and retest.
i �
1 I D. All work to be turned over to Owner in a clean, sanitary condition.
,
� i END OF SECTION
�
,November 25, 1998 15450-3 98088.00
� I
I
i
�
I
i
� j � SECTION 15515
� � � HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
i
I
�1. � PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
i I � A. P.T. Test Plugs.
I
� , B. Pressure Test Kit.
� , C. Pressure Gauges.
D. Thermometers.
� �
, E. Thermometer Test Wells.
� F. Flow Balancing Valve.
� ; G. Flow Measuring Meter.
i 1.02 RELATED WORK:
� ; i
� A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
' � B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
� � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
i � 01340 (01300).
� 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
; 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANLJFACTURERS: Refer to individual equipment
' ' i I� specifications for acceptable manufacturers.
, 2.02 EQUIPMENT
�, �, A. P.T. Test Plugs
I
� 1. Provide '/e" solid brass pressure/temperature test plugs at
� � , locations shown on drawings.
2. Nordel self-closing valve to be rated for 275 �F service.
� � ' 3. Peterson Engineering or SISCO.
I I�
; 4. Provide PT test plugs on entering and leaving sides of all
� �' condensers, evaporators, pumps, reheat boxes, fan-powered
� ; boxes, water coils, water-to-water heat exchangers and other
; locations shown on drawings.
� � B. Pressure Test Kit
I i
� 1. Provide Owner complete portable pressure and temperature test
� ' kit.
November 25, 1998 15515-1 98088.00
� �
_ �
�
2. Kit to be complete with pressure test gauge, necessary connector '
hoses, temperature test thermometer with adapter, shutoff and _
vent valves and carrying case.
3. Readout kit to be Bell & Gossett ITT. �
C. Thermometer Test Wells
1. Provide Moeller 3158 or equal stainless steel thermometer test ��
wells at locations shown on drawings.
2. Test wells to be stainless steel with 2'/z" extension neck and �
screw plug capped with chain.
D. Flow Balancing Valve System (Up to 2-inch) �
1. System to consist of 300-1b rated shutoff valves of brass/bronze
and stainless steel metallurgy. Valves to include supply va?ve, �
venturi, return/balancing valve, integral PT ports and unions.
2. Supply valve to consist of full-ported ball, high accuracy, :low
loss venturi section, dual temperature/pressure test port and �
union.
3. Setting valve to consist of a specially ported ball valve with �
lockable memory stop, temperature/pressure test port and tulion. �
4. Furnish with F1owSet Meter Kit readout instrumentation �
consisting of a case, differential pressure meter, transparent direct
reading GPM reading faces, 10-foot hoses with pressure taps,
dial indicating thermometer and a pressure gage. �
5. Provide balancing valve system at all reheat coils, flow ba�lancing
stations and at other locations indicated on the drawings fo�r the
size range up to 2". �
6. Sweat type valves are IVOT permitted.
7. Furnish F1owSet balancing valve system by Flow Design, Inc or �
Tour and Andersson STAD. No Substitutions.
E. Flow Balancing Valve (2%z" and up) �
1. Calibrated non-ferrous valve with provisions for connecting a
portable differential pressure meter for flow measurement and �
balance.
2. Meter connections to have built-in check valves.
3. Integral pointer to register degree of valve opening with tamper �
proof inemory feature.
4. Valve to have drain connection. �
5. Construct valve with integral sieves to prevent leakage around
rotating element.
November 25, 1998 15515-2 98088.00
'
, � I - - ,
�
�
� 6. Construct valve for 125 psig working pressure at 150°F.
� 7. Furnish valve with preformed polyurethane insulation for easy
� access to valve without disturbing field applied adjacent insulat-
ion.
8. Attach an engraved tag indicating design flow, pressure and flow
�' characteristic of valve.
� 9. Provide balancing valves at all reheat coils, flow balancing
� stations and at other locations indicated on the drawings for the
size range 2'/2" and larger.
� � 10. Armstrong CBV, Bell & Gossett Circuit Setter or Tour &
IAndersson STAF.
I
� � F. Flow Measuring Meter
� 1. Provide portable readout meter capable_of indicating pressure
�
; differential across previously specified flow measuring devices.
, � 2. Furnish complete with necessary hoses, shutoff and vent valves
I, j and carrying case.
; �
� i i 3. Reading range to be mid scale of units to be read.
� 4. Readout kits to be made by manufacturer of associated flow
1 ' control devices.
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
, i 3.01 INSTALLATION
' A. Hydronic specialty items to be installed in locations shown on drawings.
�
' �' B. Manufacturer's instructions to be utilized to install specialty items.
%
� I C. Provide manual air vents at top of pipe nsers and other locations where
� I � air can be trapped.
D. Locate flow balancing valves and P.T. ports in accessible locations with
enough clearance to allow insertion of probes.
� E. P.T. ports and pressure ports on flow balancing valves shall be installed I
i on the top or sides of piping. Do not install ports on bottom of pipes.
� I
END OF SECTION
�
�
� I
i
i
� '
i
�'November 25, 1998 15515-3 98088.00
' I
I
, , �
, �
� SECTION 15790
� '
� HEATING COILS
� I
i
I �
I 1. PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� ' ' A. Hot Water Coils.
I
; I B. Refer to drawings for size, location, service, capacity and performance
� i requirements for each coil.
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
I �
� A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
� ' C. Section 15062: Valves.
i �I D. Section 15515: Hydronic Specialties.
� � � 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Certify coil capacities, pressure drops and selection
procedures in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
� j �i 1.04 SUBMITTALS
; A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340
1 ; (01300).
, B. Submit manufacturer's product data.
� '
� ; C. Submit performance ratings for each coil.
�
' 2. , PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
� I
� A. Carrier.
I .
� ! , B. McQuay.
� ;
� C. Trane.
� � '�, 2.02 COIL CONSTRUCTION
� A. Tubes: Copper.
� I � B. Fins: Aluminum or copper.
; , C. Headers: Heavy gauge cast iron or steel.
� � I� D. Casing: Minimum 16-gauge galvanized steel.
I
� E. Testing: Pressure test and leak test each coil at minimum 300 psig and
� 200 psig air pressure respectively with coil submerged in water.
�November 25, 1998 15790-1 98088.00
�
�
2.03 HOT WATER COILS �
A. Design for minimum 200 psig at 220�F.
B. Coils to be constructed of copper or aluminum fins mechanically bonded �
to copper tubing.
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION �
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount coil in accordance with SMACNA Standards. �
B. Mount coils with a maximum transition angle of 30 degrees on the
entering air side of coil and 45 degrees on leaving air side. �
C. Provide air-tight seal between coil and duct or unit casing.
D. Provide access doors on entering and leaving sides of coil for clpaning �
and inspection.
E. Refer to drawings for required piping connections to water coils.
F. Externally insulate coil casing including return bends with 1" thic�:, �
blanket-type fiberglass insulation.
�
END OF SECTION
i
1
�
�
�
�
�
1
�
November 25, 1998 15790-2 98088.00
�
i
� � I
�
II � ' SECTION 15864
�
'� � � CEILING EXHAUST FANS
1. PART - 1
� �
� GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
i �
I A. Furnish and install equipment of the sizes and capacities as scheduled.
�
B. Install fans at locations shown on drawings and as required by details
� � specified herein.
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
li I
�� � A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
I
� B. Section 15170: Motors.
� i
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� I A. Certify fans performance in accordance with AMCA Certified Air and
� � Sound Rating Criteria, Standard 210 and 300.
I i
� B. UL listed and labeled.
� � 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
� 01340 (01300).
� � 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
�
i , 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
' � A. Penn "ZephYr��• .
�
� B. Acme "Masterette".
�
; I
, � �, � C. Greenheck. '
, � j 2.02 EQUIPMENT
i
� , ; A. Centrifugal fan, acoustically engineered.
i
' � B. Acoustically lined fan housing.
1 � C. Direct drive with fan motor mounted on vibration isolators.
' j D. Integral back-draft damper. ..
I � E. Fan to operate whisper quiet at specified conditions.
F. Horsepower and voltage as shown on drawings.
, , G. Permanently lubricated, thermally protected, PSC ball bearing motor.
; H. Design fan outlet to be suitable for duct connection.
� ' i
'November 25, 1998 15864 - 1 98088.00
,� � i
�
2.03 ACCESSORIES �
A. Provide a solid state motor speed controller.
B. Provide in-line duct adapter. �
C. Where indicated, furnish and install a wall discharge cap with bacic draft
damper and bird screen. �
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION ,
A. Instal] fans in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install variable speed controllers where scheduled or shown on 1
drawings.
END OF SECTION
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
. �
�
�
. '
�
November 25, 1998 15864 - 2 98088.00
�
� �
;
� SEC"I'ION 15890
� � �
SHEET METAL DUCTWORK - LOW PRESSURE
� 1. PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Furnish all sheet metal ductwork with air velocity less
� than 2000 FPM and static pressure less than 2" w.g.
I 1.02 RELATED WORK
� � A. Section 07270: Firestopping.
�
� B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
� ''j C. Section 15250: Insulation.
� D. Section 15910: Sheet Metal Specialties.
' '
� E. Shop Drawings:
� 1. Submit for approval complete sheet metal drawings indicating all
� � ductwork and fittings to be fabricated and installed in all
renovation building areas.
2. Coordinate shop drawings with routing of piping, fire protection, I
' � , electrical conduit and bus ducts, pneumatic tube system, cable
�
trays and other trades.
� 3. Prior to submission, stamp shop drawings approved to sub-
� � stantiate that adequate coordination far space requirements and
' i accessibility have been provided and that no conflicts exist
� � between trades.
�,
j I 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
'' � A. Emboss duct fittings with material gauge, manufacturer and type
imaterial
i
� B. Support ductwork in accordance with the 1985 1 st Edition of
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
� C. Install ductwork to comply with UL roof/floor ceiling assembly number
shown on Architectural plans and in accordance with UL Fire Resist-
ance.Index Catalog.
� D. Hang ductwork by angle iron and wire in accordance with the specified
� roof/floor ceiling assembly.
I
� ; E. Provide materials, including sealers, liners, pre-insulated jackets and
� � flexible ducts with a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and smoke
' development rating of not over 50.
� I, I
November 25, 1998 15890-1 98088.00
� �� �
�
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE �
A. Construct ductwork in accordance with methods and details contained in
the 1985 1 st edition of SMACNA's "HVAC I�uct Construction �tand- �
ards" unless specifically changed in this section of the specificatio.ns or
on the drawings.
B. Leakage for low pressure duct systems including supply, return a.nd �
� °
exhaust shall not exceed 2/o of the design flows as evidenced by the
� final Test and Balance Report on: (Main traversed flows minus (-1� the
sum of all terminal outlet (or inlet) flows for each system. ,
C. BE ADVISED that ALL transverse 'oint
s shall be sealed with a 2- art
J P
tape/adhesive system as specified under Part 2 "Materials". �
D. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are inside "air side" clear
dimensions. Make allowances for duct requiring internal sound liner. �
E. In areas of renovation, contractor shall field verify existing condit:ions
and clearances for installation of new ductwork and coordinate vvith
other trades prior to any fabrication of sheet metal. Contractor s:hall '
furnish offsets, rises, drops and transitions and shall adjust to equivalent
duct sizes as required to facilitate installation in the existing conditions.
F. In certain areas where higher ceilings are being installed, existing �
conduit, wiring, piping, sprinklers, rainwater leaders and ductwork will
require offsetting, raising or relocation to accommodate the renovation. �
Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions which require
offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and concFuit and
include this work. Contractor to include in his bid the cost of required �
offsetting, raising or relocation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc to all�ow for
installation of new work.
G. Where indicated on the drawings, Hardcast (seal) transverse duct jaints �
on existing (to remain) supply, return and exhaust ductwork to recluce
air leakage. Remove existing external insulation and apply two-part joint
sealant. Replace external insulation with new material upon completion '
of sealing.
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS �
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ductwork: Galvanized steel. r
B. Sheet metal angles, bar slips, hangers and straps: Galvanized ste�l.
C. Screws: Cadmium plated. �
D. Joint Sealer:
1. Mineral impregnated woven fiber tape and plastic type �
activator-adhesive FTA-20 (indoor) and FTA-50 (outdoor)
manufactured by Hardcast Inc. with FS-150 fiberglass scrim tape ��
November 25, 1998 15890-2 98088.00
��
�
� , :
� � (NO other substitutes). The use of any sealants without a
�' , reinforcing tape is NOT acceptable except as listed below.
� 2. If contractor elects to utilize TDC connectors, the gasketing for
the TDC connectors shall be Hardcast's FLANGE GRIP 1902-
� � FR flame retardant sealant and the four interior joints shall be
�� ! caulked with Hardcast's IRON GRIP 601-NO SUBSTITUTES.
' If for any reason this sealant is not used, the following paragaph
, 4. shall be applicable.
ii 'I 3. If contractor proposes any substitute gasketing sealant for TDC
; connectors and interior joint caulking, be advised that the TDC
1 ; flanges MLJST be sealed with the 2-part sealant and tape system
described in paragraph 1.
4. In renovation projects where duct systems cannot be shutdown
� ' and must remain under pressure or for areas that must remain
� occupied, seal duct system with HARDCAST's water-based,
Aluma-Grip AFT-701 - NO SUBSTITUTES.
I2.02 FABRICATION
; i A. Comply with the following gauges and reinforcement schedule when
� fabricating low pressure ductwork. Largest duct dimension governs the
duct and complete joint.
� , Max Duct Dimension Duct Slip Gauge Slip Bar Slip Reinforcement
� Gauge Size
� ' � Up to 18'; 26 26 No No
19 to 30 24 24 1 No
� ' 31" to 42" 22 22 l No
I I
43" to 54" 22 22 ]% 1'/s x '/s Band Iron ,
� 55" to 60" 20 20 1% 13/s x '/s Band Iron
61" to 84" 20 20 1% 1% x 1%2 x '/e Angle
' � ; 85" to 96" 18 20 1%2 1% x 1%Z x '/, Angle
OVER 96" 18 20 2 2 x 2 x %, Angle
� ' I
� B. Refer to UL floor-ceiling and roof-ceiling assembly for minimum
_ i
i � allowable duct gauge and wire hanger requirements.
� �
� C. Transverse Joints: In accordance with SMACNA.
' D. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock or grooved seams closed tightly
� ' and evenly. Button punch snap lock longitudinal seam construction is
; not permitted.
;
'
November 25, 1998 15890-3 98088.00
�
�
E. Cross Breaking: Ductwork, except where rigid board insulation is �
applied, to be cross broken where duct dimension exceeds 10".
F. Miscellaneous Materials: �
1. Construct all angles, bar slips and straps used with ductwoi•k of
same material as ductwork.
2. Cadmium-plated screws. �
G. Compression Angles:
1. Install steel angles on the top and bottom of ductwork �
compressed with all thread, washers and nuts.
2. Place angles on 4' O.C. at the indicated locations. i
3. Provide compression angles at the following locations:
a. All ducts over 60" in width which generate objectianable �
drumming.
b. All ducts with an aspect ratio above 4 to 1 which �
generate objectionable drununing.
c. At locations indicated on the drawings. �
d. At locations directed by the Architect.
H. Transitions: �
1. Do not exceed 1/7 slope for increase-in-area transitions. �
2. Do not exceed 1/4 slope for decrease-in-area transitions. �
3. Do not exceed 30° slope on the approach side and 45° slope on
the leaving side of transitions at equipment connections wi�thout �
the use of approved vanes.
I. TDC/TDF/T-25 Transverse Joint Connector Systems
1. If the contractor elects to utilize a formed-on flange, application �
shall be limited to ducts less than 48" wide and the following
criteria shall be required: �
a. The flanges shall include a rolled on bead at the 90°
blend. �
b. Provide 6" long flange cleats on 18" centers for all
pressure classes up to 2" w.g. Cleats shall be roll formed
from 20 ga. galvanized steel. �
c. Flange faces MUST be sealed with HAR.DCAST FR-
1902 - NO EXCEPTIONS. �
d. For duct pressures up to 2-in.w.g., bolt flanges MU�T be
installed at all four corners. �
November 25, 1998 .15890-4 98088.00
�
i I
I
� � -
I
� i e. The four interior corners of the joint must be sealed with
; HARDCAST FR-1902.
� , ' 2. If the contractor elects to utilize a TDC Connector System for
� ducts 48" and larger, a factory-manufactured system furnished by
� Ductmate or Ward Industries shall be provided as follows:
! , a. The flanges shall be factory roll-formed, knock-on type,
constructed of 22 ga galvanized steel with factory-applied
; � sealant in the pocket. Connectors shall be Ward
�I �. ' �' Industries H System or approved equal by Ductmate
� ' Industries.
I �
i � , b. Provide 6" long flange cleats on 18" centers for all
, pressure classes up to 2" w.g. Cleats shall be roll formed
�, from 20 ga. galvanized steel.
� I, c. Flange faces MUST be cleaned and sealed with
Hardcast's FLANGE GRIP FR-1902 - NO
1 EXCEPTIONS.
, ; d. Provide Ward Industries' H Corner constructed of 11 ga.
� i galvanized steel. Corner pieces MUST be installed and
bolted.
e. For duct pressures up to 2" w.g., bolt flanges MUST be �
� installed as follows:
I � (1) 48" to 96" duct: At four corners and 18" on
� � center.
�
(2) Over 96" duct: At four corners and 12" on center.
� ,� f. The four interior corners of the joint must be sealed with
Hardcast's IRON GRIP 601 - NO EXCEPTIONS.
� J. Duct Sealing:
1. Seal all supply, return, relief, exhaust and outdoor air intake
i � joints and connections using a 2-part system of mineral
; impregnated woven fiber tape factory im re nated with an activ-
� P g
� '
, ator type adhesive.
�
�
2. Mineral impregnated woven fiber tape and plastic type
� ' activator-adhesive FTA-20 (indoor) and FTA-50 (outdoor)
� manufactured by Hardcast Inc. with FS-150 fiberglass scrim
� i tape (NO other substitutes). The use of any sealants without a
reinforcing tape is strictly prohibited.
� � 3. If contractor elects to utilize TDC connectors, the gasketing for
, i �i the TDC connectors shall be Hardcast's FLANGE GRIP 1902-
; FR flame retardant sealant and the four interior joints shall be
� caulked with Hardcast's IRON GRIP 601-NO SUBSTITUTES.
,Nove'mber 25, 1998 15890-5 98088.00
� '
r
If for any reason this sealant is not used, the following paragaph �
4. shall be applicable.
4. If contractor proposes any substitute gasketing sealant for "CDC '
connectors and interior joint caulking, be advised that the "CDC
flanges MUST be sealed with the 2-part sealant and tape system
described in paragraph 2. �
5. In renovation projects where duct systems cannot be shutd+�wn
and must remain under pressure or for areas that must remain �
occupied, seal duct system with HARDCAST's water-based,
Aluma-Grip AFT-701 - NO SUBSTITUTES.
6. Should longitudinal joints prove to lealc, longitudinal joints shall j
also be sealed.
K. Low Pressure Round Duct �
1. Round duct with a maximum operating pressure of 2" w.g.
positive pressure shall be constructed in accordance with the �
following table:
Duct Diameter Spiral Seam Longitudinal
inches Gau�e Seam Gau�e �
3 thru 8 26 26
9 thru 14 26 26 �
15 thru 26 26 24
27 thru 36 24 22 �
37 thru 50 22 20 �
51 thru 60 20 18
61 thru 84 18 16 �
2. Round duct with a maximum operating pressure of 2-in.w.g.
negative pressure shall be constructed in accordance with the
following table: �
Duct Diameter Spiral Seam Longitudinal
inches Gau�e Seam Gau�e r
3 thru 8 26 26
9 thru 14 26 24 �
15 thru 26 24 22
27 thru 36 22 20 �
37 thru 50 20 18
�
November 25, 1998 15890-6 9�,088.00
�
, i
1 i ' -
,
' '� 51 thru 60 18 16
, 61 thru 84 16 14
��� i ! 3. Fittings shall be of a wall thickness notless than that specified
, � for longitudinal seam straight duct unless otherwise noted.
i
1 � 4. Refer to SMACNA Table 3-1 for mitered elbow requirements.
j '� 5. Elbows may be die-formed stamped, pleated or segmented.
, Gages shall not be less than that for straight duct nor the
, � minimum appropriate for forming and assembly.
! I
� L. Provide Ells fabricated as conditions necessitate in the following order
� � ' of preference:
i
' 1. Un-vaned elbow with throat radius equal to 3/4 of duct width and
' 'I full heel radius.
�' �
2. Six (6) inch throat radius with full radius vanes and full heel
1 � radius.
�
3. Three (3) inch square throat and square heel elbow with
, closed-space double thickness vanes. �,
� I 4. The use of square throat elbows with radius heels is NOT
� permitted. Elbows of this type will be removed at contractor's
� expense. ` �
i '� M. Make Branch Connections and Tees in one of the following manners:
, 1. Supply Branch:
' � a. Un-vaned radius transition elbow with s litter dam er
, P P
when branch width is 36" or smaller.
' � I�
, b. Vaned square throat transition elbow when branch width
is larger than 36" with splitter damper equipped with
� � locking rod and position indicator.
' ' c. For sub-branch supply, use straight tap with extractor,
j having manual control rod extended through main branch
� side with position indicator.
I 2. Return Branch:
� � � a. Use 45° or radius entry clinch lock collar up to a
� maximum of 24" width.
� � � b. Un-vaned radius transition to 36" width.
I I
� � c. Vaned square throat transition with splitter damper for
, sizes above 36".
i �
, !�
� I
November 25, 1998 15890-7 98088.00
�
,
3. Round Supply Take-offs: �
a. Factory fabricated beaded straight spin-in type galvanized
steel fittings with 45° extractor and manual balancing �
damper. Fitting to be conical type.
b. Provide extended balancing quadrant to allow insulation
to be applied without impeding operation of balancing �
damper.
c. Spin-in fitting to be minimum of 26 gauge galvaniz��d �
construction. Fittings constructed of less gauge m�t�rial
will not be accepted.
d. Raintree Products, Inc. Model 84MTSD, R & J �
Manufacturing Company Model S 1-6, or approved equal.
4. Round Return/Exhaust Taps: �
a. Factory fabricated beaded straight spin-in type galvanized
steel tap fittings with manual balancing damper. �
b. Raintree Model 84MTD, R & J or approved equal.
N. Low Pressure Flex Connectors: Connect indoor fans to duct system �
with UL listed 20 ounce flame retardant canvas.
O. Low Pressure Flexible Duct:
1. For flexible connections from ducts to registers, grilles and �
diffusers provide conosion resistant steel wire reinforcing helix
permanently banded in airtight polyester film. � �I
2. Factory certified to meet requirements of NFPA-90A with flame II
spread not over 25 and smoke developed not over 50. � I
3. UL listed and labeled as Class 1 air duct connector per UL-181.
��
4. Pressure rating: Up to 6 w.c. through a temperature range of- �
20°F to 250°F. �
5. For Return, Relief and Exhaust Air Duct Connectors: Pro`�ide � I
Wiremold Type WB flexible duct, Thermaflex, Fle�unaster or
approved equal.
6. For Supply Duct Connections: �
a. Provide factory pre-insulated type duct having core as
previously described with a 1" thick, 0.75 PCF density �
glass fiber insulating blanket covered with a woven glass
serim and sheathed in a polyolefin vapor barrier.
b. Duct to meet additional requirements of NFPA-90B and �
U.L. labeled as a Class 1 Air Duct Material.
c. Thermal "C" factor: 0.23 maximum at 60°F. �
November 25, 1998 15890-8 98088.00
�
� :-..�,
� � � ' ,
� �
' ' d. Air duct material to be equal to Wiremold Type WGC or
i �
equivalent by Thermaflex or Flexmaster.
I ' i �I 7. Flexible duct connectors shall not exceed six feet (6'-0") in
� length.
� II 8. Install flexible ducting with steel clamps or plastic strap clamps
� � I equal to "Panduit" ar "Young Quik-Clamp".
� � I 9. Do not pass flexible duct through fire rated partitions. Stop
' insulation at each side of wall and route metal duct throu h wall.
� � g
' � P. Round-to-Square Register Connectors:
', � � I 1. For low pressure return and/or exhaust application of round duct
i, � connectors to square ceiling grilles or registers, provide factory
�i I �I fabricated square-to-round galvanized steel minimum 3" deep
� � adapter boxes with 2" long beaded round collar.
� � 2. Raintree Model 79, shop, or factory fabricated equivalent.
, ' � Q. Manual Dampers:
� j 1. Hand operated butterfly type dampers to be galvanized steel, 18
' , U. S. gauge or heavier. ,
� �
I � 2. Dampers for ducts up to 12" depth and 12" diameter to be one
� � �� blade on a 3/s" round steel rod mounted inside of duct without
i frame.
� � 3. Fit damper with locking type quadrant with position indicator
and brass end bearing plate drilled and secured to duct.
' � 4. Dampers for ducts over 12" depth to be multi-blade type:
� � ; a. Provide 12" maximum blade width up to 30" blade
� !
length.
� � �i b. Provide 10" maximum blade width over 30" blade length.
�
, � c. Mount blades on frame with brass sleeve bearings,
� interconnected for operation from one locking type hand
I quadrant.
� ; I R. Fire Dampers: Refer to Section 15910 for fire dampers, combination
fire/smoke dampers, sleeves, angles and other installation requirements.
! �I
S. Splitters, Extractors, Vanes and Deflectors:
� � � 1. Galvanized steel sheet same thickness as ductwork of corres-
I, � ponding size.
� i 2. Vanes to be securely anchored to duct or casing and have
� freestanding edges rigidly braced.
' I
� ,
� November 25, 1998 15890-9 98088.00
�
3. Provide adjustable rod with position indicator and locking device �
for splitters, extractors and deflectors.
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION '
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Hanging: �
1. Support ductwork by suitable sheared strips or galvanized metals
or one inch by '/a" galvanized steel band iron hangers on each
side of duct. Refer to Figure 4-4, page 4-7 of SMACNA HVAC � I
Duct Construction Standards for details.
2. Attach hangers to the ductwork using sheet metal screws. �
3. Secure hangers to steel structure by means of C-clamps. In
seismic zones provide seismically approved C-clamps with cross �
over straps to attach to opposite side of beam flanges.
4. Secure hangers to masonry portion of building by means of
approved anchor shields or other acceptable anchors, similar to i
Figures 4-1, 4-2 and 4-3 pages 4-4, 4-5 and 4-6 of the
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction manual.
5. Where light weight concrete and decking are used that wi'1 not �
support inserts, provide angles and channels to span between
steel beams and/or bar joists to support ductwork. ,
6. Vertical risers and other duct runs, where method of support
specified above is not applicable, to be supported by angle �
brackets as shown on Figures 4-6 and 4-7,.pages 4-12 and 4-13
of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction manual.
B. Sealing: �
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions with lap
joint of 2" tape occurring on top of horizontal ducts wherl hidden �
from view.
2. Extend tape along sides of the joints onto flat duct for adhering �
the tape with adhesive.
C. In areas of renovation, contractor shall field verify existing conditions
and clearances for installation of new ductwork and coordinate ��ith �
other trades prior to any fabrication of sheet metal. Contractor sriall
furnish offsets, rises, drops and transitions and shall adjust to equivalent
duct sizes as required to facilitate installation in the existing conditions. t
D. Obstructions and Restrictions:
1. Obstructions may not be located within ducts without specific '
permission of Engineer for each instance.
�
� November 25, 1998 15890-10 98088.00
�
I
1 �� �
� �
, ' ', 2. When obstructions cannot be avoided, obstructions shall be eased
� in accordance with Figure 2-10, page 2-11 of the SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction manual.
1 ' '
; � E. FIRESTOPPING
� I 1. Penetrations and openings for all ductwork in fire rated
� i assemblies shall be firestopped with tested firestopping design
, �, assemblies and in accordance with UL listed fire/smoke damper
� , , installation where dampers are required. These penetrations
� � include but are not limited to the following:
; , a. Ductwork through above grade floor slabs.
, � �. b. Ductwork through rated walls and partitions.
' ! c. Ductwork through vertical shafts such as chases.
'' � � d. Voids around ductwork and duct sleeves penetrating
' � above grade floor slabs and fire rated partitions, fire walls
' � I and smoke walls.
� 2. Manufacturer of materials shall specialize in the manufacture of
� the products required for firestopping.
I � 3. Provide manufacturers' certifications of all materials used for
� � firestopping.
' � ' 4. All penetration methods shall be tested and listed in accordance
� � with the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory.
� �
�� � 5. Refer to Section 07270 for additional information and
�, � requirements for firestopping.
I � �
I� � , F. Insulation: Where drawings and insulating specifications indicate that
I � ducts are to be insulated, make provisions for neat insulation finish
� around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access
� � �� doors and similar operating devices.
� � G. Counterflashing: Counterflash all ducts where they pierce the roof.
i �I
� H. Pitot Ports:
I
� � 1. Pitot ports for measuring airflow to be located in each main
� , '� - supply duct at the downstream end of the straightest run of the
' main and before the first branch takeoff.
i �
I 2. Pitot ports to be formed by drilling 7/16" holes in the duct, lined
� up perpendicular to airflow on maximum 8" centers and at least
I I three to a duct, evenly spaced.
� I
� 3. Holes in return and exhaust negative pressure ducts to be
' plugged with plastic plugs.
� '',
i
November 25, 1998 15890-11 98088.00
� � �
,
4. Holes in supply and relief positive pressure ducts to be covered �
with gasketed screw-off type access caps equal to "Vent faorics
Ventlok #699 or #699-2". Provide access to these for futur� -
balancing. �
END OF SECTION �
. �
,
, �
�
, �
,
,�
,
�
�
i
,
. �
�
November 25, 1998 15890-12 98088.00
, '
I II
� � I
I I
� � ; SECTION 15910
�
' � � SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES
' �I
I
� � 1. I PART - 1 GENERAL
' ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� ' �
, i
A. Fire dampers.
; 'i B. Smoke dampers.
� �, � C. Combination fire-smoke dampers.
I '
, D. Damper sleeves.
� � i
E. Balancing dampers.
� ��
� � � F. Access doors.
, � G. Air distribution registers, grilles and diffusers.
� ' ' 1.02 RELATED WORK
' ' '
A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
i �
� � '� B. Section 15250: Insulation. I
� C. Section 15890: Sheet Metal Ductwork - Low Pressure
1 ! 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
� A. Air Diffusion Council (ADC) certified ratings.
' i
� ', B. Grilles, registers and diffusers to be tested in accordance with ASHRAE
, �
Standard 70-1991 and ISO Standards 3741 and 5219.
' �� C. Coordinate the device frame type and mounting requirements with the
itype of ceilings specified on the architectural drawings.
I
� D. Furnish all fire and combination fire-smoke dampers with integral
� , '� sleeves.
�
� � E. Fire dampers: Constructed and tested in accordance with U.L. Safety
� '� Standard 555 including dynamic testing.
' � I � F. Combination Fire-Smoke dam ers: Listed in accordance with U.L. 555
i p
; � and U.L. SSSS.
�� � i � G. Smoke damper operators: Listed in accordance with U.L. SSSS.
' � H. Fire dampers shall be dynamically tested and labeled. Static-rated
� I dampers are NOT acce table.
i p
' � I.. Provide a copy of fire and smoke damper manufacturers' installation
' � instructions with submittal and also at final inspection.
November 25, 1998 15910-1 98088.00
�
,
1.04 SUBMITTALS �
A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340
(01300). �
B. Devices and dampers to be submitted and approved before starting
installation.
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS �
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS �
A. Air Distribution products:
1. Titus. �
2. Anemostat.
3. Krueger. �
4. MetalAire.
B. Fire Dampers, Fire-Smoke dampers, Louvers: '
1. Ruskin.
2. Air Balance. �
3. American Warming and Vent.
4. Dowco. ,
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Dampers �
1. Tested and labeled as a dynamic damper in accordance ��ith U.L.
555-1990 and in accordance with NFPA 90A. '
2. Held in an open position with a 165�F fusible link and arranged
to lock in position on closure.
3. Type "B", multi-leaf, with spring closing for horizontal and ,
vertical mounting for all low pressure rectangular ducts �-ith
velocities below 1500 FPM. Type "A" dampers are NOT �
permitted.
4. Style "LR" or "LO", multi-leaf, with spring closing for �
horizontal and vertical mounting for all low pressure round and
oval ducts with velocities below 1500 FPM. Type "R" dampers
are NOT permitted. ,
5. Style "G", multi-leaf, with spring closing for vertical mounting at
grilles and registers in walls rated at 2 hours and less. ,
6. Steel construction with rust resistant finish and provided with
factory installed mounting sleeve as required by structure.
,
November 25, 1998 15910-2 98088.00
,
i I
' �
� � j � 7. Mount per manufacturer's published U.L. approved installation
instructions.
� ! � 8. Fire dampers for use in walls and floors rated at 2 hours and
less: Ruskin Model DIBD2, U.L. labeled for 1'/z hours.
� 9. Furnish all dampers with factory-mounted sleeves. Refer to
� sleeve paragraph for minimum gauge requirement.
� 10. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring
I special framing or drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's
' j '; installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the
' submitting contractor.
i ! � 11. See Architectural and Mechanical drawings for hour-rating of
' ceilings, walls and/or floors for fire damper locations indicated
' I on mechanical plans. Dampers to be compatible with hour
ratings.
1 ; , B. Combination Fire-Smoke Dampers
1. U.L. classified and labeled both as dynamic fire damper and as
i smoke damper with operator and meeting all NFPA, U.L. 555
' ' and U.L. SSSS requirements.
; 2. Held in an open position with a 165�F fusible link and ananged
' to lock in position on closure.
' 3. Rate dampers for minimum of 350 deg F.
' 4. Class II leakage requirements for a maximum of 10 CFM/ft2 at
'I � � �� 1" w.g.
� 5. Steel construction with rust resistant finish and provided with
� �, factory installed mounting sleeve as required by structure.
I�
, 6. Ruskin Model FSD-36 Class II dampers with jamb and blade
' , ; � edge seals for all low pressure ducts with velocities below 1500
FPM. Maximum of 0.08" w.g. pressure drop allowed on any
� damper at 1500 FPM velocity. Provide oversized damper where
� ' � required to limit maximum pressure drop.
! ; 7. Dampers in round or oval ducts to be provided with round or
� ' oval enclosures.
� '�i 8. Furnish all dampers with factory-mounted sleeves. Refer to
1 sleeve paragraph for minimum gauge requirement.
I 9. Mount damper in accordance with manufacturer's published U.L.
� approved installation instructions.
� � i 10. If multiple actuators are required on larger dampers, verify
' access space exists for locations of multiple actuators.
� � I ,
November 25, 1998 15910-3 98088.00
�
i
1
11. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring �
special framing or drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's
installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the
submitting contractor. ,
12. Smoke detectors to be furnished by Division 16. Coordinate
wiring hook-ups. �
13. Damper operators shall be U.L. listed for the intended dutv.
Operators shall be factory mounted. Damper and operator shall
be U.L. listed as an assembly in accordance with applicable '
U.L.-SSSS qualifications.
14. Unless otherwise noted, all fire-smoke dampers to be �
electronically controlled. Where electric operators are used,
damper motor to be compatible with electrical characterist:cs
� used for smoke detection and/or fire alarm system. ,
C. Smoke Dampers
' 1. Tested in accordance with U.L.-SSSS and bear the U.L. label. �
2. Ruskin Model SD-60 Class II low leakage dampers with airfoil
blades and silicone rubber edge seals. Construct frames of 5" x �
16 gauge galvanized, hat-shaped steel channel and blades of
double skin, 14 gauge steel.
� D. Damper Sleeves ,
1. 1'/z hour fire dampers: 14 gauge.
� 2. Combination fire-smoke dampers: 14 gauge. ,
3. Where dampers are installed outside the vertical plane of the
, wall, provide minimum 10 gauge steel sleeves. 1
4. Do not use sleeve of lighter gauge than duct.
' S. Install minimum 2 x 2 x '/s angle on four sides of sleeves and on '
both sides of wall. Angles must provide a minimum of 1"
overlap of opening and cover the corners. �
6. Fasten angles to sleeve only. Do not fasten angles to wall.
7. Connect ducts to damper sleeves in accordance with �
manufacturers' published installation instructions.
8. Always install fire dampers and combination fire-smoke dampers
in STRICT accordance with manufacturers' published installation ,
instructions to maintain U.L. listing.
9. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requ�ring '
special framing or drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's
installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the
submitting contractor. '
November 25, 1998 15910-4 93088.00
�
j - � - . ,
� ;
i
,
' ' 10. Install access door at each damper for service and inspection.
�
j Provide fire-rated wall, floor and ceiling access panels in
� inaccessible ceilings, chases, etc. for access to dampers. Refer to
, Section 15050 for additional information on Access Panels.
E. Manual Balancing Dampers
� 1. Hand operated butterfly type dampers to be galvanized steel, 18
U.S. gauge or heavier.
' I 2. Dampers for ducts up to 12" depth and 12" diameter to be one
I blade on a 3/s" round steel rod mounted inside of duct without
iframe.
� � 3. Fit damper with locking type quadrant with position indicator
I
� and brass end bearing plate drilled and secured to duct.
� �I 4. Dampers for ducts over 12" depth to be multi-blade type:
i
a. 12" maximum blade width up to 30" blade length.
� � b. 10" maximum blade width over 30" blade length.
� � c. Mount blades on frame with brass sleeve bearings,
� interconnected for operation from one locking type hand
quadrant.
� ' � F. Duct Access Doors
I �
1. Ruskin ADH24 (low pressure service), Ruskin ADHP-3 (medium
jand high pressure service) and Ductmate (round and oval ducts)
' insulated doors in ductwork, floors, walls, ceilings or casings for
� equipment service at the following locations:
� � a. Automatic dampers
ib. Fire dampers i
i
' ' c. Smoke dampers
i d. Duct-mounted smoke detectors
�
/ � e. Entering airside of duct coils
f. Other locations noted on drawings.
� � � 2. Refer to Section 15050 for wall and ceiling access panels.
i
I
,
I
� '
, �
�
�November 25, 1998 15910-5 98088.00
� � ;
'
3. Access door size at all fire, smoke and combination dampers �
shall be as follows:
�
DUCT SIZE ACCESS DOOR
12" to 20" 12" x 12" ,
22" to 36" 18" x 18" �
38" and up 24" x 24"
4. Doors to be double panel construction, using two sheets of 24 �
gauge galvanized steel with one inch thick insulation between
panels. �
5. Mount doors in a rigid frame of at least 22 gauge formed
galvanized steel or aluminum. �
6. Use angle iron bracing as required to make the door frame a
rigid assembly.
7. For installations in medium and high pressure ducts, provide ,
pressure-rated access doors for operating pressures up to b" w.g.
8. Hinge or cam type access doors with positive closing, tight ,
sealing and easily operated latches.
9. Provide factory identification labels at all concealed access doors �
to identify fire dampers and combination fire-smoke dampers.
10. Latches: ,
a. Doors up to and including 16" high: One latch.
� b. Doors 17" to 48": Two latches and inside release handle.
c. Doors over 48" high: Three cam-action door latches with �
compression levers.
11. Gaskets: Sponge rubber (all doors). �
G. Square Ceiling Diffusers �
1. Titus Model TDC all steel construction at all locations
designated by letters "SA", "SB", "SC", etc.
2. Opposed blade volume dampers. ,
3. Diffusers designated as two or three-way blow to be four-�Tay
diffusers with field adjustable sheet metal plates installed iri each '
direction.
'
November 25, 1998 15910-6 98088.00
'
` � , •
� '
� 4. 24"x 24" extended panel modules (Border Type 3) for all lay-in
' ' �
ceiling applications.
�i , i , 5. Border Type 1 (Surface Mount) for drywall ceiling installations.
I i 6. Where extended panel modules are specified for lay-in ceiling
' i I applications do NOT submit fully louvered-faced diffusers or
large louver blades for all sizes.
, � 7. Insulate diffuser tops with foil vapor barrier insulation.
, � �� 8. Frame: Flush mount.
! �
�� � 9. Finish: Baked-on, off-white enamel.
� H. Sidewall Register - Double Deflection Type
1. Titus Model 300 at locations designated by "SAR" with
' � concealed screw mounting. No face screws allowed in finished
� areas.
, 2. Individually adjustable, front and rear blades spaced at 3/4".
3. Opposed blade volume control and neoprene or extruded vinyl
; gasket. .
� 4. Finish: Off-white baked enamel.
' ; I. Aluminum Ceiling Return & E�chaust Registers
I 1. Titus Model SOF with opposed blade dampers at locations
! designated by letters "R.A","RB", "EA","EB", etc. with concealed
� ' ' screw mounting. No face screws allowed in finished areas.
; � 2. '/�" Aluminum grid.
' ' 3. Finish: Off-white baked enamel.
' 4. Lay in ceilings: Type 3 mounting in a 24 x 24 metal extended '
, panel suitable for mounting in T-bar grid.
� 5. Drywall ceilings: Border Type 1 for surface mounting.
j ;
� 6. Refer to Architectural plans for ceiling type in each area.
J. Sidewall Return Register
' ; 1. Titus Model 350 flanged steel registers with 35� blades and 3/4"
i louver spacing at locations designated by "SWR" with concealed ,
� ; screw mounting. No face screws allowed in finished areas.
' � ; 2. Opposed blade volume control. '
� � �i 3. Blades parallel to the horizontal. I
, ' � 4. Mounting screws to be concealed type.
' I
' � 5. Finish: Off-white baked enamel.
;November 25, 1998 15910-7 98088.00
'
,
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION '
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Sheet metal specialty items to be installed in locations as shown on ,
drawings.
B. Installation to be in accordance with manufacturer's published �
recommendations as well as applicable sections of SMACNA manual.
C. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring special �
framing or drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's installation
requirements shall be the responsibility of the submitting contractor.
D. Provide all angle iron or channel framing at irregular wall and floor '
slabs penetrations required to provide a smooth surface for mounting of
angles around fire and combination fire-smoke damper sleeves.
E. Provide all screws, bolts, nuts, inserts, required for attaching sheet metal '
specialty items to duct, walls, floors and ceilings.
F. Items to be installed approximately as shown on drawings taking into '
account differences in mechanical equipment submitted and that shown
on contract documents. �
G. The fire and combination fire-smoke damper manufacturers' installation
details and instructions as tested and approved by U.L. MLJST be used
in lieu of installation details shown on the drawings where applicable. '
H. Provide factory identification labels at all concealed access doors �to
identify fire dampers and combination fire-smoke dampers. �
I. Each item to be installed not to interfere with other adjacent items and
be readily accessible for maintenance, repair and/or setting and
balancing. '
J. Refer to drawings for diffuser, sidewall registers, sizes and number of
airflow directions. '
END OF SECTION �
i
i
1
i
November 25, 1998 15910-8 9II088.00
i
'
� -
�
� i SECTION 15971
' ; CONTROLS - PNEUMATIC
' � 1. PART - 1 GENER.AL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' � A. Control Panels.
! � B. Smoke Detector Installation.
i '
C. Room Thermostats.
�, D. Valve Actuators.
, '' �
� E. Control Valves.
' F. All other relays, switches and interlocks required to accomplish
automatic control sequence indicated on the drawings.
�� 1.02 RELATED WORK '
� i
A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
' � � 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION '
� � A. Complete pneumatic-type control system including control valves,
� ' temperature control devices, actuators, etc.
� B. Include ALL electrical interlocks, relays, EP switches, PE switches, ON-
� �� OFF and HOA switches, panels, pilot lights, horns, alarms, LEDs and
' �
other devices as required to accomplish automatic control of the
' mechanical systems.
' ' C. Actuators and pneumatic interlocks to control all smoke and
�� combination fire/smoke dampers with their respective air handling unit
' zone.
� ' D. Refer to drawings for details.
' i �, 1.04 SUBMITTALS
I A. Submit roduct data for a roval in accordance with Section 01340
i P PP
� (01300). "
� , B. Complete shop drawings of entire control system.
� C. List of all control valves, Cv, pressure drops and spring-ranges.
' !
, D. Composite wiring diagrams indicating equipment interlocks.
,
November 25, 1998 15971-1 98088.00
'
'
E. Pneumatic control diagrams indicating panels, gauges, control �
components, spring ranges and set points.
F. Written sequence of operation for each control system. '
G. Equipment data sheets for all major control components including:
1. Control Valves. ,
2. Thermostats.
1.05 WARRANTY '
A. At completion of final test of installation and acceptance by Arch:itect,
provide any service incidental to proper performance of control s��stem ,
for a period of one year.
B. Control system to be free from defects in workmanship and matei•ial
under normal use and service for a period of one year. '
C. Guarantee period not to start until sequence of operation has been
satisfactorily demonstrated to Architect and Owner's representative. '
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Control system to be installed and checked out by factory-trained ,
technicians skilled in the setting and adjustment of temperature cc�ntrols
used in this project.
� B. Submit calculations with submittal showing air consumption '
requirements for each pneumatic control device, quantities and tor.al
consumption to substantiate selection of air compressors for 1/3 ran �
time.
C. All control system components shall be by the same manufacturei•.
D. Mechanics to be experienced in the type controls associated with this ,
system.
E. At final observation, control tradesman to demonstrate the entire '
sequence of operation for all systems to the Architect.
F. Architect to observe function of entire control system, observe �
temperature control operations, damper positions and other functions
necessary to assure that temperature control system is operating as
intended by mechanical design. �
G. Final acceptance of system shall not occur until sequence of operation
checkout has taken place and been certified by Architect. �
H. The control tradesman to return to job during the opposite season to
verify operation of control system.
'
'
November 25, 1998 15971-2 9E088.00
'
�
,
i '
' _ i 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
�'' ; 2.01 ACCEPTABLE CONTROL MANUFACTURERS
, ; A. Honeywell, Inc.
� B. Johnson Controls, Inc.
, I
C. Landis & Staefa.
' D. Trane Company.
' � ' 2.02 EQUIPMENT
�
i i A. Control Panels
' 1. Construct of unitized cabinets.
, 2. Minimum dimensions 24" wide x 30" high x 8" deep.
' 3. Furnished with hinged, locking door opening to the front.
4. Cabinets to be UL-50 listed for line voltage applications with
' ' electrical knockouts on all four sides.
�� 5. Multiple panels mounted side-by-side to be hinged to the left.
� '
� 6. Start-stop switches, hand-off-automatic switches, pilot lights,
pneumatic switches and temperature indicating devices specified
' to be panel-mounted shall be flush-mounted in panel door.
; 7. All other devices specified to be panel- mounted to be internally
� mounted within panel.
� 8. Panel locations to be accessible for operation and maintenance.
� ; 9. Local panels exposed to weather to be weatherproof construction.
, ! i 10. All devices specified to be mounted on temperature control panel
� and requiring electrical connections to be pre-wired to terminal
' � strip located inside panel.
, 11. Wiring within unitized cabinet panel to conform to National
i �� Electrical Code.
' ! I
B. Smoke Detectors
1. Install duct-mounted smoke detectors at locations indicated on
' I drawings.
�
� �I
I ; 2. Duct-mounted smoke detectors to be furnished by other trades
� ' ; for installation by Division 15.
, 3. Install detectors in the supply ducts to all fans above 2000 CFM
, ; � and at other locations shown on the drawings.
; 4. Install detectors in the return ducts of all fans above 15000 CFM
� and at other locations shown on the drawings.
,
�November 25, 1998 15971-3 98088.00
i '� �
� '
5. Locate sampling tubes a minimum of 6 duct widths downstream '
of any elbows or branch duct connections.
6. Verify location of sampling tubes satisfies smoke detector �
manufacturers minimum requirements for air velocity acrass
probe.
C. Room Thermostats ,
1. Two-pipe type with grad relay.
2. Top-of-line room thermostat with adjustable throttling range, i
adjustable set point, dials calibrated in degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Quiet operating with no objectional noises during normal �
thermostat operation.
4. Covers to be fully concealed locking type (Tc) or type with �
accessible, adjustable dial (T) and thermometer slot as indicated
, on drawings.
5. Adjustable thermostats shall not require the use of any tool to '
change the set point.
' 6. Color to be selected by Architect. �
7. Mount all thermostats 48" above finish floor.
, D. Valve Actuators '
1. Oil resistant, molded bellows operator.
2. Limit stops. �
3. Field-adjustable stroke setting.
4. Sized to close valve to normal position upon loss of air pr��ssure. �
E. Control Valves
1. Two-inch and smaller to be bronze body with screwed NPT end '
connections.
2. Two and one-half inch and larger to be high tensile iron b��dies ,
with flanged connections.
3. Provide three-way mixing valves with linear flow characteristics. '
4. The use of butterfly valves with linkages in place of three-way
mixing or diverting valves is NOT acceptable.
5. Valve pressure rating to be in accordance with piping and fitting �
specifications Section 15060.
' 6. Valve operators to be selected to close valves against pump '
shut-off head.
,
' November 25, 1998 15971-4 98088.00
'
� _
' ! i
i �
i
1 � 7. Provide globe type valves with stainless steel stem, removable
composition disc and self-adjusting spring loaded Teflon
, packing.
8 The use of ball valves is not acceptable unless specifically
indicated.
r9. Modulating water valves to have equal percentage characteristics
iand be sized for maximum of 3 psig water pressure drop.
1 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
� 3.01 INSTALLATION
! A. Components
' � i . .
� ! 1. Provide temperature controllers, motorized valves, relays, switch-
� � � es and related items, necessary to accomplish control sequence
� I
; , shown on drawings.
� - 2. Install all components except as noted to the contrary.
' �
� 3. Deliver automatic valves to job site to be installed by Division
'� 15.
' � ; 4. Prepare composite wiring diagram showing all interlock wiring
i associated with the following:
, ' , a. Starters.
�
' �� b. Control panel.
, ; c. Pneumatic controls.
' i 5. Coordinate interlock wiring shown on control drawings with
' '; � Division 16 trade.
� 6. Include ALL control wiring associated with the mechancial
� systems.
' �
B. Drawings and Layouts:
� �
1. Submit for approval complete shop drawings of entire control
' � � system before proceeding with installation.
' 2. Provide sequence of operation written so that building engineer
' � can read and under stand control scheme.
I � 3. Frame as-built drawings under Plexiglas and placed in each
� respective equipment room.
4. "n n-fadin " rint r cess c
i All prints to be of o g p p o su h as blueprint,
black line Diazo or xerography.
' i
' II �
I
�''November 25, 1998 15971-5 98088.00
' I
i
'
C. Electrical �
l. Electrical control components except those items requiring piping
or tubing connections to be furnished by Division 15 for '
installation by other trades.
2. Division 15 to designate mounting location to installing
tradesman. '
3. Division 16 shall wire and connect ALL controls operating at
50-volts or higher complete and in working order in accordance ,
with approved wiring diagrams.
4. Division 15 shall wire and connect ALL controls operating '
below 50-volts in accordance with approved wiring diagra.ins.
5. Include ALL control wiring associated with the mechancial
� system. �
D. Air Piping-Copper .
l. Compressed air piping to be hard-drawn copper tubing �rith '
' soldered or flared fittings, concealed wherever possible, �roperly
supported and installed in a neat and workmanlike mann�r.
2. ALL control air piping mains from the control air source IYIUST '
be hard-drawn copper tubing with soldered or flared fittings,
concealed wherever possible, properly supported and installed in '
a neat and workmanlike manner.
3. Bends in hard tubing to be made with bending tool. '
4. All copper tubing must be isolated from dissimilar metal hangers
and supports.
5. Do not support copper tubing from conduit, sprinkler piping or '
medical gas piping.
6. Install a new copper express control air main (80-100 psig) from ,
the central control air compressor(s) to the area of service.
Provide shutoff valve, pressure gage and pressure reducing �
station at the termination point to serve the new area with 20
psig control air.
7. Air lines adjacent to insulated ducts or casings to be properly '
supported on brackets to prevent burying of lines in insulation.
8. Air lines to be properly sized to prevent control lag. '
9. Drip legs and drains to be installed at necessary points to prevent
condensation pockets.
10. Entire system to be tested under 30 psi pressure for 24 hours. � '
Pressure drop to not exceed 10% over this period.
,
November 25, 1998 15971-6 98088.00
'
i i
' �� �
; I
, I
11 Air gauges to be installed in main and branch lines of all
i instruments not located in finished areas.
' � E. Air Piping-Flame Retardant Polyethylene Tubing
I l. Flame retardant polyethylene tubing equal to Plexco "Instube", .
' � may be used inside control panels.
� 2. Flame retardant polyethylene tubing equal to Plexco "Instube",
� may also be used for branch runouts to wall thermostats, sensors,
' ; I actuators, control valves and automatic dampers (except smoke
i dampers) provided the length does not exceed 8 feet.
� � 3. All polyethylene tubing to wall thermostats must be confined
' I
within the wall.
� 4. Flame retardant tubing, where its use is specifically permitted in
�I , i this specification, must be securely and regularly supported by
; hangers, duct supports, piping supports, beams, joists, etc. Do
' not support tubing from conduit, sprinkler piping or medical gas
piping.
� 5. Under no circumstances is polyethylene tubing to be routed
�I � ' through fire rated walls, partitions, floors or shafts. Provide
metal sleeves and firestop penetrations in accordance with
Section 07270 and the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory.
!, , 6. Under no circumstances is polyethylene tubing to be used for
: � control tubing to automatic smoke dampers ar combination
i , � fire/smoke dampers. Use continuous hard-drawn copper tubing
only.
� 7. Under no circumstances is polyethylene tubing to be used as a
' � � component part of any smoke evacuation or smoke control
; system.
' '
� I END OF SECTION
i I
' ; �
1 i �
' i
, i
� �
i
'
;November 25, 1998 15971-7 98088.00
� i
I
' �
' SECTION 15990
�
i
' � ' TESTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
I
� � 1. , PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' � i A. Review construction documents and make written recommendations to
! i mechanical contractor on placement of dampers and other devices to
' facilitate balancing of the system.
' B. Provide at least one job site visit during construction to observe sheet
� metal installation, identify possible duct restrictions and to verify
' �, � placement and access to air and water balancing devices. Furnish a
written report on observation visit and recommendations.
' C. Airside balancing of inechanical systems and equipment specified in this
division.
, D. Waterside balancing of inechanical systems and equipment specified in
, ' this division.
E. Testing of inechanical systems and equipment to demonstrate proper
' operation.
� F. All work specified in this section to comply with the provisions of
' Section 15010.
' G. Submit a final copy of the balancing report to the Florida Agency for
� Health Care Administration (AHCA).
' 1.02 RELATED WORK
� �
� A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
� B. Section 15035: Testing Mechanical Systems.
i � C. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods. '�
' ' D. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings. '
' ; E. Section 15890: Sheet Metal Ductwork - Low Pressure.
' � 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
i I
' � � A. Procure services of an independent balance and testing agency, which
specializes in balancing and adjusting of HVAC systems, to balance and
, adjust water distribution systems, air moving equipment and air
' ' '� distribution systems specified in this division.
� B. Review construction documents and make written recommendations to
, mechanical contractor on placement of dampers and other devices.
November 25, 1998 15990-1 98088.00
� �
'
C. Provide at least one job site visit during construction to observe sheet �
, metal installation, identify possible duct restrictions and to verify
placement and access to air and water balancing devices. Furnish a
written report on observation visit and recommendations. �
D. Work performed to be under direct supervision of qualified technitiian.
E. Accurately calibrate and maintain instruments in good working order �
during balancing and testing of systems.
1.04 SUBMITTALS ,
A. Submit written recommendations to Architect and Mechanical contractor
prior to start of construction on placement of dampers and other devices '
to facilitate balancing of the system.
B. Submit written report during construction on sheet metal installation,
identification of possible duct restrictions, placement of air and water '
balancing devices and access to these balancing devices.
C. Submit air balance and testing agency for approval in accordance with
� Section 01340 (01300) including qualifications and sample balancing 1
re ort forms.
P
2. PART - 2 PARTS (NOT APPLICABLE) �
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 BALANCING AGENCY ,
� . A. Certified member of Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or NEBB.
B. Submit 7 copies of proposed reporting format and submittal data prior �
to starting balancing and adjusting of HVAC systems.
C. Perform work, compile data and submit 3 copies of completed baiance ,
report for evaluation and approval upon completion.
D. Within 90 days after completion of work, Engineer may request a �
recheck or resetting of outlet, supply air fan or e�aust fan as listed in
report. Provide technicians to assist in making tests and adjustments
during this period of time. �
, 3.02 GENERAL TESTING
' A. The renovation and adjacent areas are served by air handling units �
AHU-1, AHU-2 and return fan RF-1.
i 1. In areas outside of the renovation, rebalance the air distribution
devices which are to remain to predemolition air quantities. �
� 2. Balance during construction and again when construction is ,
completed.
3. Provide a report to the architect after the predemolition testing.
'
November 25, 1998 15990-2 98088.00
, �
� ,
4. Provide a report to the architect after the construction phase
� � balancing.
, ' , 5. Provide a final report to the architect when the construction is
; completed.
� B. Test all systems and equipment installed under this division to
� �, demonstrate proper operation.
' C. Place HVAC systems and equipment into operation and continue
' ; � operation during each working day of balancing and adjusting.
� ( D. Terminal heating coils:
' 1. Set air handling unit discharge temperature for 53�F.
' 2. Set heating supply water temperature for 180�F.
' i 3. Verify airflow settings at fan coil units and reheat coils.
4. Measure discharge air temperature and leaving water tempera-
' � ture.
� I 5. Adjust leaving air temperature to scheduled setting at design
', i water temperature drop using the coil balancing valve.
� �
6. Place ALL (new and existing) reheat coils associated with each
�floor on call for full heating and adjust zone flow rates.
� ; '�, 3.03 AIRSIDE BALANCING PHASE
i i A. Adjust fan RPM to design requirements.
� , B. Record motor full load amperes.
� ' C. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and adjust fans to design
� i airflow rates.
, D. Record system operating static pressures, suction and discharge.
, E. Adjust system for design recirculated air CFM. ,
� �
' F. Adjust system for design CFM outside air.
� j G. Record entering and leaving air temperatures:
1. Dry-bulb cooling.
' ; �I 2. Wet-bulb cooling.
I � 3. Dry-bulb heating:
� ' I .
H. Adjust main and zone supply, return and exhaust air ducts to proper
design CFM.
' i I. Adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design airflow.
I J. Identify and record readings for each grille, diffuser and register
' including location and area served.
,November 25, 1998 15990-3 98088.00
' I
�
K. Identify and list tested equipment, size, type and manufacture of '
' diffusers, grilles and registers.
�
L. Use manufacturer s ratings on equipment to make required calculations. '
M. Include required FPM velocity and test resultant velocity, required CFM
and test resultant CFM after adjustments on readings and tests of diffus-
ers, grilles and registers. � ,
N. Set automatic dampers to operate as specified.
O. . Check controls for proper calibrations and sequencing. ,
P. Adjust diffusers, grilles and registers to minimize drafts.
Q. Check air velocity across each duct-mounted smoke detector. Verify that ,
the minimum velocity recommended by the smoke detector
manufacturer's installation instructions is present. If the required �
velocity is not present, contractor shall relocate to obtain necessar�r air
velocity.
R. Contractor to make changes in pulleys, belts and dampers or addi�tion of �
dampers required for correct balance as recommended by Air Balance
Agency. �
S. On existing air handlers, return fans and exhaust fans, contractor shall
make changes in pulleys and belts required for correct balance of
existing system. '
3.04 WATERSIDE BALANCING
A. Preparation: �
1. Open all system valves to full open position. �
2. Remove and clean strainers. �
3. Verify pump rotation.
4. Examine water system and determine if piping has been treated r
and cleaned as hereinbefore specified.
5. When system water has been flushed clean, charge expans- �
ion/compression tank. _
6. Set pressure reducing valves for correct system static pressures. �
7. Verify that relief valves are operating at conect pressure.
8. Verify no automatic air vents are connected to system. �
B. Set temperature controls at coils for full cooling.
C. Use same procedure for balancing hot water coils, set for full hea�ting. �
D. Check water temperatures at inlet side of cooling and heating coils.
Record rise or drop of temperature from source. '
November 25, 1998 15990-4 98U88.00
'
�
� I
i '
' � I
E. Proceed to balance each chilled water coil and hot water coil usin flow
, g
', � � measuring devices.
,
, � F. Plumbing:
� � I
I ' 1. Adjust hot water system for uniform circulation.
' � 2. Adjust flush valves and automatic control devices for proper and
i quiet operation.
� ' G. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustment at coils, mark settings
� and record data.
� 3.05 FINAL BALANCING PHASE
I�i ' : i A. After coil adjustments, recheck settings at pumps, chillers and boilers
� and readjust as required.
i
' ' �,. i B. Install pressure gauges at each coil or use flow measuring devices
,� provided and set to design flow rates.
' C. Set pressure drop across bypass valves to match coil full flow pressure
drop.
' D. Record system static pressure at each pressure reducing valve.
E. Record and check following items at each cooling and heating element:
1. Inlet and leaving water temperatures.
� ' , ! 2. Pressure drop of each coil.
� � F. List water metering device readings.
� �
3.06 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT
' A. Furnish a 3 copies of written general report on operational checkout,
including the following:
1. Temperature readings taken in each area controlled by a
,' ! thermostat.
i
� 2. Check final air velocity across each duct-mounted smoke
, ; detector. Verify that the minimum velocity recommended by the
� ' I moke detector manufacturer's insta 1 '
_ s 1 ation instructions is present.
� �' If detectors are equipped with a visual air flow wheel, verify that
' , wheel is operating properly.
3. Airside and waterside temperature readings across each coil.
� � '
, 4. Waterside entering and leaving pressures across each coil.
�
; 5. Airside entering and leaving pressures across air handling units
i ' i AHU-1 and AHU-2 including each filter, control damper, coil,
fan, diffuser and the total unit.
I
, i
� I
November 25, 1998 15990-5 98088.00
�
'
6. RPM, voltage, nameplate rated amps and actual amps on each ,
motor.
7. RPM, voltage, nameplate rated amps and actual amps, static �
pressure, CFM, FPM, on each fan.
8. Check systems for proper operation of equipment, controls,
interlocks and safeties on both heating and cooling cycles. t
9. Adjust spring isolators to achieve maximum isolating effciency.
10. Record sling psychometric readings of both dry and wet btilb �
temperatures for the following:
a. Outside air conditions. 1
b. Air handling unit air entering and discharge condbti��ns.
c. Room conditions and thermostat settings for each ,
location.
11. Operate systems for five days and instruct Owner's repres�nt- '
ative in operation of systems.
12. Furnish written report on checkout. �
13. Report on procedure followed in making operational checkout on �
air and water systems.
14. Statement signed by Owner stating operating instructions have �
been received.
3.07 ACCEPTANCE '
A. The following items are to be completed BE�ORE requesting a f nal
inspection. ,
1. All work required under this division of specifications except as
permitted by Engineer.
2. System balancing. �
3. Control system checkout. �
, 4. Furnish required operating instructions to owner.
5. Furnish wiring diagrams, pneumatic andlor electric control �
diagrams and mount one copy of each in the equipment rooms.
�
i
i
November 25, 1998 15990-6 98088.00
�
1 .
' ' B. Job will be accepted on basis of tests and inspections.
, C. After final test and balance report has been accepted, provide locations
' of all test ports in ducts to mechanical insulator. See Section 15250.
D. A representative of balancing agency is to be present to assist
; during final inspection.
' E. Furnish necessary mechanics to operate system, make any adjustments
and assist with final inspection.
�
END OF SECTION
'
�
� �
� I
�
'
�
'
'
�
'
i
1
i
November 25, 1998 15990-7 98088.00
i
�
�� -
� �
' ' I i
I
� CRITICAL SYSTEMS CHECKLIST
' ' The I ollowing checklist must be completed by the General Contractor and the appropriate
subcontactors and returned to the Engineer at least two days prior to the Final or phased final
on-si�te Observation visit. A final observation visit will not made until this systems checklist
, is totally complete. If listed systems are not complete during final or phased final observation
trip, contractor will be billed for field engineer's time and expenses for the trip.
I
, �
I
' MECHANICAL SYSTEMS TESTING
I
---------i------------------------- ----------------------------------- -- - -------
�'YSTEM TYPE REQUIRED TEST DESCRIPTION TESTING G.0 Sup
i
DATE APPROVAL
----------�---- ----------------------- ----------------------------- --—---—---------------------------
' ---
�r Handling UniLs
I
1. Automatic shutdown on general fire alarm
� � 2. Automatic shutdown from devices within
� ! F.A. zone. (i.e. pull stations, smoke deteccors,
j flow switch, etc)
I3. Automatic shutdown from device in adjacent
i , F.A. zone where crossovers occur. (i e pull
` I stations, smoke det, flow switches, etc )
� I
� �
��'ire & Fir�/Smoke Uampers
I
i 1. Verify sleeve clearances (1/8 per foot & max of 1 )
�i 2. Verify proper angle overlap (1" min on wall) .
' � I 3 Breakaway joints (NO screws) .
� � 9. Verify smoke damper operation on shutdown.
�ire Penetrations
� 1. Pipe sleeves firesafed or caulked.
2. Non-sleeved services: insulation stopped &
penetration sealed.
I
�r Balance (Complete balance or pressure relationships) :
i I
� I l. Complete air balance and report
2. Soiled areas under negative pressure.
3. Sensitive areas under positive pressure
�
' I
I
� � �
I I
i
� I
� ; I
i
/
'
-______-___________-_________________' _ - �
__ .__________________________ _ ___ ____ ____ ' ' ' '
a-'YSTEM TYPE REQUIREC :....' DESCRIPTION '.'��T,?�(; L L ,�'�F
7AT� APPROVAL ,
MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS '
I�dical Gas Systems
1 Test each 1ir�e pressure alarm. '
2 Close valves and bleed off device
(note pressure drop on gage)
3. Check med gas manifold if applicable. '
9 Med Gas Certification.
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
Sprinklers �
1 Flow test from inspectors test station.
2 Zone Fire alarm activation. �
Standpipes
1 Roof manifold test
2 Verify min flow and residual pressure. �
3. Zone fire alarm activation
Fire Pump
' 1. Pressure/Flow test. �
2 Verify Emergency power supply.
General ,
1 Sprinkler System Certification letter
from contractor/installer.
2. Check tamper switch operation-alarm '
� at annunciator panel.
�
�
� I�I
i
ll
1
1
�
'
, �
; SECTION ]6010
' ' �
� ; ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
�
i I
' I i
' 1. , PART - 1 GENERAL
' �
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
; � A. Materials, labor and equipment required to furnish and install a
' ! complete electrical system as indicated on Drawings and specified
� ; herein.
B. Complete electrical distribution system and materials including:
j � 1. Transient voltage surge protectors
' I
, 2. Lighting
, 3. Power
� 4. Control Switches
' i
' S. Receptacles
6. Feeders
' 7. Panelboards
i I 8. Automatic transfer switch
' I ' 9. Branch circuits
10. Lighting fixtures
' I C. Grounding.
I D. Fire alarm and detection system modifications.
' � E. Master clock system modifications.
� �! F. Division 16 trade shall coordinate with General Contractor such that
' ' � verification takes place that all required connections of Division 15
equipment have been provided for prior to bid. Excluded items shall be
' documented and documentation forwarded to Architect prior to bid.
` ' � G. Power wiring for equipment furnished under Division 15 including
i � installing and connecting starters, furnished under Division 16 at
� 1 location designated by Division 15 trade. Division 16 to coordinate ,
' with Division 15 tradesman for proper sizing of circuit breakers, fuses, I
; overloads, safety switches, conduit, and wiring on all equipment actually '�
' �, �' being furnished under Division 15 prior to rough-in or bid. Division 16 �
� will provide necessary sizes as required at no additional cost to the ,
, Owner. Division 16 trade will coordinate with final Division 15 ,
,
�November 25, 1998 16010-1 98088.00
' �
1
,
equipment and include all necessary power connections recommended �
by Division 15 equipment manufacturers in the Division 16 contract.
H. All 120-volt control and interlock wiring and associated conduit for �
Division 15 equipment shall be provided under Division 16 as defined
in the Division 1 S specifications and drawings. Install control
components furnished under other divisions including but not limited to '
controllers, relays, thermostats, etc. necessary for a completely
operational system under Division 16 contract. Division 16 shall
coordinate quantity and location of duct-mounted smoke detectors with '
Division 15 documents (specifications, duct risers, control schema�tics,
etc.) and include in base bid.
I. Where substitutions are made by Division 15 trade, the cost for any �
Division 16 rough-in relative to the substitution will be the
responsibility of the Division 15 trade unless written documentati��n is ,
provided five days prior to bid which notifies the Division 16 trade of
such substitutions. Division 16 trade shall notify the Division 15 trade
of this requirement ten days prior to bid in writing. ,
J. Exact locations of outlets for owner-furnished equipment or equip:ment
furnished under other Divisions must conform with manufacturer's '
rough-in drawings.
K. Demolition to conform with demolition notes on drawings.
L. Communications to conform with respective sections of these ,
specifications and communications vendor drawings.
1.02 RELATED WORK '
A. Furnish the following work as specified under other Divisions of these
Specifications, but coordinate with other trades prior to bid. '
1. Section 09900: Painting.
2. Section 01045: Cutting and patching. �
3. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data.
4. Section 01620: Storage and Protection. '
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Wiring: Wire and cable, installed in raceway with all required boxes, ,
fittings, connectors, etc. completely installed.
B. Provide: Furnish, install and connect, and put in good working order. �
C. Engineer: Engineer of record whose sea] is affixed to the contract
specifications and/or drawings of Division 16. '
.
�
November 25, 1998 16010-2 98c)88.00
. ,
i
� �
� i
� i 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES •
� ' A. In general all equipment shall be furnished with U.L. label where such
1 , label is available. Where equipment cannot be furnished with U.L.
� label, specific mention shall be made in the submittal for that particular
item of equipment indicating that it is not U.L. labeled. Install U.L.
; � labeled equipment in conformance with applicable U.L. Standards.
� , �
' B. Install electrical work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications,
' � edition of NEC in effect at project location, recommendations of NFPA,
� state and local electrical and building codes and special codes having
I I jurisdiction over specific portions of work. This includes, but is not
' ' limited to the following:
1. Agency for Health Care Administration (AHCA) Chapter 59A-3,
' Hospital Licensure (Revised 1997).
' I
2. Chapter 4A-3, F.A.C., State of Florida Fire Prevention Code
� (1990).
' 3. 1993 National Electrical Code with applicable local amendments.
� ; 4. 1994 Life Safety Code, NFPA 101.
' , 5. 1997 Standard Building Code with applicable local amendments.
6. 1996-1997 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
' ; Guidelines for Construction and Equipment of Hospital and
! I Medical Facilities.
I ;
, , ' 7. All currently adopted 1994 National Fire Code Standards
including but not limited to:
j NFPA-13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
� ; � (1994).
NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code (1993).
' NFPA-90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
I i Ventilation Systems (1993).
' ; � NFPA-90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating
� and Air Conditioning (1993).
� NFPA-91, Standard for the Installatiori of Blower and Exhaust
� i; Systems (1992).
� � NFPA-99, Standard for Health Care Facilities (1993).
' NFPA-110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
', ; (1993).
' !
i �
'
;November 25, 1998 16010-3 98088.00
� ,
�
�' �
C. In event of conflict between national, state, and/or local codes, the more �
stringent of the code requirements shall be followed. ,
D. In event of conflict between Drawings, Specifications and such cc�de�s, '
notify Architect in writing prior to bid. A ruling will then be made;by
Architect in writing.
E. Obtain permits and certificates of approval from all authorities having �
jurisdiction over the installation and pay all fees required for scope of
work being done.
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS I
(No products specified under this Section) ,
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION ,
3.01 SUBMITTALS �
A. Submit list of materials and equipment prior to manufacturer, order or
installation and within 20 days after awazd of contract for approval. � In-
clude each item of material and equipment whether or not shop � ,
drawings are also required. Include in list manufacturer's name, catalog
number and other complete identification, as well as dimensions and� �
detailed data. ' '
B. Submit seven sets of specification sheets, blue line prints or data sheets I
for the following items, bound and identified according to Drawi�gs and �
Specifications. Mark reproducibles and return for proper distribution.
• Include a separate submittal section or brochure for each product listed
below with all sections or brochures submitted at the same time in one '
package. The first sheet in each product section or brochure to '
summarize and list all components, manufacturer's name and catalog
number. �
Submittals to include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors '
2. Lighting Fixtures including ballasts and lamps
3. Wiring devices and plates '
4. Safety Switches and individually mounted Circuit Breaker�
5. Fuses ,
6. Panelboards
7. Transfer switch ' '
8. Fire Alarm and Detection system
9. Clocks � '
�
November 25, 1998 16010-4 98088.00
, '
� ,, _,
� � , C. In addition to the above submittals, prior to rough-in submit 1/4" scale
� i plans of all electrical rooms, generator rooms and rooms which contain
' , electrical equipment (i.e. starters, motor control centers, panelboards,
� � etc.) with all existing equipment and the equipment of the proposed
j j manufacturer drawn to scale and in compliance with the requirements of
i I NEC 110-16, 384-4, and 450-11 for working clearances. (Note: layouts
� ; on drawings are based on Square 'D' switchgear and Zenith transfer
; switches. In the event that the Contractor elects to substitute a
� � i manufacturer other than Square 'D'/Zenith, it becomes the Contractor's
responsibility to verify prior to bid that there is adequate space for the
substitute manufacturer's equipment. If a manufacturer's equipment
, � ' does not fit in the given space allocation with all NEC working
clearance requirements being met, then that substitute manufacturer is
; disapproved.)
! � I D. Affix stamp of approval on certified shop drawings and submittals as
' evidence that Drawings have been checked. Drawings submitted
' without this stamp of approval will not be considered and will be
returned for proper resubmission.
i
� i E. If submittals show variances from requirements of Contract, make
' i � specific mention of such variation in letter of transmittal in order that, if
acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment.
, ; F. Contractor is not relieved of responsibility for executing work in
� accordance with Contract even though such submittals have been
j j approved.
' G. If shop drawings/submittals are returned and stamped "Rejected, Revise
and Resubmit, resubmit with appropriate corrections made to the shop
j drawings/submittals.
� I, �
� H. If the shop drawings or submittals must be resubmitted a second time,
; the cost of the Architect's time to review the second resubmittal is paid
' by the Contractor based on the Architect's published hourly rates.
' 3.02 SITE VISIT
� �
� ,
� I I
� A. Visit job site prior to bid date to determine actual conditions under
; which work shall be done, to familiarize oneself with project and to
verify total scope of work required.
, � B. Failure to do so does not constitute a reason for an extra charge.
�i
� 3.03 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS SHUTDOWN: Contractor shall notify the local Fire
' Department and Hospital Staff prior to any shutdown o�Hospital Life Safety
Systems such as Fire Alarm System, Emergency Power Generation System, or
�' I Medical Gas Alarm System.
' '
i �
' �
; November 25, 1998 16010-5 98088.00
' ' '
_ _ I
r
3.04 JOB OBSERVATIONS AND REPORTS: Contractor shall provide written �
response to each comment on job observation reports prior to the scheduling of
the next job observation.
3.05 FINAL OBSERVATION: Contractor shall verify Life Safety related systems '
are ready for final testing one week prior to scheduled visit by
Architectural/Engineering construction observation team and confirm in writing. � '
Written certification must be provided by the fire alarm system manufacturer
and the emergency generator manufacturer that their systems have been
completely checked and tested and that they meet all code requirements as well �
as the requirements of the plans and specifications. Should the Contractor fail
to send written confirmation and the manufacturers' certifications, the te�un
shall not be sent. Should the Contractor send the confirmation, and upon '
arriving at the jobsite, the team finds the job is not ready, the team shal� leave
the job and the Contractor shall be required to pay all costs to owner f�r delays
in occupancy of facility and all costs to A/E team including expenses and time ,
which shall be billed hourly including travel time. Refer to the general
electrical notes on contract documents for what is required for Life Safety Final
Observation. ,
END OF SECTION '
'
'
�
,
�
�
,
'
�
November 25, 1998 16010-6 98D88.00
,
' • � '
' SECTION 16050
, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
' ; 1. PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' � A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Use products for work in this Section
produced only by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of
' similar items and with history of successful production acceptable to
Architect.
B; Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen
' who are thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who
are completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed
' for proper performance of work of this Section. ,
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
' 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Section 01600 for requirements.
' B. Where specifications list one or more manufacturers and do not include
"or equivalent", furnish materials made by one of manufacturers listed '
(no substitutions will be permitted). Where "or equivalent" is included,
' the Contractor's bid shall be based on the specified manufacturer(s), but
the Contractor may submit after the bid date equivalent products by
another manufacturer subject to approval by the Engineer. If the
' Contractor bases his bid on a manufacturer other than the specified
manufacturer(s), he does so at his own risk, since the unspecified
manufacturer may not be approved.
' C. Architect must approve substitution before purchase, fabrication, and/or
installation. Extensions of the contract time will not be allowed due to
' delays caused by rejection(s) of proposed substitution.
D. If unapproved materials are installed, work required to remove and
replace unapproved items will be done at Contractor's expense.
, ' E. Include any and all additions or deductions needed in Division 16
' contract for all changes to project required by substitutions under other ��,
' � � trades. Include changes to work furnished under other Divisions with
' proposal to make said substitutions as an add to the Division 16
contract. Where related cost is not included in approved substitute
� proposal, the substituting trade will assume all such expense which will
not be considered an extra charge to the owner.
' F. Owner reserves right to reject substitutions proposed.
November 25, 1998 16050-1 98088.00
'
�
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION '
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Do not scale for exact sizes or '
locations. Drawings are not intended to disclose absolute or
unconditional knowledge of actual field conditions. �
B. Be prepared to relocate any outlet or device 6 feet �n any direction
without additional charge to the Owner prior to wall, ceiling, or floor
finish materials being installed or after they have been installed, if �
Architect's approval has not been obtained.
C. Install equipment according to manufacturer's recommendations ar�d in ,
accordance with the working clearance requirements of NEC 110, 384,
and 450. See Section 16010 for submittal requirements for equiprnent
rooms. Conduit rough-in to panelboards and other equipment shall not �
commence until approval of equipment room shop drawings has bzen
obtained.
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING ,
A. Refer to Section 01045 for general requirements of cutting and patching.
B. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace damaged work with n���+ ,
materials.
3.03 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS �
A. Refer to Section 01620 for general storage and protection requirements.
B. Deliver equipment and materials to job site in original, unopened, �
labeled containers. "
C. Store ferrous materials to prevent rusting. Store finished materials and �
equipment to prevent staining and discoloring.
D. Protect work and materials from damage by weather, entrance of rvater '
and dirt.
E. Cap conduit during installation.
F. Avoid damage to materials and equipment in place. i
3.04 COORDINATION
A. Failure to route conduit, etc. through building without interfering �:vith '
other equipment and construction does not constitute a reason for an
extra charge. ,
B. Locate equipment, conduit and fixtures as required to fit into available
spaces in building. �
C. Do not introduce electrical work into building at such times and manner
as to cause damage to structure.
�
November 25, 1998 16050-2 98C►88.00
_ �
� i . ' ` .
t , D. Make equipment requiring service readily accessible.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING AND SEALING
� I
A. Seal around conduits or other wiring materials also passing through
partitions which extend to the underside of the slab above, and those
, passing through rated walls in accordance with Architectural details
and/or specifications.
B. Use material approved for use by local authorities to prevent passage of
' smoke or fire and in accordance with architectural specifications.
� 3.06 TESTING AND EQUIPMENT SERVICING
' I
I A. Install complete electrical system entirely free from improper grounds
and short and open circuits. Make all required tests on conductors
' before energizing circuit and document in accordance with NFPA-70
and NFPA-99 requirements.
i
� B. Perform patient bed vicinity grounding systems voltage and impedance
' � tests as per NFPA-99.
; � C. Make test to insure that entire system is in proper operating condition,
' '; , and that adjustments and setting of apparatus (circuit breakers, fuses,
i control equipment, etc.) have been made. Correct any defects
!
i discovered in system during tests as required to meet with Architect's
' ; � approval.
�
�� j D. Turn equipment over to Owner in lubricated condition with instruction
I � on further lubrication included in operating instructions.
� i I E. Also instruct Owner on proper usage, care and maintenance of entire
� electrical system including all special systems or apparatus.
' ; F. At termination of work under this Division, furnish Owner six complete
I bound sets of equipment catalog sheets, manufacturer's specifications
, I and service and operating instructions on equipment furnished under this
j Division.
�
� 3.07 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
' ; A. Remove surplus materials and debris caused by, or incidental to,
electrical work.
, B. Remove such debris at frequent intervals (minimum of one clean-up day
per week). Keep job clean during construction.
' 3.08 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Identify the following electrical equipment with laminated plastic
� i nameplates, engraved with '/4" high letters:
� 1. Safety switches and disconnects
�
' �, 2. Communications cabinets
i
;
November 25, 1998 16050-3 98088.00
' �
, '
3. Individually mounted circuit breakers '
4. Panelboards '
5. Transfer switch � '
B. Provide black nameplates with white letters except nameplates for
essential electrical system panelboards, transfer switches, etc. to be red �
with white letters.
C. Attach all nameplates to metal enclosure and coverplates (wher.e '
applicable) using two screws or pop rivets. Nameplates attached with '
adhesive or Dymo (tape-on) labels are not acceptable. �
3.09 RECORD DRAWINGS: Maintain one set of blue line electrical prints o� site, '
marked to show as-built conditions and installations. All information recorded
on record prints shall be transfened by Division 16 Trade to a mylar
reproducible following completion of construction. As-built mylars to be '
turned over to Owner within four weeks of date job is complete and fina]
approval is obtained. '
3.10 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER I
A. Provide, maintain and remove after construction is completed, temporary �
lighting adequate for workman safety and temporary power for ali
trades. �
B. Provide, all necessary components for a complete temporary electrical '
system in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 305 and OSHA standard
requirements including but not limited to the following:
1. Services !
2. Feeders �
3. Branch circuits �� ,
4. Receptacles - minimum of one 20amp, 120V duplex type device
for each 1000 ftz of renovated or new space. ,
S. Lamps with protective wireguards - mirumum of one 150 watt
pigtail for each 500 square feet of new or renovated space. ,
6. Grounding ,
7. Ground fault protection (all 120V. receptacles used by , ' 'I
construction crews shall be ground fault protected). I
8. Provide documented assured equipment grounding conductor � ,
program in accordance with NEC 305-6(b). ,
9. Guarding of high voltage equipment to be maintained in �
accordance with NEC 305 requirements. i
C. Owner to pay utility cost.
,
November 25, 1998 16050-4 98088.00
' '
� ' � , � „ _.
, 3.11 POWER OUTAGES
i A. Coordinate all power outages with Owner and submit for approval
' ' ; proposed schedule of work indicating extent, number and length of
outages required to perform work.
, B. Include in bid cost of overtime labor required for power outage to occur
after Owner's normal hours of operation.
3.12 OTHER MATERIALS
' A. Work of this Division also includes those items not specifically
imentioned or described, but which are obviously necessary to conform
' � to the design intent, applicable codes and to produce a complete
! j electrical system that functions properly.
I i
i B. Materials as selected by Contractor are subject to approval of Architect.
I � 3.13 GUARANTEE-WARRANTY
�
I ;
� I , A. Guarantee work to be free from defects of materials and workmanship
I, ' � for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of building by
; authorities having jurisdiction, Architect, and Owner.
' ', � B. Repair and replace defective work and other work damaged thereby
i which becomes defective during term of Guarantee-WarranTy.
; i C. Furnish Owner with three written copies of Guarantee-Warranty.
' i
�
� I
i ; END OF SECTION
' i i
I
' � I
�
' i
i �
i
1 �
I �
, i �
' ,
� �
�
,
� i
INove',mber 25, 1998 16050-5 98088.00
� '
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
,
� I
i
�
�
�
,
�� �
' i �
, SECTION 16111
�
;
, CONDUIT
, 1. PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' A. Conduit
, !
� B. Conduit Fittings
� i
' j 1.02 RELATED WORK
I I
' , A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
� I B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
j i 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' 01340.
� 2. I PART - 2 PRODUCTS
I
' ! � 2.01 CONDUIT
�
� A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Allied, Triangle, Wheatland or
' I ;
; equivalent.
B. Flexible Steel Conduit (Greenfield): Electriflex, Alflex, International
' Metal Hose, or equivalent.
j 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS
' A. Couplings and Connectors: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Thomas &
Betts(Steel City), Raco, or equivalent.
' I B. Bushings: Appleton, Crouse Hinds, Raco, Thomas & Betts, or
I equivalent.
I C. Straps and Hangers: B-Line, Caddy, Minerallac,"Raco Thomas & Betts,
' ' or equivalent.
I I
D. Group Pipe supports: B-line, Thomas & Betts, Unistrut, or equivalent.
�
' E. Expansion Fittings: O.Z. Gedney Type AX or equivalent by Appleton, �
or equivalent.
' I F. Exposed Conduit Fittings: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, O.Z. Gedney,
I Thomas & Betts or equivalent.
I 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
' ' 3.01 CONDUIT USAGE ,
� � ! A. Interior conduit exposed: use only EMT.
November 25, 1998 16111-1 98088.00
' �
� �
' li
B. Conduit concealed in walls or above ceilin s: use onl EMT.
g Y 1
C. Use short pieces, approximately 2 feet of flexible conduit to conne;ct
motors and other devices subject to motion and vibration. Plastic '
flexible conduit materials are not acceptable in any applications.
D. Use of type "MC", "NM", "AC", etc. prefabricated cable is not
acceptable unless specifically referenced in these specifications or on the '
drawings.
E. Minimum conduit size '/z" unless otherwise required by system. '
3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. In general, conduit installation to follow layout shown on drawings. '
However, this layout is diagraiTunatic only and where changes are
necessary due to structural conditions, other apparatus or other catises,
such changes will be made without cost to Owner. Offsets in conduits '
. are not indicated and must be furnished as required.
B. Route exposed conduit and conduits installed above removable lay-in '
ceilings at right angles or parallel to walls of building, not "as the crow
flies". Neatly rack parallel conduits together and make bends unif'orm
to one another. Where installation is made inferior utilizing poor '
practice contrary to these methods, said installation will be removed and
reinstalled at Contractor's expense.
C. Use proper sized tools for bending. Do not heat conduit. Dents and '
flat spots will be rejected. Cut and thread conduit so ends will butt in
couplings. Make threads no longer than necessary and ream pipe free of '
burrs.
D. Color-code essential electrical system conduits by painting each cc�upling
in accordance with NEC and General Electrical Notes on drawings. �
E. Leave one #10 or equivalent nylon pull wire in empty conduits.
3.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS ,
A. When installed concealed in walls or above ceilings, for sizes 1" and
smaller, use steel single set screw connectors and steel couplings tivith �
two set screws. For sizes larger than 1", use steel double set scre�v
connectors and steel couplings with four set screws.
B. Use throated insulating bushing on all connectors. '
C. Diecast connectors and couplings are not acceptable.
D. Provide plastic bushings for all feeder and branch conduit applicat:ions. ,
3.04 CONDUIT SUPPORT AND INSTALLATION
A. Support conduit vertically and horizontally by straps or hangers. Do not '
exceed the intervals as described in NEC Section 348-12 for EMT.
�
November 25, 1998 16111-2 98088.00
i
i
, � , .
i
' ( B. Use expansion fittings, properly bonded to assure ground continuity,
� �, across expansion joints in floors and ceilings.
' C. When connections are made to motors or other equipment, not near
' � ' walls or columns, provide a vertical conduit, minimum '/4", attached to
� floor with a floor flange, bring wiring out of this conduit by means of a
' I condulet and flexible conduit extending to equipment junction box.
D. Conduit shall be supported independently and not be supported from
' ductwork, ductwork flanges, piping, other conduits or raceways, or
, ; cables.
' 1 END OF SECTION
' ' i
'
�
1 � �i
, ;
; ,
'
, � -
� i
I �
'
�
� ,
I �
� , � '
�
,
I
i �
� �
�
i
i � '
�
i
1 I
November 25, 1998 16111-3 98088.00
� ' '
I
� _ :
�
' I
i
I
' , SECTION 16113
' WALL AND CEILING RACEWAY SYSTEMS
' 1. PART - 1 GENERAL I
I 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Wall and ceiling duct in locations where required by
' drawings.
� , 1.02 RELATED WORK
I A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
' i
� B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
i
' I 1.03 SUBMITTALS
�,
� � A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340.
' ' ; � B. Submit dimensioned shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication.
! 2. ; PART - 2 PRODUCTS
,i 1 ; �
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Provide duct as manufactured by Square
i i "D", Walker, or equivalent in lengths and sizes set forth on the electrical
' � drawings, and/or imaging equipment vendor drawings.
I ' I
; 2.02 WALL AND CEILING DUCT
I
i A. Use flush-mounted trim for wall applications and provide lay-in surface
' � I wireway with removable covers for above ceiling applications and
i ; surface wall applications.
1 ' I
� �, B. Provide compartment divider of 14-gauge steel, fully adjustable to
� underside of cover with minimum 1/2-inch wide shelf at top with
I
� � corkene gasket for longitudinal bearing of cover.
' � ,
� ' C. Provide finish of UL approved corrosion-resistant coating.
; I
� D. Use UL listed universal hangers for mounting of above ceiling lay-in
, I
j wireways.
� ,
� 3• I PART - 3 EXECUTION
� 3.01 INSTALLATION
' A. Refer to electrical drawings for dimensions and system configuration.
Furnish duct in lengths adaptable to installations shown on drawings.
B. Provide duct systems and all applicable mounting hardware in
' i accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I
, � i END OF SECTION
�
November 25, 1998 16113-1 98088.00
' j
� �
�
i
' ' SECTION 16120
I
tWIRE AND CABLE
' 1. PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Wire and Cable
, 1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
' B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
� 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' � 01340.
i 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
' � 2.01 MATERIALS
�
A. All wire and cable shall be manufactured within the United States of
� i ( America.
! i B. Use stranded copper, Type THWN for feeder and power circuits #8 and
ilarger only. Type "NM", "MC", "SE", "AC", etc. prefabricated cables
! are not acceptable.
� �
i � C. Use 600-volt wire and cable by Cablec, General Cable, Okonite, Rome,
' I Triangle or Southwire unless otherwise noted on drawings.
�
' .
�
! D. For line voltage control wiring, use #14 type THHN/THWN copper by
' ' one of the manufacturers listed above. For low voltage control wiring
use type wiring recommended by equipment manufacturer and as
j required by applicable section of NFPA 70.
� � E. Use solid copper type THHN/THWN for branch circuit wiring #10 and
I smaller only. Type "NM", "MC", "SE", "AC", etc., prefabricated cable
or stranded conductors are not acceptable.
� F. Conductors for branch circuit wiring smaller than #12 are not
� acceptable.
� G. Provide fixture wire in accordance with Article 402 of the National
Electrical Code.
� H. Provide color-coded wire with a different color for each phase and
neutral and ground as follows:
, � 1. 120/208-volts circuits
a. phases A, B, and C: black, red and blue respectively
' ', , b. neutral: white
I
November 25, 1998 16120-1 98088.00
' ; �
I
,
c. ground: green. '
2. 277/480-volt circuits
a. phases A, B, and C: brown, orange, yellow respectively �
b. neutral gray
c. ground: green. '
I. Approved color tape is acceptable for feeders only. Branch circuit
conductors shall have color-coded insulation. Also provide color-coded '
wire for control circuits.
J. Use Scotchlok or ldeal wire connectors for #14 through #8 condu��tors. '
Use Burndy or equivalent by T & B, compression connectors with
crimpit cover, type CC, for #6-600 MCM conductors.
K. Where branch circuit homeruns exceed 70 feet in length for 120-ti�olt ,
and 150 feet in length for 208-volt or 277-volt, use No. 10 wire, or as
otherwise required to prevent voltage drop in excess of 3% as allowed �
by N.E.C., to first outlet.
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION '
A. Complete conduit system before pulling any wire or cable. Use only
. approved cable lubricants (such as soapstone) as necessary. �
B. Install conductors continuously from outlet to outlet or to branch ��ircuit
overcurrent devices. �
C. Make splices only in junction boxes. Splices made in panelboards are
not acceptable. No more than a single conductor shall be terminated at
each circuit breaker screw, this shall also be considered a splice. '
D. Leave sufficient slack at terminations to make proper connections.
E. Connect No. 10 wire and smaller with Type I�, 3M Scotchlock tapeless '
connectors or equivalent.
F. Connect No. 8 wire and larger with Lock-Tite type silicon bronze type �
connectors, T & B Series 35000 or 54000, or equivalent. Insulate
connections of No. 8 wire and larger with 3M #33 tape.
�
� �
i '�
1
November 25, 1998 16120-2 98d)88.00
'
,
1 �
I �
I
' � G. All single and multi-conductor cables being run exposed (not in conduit)
i shall, as a minimum standard, be listed and appropriately labeled as
� being resistant to the spread of fire in accordance with applicable article
� of NFPA-70 (NEC). This requirement shall apply to all low-voltage,
i communications, alarm, etc. cable being installed. The listing of various
� i systems cable installed by the Contractor shall be verified prior to
installation by Division 16 whether or not it is being furnished by him.
� Listin s shall include the followin :
' i g g
i1. NEC Article 725 for Class 2 and Class 3 remote control,
; i signalling, and power limited circuits (listed as Types "CL2,
' , CL3, PLTC, CL2R, CL3R, CL2P and CL3P).
, 2. NEC Article 770 for optical fiber cables (listed as Types "OFC",
"OFN", "OFCR", "OFNR", "OFCP", and "OFNP").
1 I
' I 3. NEC Article 800 for communication circuits (listed as Types
�
� "CM", "CMR", and "CMP").
' � H. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrates a smoke
� or fire rated wall, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve extended 1 foot
,� on both sides of wall with nylon insulated bushing on both ends. Seal
, ' � ' conduit inside and outside with fire-resistant sealant approved by local
authorities.
� ; � I. All fire protective signalling systems wiring shall be run in EMT
� conduit and shall be listed per NEC, Article 760 (listing types "FPL",
� � "FPLR", and "FPLP" and Table 760-51). All conductors shall be rated
'' ' for minimum of 300 volts with minimum size of#22(cu) solid
conductors or bunch-tinned (bonded) stranded copper including coaxial
; cables where used.
' � �� J. Any non-power limited fire protective signalling systems wiring shall be
� run separately from any power limited circuits and any other building
� ; wiring in separate EMT conduits and boxes.
� �( K. Where communications systems cables are run exposed above dropped
i I ceilings, cables shall be run at right angles or parallel to the building
� � lines and not "as the crow flies". Bundle cable together using nylon
straps and per NEC 300-11 (b). Support cable independent of other
' � conduit, ductwork, ductwork flanges and piping. Within each smoke
,� compartment, various systems shall be tagged and identified on 20 foot
I centers using nylon marker ties (Panduit STA-STRAP SSM series or
� � ; equivalent). This includes cables for the following:
, 1. Telephone system
� ' 2. Dictation system
� �i 3. Intercom system
1 ,
;November 25, 1998 16120-3 98088.00
'
1 ��
4. Music/paging system ' '
5. Data processing system
�
END OF SECTION '
�
'
'
�
_ 1
1
. �
'
'
�
'
�
�
�
'
November 25, 1998 16120-4 S8a)88.00
�
I
1 �
i
' ; SECTION 16130
� '�
�
�li ' ; ; OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
�
i 1. j PART - 1 GENERAL
' �
; 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' I
i � � A. Outlet Boxes
' � B. Junction Boxes
�
''� ' ' 1.02 RELATED WORK
� � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
I , � i B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
� C. Section 16140: Wiring Devices and Plates
� i 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
�, i 01340.
' , 2. �� PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
� � A. Outlet and junction boxes constructed of galvanized steel by Appleton,
� Raco, or Steel City, 1'/2" deep minimum.
� � � B. Provide boxes for lighting fixtures with fixture studs in center.
� � C. Provide outlet boxes for lighting, switches and receptacles in interior
�' ; j areas with exposed conduit manufactured of pressed steel and in exterior
I ,� areas with exposed conduit use cast.metal with threaded hubs, "FS"
� type. Use galvanized steel for concealed boxes. Provide receptacle
' boxes with green (CU) grounding screw in accordance with detail in
! NFPA-99. Provide separate boxes where normal and emergency devices
; i (including switches) are mounted adjacent to each other (i.e. multi-gang
' i �, box with metal divider is not acceptable).
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
� ; � 3.01 OUTLET BOXES INSTALLATION
� A. Securely anchor outlet boxes, set true and plumb and no part of box or
' � ; cover to extend beyond finished wall or ceiling.
B. Set flush-mounted boxes to within '/s" of finished wall and use a plaster
; ' ring to make cover flush with wall.
' � I C. Select boxes according to intended use and type of outlet. Provide
� ' ceiling outlet boxes 4" octagon in size and 1'/z" deep.
'
November 25, 1998 16130-1 98088.00
1
'
D. Use 2'/s" deep octagon boxes or 4" square boxes where required. '
E. A fixture stud of no bolt, self-locking type is required at all ceilir.�g
outlet boxes if needed to hang the fixture specified at the outlet. ,
F. For receptacle and switch boxes installed in concrete block walls not
plastered, provide with Steel City, Appleton, Raco Series No. 690
through No. 699, or equivalent masonry boxes of proper depth and gang , I
required and specifically designed for this purpose.
G. If more than two conduits enter box from one direction, use 4" sauare '
boxes with square-cut device covers not less than 1" deep specifically
designed for this purpose.
H. Round edge plaster rings are not acceptable for block walls but are �
acceptable if wall is plastered. Sectional or gangable type outlet boxes
are not acceptable in any case, except drywall construction. �
I. Mount outlet boxes worked to nearest block course.
J. Coordinate location of device backboxes to prevent back-to-bacic �
mounting on any rated partition. Provide minimum of 24" spacing
between boxes on opposite sides of same wall within a common stud
compartment or as otherwise required to maintain partition rating to ,
satisfaction of local authorities. Openings for outlet boxes shall not
exceed a total of 100 in2 for each 100 ftz of wall area.
K. Where conduit is run overhead (either above dropped ceiling or i
exposed), outlet boxes shall be supported independently (i.e. by an all-
thread rod) and not by the conduit system.
L. Color code essential electrical system boxes in accordance with NEC �
and General Electrical Notes on drawings.
M. Provide circuit numbers using black permanent marker on covers of '
outlet boxes located above ceilings (or where exposed in areas without
ceilings) indicating all circuits being routed within said boxes. 1
3.02 JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A. Size junction boxes according to number of conductors in box or type '
of service to be provided. Minimum junction box size is 4-11/16"
square and 21/s" deep. Provide screw covers for junction boxes.
B. Use code gauge steel with screw covers for pull boxes, paint with prime �
coat and provide with screw cover. Size pull boxes according to ��vEC.
C. Provide pull box every 100 feet of conduit run or where excessive �
number of bends necessitates a box for ease of wire installation.
,
,
November 25, 1998 16130-2 98�88.00
'
� I
'
' � � D. Color-code essential electrical system boxes in accordance with NEC
! , and General Electrical Notes on drawings.
' , E. Provide circuit numbers using black permanent marker on covers of
' � junction boxes indicating all circuits being routed within said boxes.
i
� �
' � '
� END OF SECTION
' �
i
� �
�
'
�
, � I
' �
, 'I
'
' i ,
'
' � I
'
I
� j
' �
' ' ' �
I
� ,
' I �
�
' '�
I i I
�
November 25, 1998 16130-3 98088.00
'
�
i
1 ' '
� ;
, SECTION 16140
' WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
' 1. PART - 1 GENER.AL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' A. Switches
B. Receptacles
, � C. Plates
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
, I
A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
i � B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
' I �
C. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes
�
' 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' ; 01340.
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
' ' 2.01 MATERIALS
� A. Provide wiring devices and plates as manufactured by Hubbell, Bryant,
i I
' ; Leviton, Pass & Seymour, General Electric, Arrow Hart or Eagle.
� 2.02 SWITCHES
�
' � A. Use 15-amps, 120/277 volts, except for 120-volt circuits loaded greater
� than 1200 watts; use 20-amps.
' � � Single Pole (15amp) Hubbell #1201-I
' I
�
� � (20amp) #1221-I
i ,
' ' Single Pole Hubbell #1201-R (emergency red)
( Three Way (15amp) Hubbell #1203-I
' (20amp) #1223-I
� Four Way (15amp) Hubbell #1204-I
' (20amp) #1224-I '
� B. Install switches on lock side and clear of door frame a minimum of 3". '
' ; � Priar to rough-in, coordinate with architectural drawings to determine
� lockside of door.
I
i I
' � i
,November 25, 1998 16140-1 98088.00
' � �
!
i
, II
C. Provide incandescent dimmers (ivory-normal; red-emergency), by , ��
Lutron, Nova preset series or equivalent as manufactured by Ligh�.olier ',
or Lithonia using decorator style dimmers with vertical linear slid� '
actuators having positive ONIOFF switching action and solid state t I
circuitry with built-in noise filters. Provide dimmers sized at 125% of �,
their connected wattage utilizing standard wattage units of 600, 1000, '
1500, and 2000 as required by load.
2.03 RECEPTACLES
A. General Purpose: '
1. 15-amp, 125 VAC
a. Duplex type: '
Hubbell #8200-I, ivory (Normal) (hospital grade to be used in all
patient care areas.) '
Hubbell #8200-R, red (emergency) (hospital grade, to be used in
all patient care areas). ,
Hubbell #GF-8200-I,(Normal), ivory (GF8200-R, emergen��y red)
ground fault hospital grade, to be used in all patient care areas. ,
Hubbell #5252-I, ivory in all non-patient care areas of hospital.
Hubbell #5252-RDB, emergency red in all non-patient care areas ,
of hospital.
Hubbell #GF-5252-I, ivory (ground fault interrupter type) in all
non-patient care areas of hospital. '
Hubbell #GF-5252-RDB, emergency red ground fault interrupter
type) in all non-patient care areas of hospital. '
2. 20-amp, 125 VAC:
a. Duplex type: ,
Hubbell #5352-I, ivory
Hubbell #5352-R, red ,
Hubbell #8300-I, Normal ivory
Hubbell #8300-R, emergency red '
Specialty type (i.e. ground fault, isolated ground, etc.) are
to be same grade as called out under 15-amp device ,
section above.
, b. Simplex type:
Hubbell #8310-I (Normal ivory) and #8310-R '
(Emergency red) in all areas shown on drawings and for
use with all (dedicated circuit) equipment receptacles. '
November 25, 1998 16140-2 98�)88.00
� �
I
i - ,
' I
I
� Specialty type (i.e. ground fault, isolated ground, etc.) are
to be same grade as called out under 15 amp device
section above.
' B. Special Wiring Devices:
' 1. As indicated on drawings.
2.04 PLATES
' I A. Satin finish stainless steel: Hubbell (Series "A"), or equivalent in all
, rooms unless otherwise required to match existing devices in an existing
room.
, B. Provide cast alloy or stamped metal plates on all conduits and exposed
devices (Hubbell 800 Series).
' C. Provide properly designed plates and covers when devices are installed
� in exposed boxes or conduit fittings.
I3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
' i 3.01 INSTALLATION
i
� A. Provide proper size outlet boxes for all wiring devices of types specified
' ; � in outlet and junction box section of these Specifications.
� B. Mounting:
' � � 1. In general, receptacles shall be mounted vertically with ground
I
� prong on top. In special instances where receptacles are
� � mounted horizontally, install the receptacle so that neutral prong
shall be on top.
� 2. Work devices to nearest block course using proper type outlet
tj � boxes. Check architectural and furniture drawings for counter
i (desk, special booth, etc.) locations. Mount devices above work
counters where required. Verify other special mounting
' conditions and locate devices as required.
C. Polarity: Properly wire all convenience outlets so that the hot wire, the
� neutral wire and the ground wire connect to the proper terminal on all
receptacles. Prior to final job observation, the Contractor shall test
� every receptacle for reverse polarity and other inappropriate connection
' combinations, • I
D. Grounding: Install all convenience outlets in boxes specified in these
' specifications, and install a No. 12 green ground wire from device
grounding terminal to the grounding lug on box and from grounding lug
to bus in the panelboard in accordance with diagram in NFPA-99 Health ,
' � � Care Code.
' ��� �
November 25, 1998 16140-3 98088.00
' ' �
;
-- ---1 �
'
E. Special Mounting Height Receptacles: �
1. Install receptacles shown on the drawings as "special mounting
height" at mounting height indicated on drawings. '
2. Where no mounting height is given and receptacles are ab+�ve
counters (or casework), mount with centers 4" above top af '
counter backsplash.
3. Where special mounting height receptacles are not above
counters and no mounting height is indicated, receptacle '
mounting heights to match adjacent light switches or abov��
counter receptacles.
4. Coordinate the installation of all special mounting height �
receptacles with architectural design and owner requirements
prior to rough-in. �
END OF SECTION ,
' '�
'
�
'
�
�
, '
'
�
'
November 25, 1998 16.140-4 98088.00
'
, � � ,
' i - SECTION 16160
' �
, I
, � � PANELBOARDS
I I -
' i 1. ; PART 1 GENERAL
; 1.01 RELATED WORK
' I
I A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
, , B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
1 1.02 SUBMITTALS
� � A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340.
' ' �
� I B. Submit for approval detailed drawings of the power panels showing
� ; bussing, breaker dimensions, gutter dimensions, spare/space dimensions,
' number, size, trip, and interrupting capacity at all circuits. Standard
factory worksheets are not acceptable.
I 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
i 1 � i
, 2.01 Lighting Panelboards
, i A. The Electrical. Distribution System shall be a fully rated system. Series
� � rated systems shall be unacceptable.
' B. Provide lighting panelboards as indicated on drawings:
' � 1. 120/208-volts, 3-phase, 4-wire (Type "NQOD")
� i 2. 277/480 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire (Type "NF")
, ; �
� I
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
� ' 1. Square D
' �
2. Siemens
i
' ! I 3. Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse
�
4. General Electric
, ! D. Provide new branch circuit breakers as indicated on drawings in existing
i lighting panelboards.
I
� E. Provide factory-assembled, dead front type panelboards with silver
' I ;
plated copper bus, lugs, finish trim and bolt-on thermal-magnetic
molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings shown on
' � drawings. Provide a minimum of five (5) handle lock-on devices for
' � ; each panel unless more are indicated on drawings.
' F. Provide multi-terminal ground bus in each panel and isolated neutral bus
' ' where neutral is applicable.
November 25, 1998 16160-1 98088.00
' ,
- �
,
G. Circuit breakers may be used as switches on fluorescent lighting circuits ,
only if approved for such switching duty. Identify with the letters
"S WD".
H. Panelboard cabinet width shall be 20" minimum. '
I. Provide single door with spring loaded lock. Key panel locks alil�;e. ,
2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Circuit breaker type distribution panelboards as indicated on drawings. ,
l. 277/480-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire
2. 120/208-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire '
Provide I-Line type panels as manufactured by Square D, or equal by
Siemens, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, or General Electric.
B. Provide new branch circuit breakers as indicated on drawings in existing '
distribution panelboards.
C. Provide factory-assembled, dead front type panelboards with silver ,
plated copper bus, lugs, finish trim and thermal magnetic molded case
circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings shown on drawings. '
D. Provide multi-terminal ground bus in each distribution panel and
isolated neutral bus where neutral is applicable.
E. Provide single door with spring loaded lock. Key panel locks alik:e. '
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Lighting Panelboards '
, A. Provide new typewritten directory cards for existing panels that serve
renovated area for both new and existing branch circuits. Also pr��vide ,
' typewritten directory cards listing specific location or circuit controlled
for new panels. Identification of each circuit shall include circuit
number, type of load served, room number(s) served (use room '
number s er final installed si na e in lieu of architectural s ace
� ) P g g P
number(s) shown on contract drawings) and size of conductors used - '
unless #12 wire is provided for the circuit being identified. Insert with
� plastic cover into directory frame on door.
B. Provide a nameplate indicating panel I.D., voltage, phase, and if on 1
. emergency power branch of essential electrical system (i.e. life safety,
critical, or equipment from which said panel is served), Also proti�ide a
nameplate on all subfeed circuit breakers which are mounted in a panel '
but are separate from the other standard pole positions. All shall be
plastic lamicoid with 3/s" letters secured to cover using two sheet metal '
screws or pop rivets. See electrical general provisions for nameplate
color.
'
November 25, 1998 16160-2 98088.00
,
, ;
' �
,
1 ` , C. Stub out into ceiling space from each flush panelboard a minimum of
one 3/4" empty conduit per each 3 poles of spare breakers or space only
� � in the panelboard.
' , D. Balance all circuits to achieve not greater than 10% unbalanced neutral
iI current in panel feeders.
� , E. Refer to General Electrical Notes on drawings for additional panel
installation requirements.
' i 3.02 Circuit Breaker Type Distribution Panelboards.
' A. Provide nameplates indicating load served for each circuit, indicating
' i panel I.D., voltage, phase, (and if on emergency power) branch of
essential electrical system (i.e. life safety, critical, or equipment) from
, which said panel is served), Also, identify for each circuit its circuit
' , number, type of load served, room number(s) served (use room
number(s) per final installed signage in lieu of architectural space
' number(s) shown on contract drawings), amperage and poles of circuit
' i breaker and size of conductor used. Where a circuit breaker is used as a
service disconnecting means, include the designation "Main #1", "Main
, #2", etc. Nameplates shall be plastic lamicoid with 3/a" letters secured to
' ; cover using two sheet metal screws or pop rivets.See electrical general
. , provisions for nameplate color.
' B. Refer to General Electrical Notes on drawings for additional panel
installation requirements.
� C. Refer to General Electrical Notes on drawings for additional panel
' ; installation requirements.
' � END OF SECTION
'
' �
' ; I
1 � i
' � I �
' I
November 25, 1998 16160-3 98088.00
' �
'
i
' , SECTION 16170
' � SAFETY SWITCHES (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT)
;
' 1. '� PART -1 GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' A. Disconnects.
B. Fuses.
' ' �
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
' , B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
� C. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
' i 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
i 01340.
' 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DISCONNECTS (MOTORS AND CIRCUITS):
fi A. The Electrical Distribution System shall be a fully rated system. Series
i rated systems shall be unacceptable.
,
' , B. Provide switches by Square D or equivalent by Siemens, Cutler-
, Hammer/Westinghouse, or General Electric.
i1. Provide switches equipped with interlocking cover.
' 2. Use eneral dut t e uick make uic
' g y yp , q , q k break for 240 volt
' ' switches.
i
3. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for general interior installation.
' ; 4. Provide NEMA 4 enclosure in mechanical equipment rooms.
��
5. Provide equipment ground lug in each switch.
' ; 2.02 FUSIBLE SAFETY SWITCHES
, A. In fusiblc safcty switches provide Bussman Fusetrons (Class RKS), dual
element, time delay fuses for motor loads and Bussman Low Peak
' ; (Class RK1) dual element, time delay fuses for non-motor loads.
i
Equivalent fuses by Littelfuse or Gould-Shawmut are acceptable.
' � B. Provide Class R fuse rejections kit on all fusible switches which rejects
all but Class R fuses.
'
November 25, 1998 16170-1 98088.00
'
'
� 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION �
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide safety switches sized as indicated on drawings. �
B. Mount switches to walls or equipment enclosures with a minimum of
(4) bolts with toggle anchors on masonry construction, Phillips arschors '
on poured concrete construction, and bolts with jumbo washers, lock-
washers and nuts for equipment enclosures. Where free-standing, mount
on channel iron 24 pedestals (4" minimum) poured into minimum 12" '
square by 24" deep reinforced concrete base. Cross brace channel iron
at required width of switch/starter, etc. using Unistrut bracing bolted to
channel. . , I
C. Identify all switches using plastic laminate nameplates in accordance i
with Section 16010. '
END OF SECTION �
'
�
'
'
,
�
�
'
'
1
November 25, 1998 16170-2 9�088.00
'
' II
' SECTION 16190 '�
' , �
' SUPPORTING DEVICE A
� S ND HANGERS
' 1. PART - 1 GENERAL
' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Provide a system of supporting devices and hangers to
' insure secure support or bracing for conduit, electrical equipment, including
� safety switches, fixtures, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, etc.
' 1.02 RELATED WORK
' ' A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions �
' B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' 01340.
2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS
' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide appropriate supporting devices and hangers for electrical
equipment from the following list of Caddy Fasteners as manufactured
� by Erico Products, Inc., Steel City, Minerallac, or equivalent:
� 1. Vertical flange clamps (beam clamps).
' 2. "Z" purlin clips.
� 3. Conduit clips.
' i 4. Universal clamps (beam clamps).
� 5. Beam clamps (set screw type).
' � 6. Combination push-in conduit clips.
7. Combination conduit hanger clamps.
' '
8. Flexible conduit clips.
� 9. Special combination conduit clips.
' �
10. One hole steel straps.
, � 11. Minerallac conduit hangers.
' ' 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
, ; 3.01 INSTALLATION
, A. Secure conduits to within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction box,
cabinet, fitting, etc., and at intervals not to exceed those currently
' � ; effective edition of the National Electric Code.
�
November 25, 1998 16190-1 98088.00
, .
�
B. Install clamps secured to structure for feeder and other conduit routed ,
against the structure. Use drop rods and hangers to support conduits run
apart from the structure.
, C. Provide and install suitable angle iron, channel iron or steel metal �
framing with accessories to support or brace electrical equipment ,
including safety switches, fixtures, panelboards, etc. '
D. Paint all supporting metal not otherwise protected, with rust inhibiting
primer and then with a finish coat if appropriate to match the �
surrounding metal surfaces. (Prepainted, parberized or galvanized
support material is not required to be painted or repainted.}
E. Use of chains, perforated iron, baling wire, or tie wire for supportmg '
conduit runs will not be permitted.
F. For support of low voltage wiring not required to be in conduit, bundle ,
cables together in a neat manner using approved nylon tie wraps.
G. Bundled cables to be supported with "J" hooks on telephone type bridle �
rings, a minimum of 5' O.C.
H. Clearly identify all differing types of cables being run and tag th�in
with plastic tags reading "telephone", "intercom", "dictation", etc.., for '
various systems utilizing cable.
I. Provide identification tags on cables at intervals not exceeding 20' and �
within 3' of building smoke compartment separation walls.
END OF SECTION '
,
'
,
'
'
,
'
November 25, 1998 16190-2 98088.00
'
i '
I� �
I ' SECTION 16400
i
' ' DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND GROUNDING
�
, ' 1. I PART - 1 GENERAL
' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' , I
A. Distribution system
� � B. Grounding
t1.02 RELATED WORK
i A. Section 16111: Conduit
i I B. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
�
1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
, 01340.
, 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� , � 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide distribution system conduit, wire, and miscellaneous hardware
II � � as required on drawings.
i� B. Ground clamps and other grounding hardware as manufactured by "OZ"
� Electrical Manufacturing company, Type "CG" or equivalent by Steel
�, ! � City, or Appleton.
, 3. ' PART - 3 EXECUTION
' I 3.01 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
' A. System commencing at existing pad-mounted transformer secondary and
� ' continuing through existing underground service entrance, main
I switchboard, distribution panels, feeder circuits, transformers, to new
� I and existing panelboards, and new branch circuits serving wiring
� � devices, appliances, apparatus and other utilization equipment.
, 3.02 GROUNDING
' I
I A. Ground electrical system in accordance with applicable edition of
� Article 250 and 517 of the National Electrical Code and requirements of
� local authorities having jurisdiction including NFPA 99 requirements.
B. Do not use flexible metal conduit and fittings as a grounding means. I
� i Pull a green insulated copper wire in each piece of flexible conduit and
� � screw to conduit system with lugs at both ends.
' ,
November 25, 1998 16400-1 98088.00
�
'
C. Install green bonding jumpers in flush-mounted receptacle boxes as �
required to connect the receptacle ground terminal to the groundecl box.
Install green bonding jumpers between outlet box and wall bracket
mounted lighting fixtures. Screw jumpers to fixture chassis with lugs. �
' D. Install code size green grounding conductors in all branch circuits
feeding receptacles, motors or other permanently wired fixed electrical �
, utilization equipment and all feeder circuits.
, E. Bond conductors to chassis of fixed equipment. Bond all grounding '
conductors to multi-terminal ground bus at panelboard or service �Nire
trough.
F. Grouping of grounding conductors under a single lug or terminal screw '
is not acceptable. Should this method be used, contractor will provide
additional ground lugs as required to correct the condition and re«ire at
his own expense. �
G. Locate grounding attachments away from areas subject to physical
damage and clean all surfaces on equipment to be grounded to assure '
good electrical continuity.
H. Tie ground bus in normal and essential electrical system panels serving �
a general patient care area together with an insulated conductor not
smaller than #10 (cu) per NEC, Article 517, and NFPA-99 Standards.
�
END OF SECTION
�
�
'
�
�
�� '
�
'
November 25, 1998 16400-2 98088.00
�
�
i
'
� ' , I' SECTION 16500
' , LIGHTING FIXTURES
� ' 1. � PART - 1 GENERAL
� � 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' , A. Fixtures
�, B. Lamps
I ' � C. Ballasts
i 1.02 RELATED WORK
�
� '� A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
' � C. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers.
i
! 1.03 SUBMITTALS
I ' A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340.
' ; B. Submit shop drawings for luminaries showing pertinent physical
i characteristics and performance data. Include specific proposed ballasts
;' and/or lamps for each fixture as part of the submittal.
' ' C. Submit samples of luminaries prior to final production at Architect's
�
request on any proposed fixture substitution.
1 , 2. I PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
� A. Provide fixtures by manufacturers scheduled on drawings. See Section
� 16050 for substitutions.
�
� i B. Provide incandescent and fluorescent lamps as manufactured by
Osram/Sylvania, Phillips, or equivalent.
� C. Provide fluorescent ballasts as manufactured by Magnetek, Advance or
' , equivalent.
2.02 FIXTURES
t � A. Provide regulating, HPF ballasts in all compact fluorescent lighting
i
fixtures. Use recessed compact fluorescent fixture ballasts provided
� i � with integral thermal protection.
�iB. Provide high frequency, electronic ballasts (Magnetek Triad HP or
!, approved equal). Electronic ballasts shall have a Total Harmonic
� ' Distortion (THD) of less than 10%.
November 25, 1998 16500-1 98088.00
�
,
C. Provide recessed fluorescent lighting fixture ballasts with integral �
thermal protection. Where fixtures are required to be tented, pro`�ide
same with super-premium, self venting ballasts.
D. Provide rapid start, energy saving type "T8" and specialty type "T12" '
lamps for all fluorescent fixtures in accordance with final fixture
' schedule. Provide "T8" lamps having 3500K color temperature with a �
CRI of 75 for all general applications. All "T12" lamps where used for
general lighting will have 3500K color temperature with a CRI of 69
minimum. '
E. Provide compact fluorescent and incandescent lamps of wattage and
type as shown on drawings. All incandescent lamps shall be 130-volt. '
Provide compact fluorescent lamps having 3500K color temperature
with a CRI of 81 minimum in all applications where possible.
F. Recessed incandescent fixtures to have thermal protection in accordance ,�
with NEC 410-65(c).
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION '
3.01 GENERAL: Furnish, locate, lamp, and install fixtures as indicated on
drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATI ON �
A. Mount fixtures as called for on drawings. Determine type of ceiling '
being installed in each space and furnish fixtures suitable for exact type,
including roof/floor or ceiling/floor fire rated design with fire tenting
required by Architect. All coordination and materials to be provided ,
without additional cost to Owner.
B. Structurally support lighting fixtures. Support ceiling system grid
directly with hangers attached to building structure and attach !
fluorescent grid troffers to ceiling system as required by NEC 41 Ci-
16(c). '
C. Support incandescent fixtures mounted in suspended ceilings by fixture
channels, furnished under this division, laid across ceiling support
channels.
�
D. Support surface-mounted fixtures from building structural system using
rods in conjunction with clamps or fixture outlet boxes.
E. Support from structure all surface and recessed fixtures installed on '
concealed z-spline, plaster, or drywall ceilings.
F. Support plaster or drywall mounted fixtures from support channels '
spanning across main building supports without depending on ceiling
system for support. �.
�
November 25, 1998 16500-2 98+)88.00
'
I
il
' �
' G. Coordinate depth of recessed mounted light fixtures trim with ceiling
medium to assure that fixture will fit in allotted space and is compatible
� with type ceiling system being used.
' H. Coordinate width of recessed mounted light fixtures including mounting
hardware to assure that fixture will fit in allotted space including
� � �, bulkheads and soffits.
' I. Receive, store, uncrate, install and lamp all hard-wired fixtures shown
� i on drawings as being furnished by Owner or others.
, J. Wirc incandesccnt luminarics with mcdium basc sockets with wire not
_ , smaller than No. 16 and mogul sockets with wire not smaller than No.
� ; 14, type to be in accordance with current edition of NEC 410-25.
K. Wire recessed fluorescent luminaries using flexible metal conduit with
, ' ' Type THHN wire (including ground wire) not smaller than No. 14
; AWG. Install a separate insulated green grounding conductor in conduit
, (not smaller than No. 14 AWG) for grounding continuity with conduit
1 ' � system.
L. Wire surface-mounted fluorescent luminaries with Type THHN wire
(not smaller than No. 12) from outlet boxes to fixture and through
� ; fixture channels. Use patented UL listed grip clamps for mounting
, surface fixtures on exposed tee-bar ceilings. Take care that fixtures are
� i installed level and not tilted.
M. Locate no splice or tap within an arm or stem. Provide continuous
wiring from splice in outlet box of building wiring system to lamp
� ; socket or ballast terminals. Provide "hang-straight" type canopies for all
stem-hung or pendant-hung fixtures mounted on sloped ceilings or
� structure. Fixtures called out on fixture schedule as stem-hung or
� � pendant-hung indicate rigid stems, cords will not be acceptable.
�. N. Coordinate fixture locations to clear diffusers, ductwork, piping,
� , building structure, etc. without additional cost to owner.
� , , END OF SECTION
�
�
, � �
1 �
�
November 25, 1998 16500-3 98088.00
�
i
� �
, SECTION 16612
' � AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
� I
' 1. PART - 1 GENERAL
�
, 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Provide automatic load transfer control to provide
� , automatic starting and stopping with accessories as specified.
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
� � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
� B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
' , 1.03 SUBMITTALS
' A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340.
� I 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
' 2.01 AUTOMATIC LOAD TRANSFER SWITCH
� ' A. Provide 4-pole (or 3 pole with overlapping neutral) automatic load
� transfer switch of amperage ratings indicated on drawings. Provide
' i ZTS series transfer switch (ZTS-DH40FC-7AAELLT) as manufactured
by Zenith to match existing.
B. Provide mechanically-held automatic transfer switch on both emergency
Cand normal side and rated for continuous duty in an unventilated
NEMA-1 enclosure. Provide double-throw switch with main contacts
� I rigidly and mechanically interlocked to insure only two possible
positions: Normal or Emergency. Manual operator must be provided to
� enable manual operation. Provide for accessibility of control relays
� i , from front of enclosure.
C. List transfer switch under UL 1008. Switch utilizing reversing
contactor mechanism as a means to transfer load are disallowed and will
' not be considered.
� � D. Accessories for Transfer Switch: Include automatic load transfer switch
1 i accessories as follows:
1. Provide engine starting contacts for generator starting should
normal voltage drop below pre-set value after a time delay of 1-
� ' 3 seconds to allow for momentary dips in accordance with
� NFPA-99, Article 3-4.2.1.4(C) and (D).
� � , 2. Provide full phase protection: Provide field adjustable three-
� phase, closed differential type with 92-95% pickup and 82-85%
� drop out. Connect relays across live lines.
� �
November 25, 1998 16612-1 98088.00
'
i
3. Provide test switch, to simulate power outage on each transfer '
switch.
4. Adjustable time delay (with bypass similar to that discussed in ' ',
NFPA-99, Article 3-4.2.1.4 (a)) on retransfer of load to normal
with 0-30 minute delay (set at 15 minutes unless directed
otherwise) after normal power is restored before transferririg over �
from emergency source. Provide a 0-20 minute delay (set at 5
minutes) for cool-down timer wherein generator set runs
unloaded after transfer to line. �
5. Provide one auxiliary contact closed on emergency and one
auxiliary contact open on emergency in each transfer switch.
(Provide two sets (each) of contacts on equipment branch i
transfer switch.
6. Provide pilot lights to indicate normal and emergency position of �
transfer on each switch.
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION �
3.01 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A. Provide services of factory-trained engineer for (documented) jobsite ,
visits during installation to insure system is being installed in .
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 TESTING: ,
A. Prior to acceptance of installation, test equipment for any defects and
verify system will start automatically, transfer automatically, initiate and �
indicate alarms on panel and at annunciator while subjected to a four-
hour full load test through the use of portable dry-type load banks
supplied for this purpose at job site by generator set supplier or by use '
of actual building loads where existing generator sets, transfer switch,
etc. are being tested.
B. Perform all testing as required by NFPA 110, Section 5-13. i
3.03 WARRANTY: Guarantee equipment furnished under this section against �
defective parts and workmanship under terms of manufacturer's and dealer's
standard warranty. �
�
END OF SECTION
�
�
� �
November 25, 1998 16612-2 98088.00
� - �
I -
I _
' I
i
�
� SECTION 16720
' �
' ` FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
!� I 1. ; PART - 1 GENERAL
; 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
1 �
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the
I furnishing of all labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all
1 , operations associated with the installation of the fire alarm system as
� shown on the drawings and as herein specified. Provide expansion of
, j existing non-coded, analog, addressable microprocessor based fire alarm
, ' � system as specified herein.
�
B. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary
� Conditions, and General Requirements apply to the work specified in
� this section.
' I C. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of
' � NFPA-72 (1993), NFPA 90A, Standard Building Code (1997), Local
Code Requirements, and National Electrical Code with particular
attention to Article 760.
i �
i D. Field acceptance testing.
'�, 1.02 RELATED WORK
� ' A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
i B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
� I
C. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
D. Section 16111: Conduit
i �
E. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
� � 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with section 01340.
, i B. Submit a complete conduit and wiring layout drawn to 1/8" scale on
; i building floor plans and a point-to-point wiring diagram for approval.
Fire Alarm system shall be rejected (without further review) should
� ', diagrams be omitted from the submittal package.
, ; C. Should an electronic Autocad file disk of the architectural floor plan
� with the fire alarm devices located on the plan be desired, one is
' available from Phoenix Design Group, Inc. at a cost of $250.00 per
� disk.
r
November 25, 1998 16720-1 98088.00
'
'
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. Each and all items of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product
of a single fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate �
category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual
(FM) and shall bear the "UL" and "FM" labels.
B. A factory authorized installer with a minimum of five years of +�
experience shall perform the work covered under this Section.
1.05 GENERAL 1
A. Furnish and install a complete fire alarm system as described herein and
as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected, and left in proper ,
operating condition. Include sufficient control panel
additions/modifications, manual stations, automatic fire detectors, smoke
detectors, alarm indicating appliances, wiring, terminations, electrical ,
boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating s.�stem
in accordance with all applicable local and state regulations.
B. All panels and peripheral devices shall be as manufactured by Siniplex i
Time Recorder Co. and shall match and be compatible with the e�:isting
system. ,
1.06 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any �
manual station, automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch
shall be as follows:
l. A general alarm condition shall be indicated at the fire alarm �
control panel and a pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the
control panel until the event has been acknowledged. '
2. The specific device in alarm shall be indicated at the fire alarm
control panel.
3. All audible alarm indicating appliances shall sound a continuous ,I
fire alarm signal until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the
control panel. Visual devices shall also cease flashing wh�never
the audible devices are silenced. �
4. Any subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate the alarm indicating
appliances. �
5. All doors normally held open by door control device shall
� release after a 15-second delay.
'
6. A supervised signal to notify an approved central station shall be
activated. '
7. For automatic devices onl the mechanical s stem control� shall
Y� Y
activate the air handling systems (smoke evacuation, A/C
shutdown) per Division 15 documents and in accordance with �
November 25, 1998 16720-2 98()88.00 ,
I
' ,
, �
' , � NFPA 90A. Air handling unit shutdown shall be by fire alarm
building zone (i.e. only the air handling unit(s) serving the
� zone(s) in alarm shall shut down; other air handling units serving
� ad'acent zones not in alarm shall remain runnin . Manual ull
` � J g) P
station activation shall not cause air handling unit shutdown.
' B. Supervised "positive feedback" inputs shall be provided to indicate true
' �,
, "ON" and "OEF" status from designated contact closures in the air-
, � handling system. This positive feedback indication shall take
' � precedence in determining true "ON/OFF" status.
' C. Upon reset of the fire alarm control panel, air-handling units shall
' sequentially start up to minimize power demand.
� ' D. The alarm shall be dis la ed on an 80 character LCD dis la . The to
p Y P Y P
i line of 40 characters shall be the point label and the second line shall be
the device t e identifier alon with the desi nation of the smoke
' ��
YP g g
; compartment in which the device is located. The system alarm LED
� shall flash on the control panel until the alarm has been acknowledged.
Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm
received from another zone shall flash the system alarm LED on the
� I control panel. The LCD display shall show the new alarm information.
i� E. The control panel shall have a dedicated supervisory service LED and a
� dedicated supervisory service acknowledge switch.
�� � f
1. The activation of any standpipe or sprinkler valve supervisory
(tamper) switch shall activate the system supervisory service
' audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control panel.
II �
, � Differentiation between valve tamper activation and opens and/or
igrounds on the initiation circuit wiring shall be provided.
' I 2. Pressing the Supervisory Service Acknowledge Key will silence
I the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the Supervisory
; Service LED "ON" indicating the off-normal condition.
1 '
' 3. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the
Supervisory Service LED to extinguish, indicating restoration to
' normal.
i
, ' ; F. Activation of an auxiliary bypass switch shall override the selected
�, � i automatic functions.
� G. All doors normally held oren by door control devices shall release ur�n
� AC power failure.
� 1.07 SUPERVISION
� � A. The system shall contain a minimum of two Style 4 signaling line
, circuits with each circuit capable of supporting up to 127 devices. The
alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent
� alarm operation of any other initiation circuit.
November 25, 1998 16720-3 98088.00
�
!
B There shall be supervisory service initiation device circuits for �
connection of all sprinkler valve supervisory devices (tamper switches).
Device activation shall cause a supervisory alarm at the control panel.
C. Auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that an "off normal" �
position of any switch shall cause an "off normal" system trouble.
' D. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete LCL> �
readout to indicate disarrangement'conditions per circuit.
E. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition '
or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at
the control panel.
F. The system modules shall be electrically supervised for module ,
placement. Should a module become disconnected the system trouble
indicator shall illuminate and the audible trouble signal shall sound. In �
the event auxiliary fire alarm relays are used to control emergenc}�
control devices (i.e. HVAC systems fans, etc.,), the relay shall be
located within three feet of the emergency control device to insure �
supervision. Refer to Section 7 of NFPA 101 for additional
information.
1.08 POWER REQUIREMENTS �
A. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate
the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal ,
supervisory mode for a period of four hours with required minutes of
alarm operation at the end of this period in accordance with NFPE�-72
and local authorities having jurisdiction. The system shall automatically �
, transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charg-
' ing and recharging operations shall be automatic.
B. All external circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24��DC �
and shall be individually fused at the control panel.
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS ,
2.01 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A. Existing Fire alarm control panel is Simplex 4100 series, modular with ,
' solid state, microprocessor based electronics. It shall display only the
primary control and displays essential for operation during a fire alarm �
condition.
A local audible device shall sound during Alarm, Trouble or
Supervisory conditions. This audible device shall sound differently r
during each condition to distinguish one condition from another wihout
viewing the panel. '
' '
November 2�, 1998 16720-4 98088.00
'
'
I
, 2.02 ADDRESSABLE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
A. Alarm initiating devices of the types indicated below shall be
� � arranged to be point addressable:
i
� 1. Single action Pull Station type, Model 2099-9795, fabricated of
� j high impact red LEXAN or metal, and finished in red with
� molded, raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color.
� Stations which use Allen wrenches or special tools to reset, will
1 i � not be acceptable. Addressable pull stations will contain a
communication transmitter and receiver having a unique
' I identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP.
� ; There shall be no limit to the number of stations, detectors, or
� zone adapter modules, which may be activated or "in alarm"
isimultaneously.
' ' ' 2. Photoelectric Smoke Sensor, type 4098-9701 with 4098-9781
; Addressable Base. Addressable sensor bases for system
photoelectric smoke and heat sensors shall contain electronics to
I� , , ' communicate the detector status (alarm, normal or trouble) to the
� FACP over 2 wires. Smoke sensors shall be capable of
li sensetivity adjustment, self testing, and remote sensitivity testing.
, 3. Cover all smoke detection devices with plastic covers
� immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness.
� 4. Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector, Type 4098-9706 with
, programmable relay, -9701 sensor and 4-foot sampling tube. At
� 'I every duct smoke detector location, provide remote test station
with power "ON" and alarm indicators (Simplex #2098-9805)
j mounted on wall (below the ceiling) adjacent to the detector.
, � 5. Addressable device monitor modules, type 2190-9172: use
, where required to interface to contact type devices (flow and
tampers, smoke detectors, etc.) with the system signaling line
, ' circuit. This module shall supervise the wiring between the
module and the connected open switch for open or grounded
' conditions.
, 6. Addressable device control modules, type 2190-9163 shall be
� installed where necessary for the operation of supervised and/or
, � unsupervised control functions. This module is used to control
fan control or other auxillary functions as required. Contacts
' _ �,I rated at 2amps, 120VAC or 28VDC.
� i
' I
' I
' I
November 25, 1998 16720-5 98088.00
� �
i
,
2.03 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES '
A. Visual Strobe Appliances
1. Provide Visual Strobe appliances in accordance with ADA ,
criteria. The minimum flash rate shall be at least 1 Hz(60 flashes
per minute) and the maximum flash rate shall not exceed ?Hz
(120 flashes per minute). '
2. Visual Strobes flash rates shall be synchronized wherever flashes
from multiple strobes may be visible from one location. �
3. Visual Strobes shall be able to provide a minimum 15 Caridela at
' 20 foot s acin s.
P g �
4. Visual Strobes shall be located within fifteen feet of all er�d
points of egress corridors, egress corridor exits and magnetically
held open doors in egress c.orridor smoke control walls (both '
sides of the door(s)).
B. Electronic Audio and Audio/Visual Appliances �
1. The Electronic Audio and Audio/Visual Appliances shall c�perate
on 24 VDC nominal. '
2. Audio appliances shall be chimes, high level output electronic
type with a minimum rating of 83 dBA at 10-feet.
3. Combination chimes/strobes shall be Wheelock #CH-DFI-LSM- '
24-VFR with vertical lens, fire lettering, and red plate.
2.04 DOOR HOLDERS/CLOSERS �
A. Door Holders/Closers shall be 24 VDC floor or wall type as appl�cable.
B. Provide semi-flush to allow for maximum concealment. i
2.05 WIRING TYPE
A. Wiring types shall be as approved by the manufacturer and as required '
by NEC.
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION '
3.O 1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and �
specifications, all applicable codes and the manufacturer's
recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit and in
' strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC, Article 760. Refer to ,
section 16120 for specific restrictions on Fire Alarm system wirinj.
B. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labelled "Fire Alarm".
� '
Wiring color code shall be maintained throu hout the installation.
g
. '
November 25, 1998 16720-6 98,�88.00
�
, �
' �
i
, , C. Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinet
or equipment enclosures where any circuit tap is made.
� � D. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the
� contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
' E. Contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside
� �, of the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation.
, ; F. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on-site
� supervision of installation and be available at each designated time of
systcm tcsting.
I G. Provide 190°F. fixed temperature heat detectors in mechanical rooms
I � and 135 degrees F. fixed temperature and rate of rise heat detectors in
I all other areas where heat detectors are shown on drawings.
' � H. Maximum load capacity of alarm indicating and initiating device circuits
shall not exceed 80% of circuits total capacity.
' ; I. Smoke Detector Application:
� 1. Use light refractory type detectors in all applications shown on
' drawings (including duct mounting) with the following
i
exceptions:
�
a. Use ionization detectors in areas susceptible to high •
I ' � � concentrations of steam (such as rooms directly exposed
, to showers), high concentrations of steam, dust, or
�1
tobacco smoke.
��� ' � b. Use fixed temperature heat detectors in mechanical
' equipment rooms, and rooms containing steam generating
1 equipment.
I c. Provide all detectors installed rior to com letion of
P P
' construction with protection from contamination using
', , i sealed plastic coverage. All such covers shall be removed
' on day of final system testing by architectural team and
, local authorities.
' J. Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors
, � 1. Install duct mounted smoke detectors in supply air systems
', ' � downstream of final filters and a minimum of 5 feet upstream of
� ' � humidifiers where applicable and in accordance with
' ', manufacturer's installation requirements.
� - 2. Furnish and connect duct detectors to fire alarm system under
� Division 16. Other trades to install same in duct. Division 16
' I tradesman to coordinate installations with other trades prior to
', bid and to verify that proper access panels, air flow tests, etc. are
, provided.
November 25, 1998 16720-7 98088.00
' �
�
K. Sprinkler Tamper Supervisory System ,
1. When a sprinkler system tamper switch is actuated, illuminate a
light on fire alarm control panel identifying that specific s�uitch ,
zone and initiating a separate audible signal device at the control
panel via the supervisory signal circuit module in the conti�ol
panel. Should the audible device be silenced at the control �
panel, the light on the control panel to continue to light until the
problem has been corrected.
2. Do not initiate a general alarm upon actuation of a sprinkler 1
tamper device.
'� 3. Locate a sprinkler tamper silence switch at the control panel
only. �
3.02 TESTING ,
A. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures
outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit '
conductors and ground.
2. Megger test all conductors other than those intentionally aiid '
permanently grounded with electronic components disconnected.
Test for resistance to ground. Report readings less than 1- ,
megohm for evaluation.
3. Test all conductors for short circuits utilizing an insulation-
testin device.
g
�
4. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit
� and measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. RPa�rd the
circuit resistance of each circuit on the record drawings. '
5. Verify the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in '
the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual.
' 6. Test initiating, notification, and signaling circuits for proper
signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One ,
connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of
the initiating and notification devices. Observe proper sign3l
transmission according to class of wiring used. �
7. Test each initiating device and notification appliance for aIarm
, operation and proper response at the control panel. Test srnoke '
detectors with actual products of combustion.
8. Measure and record the actual current draw of each Notif cation ,
Appliance Circuit.
9. Test the system for all specified functions according to the
manufacturer's operating andmaintenance manual. '
November 25, 1998 16720-8 98088.00
,
i
, ,
I
' � Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at
each station including making all possible alarm and monitoring
' initiations and using all communications options. For each item,
observe related performance at all devices required to be affected
by the item under all system sequences.
' 10. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and
annunciation indications.
' i 11. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test,
� the secondary power system is capable of operating the system
' �� for the period and in the manner specified.
� , B. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest
i work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that
� the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable
standards.
; C. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of
� inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log.
�
�I , Submit log u on the satisfactor com letion of tests.
r Y r
I D. After completion of all of the above, the completed fire alarm system
' ' � shall be fully certified in accordance with NFPA-72 by the fire alarm
, installer and written certification shall be provided to the General
' � Contractor and the Owner's Representative. The system shall then be
tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and the Local Fire
Marshal or other authority having jurisdiction (each of which may be
' '' testing the system on separate days).
� 3.03 WARRANTY
I
' A. Contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring and
equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for
' a period of one (1) year from the date of the completed and certified
� ; final test and approval by architect team and all authorities having
, jurisdiction.
' , il B. The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the owner a
maintenance contract proposal to provide the required minimum number
� of inspections and tests per year in compliance with NFPA-72
1 guidelines.
1 ; END OF SECTION
� I
, � ''
'
November 25, 1998 16720-9 98088.00
�
� �
' � � SECTION 16726 i,
� � WIRED MASTER TIME SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
' 1. ', PART - 1 GENERAL
, 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
I ' � A. EYtension of existing master clock system.
i 1.02 RELATED WORK
' � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
� � B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
' � C. Section 16111: Conduit
; D. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
� � I E. Section 16130: Outlet Boxes
� , F. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
I' � � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
01340.
' ' 2. i PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Furnish Simplex Time Recorder
' � Company to match existing.
; 2.02 EQUIPMENT
' , I
I A. Existing System uses a Simplex 2351, Microprocessor-based Master
'� Clock.
' ; B. Provide Simplex electric type 6310 indicating clocks as follows:
; 1. Semi-flush, 12", regular dials, matte black finish, with type
� 2975-9038 back boxes or 9" regular dials, matte black finish, as
' ' shown on drawings.
;
C. Provide conduit wiring, boxes, supports, etc., as specified in other
' ; sections of these specifications.
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
' ' 3.01 INSTALLATION
i A. Provide system complete, in accordance with manufacturer's
' instructions, including conduit, boxes, wiring, and accessories. Install �
wiring in conduit. Provide No. 14 solid copper conductors as specified '
; in Section 16120.
,
November 25, 1998 16726-1 98088.00
� li
'
C. Provide Owner's maintenance personnel with a minimum of two '
' instruction sessions in operation and maintenance of system. Provide
letter si ed
�
gn by Owner s Representative stating two instruction sessions
have been satisfactorily completed, and send copy of letter to Architect. �
END OF SECTION �
1
,
,
� ,
'
� ,
'
�
i
1
1
1
1
i
November 25, 1998 16726-2 98088.00
�
, i I
i
�'� , ' SECTION 16740
�
' ' TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM
�
' ' l. ' PART - 1 GENERAL
�
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
, � �
A. Interior telephone system to be selected by Owner and provided by
Owner's vendor.
' , B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, etc., as specified and shown
on selected vendor wiring schematics.
' i C. Install vendor-furnished special backboxes in accordance with vendor's
�
specifications.
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
' ' ' A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
' B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
I
C. Section 16111: Conduit
, � D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
' E. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
�
il � i F. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes
� � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' 01340.
II, � 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
' 2.01 MATERIALS
� ,
1 ; A. Interior telephone system components as provided by the Owner s
vendor to include all switching equipment, power unit cabinets, special
' . backboxes and cable.
, B. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by systems
� manufacturer and as manufactured by Appleton, Raco, Steel City, or
` � equivalent.
� I C. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics
� �,
and conforming to "CONDUIT" section of these specifications, from
; backboxes to accessible dropped ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress
� corridor. Terminate conduit ends (stubbed above ceilings) using nylon
' insulated bushings.
� D. Wall outlets to be 4" square with depth and single-gang or double-gang
' device rings as required by Owner's vendor.
November 25, 1998 16740-1 98088.00
,
,
E Provide where indicated on drawings exterior grade plywood telephone '
terminal boards sized as shown on drawings. Terminate all conduits
with nylon insulated bushings at these boards. -
F. Paint all telephone terminal boards with two coats of black insulating '
varnish or paint.
G. Provide grounding system in accordance with NEC 250 using #6 (cu) ,
grounding conductors per drawings.
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION
� � �
�.O 1 INSTALLATI ON
A. Receive, store, and protect all telephone system equipment cable. '
B. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on
drawings and vendor wiring schematics.
C. Serve each tele hone outlet from a se arate conduit stubbed u arid
'
P P P
terminated above accessible ceilings of nearest main egress corridors
with nylon insulated bushings. Conduit minimum size is 3/4". ,
' D. Coordinate sleeves with telephone vendor for location, size, and quantity
prior to rough-in. '
E. Su ort cables in accordance with Section 16190.
I Pp
, F. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrate smoke or �
fire rated walls, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve, extending ai: least
1 foot on both sides of said wall, with nylon insulated bushings an both
ends. Seal conduits inside and outside with fire-resistant sealant �
approved by local authorities.
G. Install all vendor-furnished cable concealed in walls or inaccessible �
(drywall) ceilings in conduit.
END OF SECTION �
'
,
�
�
'
November 25; 1998 16740-2 98088.00
�
i �
�
1 � �
SECTION 16745
' DICTATION RACEWAY SYSTEM
� ' i
�
�
� �i
�' ' 1. ; PART - 1 GENERAL
' , i
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� A. Dictation system to be selected and furnished by Owner's vendor.
, B. Provide all rough-in conduit, standard boxes, etc., as specified and
' ; shown on selected vendor wiring schematics.
. C. Install vendor-furnished special backboxes and cables in accordance with
' i vendor's specifications.
� D. Provide identification labels on all vendor wire and cable.
' � ; 1.02 RELATED WORK
�
i
A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
� B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
' C. Section 16111: Conduit
, � D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
� E. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
, , F. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes
' 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
'I ' 01340.
2. ' PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� 2.01 MATERIALS
' '
, I A. Dictation system components as provided by the Owner's vendor to
, j include all dictation/ transcription equipment, power supplies, special
' '; back boxes and cable.
B. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by systems
� , ' manufacturer and as manufactured by Appleton, Raco, Steel City, or
� equivalent.
' �' C. Stub conduits above accessible dropped ceiling (lay-in) of nearest main
egress corridor from each terminal board and outlet box conforming to
� "CONDUIT" Section of these specifications and sized according to
' i j drawings. Provide conduits with nylon insulated bushings on both ends.
I
'
November 25, 1998 16745-1 98088.00
' '
' �
I 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION '
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Receive, store, and protect all dictation system equipment cable. ,
B. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on
drawings and vendor wiring schematics. ,
C. Serve each dictation outlet from a separate conduit stubbed up and
terminated above accessible ceilings of nearest main egress corridors '
with nylon insulated bushings. Conduit minimum size is 3/4".
D. Coordinate sleeves with dictation vendor for location, size, and quantity
, prior to rough-in. �
E. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190.
F. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrate smoke or ,
fire rated walls, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve, extending at least
1 foot on both sides of said wall, with nylon insulated bushings o n both
ends. Seal conduits inside and outside with fire-resistant sealant ,
approved by local authorities.
G. Install all vendor-furnished cable concealed in walls or inaccessible ,
(drywall) ceilings in conduit.
END OF SECTION '
�
,
'
,
� �
� ,
'
'
November 25, 1998 16745-2 98088.00
'
� i
� 1 � .
, j ��
' SECTION 16750
' � � INTERCOM AND MUSIC/PAGING RACEWAY SYSTEMS
' �1. , PART - 1 GENERAL
, � 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' � A. Intercom and music/paging systems to be selected by Owner and
' , provided by Owner's vendor.
� ' B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, etc., as specified and shown
ion selected vendors wiring schematics.
, ; C. Install vendor-furnished special backboxes in accordance with vendor's
i specifications.
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
' j A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
� B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
, C. Section 16111: Conduit
, D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
I E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes
' �I F. Section 16190: Support Devices and Hangers
� � 1.03 SUBMITTALS. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' 01340.
� I �2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� 2.01 MATERIALS
', ' '
, A. Intercom and music/paging system components as provided by the
, Owner's vendor to include all intercom stations, speakers, amplifiers,
' � � power supplies, special backboxes and cable.
, B. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by systems
' i manufacturer and as manufactured by Appleton, Raco, Steel City, or
equivalent.
' , C. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics
and conforming to "CONDUIT" section of these specifications, from
; backboxes to accessible dropped ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress
� ! corridor. Terminate conduit ends (stubbed above ceilings) using nylon
� insulated bushings.
'
November 25, 1998 16750-1 98088.00
' � �
`
. ,
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION '
3.O 1 INSTALLATI ON
A. Receive, store, and protect all intercom and music/paging system '
equipment cable.
B. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on �
drawings and vendor wiring schematics.
C. Coordinate sleeves with intercom and music/paging vendors for location, '
size, and quantity prior to rough-in.
D. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190.
E. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrate smoke or i
fire rated walls, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve, extending at least
1 foot on both sides of said wall, with nylon insulated bushings on both '
ends. Seal conduits inside and outside with fire-resistant sealant
approved by local authorities. ,
F. Install all vendor-furnished cable concealed in walls or inaccessib.le '
(drywall) ceilings in conduit.
'
END OF SECTION
1
� 1
,
'
,
'
,
� i
i
November 25, 1998 16750-2 98�88.00
'
1 � �
�
_ � �
, SECTION 16775
i
, I
' � � CONNECTION TO OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
, ,4. PART - 1 GENERAL
; 4.01 WORK INCLUDED
' ' A. Certain pieces of equipment are to be owner-furnished such as angio
equipment, examination lights and respective variable intensity
, i controllers, etc.
B. Connect this equipment in accordance with manufacturer's brochures
� and instructions.
' � C. Connect this equipment in accordance with local regulations of
� governing authorities.
' ; 4.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
, B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 16111: Conduit
' � D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
' E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes
' F. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
, G. Section 16170: Safety Switches
' � 4.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
i 01340.
' � 5. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS
� � 5.01 MATERIALS: Provide all conduit, wire, outlet (with proper NEMA
' i configuration) and outlet boxes, circuit breakers, disconnect switches, etc. in
, accordance with applicable sections of these specifications and as required to
' connect owner-furnished equipment per manufacturer's brochures and
' , instructions.
�
'6. PART - 3 EXECUTION
, � 6.01 INSTALLATION: Connect owner-furnished equipment and leave in
� � satisfactory operating condition. Prior to bid and/or rough-in coordinate
, i mounting heights and types of connections with final architectural elevations
and manufacturers final rough-in drawings. Include all required components
�
necessary for a complete turn-key installation.
' ; END OF SECTION
Nove,mber 25, 1998 16775-1 98088.00
� '
,
' I SECTION 16781
' I
' � DATA PROCESSING RACEWAY SYSTEMS
i
, l. PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
, �
A. Data processing system equipment to be selected by the Owner and
provided by the Owner's vendor.
' � � B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, etc., as specified and shown
; on selected vendors wiring schematics.
� i C. Install vendor-furnished special back boxes in accordance with vendor's ',
specifications.
' i 1.02 RELATED WORK II
A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions ,
, i B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
� C. Section 16111: Conduit
� D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
' ' E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes
� ,
' F. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section
' 01340.
2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS
; 2.01 MATERIALS
� � A. Data processing system components as provided by the Owner's vendor
. to include all power supplies, patch panels, VDT's, printers, servers,
' ; special backboxes and cable.
B. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by vendor and
' ' as manufactured by Appleton, Raco, Steel City, or equivalent.
, C. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics
1 i and conforming to "CONDUIT" section of these specifications, from
backboxes to accessible dropped ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress
� corridors. Terminate conduit ends (stubbed above ceilings) using nylon
� ' insulated bushings.
� I
November 25, 1998 16781-1 98088.00
� �
'
3. PART - 3 EXECUTION '
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Receive, store, and protect all data processing system equipment cable. !
B. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on
drawings and vendor wiring schematics. �
C. Coordinate sleeves with data processing system vendor for location,
size, and quantity prior to rough-in. '
D. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190.
E. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrate smoke or '
fire rated walls, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve, extending at least
1 foot on both sides of said wall, with nylon insulated bushings on both
ends. Seal conduits inside and outside with fire-resistant sealant
approved by local authorities. '
F. Install all vendor-furnished cable concealed in walls or inaccessible '
(drywall) ceilings in conduit.
, END OF SECTION '
�
� '
,
'
,
'
i '
'
�
November 25, 1998 16781-2 98088.00
,
,
� ,
� CRITICAL SYSTEMS CHECKLIST
I
' � The following checklist must be completed by the General Contractor and the appropriate
, subcontractors and returned to the Engineer at least two days prior to the Final on-site
' Observation visit. A final observation visit will not made until this systems checklist is
'� ' total��ly complete.
' i i
,
�
1 �
' �
I
' �I
1 �
�
�
1 I
' i
'
'
�,
' ;
� �
, �
'
November 25, 1998 Electrical Systems Checklist - 1 98088.00
� �
�
_ �
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
cyc�;gu Tya� REQUIRED TEST DESCRIPTION TESTING G.0 Sup ,
DATE APPROVAi,
Fire Alarm Annunciator '
Panel wiring complete and operational.
Verify system on life safety branch of essential electrical system. '
Fire Alarm
1 Pull Stations. ,
a. Alarm initiated (audio/visual)
b. Annunciation by zone
c. Door holders' release '
d. Fire shutter release(stays open)
e. Verify mat of 48"A.F.F
2. Ceiling Smoke Detectors: ' '
a. Alazm initiated (audio/visual)
b. Annunciation by zone
c. Door holders' release '
' d. Fire shutter release(close on local detection)
e. A/C shutdown w/annunciation '
f. Verify detectors installed within 5 feet of smoke doors.
g. Zone Smoke dampers close.
3 Duct-mounted Smoke Detectors. '
a. Alarm initiated(audio/visual)
b. Annunciation by zone
c. Door holders' release ' I
d. Fire shutter release(stays open)
e. A/C shutdown w/annunciation '
f. Zone Smoke dampers close.
g. Test detectors with smoke bombs.
h. Verify visual flow wheels on detectors are operating if present. ,
4 Sprinkler Tamper Switch:
a. Shall not initiate alarm
b. Annunciation by zone ,
c. Separate Audio device at Annunciator panel.
� Sprinkler Flow Switches: '
a. Alarm initiated(audio/visual)
b. Annunciation by zone
c. Door holders' release '
d. Fire shutter release(N O)
e. A/C shutdo�vn w/annunciation
f. Zone Smoke dampers close. '
November 25, 1998 Electrical Systems Checklist - 2 98U88.00 ,
1 I
�,II
1
� ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
, SYSTEM TYPE REQUIRED TEST DESCRIPTION TESTZNG G.C. Sup
� DATE APPROVAL
, , 6. Verify system power supply on life safety branch with written Certification of System
, by manufacturer
� 7 Verify pull stations are located within 5 feet of all eeress doors.
8. Verify fire dept is notified by F.A. System
� � 9 Verify battery backup provided.
' I ]0 Have two elecvicians, one alarm rep and three walkie-talkies available for testing.
Emereency Poo•cr
' I I:ill power to normal side of transfer s�vitches and time transfer as being less than ]0
seconds for•
' a. Life Safety
, b. Equipment(may be delayed)
c. Critical
' 2. Check automatic operation of Emergency Generator
, i 3 Check operation of alarm panel.
i
; 4 Verify fire alarm system on life safery branch.
� 5 Verify communications,paging system on life safety branch.
6. Check critical and life safety lights after generator is running with normal power to
project area off.
' , 7 Provide written Certification of System by manufacturer
8. Verify auxiliary contact in equipment branch Vansfer switch is interlocked with
i elevator convols for emergency operation.
, � 9 Verify emergency power supply to�
a. Critical AHU Systems
� � b. Critical exhaust fans
, c. Heating Hot Water Pumps (Recirc).
d. Convol air system.
; ]0. Test and recertify existing generators which serve loads in new or renovated azeas
1 covered by the contract documents.
I
, 11 Verify operation of power-operated doors.
' Intercom,
Emergency Communications Systems:
, ' I 1 Provide Owner's Vendor certification of device testing and system completion.
2. Have vendor present for random testing of patient stations and verification of
, annunciation.
' �I 3 Verify emergency power source to communications equipment.
' I
November 25, 1998 Electrical Systems Checklist - 3 98088.00
� �
�
'
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SYSTEM TYPE REQUZRED TEST DESCRI?TION �'ES"I?�G G.0 Sup t
J•�':E APPROVAL
Patient Bed Grounding Systems: '
I At each patient bed location perform voltage and impedance testing usina test
instrument, Hampden #MVO-]-PB tester or equal as manufactured by Dynatech which �
meets criteria and requirements of NFPA-99
2. Verify NFPA 99 required patient bed voltage and impedance testing is documented
�+•ith a copy sent to the Engineer
'
END OF SECTION
'
�
�
i
�
1
1
1
1 ��
_ 1
1
1
November 25, 1998 Electrical Systems Checklist - 4 98{►88.00
_ '
\
, i �
1
�
�
E�.DDENDUM NO. 4
_ y�
F��BRUARY 24, 1999 � - _
�,�-�� . _ _ ;
ANGIO/HUMAN RESOURCES RENOVATION ` �,ti�`� .- � �
EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER =
LEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA
JOB NO. 98088.00
AHCA LOG NO. H-425-AF
I
EARL�SWENSSON ASSOCIATE5, INC.
2100 WEST END AVENUE, SUITE 1200
NASHVII.LE, TN 37203
This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Bidding
Documents, dated November 25, 1998, as outlined here in addition to being shown on the
drawings as Delta 4, dated February 24, 1999:
i
CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS
�
Sheet�A-5 —Demolition—First Floor Plan, Part B:
1. Delete the existing water cooler as indicated in the attached ASK-7, dated February 24,
� I 1999, Delta No. 4.
� �
Sheet�A-6—Noted and Dimensioned-First Floor Plan, Part B:
�
1. Incorporate the changes to the floor plan as indicated in the attached ASK-3, dated
February 24, 1999, Delta No. 4.
Sheet A-10—Reflected Ceiling—First Floor Plan, Part B:
1. Incorporate the changes to the plan as indicated in the attached ASK-9, dated February
24, 1999,Delta No. 4.
Refer to the attached M, P, &E Addendum.
�
END OF ADDNEDUM
. �
ADDENDUM NO. 4 PAGE 1 JOB NO. 98088.00
,'� �
�
. � _ _ � _
\ I: €� ���\\\��\�— ��:,.._ , ,L �� = __ ;
� � =y�:
� y :� �; � ,� � � , ��: ._.. .. .:��:.::::� _ _ _ _ .
�`i; _
:�:.�:�`�ii � � �_ �.,. -
\� �€ �5 ;�\ ` i� \ \ \ \(:
� ..�.—,�.�..�—
��.: ... .�1;. .. :� � r/..—.�.—..�'f€ ........................................
�� .. :f � � . � J / •:
......... / — � - - �
\ � :: :� \ / /�:
_ :.
. ::
_ ::
. , : ::
I \ :- \ � /:...�� ==
::
l ......... /
. . . : _ / „
i �?;::.::::::::::::::.::::::€.....::::::::::::::::::::I� � P�frol l/ ::...............,. ..........................
:..�: :.. ............... .... ...............
��� �`��� .:= � i;:��� - 0 ,f7ff,� /��€
� I.:.....::. =1 � - � i l=
; �� !: �� =������.� ��
= -� �- � ' ,'�: - �..... ::
I \�: 05 _��L� � / 2 � ..................._
�. 4 �- ::�::::... .... , .
. ...: = : ::
� , :: � . -.. ::
� L::.......:...... .......... ...........::.....���..;:�: � �-�-�C'� ' _:::.::..>::�::�:::::z:�:�.:::
I ���..�..��,�� �� � � � � � � � � -
.. ::������
i � � � � �:�i�� � � � � � � � ,�I .... ..... .... .............
.:
� � � � � � � ::_:
I ,� � �._..� 1 \T
i� \ �� � �� � ��� `''•... :...............:� ....... .r!
:... ..
E c�"'•..
.,. �
� =� -
, .._ '
I i�r � C� � II� \ i: €� �' ��
I , .\ \ `l' \ \�€ €' si €•:: . ....................
\ \` \ � � i i� � �_ ', Fi ::'••••..
i �� � � - - - F. .
� \ \ � \ \�€ . �: :�
:: .
. \_ \_ �y i\ \ '` ' : �:'•_�:'€€ ': :' ;;_..:::Ri
::
::
::
: :
• ::
: - :., .
� I \ \_ � � \ \:....;.::...........�.:.._:.€€....:.::.............�::::�:.f� ::
i � � � �� � f��r.._�..—..�.._....__;
� � � ��� V:. � i i��
� I � � � � �1 =:. � i i k; �
� ��-�_ �,�- � � � �I:� i 0�'f i ,
,� � � � ��� <�� �1r i i i�,
� ��tSup��'i�cS � r�P � �; i i i k,
� ,� �� —�_�— �' A k ` i i i fi,
\�.�...�..\.. ..\..�.....�.�.....�.....�...�.`.{..P����..�......�......�.....� ���.........`.�.F�. .. ........ , ......................................... ....
:.=4:��:'" _.[i:� .... .. ..n...: .
I
I
I
4�v ��
���1W11YP ��1� ��!
��r„��� Angio Renovation 98088.00 2-24-99
`~'""�'m East Pasco Medical Center � °roin�' °�`d�
r�SK� / J.B. J.B.
ZYPHYItHILIS,FfAW UA �
4 2-24-99
�EFERENCE SHEET - A-5
�
�t . �
i
.�
r ,
i - -_ _- - —
; �.2�.��1 _ V ;
� — -- ;`1 .
4 -- -, ,
,, ,
i ' � NOTE E�� \'� 2 STG ._.. ..z;:�:::
! �; -= .
' °� A&B � ... `�
o:��� 0 1-20 - ,......:
� _. '�': ��NOTE �'��:.
� .�1-212��� ...�:: .. .. ......... ........................
� ��� .
I :��� NOTE D :: PASS � NOTE D �
�;�:::::'::::::::::::::::::.....:::::::::::::::::::;� I-210 � FILE :...� ..........................................
' - =��:::�:: � STG. �
:.:........ ]-213 :: � 1-202
�: � T �
S ��A&B � ...................._
:: :. :::::��:
......................... :;:
� �q:: .
::.................................................�..� �.�.. .
� .... -
.:,,. VEST . � ::..:..:.::..,,:: :;,:
, :....................................................�.-. T � �: :.::.......�:��:::.. ..... ... .............
NOT 1-211 • � - � �`
. , ._ ..:.� :
A& :.: ....:... ...:............
I �f:,5�u4�::... — . �.� �
-0' ;: 4 �NOTE E ........................
�.".°;:•.�: ...�::°°:.:: - �
• ......—........=.........—.........—....::�
::
, EC.
1-200 ' :�::��.�..��'�VOLUNTEER �
COPIER ��� �� OFF, j�NOrt€� E ::
� 1-201� ,
' ,- ' o
'- ' ..i�.. �
, �� ....-........- -....-........-..-.t . _ ....._.�.._ . . _'�—.....:�:. ............ . ..,.:::::::::.�::::::::.�::'.:..�...... . ..
_ ..�..
aSEWORK OTE C
� CATED LIMITS .OF CONSTRUCTION
..,,�:-
... >.�a:�• _._ ..,.,....:
� _
� � ,a�n,ro� o��.
���� � EiNw81`ANII�M01�1 wMOC{��li'.. Angio Renovation 98088.00 2-24-99
`"'"'�'°' East Pasco Medical Center � J g� j g e0�
f ,I J K-8 zerav,ceiu.cs.e,.owun � 4 2-2 4-9 9
REFERENCE SHEET - A-6 �
�
ji , � ,
)
;k
i
i - -�— � _
I ' �'_10 ��� : ;
� . . . ._.... ..•1s::�:.: .. � .2a�= , -�;
. ,.�
� . � -_ - ;
! _ -
i : :��i;: :.�,..�. .. .. .. . ........................................... _ ,
- :. : - �.: : .
..... .
1-212 � �.....� �..
i ����::....... : : ........ ............................ .....
.. ..T.. �� �
I ;' ....... :
� i .:...........r..�r��: :..................: �
...::
:
�1�....�.•r.....................�...................� :.' ...................................
.,
, . � ���� • ...�..
� . r
'.:.....�......�r�.�........................... '
� ��`=����'� ��� PATCH:AND REPAIR f
� ;::�:"�;;>:: � ;:=:��'STG. � REOUIRED FOR NEW
1-213 _ 1-202 �
_;.. � ll:::::;�:::::::::::::::::::::::�
� :.................................................� :r::�; � . .. .:=:.,;.,. :,:
..:. �„ .. . .., .. ,. ..� ..,..
,.:.
0 �� .
.... . :: .......
. . .. `'"
:��;:,:.;:,:.:,. :.: .. :
............::...
, ..:�:.. . ,���QI�'1 ��""�T:�1
I � ........................
: :: -: :: ��.... :
� � �T��1. �� �� � � �����������:: ^ ' . . :: . :4 � PATCH_ ANC1'REPAIR I
, . . . .... _
. .. _. :. :
������ =� '� � � "��� MECH :�IORK ABOVE f
i � .. ::.:::::::::::�:::-::.:'::::::::::::::�:::.�::':°�:.�
I o . �t.��
. ::
�� °�� � `�VOLU�I�T�EER '`
�:;;;;;�: ��PI ���� OFF. ... - ..��.. .. ..
:r.�t •
� 1-201
' ...................... .................................... .....:::::::'::'.�:::::::.:'.CO::.::::::::::::::...... ........... ,- ....:::::::.�:::.�.�:::�:.::..�...... .......
� ...•4��+.�:= •��: ... ....r....:
I II
I
�
�11Y1RR� I� �ry'� W`!
E��„�����'► Angio Renovation 9H088.90 2-24-99
`�'�'�"�3°D East Pasco Medical Center �f0 j B J°iB ed�
����� ZEPHYItHWS�F1.011lW �a 4
��
2-24-99
REFERENCE SHEET - ��A-10
- -- �,•,.� - � /
.�DDENDUM N0. 4 = -_. _f�-I �=
_ �� f �- .�
,EBRUARY 2 4 , 19 9 9 ��=-r , �- , _ ,
�
� �� - �
; ;;;;;,-.-;,�ZZ--��i
ANGIO/HUMAN RESOURCES RENOVATION ��'' �' �� r -,-
EAST! PASCO MEDICAL CENTER r`�'"
ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA
JOB NO. 98088 . 00 _
- C.
AHCA LOG NO. H-0425-AF -
PHOENIX DESIGN GROUP, INC. a,-aa"�q
104 WOODMONT BLVD, SUITE 218
NASHUILLE, TENNESSEE 37205
This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies
the original Bidding Documents, dated November 25, 1998, as
outlined here in addition to being shown on the drawings as Delta
No . 4, dated February 24, 1999 .
i
CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS
MECHANICAL �
Sheet M-3 - First Floor Plan - Part B - HVAC & Piping:
I 1 . Add a return grille RA-75 in File Storage Room 1-202 as
shown on attached drawing MSK-1, dated February 24,
1999, Delta No. 4 .
2 . Add a return grille RA-25 in Storage Room 1-206A as
shown on attached drawing MSK-1, dated February 24,
1999, Delta No. 4 .
� 3 . Relocate the existing thermostat in Vestibule 1-211 to
new location shown on attached drawing MSK-1, dated
; February 24, 1999, Delta No. 4 .
ELECTRICAL
Sheet E-3 - Lighting First Floor Plan Part B:
l . Delete one type BCL and add one type CCL and one type
CL as shown on attached drawing ESK-1, dated February
24, 1999, Delta No . 4 .
I
ADDENDUM N0. 4 Page 1 of 2 98088 . 00
2 . Revise fixture schedule to add type CCL as shown on
attached drawing ESK-1, dated February 24 , 1999, Delta
No. 4 .
Sheet E-4 - Power & Systems First Floor Plan Part B:
' 1 . Add two receptacles for water coolers as shown on
' attached drawing ESK-2, dated February 24, 1999, Delta
No. 4 .
2 . Add smoke detector in File Storage Room 1-202 as shown
on attached drawing ESK-2, dated February 24, 1999,
, Delta No . 4 .
i 3 . Add fire alarm strobe unit in Conference 1-204 as shown
� on attached drawing ESK-2, dated February 24, 1999,
� Delta No . 4 .
Shee't E-5
i l . Revise panel schedule C as shown on attached drawing
� ESK-3, dated February 24, 1999, Delta No. 4 .
- END OF ADDENDUM -
I -
, I
I
�
ADDENDUM NO.. 4 Page 2 of 2 98088 . 00
�
� �
�
.
, p 1 1 1
�
* 1�
.��:�iur�: �;�"���I�
� �
� ,
� � � - • = i
r� ��' .�.. �
x�,�s. � . E,►i ,
a �,� �._� �,
= � �
` . .�
� 1 .
�� - - � � ��
-: - :: 1�.�w� � w
�n uw���ui�����►rw��� � � •
+ � . • ���� �. ti �
?�.. �� �� �t,
� ---� . .
� , � • � � ■ :.:r. � � .
i � �11 -.y� • � � - � �
.
� ��.,,,: '� � i
� �:
j �ai�i�i�i�waR�ai=�. ����ri��w�r� �
I :. � E � • ba �=`�►� I
i �— _ �N r �� ' .
`��-.. • � : f � : � � �: .
.�. _
• �' : � • ;, �� �� I
• �' � " �
IT � �♦ � � rY ��' • � '
' �10� ��:.�ir� y� u
Q � �' ���� �:�i.! -- — — -��e�A���•:�
r �
° ' f� i
�� �� �� ►M � •
1 1 � 1 1 �. �'• ��� ! ..
M '
�, iai����� i + � �� 11
� ' G
f� �' u .
n � , � ;; ;; �
E . rt
'� i� ,� ��' � ` � 1 �
n � � �� �, .. � ���
' ' �� :.
y " �r +� • � ; �_..•�■.� �
t! .� .M �.�. r �:' ' .
...�..� Q • � � ��� t ' ��f, ■
- 11 b ,r:•:����. C
M � • _ _ �'� . ��._� r;, ._r...t G � , e :
C ���������nia�s�=M1+ i� k,
r
• � 1 , '���8 � , � • !
11 1 �' L� i i1rl��•�ri�l�����
� � � II .li� �� � _ . �■, � � �
Q� �• F �r�� itvo� �ti��
� �{�.�'��� •
111 �� ��, ` � � �� e
. i, , � j � `� rw����=�����r�� a,
.l � � �, 1 � I� ! 1 � - - -
� , ■
� �� II � � l���� i
� i�_� ��- �
��f c=�� �1 �:�r�._ ..� •
• . �
• # �•►� • 4! • �I
�� �, �' �j •• �
i
. �; � � �+ -
� Hc� � � � x �•� � - � • � - �,�1
F� Ht� � � X � . � . . �. � . ,
■ ♦
�� fC : ' •:f ! �
� ... . e .
' *� : � 1 ' • � M'' C :
c.
. � _ � 1B� � i F1LE a "aa�9
�ffice I STG. I
1-21`� I 1-�02
/ 4
A&B 'EML I C
� � � EX
°F L �T ST P rchasinc
c-� 1 1 . -
B
AC
a '2XLE' N�TE D � N�TE E
I
Q � Q �
C �, AC
� �nn \/fll I I�ITrf n ,
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I � I
I L I G H T F I X T U R E S C H E D U L E I
�--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------� .
I I I I �AMPS I I
I TYPE I MANUFACTURER 6 CATA�OG Nl1MHER I VOLT I N0. / TYPE I REMARKS I
�-------�---�---------------------------------�-------�-----------------�----------------------------------------------�
I , I I I I I
I I I I I I
I AL I L]THONIA #2GT432Al2. 125 I 120V I 4 F32T8 I 2'x4' RECESSED GRID <0. 125 INCH LENS) I
I I I I I I
I ACL I LITHONIA #2GT432/HOL�PHANE 8246 I 120V I 4 F32T8 I 2' X 4' RECESSED GRID WITH HOLOPHANE BZ46 LENI
I I I I I I
I BL I L]THONIA ik2GT232Al2. 125 I 120V I 2 F32T8 I 2'x4' RECESSED GRI➢ <0. 125 INCH LENS) i
I I I I I I
I BCL I LITHONIA #2GT232/HOLOPHANE 8246 I I20V I 2 F32T8 I 2' X 4' RECESSED GRID WITH HOLOPHANE 8246 LENI
I I I I I I
4 I CL I L]THONIA #2SPG417A1z. 125 I 120V I 4 F17T8 I 2'x2' RECESSED GRID (0. 125 INCH LENS) I
I
I CCL I LITHONIA q2SPG417/HOL�PHANE 8246 I 120V I 2 F17T8 I 2'x2' RECESSED GRI➢ VITH H��OPHANE 8246 LENS
� � I
I EMLi I L]THONIA #6ELM2PLUS I 120V I 2 FURN]SHED I VALL BRACKET DUAL HEAD BATTERY LIGHT I
I � I I I I CLOCATE➢ IN GENERATOR ROOM/ENCL) I
I � I I I I I I
I �L i I L�ITH�NIA/G�THAM #LGZ7SBFFL I 120V I 1 150H/A23 I RECESSE➢ I.ENSED V/STEPPE➢ BAFFLE I
I I � I I I I
I VL � I M�RLITE #R-714-SGN I 120V I 2 P�7 I WALL RECESSE➢ ABOVE DO�R [N USE VARNING I
I I � I I I LIGHT I
I I I I I I
I IX�E I SURE-LITE tiCAX-7-1-70-00-R I 120V I - �ED I SINGLE FACE EXIT LIGHT CRED �ETTERS) I
I I C4/EMERGENCY NI-CAD BATTERY PACK) I I CINCLUDE➢> I CUNIVERSAL HOUNT) 11/CHEVRON INDICATORS I
I I I I I I
I 2X'�_E I SURE-LITE #CAX-5-2-70-OD-R I 120V I - LED I DUAL FACE EXIT LIGHT CRED LETTERS) I
I I CV/EMERGENCY NI-CAD BATTERY PACK) I I CINCLU➢ED) I CUNIVERSA� MOUNT) W/CHEVRON INDICATORS I
I I I I t I
I 1XI_ I SURE-LITE NCAX-6-1-00-R I 120V I - LED I SINGLE fACE EXIT LIGHT CRE➢ LETTERS) I
I I I I CINCLUDED) I CUNIVERSAL MOUNT) V/CHEVRON INDICATORS I
� -----� ------------------------------- ----------�
----� ------� ---- -------------------------------
--------------
� PROJECT: ANGIO, EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER ESK-1
LOCATION ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA SHEET NO.: E-3
1� � � /� ARCHITECT: ESA JOB NUMBER: 98027.04
104 Woodmonl Blvd. Suite 218
� Nashville, TN 37205 SCALE: 1 S'�=1'-0" DATE: 2-24-99 REVISIONS: � DRAWN BY LAH
(615) 386-9287 (FAX: 385-0922) / 4
. �
I�� � ' /
.....�i,:.�!�� � e � � �
� �a��r�� �� R� �0 i
� �
� f � �� r / �
.� � � �
� � � i; '
-tuis�ai=�� \/i��� ��
� � � � ��������l� `
N • � � , i .
G �
1 ;� i - � �
, , �, ,a ,,
. �'� ►�
. '��� (�'--l-� ' — !�
.� , ���5...�..
�
�
n
' i
1 i : �. '
0 � _
�, i n
� �� �
� k
� P �
t `� � �
u�=�►� ir
�i i � � „ � ,M
/iL. � �� r
�' \i.' �,�y`�' ..: � ' ■
�:i�i�sair=i� Vi � � � ��
, L�IIr^. �
�+� �'� � M
�j�� r �
j t f ��� i i�O �
� � �,' :a��, st�w:�
i f
,� `i Rlit�=�
!���iTiilfw
� ��
i
- IG= i[�n[rr�i=�ion
�, � a �
:� � � ^
�', �.��—,—�.
` ���� �
il •�� -
� � ��- ► � C
�� .
:
a�
M ` .+.�
.w.rr�
��
�� �
� P }--IC_�YF (� I X .., . . . . * . . �� �
' �H (� � � X. � � � - - .- , . �
� •
�• . �: : • •:� ,
.. .., . . �i'� � '�Q���� ' ' ' ,d►�' � '
• i
f•
4 �
I "��
_\
a��a- �-
�
,
�
�
�
� ---------, .
, ,, . -------------------------------------------- ,
�o -------------------------------
--------------------' HRKR 11PTIONS� i
""`'--� MDUNT+ 5URFACE 1
ST'Shunt Trip IG=tsolcted Grn
IPANEI� HANtJF+ SD '�' �
IAMP� � TYPE � NaC70 ld=�ock-�n-Dev PL=Po*ert�nk Cantrots Csee specsldeto�ls '
(Y�L7<Hi>= 20�j SI� , �zK GF=Grnd Fcult Int
iValT<lo): i�fl, � SV-Swttch Ruted �
---------'-------------------
' riA=HACR'HVAC Rated -----------""'"'_ Phase
IPHlYIRE: 3/4, '------------------------V�re
INAIN� µ'�'Q' '""--�- ���r CKT PH GKT �'�d Po4e Hrkr ICVA DIRECT�RY �
"----'----____'____Y�re Grd �P ------'..
f-------------- � 8 Condu�t Stze No/ Size __ __ __ ---
� � PKy'pp++rHrkr Pale �p No/ Stzc Size GondWt H_ M !_ ---- � 1 1 ! 20 1 1.1 A�MtN. �Y�• �
tOtRECT�RYi � _ -- -- --- --- 2 II/2�n 1f112 t 2 N12 � 4 � i 20 f i.� AIIHIN. L7G. ; 4
�""��_�yr J - - ! 20 I 1 ! I 2 NI2 IMl2 tI12�n I � a � ii/21n INt2 4 2 M12 � 1 1 1 20 I I
�nnKtn cn�. LTSt.S � 2 1112 Ik12 1112in { 3 H 6 !1/2in tN12 l 2 Mt2 q,6 VAT R COOLER
1 20 I 1 I ! 8 M1Z IN12 ii/2tn 1 5 C 8 II/'��n IM12 I 2 M12 1 t 1 1 20 � O.fi
fADM1N. RECS. 0.4 i � y ' ' i Z N�2 �KtZ ���21n 1 7 A 4 � 1 � ZQ � 0.5 SPARE �
IADNIN. R�CS. 0�.6 t0 Il/2tn IAt2 1 Z �tZ � � 1 1 2� � USAH�E SPACE �
ISPARE 0�6 1 20 1 1 I ! 2 MIE tM12 I1J2in 1 9 8 � f 1 1 { �.0
ISPARE �Nt2 ii/2ta t 11 C 12 Itl2�n ;NIZ y 2 Xt2 t ' 1 ` � a,0 uSAHLE SPACE 1
{SPARE 0.6 � 20 1 1 1 I 2 k12 � � 1 13 A 14 1 � I
� � 1 IS H 16 � � � 1 � { Q.D USRHLE SPACE i
4USaHl.E SPACE Q�� � � 1 � � i 17 C 10 1 � � � � 1 � f 0.0 USAHIE SPACE i
IUSAHIE SPACE 0:6 � � S � � � � � 19 A �� � � � I I 1 � � �'fl +
1 USRSLE SPACE Q.� I 1 1 1 1 � I 1 � � ! 1 1 I 4.U - �
IUSAHLE SPACE �.0 I I 1 I { � � I 2S H 22 1 � � , I 1 i l 0.0 - 4
�_ � 0.0 I i S 1 I � � { 23 C 24 I 0.0 - �
�,p � 4 1 1 1 � � 1 25 A 26 ! � � � I 1 I � _ i
�' �y.0 � I 1 1 1 � 1 y 27 B 28 i � � _
i' � � f ! 1 I � �� �
��, 'p,p i I 7 I i { � t 29 C 3tl i � � i t � p.0 _ I
O.p l I 1 { 4 � � I 3f A 32 ! � � � f 1 � � _ 1
1' 0.0 I I 1 4 1 � � f 33 8 3� i � � 1 1 1 I Q.p 1
t- �.0 t 1 1 i 1 t 35 C 36 1 � � � 1 1 4 4 0.0 -
I- � � I 37 A 38 � � � 1 1 1 1 � 0.0 ^ I
,_ � a.a � � � i i � � ,
�_ � ti.D � i i t I 4 i _ 1 39 H 40 1 � � 4 1 1 1 { 0.� -
�_ � �_ I 41 C �2 I
� 0.4 1 {• S 1 � --- -"--""-------- --------------.._______--- -
______+'_~^Ypw\FII.ES\ELOTUSti48027\
1- � �QNNEC7ED L�AD BREAKDOVN a Q
-----`-----------------"'-- ------------___^_'_-'--FACT t1[Y LD L[GHTING 3.7 SPECIFY Q.d
pIYERSIPIEfl lOAflS� �d,p p,g 0.0 REGEP7ACL£S 2•0 MlSC
LIGHTING 3,7 N1SC IlIYERSIFIED � 0 Q q 0.0 3PH MOTORS d.0 TOT CONN KYA 5.7
RECPT <=1DK 2.0 HEAL7HCARE TYPE � � � 5 p.0 �pH M�7CfRS Q'� Anps �1A
1%2 RES7 0.0 DIAGNl7STIClXRaY d.0 1.� p.0 �A7 �.� p p 31.8 3.e
3PH �MOTl1RS d.0 KITCHEN Eti a p y,p 0.� HEALTHCAREtYPE d•�
ipH M�T�RS 0.D SPECiF1ED H 0 22•0 2.6
25'!.,LNOTOR �•ti �IY KVA 5.� DIAGNOSTIC/XRAY Q:a � Q 23,3 2.8
HEAT �•� DIY AMPS 15.7 KITCHEN Efl
NISC i? 160G ���
�
' � ,
(
�
�
I
� �
; i
�
�
� ,
I '
� � PROJECT: ANGIO, EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER
� I � ESK-3
�oeAT�oN: ZEPHYRHiLLS, �LORIDA
� 1��� �� ,� �,1 , SNEE� NO.: �5
104 Woodmont 8lvci, Suite z�$ ARCHITECT ESA ;
+ (6�S) 3 60592$7�{FAX3738S-Q922 "_ + ri �
� � SCALE: 1/8 1 -0 DAI'E. 2-24-9f REl//S/ONS' `��B �(JMBE�'' 9�4Z1
� a Q�A�N , ---'
BY, �,��
� � i
" ; ADI�ENDUM NO. 3 ' ' '
r
FEB[�UARY 19, 1999
ANGIO/HUMAN RESOURCES RENOVATION
- EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER
ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA
i , -('h,�`;
JOB NO. 98088.00
.� _ `_ _-_ ^
AHCA LOG NO. H-425-AF f4 �r�1�°�.-_ _ _
/A�/-�`'� �
V�
EARL SWENSSON ASSOCIATES, INC. -- __ _- ". ��, �
2100 WEST END AVENUE, SUITE 1200 � - �
NASHVILLE, TN 37203
I �
This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Bidding Documents,
dated November 25, 1998, as outlined here in addition to being shown on the drawings as Delta 3, dated
February 19, 1999:
I �
_ INDEX I '
1. Refer to the fire protection category of the plan review data information and incorporate the
ch'anges as indicated in the enclosed ASK-4, dated February 19, 1999, Delta No. 3.
CH.ANGES TO THE DRAWINGS
Sheet A-2—Life Safety Plan—First Floor Plan:
� j
1. In�corporate the wall rating change to the existing Soiled Linen Room located in smoke
compartment 1F in the attached A-2 Life Safety Plan, dated February 19, 1999,Delta No. 3.
2. Incorporate the area name changes from the existing "open" to "open breezeway" names located
around smoke compartments 1G, 1H and 1F as indicated in the attached A-2 Life Safety Plan,
First Floor Plan, dated February 19, 1999, Delta No. 3.
3. � Revise the wall rating to the corridor wall that separates smoke compartment 1B and smoke
' compartment 1D from a 2 hour fire/smoke wall to a 1 hour fire/smoke wall. This is indicated in
the attached A-2 Life Safety Plan, First Floor Plan, dated February 19, 1999, Delta No. 3.
Sheet A-5 —Demolition First Floor Plan Part A:
1. Incorporate the clarified wall rating along the corridor adjacent to Angio 1-104 as indicated in
tYie attached ASK-5, dated February 19, 1999, Delta No. 3.
I
Sheet A-6—Noted and Dimensioned Floor Plans:
i
1. � Incorporate the clarified wa11 rating along the corridor adjacent to Angio 1-104 as indicated in
the attached ASK-6, dated February 19, 1999, Delta No. 3
Refer to the attached M, P, &E Addendum.
' END OF ADDNEDUM
I
i
ADDENDUM NO. 3 PAGE 1 JOB NO. 98088.00
� i
i �
,"i
i . .
� •
i
I
i�
.. _ . ��_
I ' _. •` � "-�_�f,"
I _ - � =
I " N''" ���- _ ,f '
���`�_ ;�_.��
I I
�
' I
I
� I�
FIRE PROTECTION �
� NED BY SBC REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE II CONSTRUCTION TABLE 600
AND, SBC 503.2.6-1997 AND 1994)�
TABLE 600 (SBCI 3
r ,
COLUMNS-3HREXISTING U.L. N0. X772 FOR HUMAN REC. RENOVATION - 14" SQUARECONC. COLUMNS
� / 3HR EQUIVIENCY FOR ANGIO RENOVATION
, FLOORS-2HR EXISTING U.L.NO. G514
' BEAMS SUPPORTING FLOOR-3HR EXISTING
�
FIRE PROOF DESIGN THICKNESSES SHALL BE FOR UNREST.RNNED STRUCTURE
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM�
ITHEi EXISTING FACILITY IS FULLY SPRINKLERED. THE RENOVATED AREAS WILL BE FULLY SPRINKLERED
i �
I
I
I
�
�
�
�
�
I
�
sKei rwroa
g � � 2-19-99
�� ���������t An�o Renovaaon 98086.90
`~'"�'" East Pasco Medical Center trJ ge� °J"Bd`°°s�
ASK�-4 ��.�� �
2-19-99
� REFERENCE SHEET - INDEX SHEET
� �
� �
S O ,
' � •
...n�:. Y:�. ..
... , ... ......
......
:..�. ... .............. •... ..
•T....... ...�: .
,'V' ^ • �.. ..- ..
:�' " �
'�" '. ,�...�...� l.. :
� "■:..�.....� .... , :
_ .. .1.: :�.�.���n��.�.�7.���
r•. a•.. r•., r�,. r•, r•. _ :E �` ` i.F ` ' ;'::
- r:IIIIII.;a:illfii,;z.1U1A.;i.11lill'.;a.71i1iT.;>:iittiT,•'r "' ' -
I , _ _ =�I�'z Illltl�p Ilil}Y'1yi�,��`-.� =
s t.
� . = CeZ ?a.-lllllL�. � �iT��iT
. . ..
I ::� 'r.`5 ..:.j�i.
:,'t.........,r.........�...........�.......... ......... .. .a
i... ;; r..t4..,,..,a.�I..ii..,x.1�,.,,....r......,...,r..L..�,.,,z.� ... .... v:.....::
...:•.:..:•: :€ ; r•• E....:::::::. �
-�1.;, u . � . i i� . ii ii S' i n".'�� ii
.... ..- � . . _ 1:. .. ................................ ....
� . w'
,.._..� .. ...- — "` .r ti:...
i _' _ _
I I ,.,`.�s.Eii . ... . �V Y' '
- I I ' � _ .... ..... ,....................
I i ..::..:..:...........::..:.. ............� � � 11 fW11C:f � .
:...... ........::
.......:
.,-.
,_ .. .. . .. . ..
; ; :. ::... , . ....,�.�\� �""'`\�`.u�,j 04
. ..: .. ❑
::
� , _.: :l � 6 � �� =
:�........
� , . :� � _ ... ........ ......
� � :.. : � :�� ., � �....:::i , . Y:.. . ..
:_ � � - ,.,., �:,. . 6 - �
I � ::.;,:.:,�:: :� � ����... ��:_.�� ........ . ....... ... ... .
,
� � . - - ;�= ... ........
:
:: -
: _
:
� �,._. .. . ..� `� � � .... ......... .:
� � ' � � ::::..� . .,. .
.....�: .:::,:. .
� ..............:::�:.......�.�.......,,.....: I.....� � � �..� .
...�...::.:.::.:..:.::.:�:
�.\. .\... .... .\ : 0 �
� i ���-� ����-���= � � � v
: � . _�:..
� � � � ::°� � .�... ,�� � :: �: . .:...
� � � � �� ::;� � �. � �. � -�
� � �L�J. ��...,�..�� �� �; � ::;: �� I;� �
� � � � � �. � � �� � �;� �� �,;.::� ,:. EMPOR�RY DUS1
..: .. ::
� � ::: : �. �:::.:�,: :;� � :
� � � :� � � � _........ ...... .:. .,
. .....,,... ... .... ,:�
� � � � . w�
\ \ \'' \ \ \ '� • _
• ..�_• \.....�:•. \ `� ... ::M.���\���\ _.
:. •::�::'::=. :
,..... A= ... .
�.`� �-;:..� . 4 . � .... ... . . .: M�:; �4 _ .
, � �
�.�-��: .:. -: w� :
� \ .... ,
' � � :'�� � �� ...... ... .\�::�_� = .
� � 6 0�3 � �, � � � � ��l ` .
_ :.
.. . .. � - : :
.�_ � :.
� i :._;:. .�...... ..� . ... �_::`�:�� ��: ........ . .. ���: r- 3
� . .. . . . . =
� . . � r ..
. ....... ...... . .... .... : : Y- ' :
\ \ � �
� �` \� 0 \ �'r;�,:: :�:�.�:' ... _ . . ... ... .......
, � :• � � � ;.. ; .. :�:�:�::�:{::;;��
� •��� � � �- � ��: ;�����:..
, , �.....t� .� .� ..� ....\� � �: �
.� � �;€....�.: .::�:::::::�::::::::�::::::::�: �ti.....� � ���: _
� ; � :.....,.. . �...:_� fi
, , �;�� � �\� �,:����; �:�:����: ,,,,,...
Yy •••• .�:y..::
. \ !.: ' � O�
\ '.� \ \ \ \......� Y�
::
� t- . .
• ' :'... �.:.
\�: \ \ \. \ • \�� \ y•
\ :t \ �:=':�::,� € � \ �=�:� 01 �.......... . ........ -
.A5.. . .AS. .
���������\� � � :� �� ... ...
� � � � �.:,,�; �-
€: � � �: � �� r� ���..J
�:� � �
� �s.—.._._._...��--•� \ \ :: .�.�,�.,—,. 1 1
- . ..•
.•:M=
�il• _: i.1:�::
.
�- .-. - :, .
nnumr.i.............................................i�uuun muun �E : U.in.;;.I;.r.;;.l;..;l;6u.il.lf.J�-' _ + '� €€ ;'�s.J. .
...��........ i...c c=.:'c Ecis
� '` :'i�. c c'– ` i• �
• .n _.'t_'� ...�� '
�' '%'� �-' r • r•• i;!i.....:.
04 • � :.•:z �� nui.:rimn.;r ...;: :•: ........ .;:
. •�— - .�
.:
� ��� ��"•••••...... _ .
�/,�M-�"� y . . . - .... `� �.
� ' -
.�.�.:..:: :
:.
�� �.,.. .: : �
J V �°1 . . ..... ... _ -�- .
1/�'' ...�Y'
;r..
_ - '�/, . �. �.. .... .�_ . . %.1�.'.
��
su•:t Hu+txc � ESII�i0�11�w1�C111bCt 808►uree Do�■ 2-19-99
��w,��q Angio Renovation
����� `�'""'�'°° East Pasco Medical Center tr0j g�' J°iB�`°d�
YvaHYItFiILLS,F7AAIbA
Re.�a6 2-19-99
�EFERENCE SHEET - INDEX SHEET
.�� ,
, '� �
�; , .
•..n.• Y.'�. .................... . :1.:. �
I ,..' . . . ^ , - T •.... ... ... •
; . :w: .. ... .......... ........... ... ..
....................................................... 'r::. ' _. " .�.. ....
_ i.cE�.�:!S E i
. . ti. ..
._:: . . ..
i�.: .'--.° =' ...... ,
..... :
.; ;: :��,-....:..
� — :: ;� :;; .. ...�_",y:AllA:.";'y:IlIDI.`;'y.ill
�:IIIIII,'�'t:III111nd:1U111,�'�":LOill'ni:117111'�'►i111Tf�'F • i•- . o:
�I�x �Illili�p Iilill �
� • = Y'� `:i3ll �.7l1l1l.�'ry`:!!!!liPr .
_' irr: •�e�=E -/ '.
I ;...F..;...... ,.+..�;.. ....ti., .;.. .'..:`�i'• ...., l '
� �;..:t..tl..il.:.>..Ii..li..cx.l..7..".r..tE.. .:,7..l..il.�>,,i.., ........
I ..,v� � �'' GYP BRD ON �::::::::�� .................................... ....
... . ::
.: �: ::
� ..:..:..::. .. � :: =1...,:, .
� :: :.::'. .. .
: :... --�
I :: � S _ .
-- � 3 ' MTL. STUD
P:
Np E B-�'.: FU�t�..,OUT. _ �: ::;_: �
_ ,..�>::��;. .... = NOTE B "� .::=:....
, . _ :��.�: .� . - _ -
.:�<<:�_.��:�:���. . .
.. . . Y= .
T UD ,.. . - ���:� __ ....................
. - ........::r .........
� � .. .... ... .:I`...—""".- .' — — — —'' ;:'«'t`�"}.� j LIMIT OF ,ONSTRUCTION.......
. ..... - o - N r - -
_ m i
COMf�. �:•
. . . �
, ..: -
�:� �� I,I = ,
, 0 �� �
� : � _.. � :. � , � � _ _ ....... .........
_
,�., -- ..
, , �: .
: �. � � � :
.: ::.;:a:=���: � � �. . .. ........ ... ... .
.� �� `-�10%z:� NOT D 1-105 � :;... . ... ... ..... .....: .
-�. � 4- ��� j � �. ............. ...
.
. .......:. PB �`�
Lo�asi' — n:a PUSH PAD � � � �
I ��=
;E HER�� _ I� <� ,�k 4;�.���:�-. � -;} '� � � . .....
�� a �– – – -�_� ^�'<.
,� _I� �_ �-� :1!'.' :p'. . �-
_ I I 110 OA � I � ' I
u�E � � .. .......p.�. ......
; r _ T • �..... .. ... . . � ...,
i ; � � . �-+�-,=�+T `�k � � � :
; , , �,- � ��'i '� ;�y � I � A6 A6 :
PAD � � �' �, ,� , � �: .
� � to8 I i ik ! r � �i i ii � _
� • � iiu i, � iu�l���! � -
r - <-
f� nn i u �i'T4 _. _
�,',� � I
� � F--I-rur_ L�_� ii� i � =���I � �, . .. �i
' � � =..... ... .......... ..... ... .:
I 4�-0� i ��� '�_ -� ;� �; ANGIO ������. -
4 ��1�_ - �f u 1-104� � - .. .:„'•=�::+�F:z. ....
ULTR - N �- ��-��;� ,-�4, . Q, � NOTE _
1-�03 � � �a- .��_ � _�h�-�� I � ...i;:, . .
ni i i n c� � �;:s;.'.;t::
�r-�-�� �4� « a� �
I � 0-_9� �� -� � I =
:;...,.....�
. v ::
� —,� — -�r r-i-, � . - �.... ........ . ............::............................
NOTE A p�;� i� i i �i- —' ���I�.— —�r —q � c° � ,.- ::
( i � ��-��LLLI L���� 6,}_ ��}. 1— �. � c� v �.... ..... .. ......... .... ............
� (I ���w-... I .................... ............... "j�•A;ii;j1.�I.'i�;A'�.?'y:t�Ti;j��.:� '�. . :i': .1', ``t;;"•:1'.
...............— �........�.........�.. _ _ _ – I :�.
- � _ _ _ _ � � � _ � � _ _ � � ,—:�_
.. :..=– • y;�:......
•L,:;,':"'.:�mi;rimus; ..., , ,. ..... ,
_ - _ -- - = NOTE C .. A- � �..,`��..
_��::.
_ _ �L. .......... �
_ '-�� I� _ ......•• �+R, . • . .
--; ��°1_` � . _ .. _.... .........»_ - ... ' : . :.j,';,
'�, ----
r - i �
' � - i
9�eel Nunber �
Ei�,,,�,�„�,,,p �rl�.t Angio Renovadon 808� �lf 2-19-99
� `�""'� East Pasco Medical Center a0 j,�; J°iB`�`��
ASK�6 �H� ��,��, ,�
2-19-99
R,EF � RENCE SHEET - INDEX SHEET
�
�
� ,
� , I
, i . ' .
�
ADDENDUM N0. 3
FEBRUARY 19 , 1999 �
ANGIO/HUMAN RESOURCES RENOVATION - _ w
EASTi PASCO MEDICAL CENTER _ - � ` ` �
ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA - - _; `, � `-
� ` _ _— �`�- -
JOB N0. 98088 . 00 _ , , � - ,_ . . ;% .�_ � -
; _ � , `'-,- ^��`� . -
' , . ',;�`;: ,-
AHCAi LOG N0. H-0425-AF ''� ' ��
� ����r.r,
i �
PHOENIX DESIGN GROUP, INC.
�104 WOODMONT BLVD, SUITE 218 �
NASHVILLE, TENNESSEE 37205
Thisl Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies
the original Bidding Documents, dated November 25, 1998, as
ioutlined here in addition to being shown on the drawings as Delta
�No. 3 , dated February 19, 1999 .
I
CHANGES TO THE DR.AWINGS
!Sheet M-3 - First Floor Plan - Part A - HVAC & Piping:
� 1. Revise HVAC as shown on attached drawing MSK-1, dated
, February 19 , 1999 , Delta No. 3 .
� I 2 . Revise HVAC KEY NOTE 1 as shown on attached drawing
MSK-2, dated February 19 , 1999, Delta No. 3 .
Sheet M-3 - First Floor Plan - - Part' B - "HVAC & Piping:
I1. Add a return grille RA-25` in Storage Room 1-203 as
shown on attached drawing MSK-3 , dated February 19 ,
� 1999, Delta No. 3 .
Sheet FP-1 - First Floor Plan - Part B - Fire Protection:
� 1 . Add sprinkler head to Stretcher Area adjacent to
� ' Vestibule 1-108 as shown on attached sketch PSK-4,
� dated February 19 , 1999 , Delta No. 3 .
i i
; 2 . Add sprinkler heads to Computer Rm. 1-109 as shown on
attached sketch PSK-4, dated February 19 , 1999 , Delta
�
No. 3 .
- END OF ADDENDUM -
i
� ADDENDUM NO. 3 Page 1,_o�f;-,1 ,. , _ _ 98088 . 00
! - - ., .. � . ..
i i . .
I
�
i
� �i
��
� ��
..� ... •� � �� ;.�`—�:�:�:�:-�.-a: �:�:� ��
U ■ � �'_ . ',
• �
� � f � -�.-�.-�.�.-�.��
„
[� � � � �
..� . ,
i • . . Q - � . � ---
. : . �,.
��^, � � � �
� _ ' •/ 0- � � � • � ' —
� � �=����s
�������� �
n.....,_ _ `v _ � �r��_—I�- L� .1 pu�1
fi
-��a��c� ���� � ` ����� i
� � ■
��� _ ��11 • �s
Ansi��tl�a�i���iai) ,�� ` � � : m
� • • �������� � � �'-`� � �� ' W
� : ,;�_ . . , - . . ,�. • ���r■���, �
. �"� �. ��_:-!i�R�,������ � "�����', m
Ji`�e�►ua�����:_aw���ia��o1����:���!i�� Y..� i � �J III
/ `i��I �� � �_ ���ati _ �
•t ' � • t' !n�� . _�� '• L l3J ��— `��i � �'�I��� � �W
rs �
�: �� • � � , `, A `ul ���I wi••"' r�'��i� ir!
�� �i7��1� I =l�i=C 'a�r��� W
i� � _ �- _� i. _ �
• m
� � �/� � � W � � W2
. � , . , � _ .
�� ' �al� �. � m
11 �- � /i�. +�'!�n,��'� � N�1����
A � �
• `i� �� ► ��� •�'� �»i .W � �' � ■.
.�iii�_. ,
11 � �
� r.i ':1�::� ��
��������r��ii i�i i���i�� � ■
n ' ' �, ' !I�� � ���� - � "o !e�° 1 I �,►� :� � � �� �
. J r�
����L•�•� • •• a���� r i i i�. `.� './� . �!�A�� r
� 1 � �
, , ci ' �
Y ■ '
Mi ■ � i�
� � � ����/��111�' � �'����� . - 1�` ;
F�� _�., .�;!Allf'1/I " _ .
I�I� •
! 1 L71 � !_—� r�:� L'� • ■ 7� �
li � 1 � -- a��l�� . . � :� 'q���r,�ii+ � . W
� � � �,�j'� � `w' �y• � � � i
� �� �.' ICI_e- A
� . , �I;Ill�i�l►1�� �'�� •� � �
�� • . � � . � •
� -�- .• ��fi��—� - __�_.1�
���bTi��7��i'I�L�,tii�r;�!' - .���I�i
�
C� � �I�li�u 11���'�' � �� �f : �
■ L� '�iL�e�.z �� �
. � • ��� �. �
• : � - : � � ��
� • : .
.. . '�i ,
. . . e
. . ..
pHnE ` � X .., . , . . . , , . .
F� H (J � 11X � � - - •- � • �
F� U � I�11X • �: : •:. ..
..
� ,. : . ,. . .. , o .. : :
• I
/ �
e i
I
i I
I
� I
' KEY P �A�I
�
,
� _
�
, �
Z
W
. �
K
I
�
i I
1
I
I I
'
I
� o HVAC KEY NOTES
� �
; ; O1 20x10 FROM AHU-1 TH 90� FI AL FILTERS
�
� 2O 44x14 FROM AHU-2 WIT NAL FILTERS
�
�
O3 RETURN AIR DUCT TO RF-1
** APPLIES TO THIS SHEET ONLY **
�
I
WA�� �EGE�JD
�
NEW NON-RATED WALL TO DECK
I
� NEW SMOKE RESISTIVE WALL
�
TO DECK
� � NEW 1 -HOUR FIRE WALL TO DECK
I - _ _ - 20 MIN., 45 MIN., 60 MIN.,
� i ROTECTION AS REQ.
�
j _ _ _ _ _ _ _ NEW 2-HOUR FIRE WALL
' TO DECK (90 MIN. PROTECTION REQ.)
i
� -
�
� PROJECT: ANGIO, EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER MSK- 2
� LOCATION: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA SHEET NO.; M-3
� ARCHITECT; ESA JOB NUMBER: 98027.04
104 oodmont Blvd. Suite 218
�Noshville, TN 37205 SCALE: 1�8"=1�-0�� DATE: 2-19-99 REVISIONS: 3Q DRAWN BY: JTB
(615) 3B6-9287 (FAX: 385-0922)
�
� , � i
' � j �
�I _ , , .
� O O
�
j �
I
I i HC THERMA FUSER
� 615 CFM - SEE
! � SCHEDULE SHEET M-1
� i
— — � — — — — — —
i �
' ' 16x10
i g �QX6 FD I
� f ' -
� ! 1- 06A SB �5 F� �
20 RB 1 �
i 200 � �I
RB I '`� RE �
105 r � - 8x10 MVD 615
� � I ;r�� —
! AP 1-�08 F,��T - --- - --� _ _��TO AHU
� ,
�F � � ' _' ----------__�� ° M�/D
�
1�D -__ ___-�-_ ____-_- 14x5__ ' SA — — — — -T- - -- -�
FD rF�D � � j I �l� � L
� R LL�J�J �-i 25 T 25 � � Electr;ica�l ; 8x16���
� 100 � F--� � � � � ' ��- � ,
� ' � --------,
� ----s�F ��----�.r--- --- � I �---- � -
RB ,�-� �-�Jf ��;ex6- �--�--- - -------�- Y% � �
J s� ��� D FD
— 1 5 ' �� �I C FD i xi II i I i cp i
�---- �i I i i i i
I x
I rf'��S � �N' � ° a--,
' = i-l�� ' ' F--�� � ' ' _
i i ��t�- ,�� i ,
Fy i ----------- FD � �'� I � �i L't L�i 7.rJ ?�,�--T—
���,4e Fti4-�-- � �- �--�- � � � ST�, I 1 �
F-�----
� ; ; c 1-2 ��� � ,�J F D I � � 1-�02 � �
� � � J Fy.�'� I s I I 1 I � I I I
; R ;F�.,� S�S 85 �.'�.� � � � „ � � ' ;
LLJ �LL�J INI I I I ��yl 2UX�� r � ��
--� ------i --r=-�- --s�----F I � �Fp i iFD f ���---� --------H-
J �� � 14x6 - - - �, � � � — — — � � hIQS�l�t � �
-- , ..+- �- ---
-�"�---� - rF y �� r--�fi 20� i i i 3 X�� -'"
� i � -4i4 4
I� I ' \,I R �Y y �__� . �--- -r � i-- i--- I y-,---I - --- -- -�
�5
er;�on�� ��_� 490 �� \ ��
� � �
f`�`���,� j , �`��-.� 30 ��
_2 � ' ��
�I � � � , �
� . II I
I / �
I i � ;��',�;' � I H
' i �?n,� i
SC S � RB — — ' i
�
i 340 1-200 75 [} JV��UNT�-E�----- �'�`D
t r r��'v1.�'� I tit n C�n r� F�i'� Ffl ��� _
� PROJECT; ANGIO, EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER MSK- 3
LOCATION: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA SHEET NO.: M-3
I ARCHITECT: ESA JOB NUMBER: 98027.04
104 Woodmont Blvd. 5uite 218
�Noshville, TN 37205 SCALE: 1�8��=1�-0�� DATE: 2-19-99 REVISIONS: Q DRAWN BY: JT8
(615) 386-9287 (FAX: 385-0922)
a � ' ` �
� ` � � Equ�pr�ent II
Tech Lounc�.�e � — �— _ �
� � � �- °C�Mf ,
' ; ��� il
s- � • Control• Eq�lp CONT, � II
t'n � PB •1-105 ' ❑ II
A�.:S, • � — � � — — � II
lO] � . -RETo;HER � STRETCHER � � ��� II
i L - - � - - - J C � �..� — J
II
� VESTIBULE PB P� � _ O � II
; 3 1_l�g n
; • � �_ �rr�i � � II
� —�� II II � II
�
i ; F � 11� �,�f � �� � EXIST. ��
�- 3"
� a �j I I I � � FIRE LINE II
� • � � I1 f II II ANGI� FEC II
CLD T i i i � �a� �I� � 1-104 I II
� �F F�. U L T - - 1� � � F � V- I I
� Clo 1-10� 1-103 -
II
o � �- �--� � ► EXIST. 3�� �►
rol � 1� - FIRE LINE -
� �-• , � I II
T I � � �� I��l�, _ 9= � ]� II
I
� =__________ ___� II
! }/ ��� FHC II
� III S S
I�
111
III
I
I
I
FIRI� PROTECTION
,
FIRS-� F�O� R P �Af� PART A
'
� -
� 0 4' 8' 16' 24'-
,
� PROJECT: EAST PASCO PSK-4
LOCATION: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA SHEET NO.: FP-1
� � �/� ARCHITECT: ESA JOB NUMBER: 98027.04
104 Woodmont Blvd. Suite 218
�Nashville, TN 37205 SCALE: 1�8"=1�-0" DATE: 2-19-99 REVISIONS: 3 DRAWN BY: PST
(615) 3,86-9287 (FAX: 385-0922)
i I
a. � � I
�
�
�
:�DDENDUM N0. 5
?EBRUARY 26, 1999
?�NGIO/HUMAN RESOURCES RENOVATION
EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER . - : " _
ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA _ -' -!�,��
, � �- �l: � � /
JOB NO. 9 8 0 8 S . 0 0 � �,y'� '; � �
, AHCA LOG NO. H-0425-AF ��/�`rZ������
l., _
PHOENIX DESIGN GROUP, INC. / ��"��
104 WOODMONT BLVD, SUITE 218
NASHVILLE, TENNESSEE 37205
I
�This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies
;the original Bidding Documents, dated November 25, 1998, as
;outlined here in addition to being shown on the drawings as Delta
No. 5, dated February 26, 1999 .
i
CHANGES TO THE DR.AWINGS
I
Sheet M-3 - First Floor Plan - Part A - HVAC & Piping:
i .
I 1. Revise HVAC as shown on attached drawing MSK-1, dated
I February 26, 1999 , Delta No. 5 .
� �
- END OF ADDENDUM -
�
I
�
i I
i �
�
� I
� ' -
; ADDENDUM N0. 5 Page 1 of 1 98088 . 00
I
i i
�
�: s 'r !
I
I
�
�
i
� I
� - '_ _ J _ - _ _ _ _ _ _
� �
i ���
, i �
� �
' III
- � �
�
, , _ _� _ _ _ _ _ —
I I T T �F 1�
i . i
I �L�I�
! � T
� C,T, Scan
� I �
I o �E LOCATION OF ;
� o E EA �. & I-
'� E TE'�'-F� DUCT 6" MTL, STUD �
� I P,B, T' N�WF�i���, '��a� � 2oXfd���P�-�o �
I S A.F.F.-1000 CFM I �
�
�
�
� S �
i N�TE F�--- --5 Control ui �
�---- , NOTE
� � t�n ; RB �� � � 18
� 100 �
�
i F-E C � 50 ONS, r+, x6S1��T�I� I -- TCH 5�� �.
� � L i J �44x8_�N T�P __ ,
I{� ' �
' ------------I --------- -- -----1----- -- ------- -
� �U E
� �� ' PASS, 44x14 1��Og .
� �---------- ---- - - -------- - - ' ' �
� � �-���--------------- �-�--SA �� � �
� 2 ' �
� N�TE � � ��� �-
� A&B NOTE� CATE ' �R RC � T'
--� NC�`�FE D � THER AT � �`J 2 280 �'I
I � � �
�
i �
c�a . � � �oX,
' T � � � � RH-3
� ;o��, �R�-
�'�' -- 1-�10 _ � -
_-- :�, _ �
, � :�i-' _ /
, i=f' �.
� ; = ;" ;: � Z����
� ^v�% .�Z� __-- .
,;�� _, ,-
I �����r
D ' � PROJECT: ANGIO, EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER MSK- 1
�
� LOCATION. ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA SHEET NO.: M-3
�� � � ARCHITECT: ESA JOB NUMBER: 98027.04
104 Woodmont Blvd. Suite 218
! Nashville, TN 37205 SCALE: 1 S"=1�-0" DATE: 2-26-99 REVISIONS: Q DRAWN BY: JTB
(615) 386-9287 (FAX: 385-0922) � �J